JP2021035611A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: An identification part corresponding to a stoppable range set to a determined movable pattern from among a plurality of identification parts in a movable body is stopped in a determined performance position. For the movable pattern, a movable pattern in which a stoppable range where the movable body is stopped next is preset is determined when the movable body is stopped. More specifically, a next stoppable range is determined in a state where the movable body is stopped. Thus, a degree of expectation regarding whether a specific identification part stops in a performance position from a position in which the position of the movable body is stopped according to a next stoppable range. Even if the specific identification part does not stop in the performance position, a player is allowed to become interested in the stop position. Thus, monotonicity in a game can be suppressed, thus suppressing inconvenience in which the player readily gets tired of the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as a hit is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position is determined in advance. It is notified by determining based on and controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a game machine is proposed in which a game is executed in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped. ing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 7-20431

In this case, even if the rotating body is stopped by the rotation effect of 1, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be changed depending on the stop position, and the player gets bored early due to the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a movable body for moving the movable body by the movable means. With the control means, the determining means for determining the movable pattern in which the stoptable range capable of stopping the movable body is preset based on the establishment of the movable condition, and the movable pattern determined by the determining means. When the movable body is moved by the privilege giving means for giving a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved, and the movable body in the movable pattern. In addition, the identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit set in the stoptable range based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means. It has a stop control means for stopping at the effect position at a specific stop timing, and the determination means has a stoptable range to be stopped next corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. It determines a preset movable pattern.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable pattern has a preset execution period.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, and the stop control means has a discrimination result by the discrimination means. When it is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the effect position.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting conditions in the gaming machine according to claim 3.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and a movable body are movable. A determination means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoptable range capable of stopping the movable body is set in advance based on the establishment of a condition, and after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determination means, When the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege which is advantageous to the player, and when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern, a specific condition is satisfied. Based on the establishment, the identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit set in the stoptable range and the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means are determined at a specific stop timing. It has a stop control means for stopping at the effect position, and the determination means is movable with a preset stoptable range corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. It determines the pattern.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the movable pattern has a preset execution period.

This has the effect of providing a suitable effect to the player.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. That is, the stop control means has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result, the specific discriminating unit is placed in the effect position. Is to stop.

This has the effect of providing a suitable effect to the player.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 3. That is, it has a setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 4, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection. Is. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view of the upper elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit. (A) is a front view of the first gear, (b) is a rear view of the first gear, (c) is a front view of the second gear, and (d) is a second gear. It is a rear view of. It is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device. It is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device. It is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device. It is a front view of the elevating body and the transmission device. It is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member. It is a rear view of the drive side slide member. (A) is a front perspective view of the connecting member, (b) is a front view of the connecting member in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 26 (a). It is a rear view of the connecting member in the XXVIc direction view. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a rear view of the 2nd passage forming member and the connecting member. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in the direction view of arrow XXX of FIG. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the swinging operation unit. It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a partial front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit and the left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is a front perspective view of the rotating unit in a state where a guide member is removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of the rotating unit in a state where a rotating member, a part of a pitching device, and a guide member are removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. (A) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member and the other-side rotation member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). is there. It is sectional drawing of the rotating unit cut in the plane including the rotating shaft of a central transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the split member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the split member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a split member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a split member. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in the state of being arranged in the first section. (A) and (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the split member in a state of being arranged in the second section. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged in a holding position. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of an arm rotation mechanism is arranged at a separated position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece appearance mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in a protruding position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where a holding piece is arranged in an immersion position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at a protruding position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line of FIG. 68 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the immersion position, and (b) is a partial enlargement of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism in the LXIXb-LXIXb line of FIG. 69 (a). It is a cross-sectional view. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotating member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams for each rotation of the one-side rotation drive member by 30 degrees. It is a state relation figure which shows the relationship between the engagement or disengagement state of one side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member with respect to a split member, and a phase. (A) to (c) are state transition diagrams for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member. It is a partially enlarged side view which enlarged the part in the 1st section of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of the tip wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of the tip wall member, and (c) is the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a tip wall member, (d) is the front view of the main body member of a tip wall member. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. It is a front view of the left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). Is a partial front view of the drive side slide member. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during variable display of symbols, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a combination of symbols that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a combination of symbols that is a big hit is stopped and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a time saving suggestion effect. is there. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a deviation is notified in the time saving suggestion effect, and (b) shows an example of a display mode when a hit is notified in the time saving suggestion effect. It is a figure. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the increase effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the roulette chance effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the thrown ball is swinging on the holding piece. .. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball comes off and falls into the pocket in the roulette chance effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball hits and falls into the pocket. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the additional effect is executed, and (b) shows an example of a display mode when the lucky number of the additional amount is notified in the increase effect. It is a figure. It is a front view of the rear LED. It is a figure which showed the case where a part of the lighting area of the rear LED was set to the lighting state of a lighting rate of 100%. It is a front view of the rotating member in the case where a part of the lighting area of the rear LED is set to the lighting state of 100% lighting rate. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state is set for each lighting area of the rear LED, and (b) is the setting of the lighting state for each lighting area of the rear LED. It is a front view of the rotating member when it is done. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the rear LED makes 1/3 rotation after setting the lighting state, and (b) is a front view of the rear LED when the rear LED makes 1/3 rotation after setting the lighting state. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the rear LED when the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected, and (b) is the case where the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the correction section is corrected. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a diagram showing a case where the sphere during the swinging operation is arranged outside the detection range of the sphere detection sensor, and (b) is a diagram showing the case where the sphere during the swinging operation is within the detection range of the sphere detection sensor. It is a figure which showed the case where it was arranged in. (A) and (b) are explanatory views about the control of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device, b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table per first, and (c) is the first hit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the type selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the hit type selection table for special figure 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the hit type selection table for special figure 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the method of the state transition of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal medium-sized jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal medium-sized hit table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time-saving medium-sized jackpot table, and (b) is a schematic showing the detailed contents of the consecutive villa middle table included in the time-saving medium-sized jackpot table. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving middle-aged table, and (b) is a schematic showing the detailed contents of the consecutive villa middle table included in the time-saving middle-aged table. It is a figure. (A) is a timing chart showing the timed change of the mode of the out-of-roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the timed change of the mode of the out-of-roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time reduction. is there. (A) is a timing chart showing the timed change of the mode of the winning roulette chance, and (b) is a timing chart showing the timed change of the mode of the winning roulette chance when the fluctuation is interrupted during the time reduction. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game result setting table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the state setting table. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM in a main control unit. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the operation scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the upper elevating unit table, and (c) is the contents of the specific opening table. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the initial operation table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the rotation position determination table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the hit position storage area schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first storage area, and (c) is a second storage area. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area, and FIG. 3D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third storage area. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol 2 prize processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the on-time state setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drop control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the emission detection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the connection disconnection determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command processing which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 winning command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display number selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory operation setting process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece in the second control example, and (b) is a front view of the holding piece in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the correspondence between the arrangement of each sphere detection sensor in the 2nd control example, and a section. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the amplitude discrimination table in the second control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the swing angle discrimination table in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rocking effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drop control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the amplitude discrimination processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the swing angle control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the execution command process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the arrangement specifying process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the specific process during rotation executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the non-specific time processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process during rocking which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the timekeeping change of the effect mode when the hit middle fluctuation is set during the consecutive villa mode in the third control example, and (b) is the timing chart in the third control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the timekeeping change of the production mode when the out-of-middle fluctuation is set in the continuous villa mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing change of the effect mode when the hit short variation is determined after the detachment short variation is determined twice in a row in the third control example. , (B) is a timing chart showing the timed change of the effect mode when the off-short fluctuation is determined three times in a row during the consecutive villa mode. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the table for the big hit in the consecutive villa in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the table for leaving the consecutive villas in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional area selection table. .. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the hit position storage area in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition position determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 winning command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the consecutive villas in the fourth control example. It is a figure, (c) is a block diagram which showed the structure of the operation scenario table in 4th control example, and (d) is schematically the content of the upper swing effect table in 4th control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the rotation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 winning command process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern selection process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the upper swing effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the operation mode of the left swing unit when the left swing effect is being executed in the fifth control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the pitching pressing effect in the fifth control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the left swing unit table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the first left swing unit table in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second left swing unit table in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drop control process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pitching push effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pocket distribution process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 winning command process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the variation display executed in the "normal mode" in the sixth control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode of the variation display executed in the "preparation mode" in the sixth control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the symbol position selection table in the sixth control example. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 6 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a display position selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a stop position selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the signal waveform of the lighting control command in the 1st control example.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640a, the second variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of (see). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640a, the second variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640a, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640a. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, probabilistic jackpots A to K and normal jackpots A and B are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "probability variation jackpots AK" are jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. On the other hand, when it becomes "normal jackpot A, B", the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot of 2 rounds.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win a prize in the second entry port 640a. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second entrance. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily wins the 640a. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Is set. When the electric accessory 640b is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640a as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640b is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win a prize in the second entry port 640a, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The electric accessory 640b may be changed to increase the number of times it is opened more than usual. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640b is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened and at one hit. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640b at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640a, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to form a third. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display to be made. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640b of the second entrance 640a. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entry port 640a.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second entrance 640a can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640b may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is out of order. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the first symbol display device 37A and 37B. 3 It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made at 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in the front view, a second ball opening 640a in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640a, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640a is also one of the winning holes in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640a are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry slot 640a are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640a may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640b is attached to the second entrance 640a. The electric accessory 640b is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640b is in a closed state (overhanging state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640a. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b is in the open state ( It becomes a retracted state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640a.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640b is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640b is longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second entry port 640a as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state depending on whether the ball wins the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640a. is there. However, as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot, the selection ratio of the jackpot type that can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls is set higher when the ball wins in the second entrance 640a. Has been done. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640a, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640a is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640a. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first entrance 64. , It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second ball entry port 640a is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entry port 640a is likely to win a prize. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 640a so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be an electric accessory. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning a prize in the second entrance 640a while opening the ball.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first ball opening 64, and a first specific winning opening 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the first variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win a prize in the first specific winning opening 82. On the other hand, at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, probability variation jackpot A), the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to a predetermined opening pattern according to the jackpot type. As predetermined opening patterns, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times, and an opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once (opening pattern B). ) And are provided.

The opening / closing operation according to a predetermined opening pattern by the first variable winning device 82a can be repeated at most, for example, twice (two rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done. In each round, even if the opening pattern is not completed, if it is detected that a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more of the balls have won the first specific winning opening 82, the first is forcibly performed. The variable winning device 82a is closed and the end of the round is set.

A second variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640a becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. When the jackpot type corresponds to the second specific winning opening 65a, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball can easily win a prize in the second specific winning opening 65a. As this special gaming state, the second specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). That is, a longer opening time is set as compared with the jackpot type in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Therefore, in the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, in many cases, the maximum number of balls (for example, 10) can be won for the second specific winning opening 65a, so that the player can win the prize. On the other hand, more prize balls can be won. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to request that the second specific winning opening 65a is an open jackpot type, so that in the case of a big hit, the second specific winning opening 65a can be focused on. ..

The second specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, twice (two rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The second specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first ball entry port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the main control device 110 is the main pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 by the MPU 201. Execute the process.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate of the second specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands to these via the input / output port 205. And send control signals.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, various sensors 230, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In addition, in FIGS. 6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position is shown in FIG. 9, in which the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. The state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is connected to the 520 is shown in FIG. 10, and the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 6 to 10, a state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged at the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 210, an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit. The 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 are housed, respectively.

The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 is provided with a recess having a substantially circular shape in the center thereof, and the rotating unit 600 is housed in the recess. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 are the upper edge portion, the left side edge portion, and the lower side edge portion of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. It is arranged in each part.

The upper elevating unit 300 includes elevating bodies 330 in which a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) are arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 8), and the elevating bodies 330 are independently arranged in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position, when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the elevating position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8), while the elevating body When the 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 12), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is made invisible by the elevating body 330.

The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 has a pair of guide rods 451 arranged in a vertical posture with the axes along the vertical direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide rods 451. A drive-side slide member 420 and a driven-side slide member 430 that are supported so as to be slidably displaceable, and a drive motor 441 that moves the drive-side slide member 420 up and down are provided, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the drive motor 441. As a result, the driven side slide member 430 is driven and moved up and down.

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. The driven side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight as the drive side slide member 420 is lowered.

The drive side slide member 420 is provided with the second passage forming member 422, and the driven side slide member 430 is provided with the display device 81 on the FIG. 3 side. When the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position between the ascending position and the descending position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (FIG. FIG. 9). Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction in which the tip side is moved up and down with the base end side as the center. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the tip side, the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the tip side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. When it is swung in the direction of swinging down the tip side, it is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10), and the connection of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 with the second passage forming member 422 is released.

The ball flowing down the game area can flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 flows into the left swing unit 500 when the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 10). , The inflowing ball is sent to the game area through a passage to be described later provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

The rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a wheel (rotary disk) formed rotatably and a member (rotating member 640) formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction are colored in red or black and different numbers are displayed. A portion corresponding to a pocket (display plate 646 and a partition plate 647) is provided, and a ball B thrown from a device on the inner peripheral side of the wheel (throwing device 650) is included in a portion corresponding to a plurality of pockets. Formed to fall into either.

In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the descending position (see FIG. 8), almost the entire rotating unit 600 is shielded from the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, while the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in the connecting position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position (see FIG. 10), the wheel is exposed. In addition to a part of the corresponding member (lower part), the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from when the ball B is thrown to when it falls into the part corresponding to the pocket It is exposed and these are made visible to the player.

The light emitting decorative member 700 includes a case body formed of a light-transmitting material and a plurality of LEDs arranged inside the case body, and a mode of light emitted from the LEDs (for example, a light emitting LED). By changing the number and light emission time), the effect of light emission is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20, detailed configurations of the upper elevating unit 300, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotating unit 600, and the light emitting decorative member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper elevating unit 300. It should be noted that in FIGS. 11 and 12, all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 12) are arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 are lowered. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the width direction of the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310, and each elevating body 330 is arranged. It is configured to be movable up and down between the ascending position (see FIG. 12) and the descending position (see FIG. 13). Next, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear disassembled perspective view of the upper elevating unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, in the upper elevating unit 300, the base member 310 is provided with a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 between the horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped base member 310 and the base member 310. A rear cover 320 that is fastened and fixed to the back side, and an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is housed between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect portion 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310. Mainly, a drive device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 to generate a driving force required for raising and lowering the elevating body, and a transmission device 350 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the elevating body 330. Be prepared.

The cover member 310 is a semicircular recessed portion 311 having a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is arranged at the lower end and is recessed from the front side side surface to the back side, and a rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the back side side surface. It is provided with a guide rib 312 that is projected in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap in the left-right direction.

The semicircular recessed portion 311 is configured with a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the effect portion 331 of the elevating body 330, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the effect portion 331 are vertically linear. It is placed at the position that matches with. As a result, when the effect portion 331 moves upward, it is possible to move to the front side of the position where the semicircular recessed portion 311 interferes with the semicircular recessed portion 311 on the front side of the base member 310, and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. , It is possible to secure a large ascending movement width of the effect unit 331.

The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion extending in the vertical direction, and is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction (translation or tilting operation) during the ascending / descending movement.

Further, by configuring the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recess recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side can be made invisible is increased as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-rear direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for arranging the mechanical portion (a portion such as a gear or a motor that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player).

The back cover 320 has a main body portion 321 formed in a case shape with the front side and the lower side open, a cylindrical shaft support portion 322 projecting from the main body portion 321 to the front side, and the front surface from the shaft support portion 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole drilled in a position where the extension direction is aligned with the vertical direction at a position shifted in the left-right direction in view, and a shaft support portion from the bottom of the periphery where the upper shaft support portion 322 is convexly provided. A rib-shaped locking portion 324 is provided along the radial direction of 322.

The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that pivotally supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the elevating operation of the elevating body 330.

The locking portion 324 is arranged on the upper side in the vertical direction and the lower side in the vertical direction with respect to the shaft of the upper shaft support portion 322, and the first elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position or the descending position, respectively. The end of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can be brought into contact with each other in the rotational direction.

The elevating body 330 includes an effect unit 331 formed in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the effect unit 331 and extended in the vertical direction at a position leaving a gap from the back side side surface of the effect unit 331. , Equipped with.

The effect unit 331 is a portion in which a circular liquid crystal panel is arranged inside a circular outer frame, and an effect is produced by displaying a pattern or a figure on the liquid crystal panel.

The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332a that is convexly provided on the back surface side and is projected to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

The slide shaft 332a is not a mode in which a plurality of the slide shafts 332a are convexly provided, but a mode in which one is projected. Therefore, since the number of guide holes 323 to be arranged can be reduced to one, it is possible to secure a large moving distance of the rack 332 while suppressing the arrangement space of the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can come into contact with the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, the rack 332 can be in the left-right direction even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at one position. It is possible to prevent tilting to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effecting unit 331 from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and it is possible to prevent the distance between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 from fluctuating and the toothing relationship from deteriorating. be able to.

The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 which is a drive source fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 which is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and transmits a drive force to the transmission device 350. ..

The transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 and meshed with the drive gear 342, and is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. A second gear 352 and the like are provided.

As described above, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) elevating bodies 330 each include an independent drive motor 341, in addition to the operation in which all the elevating bodies 330 are interlocked to move up and down, each elevating body 330 is used. It can be raised and lowered individually. Since the technical idea of each elevating body 330 is common, the elevating body 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the other elevating bodies 330 will be omitted.

Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16 (b) is a rear view of the first gear 351 and FIG. 16 (c) is a front view of the second gear 352. 16 (d) is a rear view of the second gear 352.

As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the first gear 351 has a main body portion 351a having a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. And, on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 351a, the overhang length of about half of the tooth length of the gear teeth (extending to the pitch circle C1 in which the contacts of the teeth to be meshed are connected) is extended to the portion where the formation of the gear teeth is omitted. A contact portion 351b that is formed to overhang in the radial direction with an overhang length) and a locking portion that is convexly provided in an arc shape centered on the axis along a direction parallel to the axis from the back surface side surface of the main body portion 351a. The arc portion 351c is provided.

The contact portion 351b has an arc shape whose tip surface in the radial direction has a radius r centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, and has a tooth thickness (arc) equivalent to two to three gear teeth formed on the main body portion 351a. The angle formed by the center of the tooth is composed of tooth thickness in the range of about 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be ensured as compared with the gear teeth of the main body portion 351a.

The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose tip in the circumferential direction can come into contact with the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

As shown in FIGS. 16 (c) and 16 (d), the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and is an intermediate plate 353 formed in a donut plate shape. And the deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially deformed tooth profile, and the spur gear shape formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with the rack 332 (see FIG. 15). The transmission gear unit 355 is provided.

The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to project radially outward from the tips of the gear teeth of the deformed gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed with the mating member (first gear 351 or rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) can be brought into contact with the mating member by overlapping in a direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. It is possible to suppress the movement of the 330 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface during the ascending / descending operation.

The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that is meshed with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. The main body portion 354a to be formed, the receiving portion 354b to be formed overhanging the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where the formation of gear teeth is omitted, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side of FIG. 16C). An adjacent gear tooth 354c, which is adjacent to the end), is provided.

The receiving portion 354b is located on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front from the adjacent gear tooth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 engages with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward). ) Is a portion formed at an arrangement angle (about 30 to 50 degrees) equivalent to two gear teeth, and the tip surface of the contact portion 351b in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. The tooth length of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is formed between the curved wall portion 354b1 formed to be curved along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tooth, and the curved wall portion 354b1 and the tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a tooth length of about half of that (a tooth length extending up to a pitch circle C2 connecting the contact points of teeth to be toothed). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side has an overhang length of about half the radial overhang length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2. It is formed so as to project radially from the connecting wall portion 354b2 in a state of being integrally formed with the connecting wall portion 354b2.

As shown in FIG. 16C, in a state where the transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 has a curved wall along an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is arranged, the adjacent gear tooth 354c is arranged outside the arc having a radius r (the second gear 352 side) (the adjacent gear tooth 354c has a radius r). The formation is limited to a position that does not interfere with the circle).

Next, the elevating operation of the elevating body 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20. Since the operation path of the ascending operation and the descending operation is the same, the ascending operation will be described here, and the description of the descending operation will be omitted.

17 to 20 are front views of the elevating body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the ascending operation of the elevating body 330 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 17, the state in which the elevating body 330 is arranged in the descending position is shown, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 17 to determine the elevating body 330. The state in which the distance increasing operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 begins to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352 is shown, and in FIG. 19, the state shown in FIG. 18 is shown. The state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view so that the end face of the contact portion 351b in the circumferential direction and the adjacent gear tooth 354c are disengaged. Illustrated, FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated by a predetermined amount clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. To. More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 of the second gear 352 (see FIG. 16D), so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 332a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the back cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17, the first gear 351 comes into contact with the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the lower locking portion 324 of the back cover 320. The rotation of the rack 332 in the clockwise direction (the direction in which the rack 332 is lowered) is mechanically prevented.

As a result, even if the drive gear 342 is over-rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341 or the like, and a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. By mechanically preventing the rotation of the first gear 351, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation where the rack 332 descends can be avoided. Therefore, the slide shaft 322a (FIG. FIG. 15) is pressed against the lower side surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) to prevent the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the process of ascending the elevating body 330, the circumferential end face of the contact portion 351b whose peripheral tooth thickness is made larger than that of other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear tooth 354c. Therefore, the load transmitted in the reverse direction from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 (load due to the weight of the elevating body 330) can be received by the contact portion 351b having a higher strength than the other gear teeth. , The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

The contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is projected to the pitch circle C1, and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 is projected to the pitch circle C2. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 18, the contact portion 351b is connected. It is approached to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion close to the tooth root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

Further, since one side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c is connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial overhang length of the side surface on the connecting wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, the resistance to deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth length direction is increased, and the connecting wall portion is formed. Since the 354b2 is integrally formed with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion that receives the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. , The resistance to the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear tooth 354c increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

As shown in FIG. 19, immediately after the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the arcuate tip portion of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c come into contact with each other. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotational direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. To.

Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the elevating body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351 and the elevating body 330 starts to move in the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It is about to rotate in the direction of downward operation (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range in the direction in which the adjacent gear tooth 354c rotates (inside the circle formed by the tip of the adjacent gear tooth 354c), the second gear When rotating the 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component toward the axial side of the first gear 351. It is decomposed into Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

The axial component Fa is not in a direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and in a state where the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand and contract in the radial direction), the abutting portion is formed by the axial component Fa. It is difficult to push 351b out of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

The circumferential component Fb faces the rotation direction of the first gear 351 but slips between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b because the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b come into contact with each other at a point. , And the first gear 351 is difficult to rotate, so that it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

Therefore, since the contact portion 351b is prevented from being pushed to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and the second gear 352 and The state of the elevating body 330 is maintained.

Both the abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are formed from an arc shape having a radius r centered on the first gear 351 and, as shown in FIG. 19, the circumference of the first rotating gear 351. Since the contact is made against the surface along the direction, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received by utilizing the entire area of the curved wall portion 354b1. As a result, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the ascending position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. It is possible to prevent the delay of the lift from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates until the locking arc portion 351c abuts on the upper locking portion 324 and stops. From FIG. 18 to FIG. 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the second gear 352 is rotated, so that the adjacent gear tooth The 354c is aligned with respect to the second gear 352, and in the state shown in FIG. 20, a state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abuts on the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b can be reliably formed.

From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is restricted that the second gear 352 rotates in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved ascending (clockwise in FIG. 20). Will be done. Therefore, even if the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 19 with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate. Therefore, it is possible to surely form a state in which the tooth tip surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

As shown in FIG. 20, in a state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the second gear 352 follows an arc shape having a radius r formed by the tip surface of the abutting portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc having a radius r (the second gear 352 side) in the arranged posture, only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotation direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction (FIG. 19).

At this time, the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is thicker than that of the other gear teeth (approximately the thickness of two to three gear teeth), so that the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderately adjusted. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops in a phase intermediate between the state shown in FIG. 19 and the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. It is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352.

Further, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions while keeping the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 loose. That is, even if the second gear 352 is about to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with the tooth tip surface of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is adjacent to the above-mentioned details. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the set gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both the up and down directions when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling in the elevating body 330. It is difficult to regulate both the upper and lower directions (particularly, the regulation in the ascending direction) with the conventional crank mechanism, and it is achieved for the first time by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. It is a thing.

As described above, due to the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while the elevating body 330 is arranged in the ascending position. It is not necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or larger than its own weight in order to maintain the above position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to maintain the elevating body 330 in the ascending position by using the dead center of the crank mechanism, but in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large in size corresponding to the moving distance of the elevating body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not required, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be regulated by the relationship between the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be miniaturized.

A method of releasing the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not arranged in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 is rotated in the opposite direction. Therefore, the rotational operation in the direction in which the elevating body 330 of the first gear 351 is lowered (clockwise in FIG. 20) is allowed.

When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the restriction on the rotation direction of the second gear 352 is released (the contact portion 351b of the contact portion 351b). (The tip surface is separated from the adjacent gear tooth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be lowered. That is, the rotation restriction of the second gear 352 can be released by the rotation operation of the first gear 351, and the first gear 351 can be made to perform another operation in order to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

Next, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is composed of a drive-side slide member 420 that has an effect portion 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and moves up and down, and a member that moves up and down in response to the drive-side slide member 420. A driven side slide member 430 including a third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the driven side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are communicated with a common guide rod 451 and are configured to operate in the same direction. Will be done.

FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a drive-side slide member 420 configured to be vertically movable, and a drive thereof. Generated from a driven side slide member 430 that is arranged above the side slide member 420 and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction, a drive device 440 that generates a driving force for the drive side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440. A transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 that transmit the driving force to the drive side slide member 420 and guide the operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower ends of the pair of base members 410. The lower front plate member 460 is connected to the drive side slide member 420, and the cover member 470 is arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and on the front side of the upper part. ..

The base member 410 is a U-shaped recess that is arranged at positions that vertically coincide with each other in the vertical direction of the main body member 411 that is configured as a vertically long plate-shaped member and the upper and lower ends of the main body member 411 and is open to the front. A member of the guide rod support portion 412, which is arranged inside the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 (the side closer to the other base member 410) and extends to the front side of the main body member 411. The first shaft branch 414, which is projected in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the opposite side of the locking portion 413 with the vertical straight line drawn from the stop portion 413 and the guide rod support portion 412, and its first. A descent restricting member 415 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support 414 and regulates the descent operation of the drive side slide member 420, and a cylindrical shape that is arranged below the first shaft support 414 and is projected on the front side of the main body member 411. It mainly includes a second shaft branch 416 and a lift restricting member 417 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft branch 416 and regulates the climbing operation of the driven side slide member 430.

The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, the cover member 470 is fastened and fixed to the base member 410, so that the opening on the front side of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed, and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

The locking portion 413 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the fall prevention portion 435 of the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, and the driven side slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. To regulate.

The lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 rotate with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420 and have a role of restricting the movement of the driven side sliding member 430, which will be described in detail later.

The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450, and is moved up and down by the slide operation of the rack 452.

The driven side slide member 430 does not have an independent driving device, and its left and right ends are supported by guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and the driven side slide member 420 is moved up and down in accordance with the elevating operation of the driving side slide member 420. The driven side slide member 430 includes a main body member 431 having a third symbol display device 81 and being elongated in the left-right direction, functional units 432 arranged at both ends of the main body member 431 in the left-right direction, and the functional parts thereof. A guide hole 433 that is a hole drilled in the 432 in the vertical direction through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 434 that extends upwardly and inclined in the left-right outward direction at the lower end of the functional portion 432. It mainly includes a fall prevention portion 435 extending to the back surface side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end portion of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433).

The hook-shaped portion 434 is a portion hooked on the ascending restricting member 417. In a state where the driven side slide member 430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 wraps around and is hooked on the engaging surface 434a which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434 (see FIG. 29). It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the ascending direction (for example, it is possible to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to the reaction of falling). Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is tilted upward and the engaging claw portion 417e of the rising restricting member 417 is formed in parallel with the inclination, the engagement between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the rising regulating member 417 causes the hook-shaped portion 434 to be tilted in the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outside the tip of the engaging claw portion 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side of FIG. 29)) is based on the movement locus of the engaging claw portion 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even in a state where the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the ascending regulating member 417 can be rotated.

The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor.

In the transmission device 450, a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and the drive side slide member 420 supported by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable are fastened and fixed, and the drive gear 442. Mainly includes a rack 452 meshed from the inside (inside of the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically elongated plate-shaped contact wall 453 extending from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452 to the front side.

The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the ascending restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of moving the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442 by receiving the urging force of the ascending restricting member 417. Details will be described later. To do.

The lower front plate member 460 is bent in such a manner that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410 and the central part is offset to the back side by a predetermined amount as compared with the left and right ends. A main body member 461 having a shape, a guide hole 462 drilled in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner of ascending and inclining toward the outside), and extending above the main body member 461. It is mainly provided with a tubular passage portion 463 which is a tubular member to be formed and whose upper end portion is opened to the front side.

The guide hole 462 is a long hole in which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring storage member 423 is slidably guided.

The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a ball can pass, and forms a second passage of the drive side slide member 420 in a state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at a connecting position (see FIG. 31). It is a member through which a ball flowing down through the member 422 passes.

The detailed configuration of the drive-side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disk having a main body member 421 formed as a plate-shaped member elongated in the left-right direction and an effect portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side and a groove through which a ball can pass is extended from the disk portion to the left in the front view, and a second passage thereof. A wiring storage member 423 whose one end is pivotally supported at the lower left end of the forming member 422 and whose other end is supported by a guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and a second flow path forming member 422. Mainly includes a connecting member 424 which has a passage portion which is pivotally supported by the shaft and penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and serves as a portion for introducing a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

The main body member 421 is opened to the front side with a guide portion 421a forming a part of a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending from the central portion to the left in the front view. It mainly includes a groove portion 421b arranged so as to be inclined downward to the left in the embodiment, and a discharge opening 421c formed through the groove portion 421b at the lower left end portion having a size equal to or larger than the diameter of a sphere and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ..

The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arcuate cross section that is opened to the back side and extends in the vertical direction, and the guide rod is closed by closing the opened portion with a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450. A tubular portion through which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is formed.

The groove portion 421b is a member that jointly forms a sphere passage with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere that has flowed down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the back surface side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening 421c. To.

The second passage forming member 422 includes a directing portion 422a composed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b projecting in a cylindrical shape from a disk portion arranged on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the back side. A sensor member 422c that is arranged below the shaft support portion 422b and detects the passage of a sphere, and a groove that opens to the back side with a width that allows the sphere that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down, in the front-rear direction with the groove portion 421b. A shape capable of accommodating a groove portion 422d having the same shape, a guide portion 422e forming a tubular portion through which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a connecting member 424 between the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. Mainly includes a storage recess 422f recessed in.

The shaft support portion 422b is a portion where the connecting member 424 is pivotally supported. In the state where the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connecting position, the sphere flowing down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c via the connecting member 424, and then the sphere passes through the passage formed by the grooves 422d and 421b. To do.

The wiring storage member 423 is a member that accommodates wiring that extends from the lower front member 460 and the like and is connected to the effect portion 422a and the like, and is a length that is pivotally supported by the left lower end portion of the second passage forming member 422 in the front view. It mainly includes a main body portion 423a which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b which is projected from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a to the back surface side.

The main body portion 423a is a member for accommodating wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and is configured in a curved shape so as to be convex in a direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. To. As a result, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the shaft support position with the second passage forming member 422, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent and broken.

The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

Next, the configuration of the connecting member 424 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. 26 (a) is a front perspective view of the connecting member 424, FIG. 26 (b) is a front view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 26 (c) is a front view. 26 (a) is a rear view of the connecting member 424 in the direction of arrow XXVIc.

As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the connecting member 424 extends in the radial direction of the tubular portion 424a formed in a tubular shape and pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a thereof. The plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b to be provided and the curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere below the front view of the upper side wall portion 424b. And the connecting cover 424d that connects the back side ends of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is laid between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound and connected to the tubular portion 424a. The member 424 is mainly provided with a torsion spring 424e that gives a downward (counterclockwise direction) urging force to the member 424.

The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases from the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a toward the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. 25 (b). It is a plate-shaped part.

The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion formed to be curved along an arc centered on the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and a space having a length through which a sphere can pass is provided between the lower side wall portion 424c and the upper side wall portion 424b. Arranged.

The connecting cover 424d is a plate member that prevents the ball passing through the connecting member 424 from spilling to the back surface side. The open portion of the connecting member 424 formed on the opposite side (front side) of the connecting cover 424d is closed by the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 coming into contact with the front side. This makes it possible to prevent the sphere from spilling from the open portion of the connecting member 424.

The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 shows a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 faces in the left-right direction, and FIG. 28 shows the connection as compared with the state of FIG. 27. The upward inclined state in which the open portion composed of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces diagonally upward is shown, and FIG. 27 corresponds to the separated state (see FIG. 41) described later, and FIG. 28 shows. Corresponds to the communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connecting member 424 can rotate around the shaft support portion 422b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodating recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422, and the second passage forming member 422 can rotate. The front side end faces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are brought into contact with the bottom portion of the accommodating recess 422f.

The accommodating recess 422f is formed in an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c in a portion of the connecting member 424 facing the lower side wall portion 424c in the state shown in FIG. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in an upwardly inclined state (see FIG. 42). The facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface to be formed is provided.

Since the curved wall portion 422f1 is in surface contact with the lower side wall portion 424c in the downward inclined state of the connecting member 424 in the radial direction, the positional deviation of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened (a state where the gap is large, for example, a state where the dimension has a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm), the connecting member When the 424 is tilted downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

On the other hand, when the fitting of the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connecting member 424 is loosened, the operating resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, so that the connection is made unless a load from other members is generated. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downward tilted state by the action of gravity and the urging force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the connecting member 424 is maintained in an upwardly inclined state even though no load is generated from other members.

The facing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the sphere from the connecting member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the surface of the curved wall portion 422f1 facing the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved so that the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.

The upward tilted state is formed in a communicating state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are communicated with each other. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the ball that has passed by rolling the lower side wall portion 424c of the connecting member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1 and of the sensor member 422c. It passes through the opening and flows down the groove 422d.

On the other hand, the downward tilting state is formed in a separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated from each other. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c projects to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f arranged to face the lower end portion thereof (sensor member 422c). By setting the dimension between the sphere and the wall surface extending vertically upward to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is ejected from the lower end portion).

Therefore, as will be described later, even if the sphere reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stagnant at the connecting member 424.

Next, the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. First, the positional relationship between the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in the direction of arrow XXX of FIG. 29. In addition, in FIGS. 29 and 30, the state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the descending position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. The transmission member 450 is visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially magnified, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the ascending regulating member 417 come into contact with each other. The outer shape of 452 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven side slide member 430, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below at the lowered position, and the hook-shaped portion 434 is raised. It comes into contact with the regulating member 417 from above. In this way, since the driven side slide member 430 is restricted from moving in both the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the descending position.

Further, the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged with the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433 sandwiched between them, and they can come into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430. It is possible to prevent the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the left-right direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Further, since the ascending restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are arranged so as to be displaced in the vertical direction, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the ascending restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the ascending restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is arranged at a position far from the drive side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 slides on the drive side. It is possible to prevent the member 420 from hindering the ascending / descending operation. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged in front of the ascending regulating member 417, and the forming height of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the overhang length from the vicinity of the tooth root of the rack 452). Is the height before reaching the descent restricting member 415, so that the descent restricting member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not abut in the rotation direction of the descent restricting member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as the ascending regulating member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the descending regulating member 415 do not come into contact with each other in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a convex plate 453a projecting from the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 toward the front surface, and the convex plate 453a can be brought into contact with the lowering restricting member 415 in the rotational direction.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In FIG. 31, the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up from the descending position and arranged at the connecting position is shown, and the illustration of the pair of left and right cover members in the cover member 470 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 31, the descending regulation member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 on the right side of the front view are partially magnified.

In a state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position, the ball can be introduced into the connecting member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the ascending restricting member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from above in a state before the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the ascending restricting member 417. Rotational operation is possible between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the disengaged state shown in FIG. 31. The released state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31, and means a state in which the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated from vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a posture in which the ascending regulating member 417 is retracted.

The ascending restricting member 417 is one of a cylindrical portion 417a pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416, an extension plate 417b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and the extension plate 417b. A release convex portion 417c projecting vertically from an end (lower end), an engaging convex portion 417d projecting vertically from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and an engaging convex portion thereof. At the convex end of 417d, the hook extends parallel to the extension direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 in an engaged state and is arranged above and inward (upper left in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434. The joint claw portion 417e, the separated inclined portion 417f which is downwardly inclined on the upper side surface of the convex end portion of the engaging convex portion 417d, and the cylindrical portion 417a are wound around and one end portion is formed on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 417 g that urges the ascending restricting member 417 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) by being locked.

The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. As a result, when the release convex portion 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven side slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

Even if the driven side slide member 430 is about to move upward in the engaged state, the engaging claw portion 417e meshes with the hook-shaped portion 434 (between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). (By entering 417e), the movement of the driven side slide member 430 is strongly suppressed.

The release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the ascending restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is raised to the state shown in FIG. 31, the end portion of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the raising restricting member 417 is moved outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 31). ), And the engaging convex portion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

That is, the release operation of the ascending restricting member 417 can be performed only by the ascending operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the solenoid member for releasing the ascending restricting member 417 is separately arranged, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as the driving device for releasing the ascending restricting member 417. It is possible to reduce the number of drive devices arranged (the product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the ascending regulating member 417 from being inadvertently operated.

In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the ascending regulating member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, as compared with the case where the ascending regulating member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent the rack 452 and the ascending restricting member 417 from malfunctioning due to inconsistent operation timing, and when the driven side slide member 430 ascends, the ascending restricting member 417 reliably shifts to the released state. Can be made to. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the lift restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging convex portion 417d of the lift regulating member 417.

Further, the rack 452 is lifted, and the lift restricting member 417 is moved to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven side slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rack 452 continues to lift. When the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are separated from each other, an engaged state (see FIG. 29) is formed to prevent the driven side slide member 430 from rattling, while the driven side slide. When the member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, a release state (see FIG. 31) is formed, and the driving force required for raising the driven-side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Here, in the case of the configuration in which the drive side slide member 420 pushes up the driven side slide member 430 during the ascending operation of the drive side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are disengaged. Can be performed by pushing up the driven side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to bring the driven side slide member 430 into an engaging state that can be disengaged by the pushing force of the driven side slide member 430, and strong engagement is difficult. It becomes. Further, in this case, there is a problem that the driven side slide member 430 vibrates due to the reaction generated when the driven side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are disengaged, and the posture becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated to be disengaged by retracting the ascending restricting member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 430. The force that can be applied to the driven side slide member 430 and the force that causes the ascending regulating member 417 to rotate can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force for suppressing the ascending operation of the driven side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for releasing.

Further, since the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the ascending restricting member 417 is released, the driven side slide member 430 is less likely to recoil, and the driven side slide member 430 at the time of release is less likely to occur. Can stabilize the posture of.

In the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive-side slide member 420 and the tubular passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 are communicated with each other. As a result, the ball that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the tubular passage portion 463.

32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Note that FIG. 32 shows a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is about to come into contact with the lowering regulation member 415. FIG. 33 shows a state in which the convex plate 453a is about to come into contact with the lowering regulation member 415. , The state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 32 and the convex plate 453a is placed in the raised position on the upper side of the lowering regulating member 415 is shown. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering regulation member 415 is partially enlarged.

In the state shown in FIG. 32, the release convex portion 417c of the ascending restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically, and the direction in which the release convex portion 417c abuts on the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release convex portion 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the ascending / descending operation.

Since the lift restricting member 417 is urged in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417 g, the load in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release convex portion 417c. Can be called. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is urged in a certain direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive-side slide member 420 during the ascending / descending operation can be stabilized.

Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release convex portion 417c to the contact wall 453 is such that the drive-side slide member 420 is returned to the center position, and a pair of left and right slide members are returned. The ascending restricting member 417 becomes left-right asymmetric.

That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction close to the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is further rotated toward the release side, so that the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased and the urging force is increased. While the force pushing back the contact wall 453 increases, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release convex portion 417c, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side, so that the torsion spring 417g The amount of deformation is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

Since the drive gear 442 and the lift restricting member 417 are arranged on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the urging force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of separating the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive side slide member 420 The rack 452 and the drive gear 442 are close to each other due to rattling in the left-right direction, and it is possible to suppress an increase in drive resistance (the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

That is, when the drive side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and the rack 452 moves in a direction close to the drive gear 442, the ascending restricting member 417 is wound outward (the engaging convex portion 417d is on the left and right outside of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400). By being rotated in the direction of rotation (moving in the direction), the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g is increased, and by increasing the urging force, the urging force that pushes back the drive side slide member 420 is increased, while the rack 452 is driven. When moving in a direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 separates from the drive gear 442 beyond the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is narrowed, and it is possible to suppress an excessive meshing resistance, and the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 is widened, resulting in tooth misalignment. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, in a state where the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the ascending position, the lower side surface of the convex plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is the release convex portion 415c of the lowering regulation member 415. Contact with the upper side surface (locked state).

The convex plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower side surface, which is inclined upward toward the left and right outward sides.

The descending inclined member 415 is one of a cylindrical portion 415a pivotally supported by the first shaft support portion 414, an extension plate 415b extending linearly in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and the extension plate 415b. A release convex portion 415c that is projected vertically from the end (upper end) and has a semicircular tip, and a release convex portion 415c that is wound around a cylindrical portion 415a and one end of which is engaged with the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 415d that urges the lowering regulating member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33) by being stopped.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held in the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

Further, the rotation operation of the lowering restricting member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by raising the rack 452 and causing the convex plate 453a to get over the release convex portion 415c of the lowering restricting member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering regulating member 415 can be generated by the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship between the descending regulation member 415, the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 in the front-rear direction will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 30) as compared with the ascending regulating member 417, and the contact wall 453 can abut on the ascending regulating member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 30. The lower side surface of the lowering regulation member 415 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

It will be described back to FIG. 33. The lowering restricting member 415 and the contact wall 453 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the contact wall 453 and the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 33 left-right direction), and the abutting wall 453 and the descending regulating member 415 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction (paper surface of FIG. 33). It is abutted in the vertical direction). As a result, the ascending restricting member 417 can suppress the rattling of the drive side slide member 420 in the left-right direction, and the descending restricting member 415 prevents the drive side slide member 420 from rattling in the front-rear direction (direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442). It is possible to suppress rattling.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area of the tooth contact surface from being reduced due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to tilt forward when the rack 452 is arranged in the raised position. Can be prevented.

By rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction of lowering the rack 452 from the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 is about to be lowered, the convex plate 453a applies a load to the release convex portion 415c, thereby causing a lowering regulation member. The 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the magnified view of FIG. 33). As a result, the lock by the lowering regulation member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be lowered. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulation member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (the drive source can also be used), the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the lowering regulation member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the drive side slide member 420, the operation timing is deviated and the lowering regulation is performed as in the case where the lowering regulating member 415 is rotated by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the regulation of the member 415 is lifted, causing an overload on the drive source and the lowering regulation member 415.

In the structure in which both the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are maintained in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the driven side slide member 430 is locked in the raised position of each member. However, in that case, the structure for connecting and separating the driven side slide member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 becomes complicated, and the cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the driven side slide member 420 is maintained in the raised position by locking the drive side slide member 420, the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. The configuration required for this can be reduced (only the drive device 450 and the drive side slide member 420 can be used). Further, the interlocking of the driven side slide member 430 with the drive side slide member 420 is solely due to the action of gravity, so that the structure between the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 can be simplified. it can.

When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven side slide member 430 is lowered on the rack 452. However, for example, the guide rod 451 becomes dirty and the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (see FIG. 22) are lowered. ), The descending speed of the driven side slide member 430 may be smaller than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven side slide member 430 comes into contact with the ascending restricting member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417 to rotate the ascending restricting member 417. Due to the weight of the driven side slide member 430, the ascending restricting member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged with each other.

Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13, and the ball winning the first specific winning opening 82 is placed. It is provided with a flow path inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b for detecting that a ball has passed is provided between the first variable winning device 82a and the first specific winning opening 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is a unit in which the first passage forming member 520 is hung down to the lower right in the front view, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung to produce an effect. is there.

FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510 and swinging, and a base. A drive device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate a driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and a cover on the front side. It is mainly provided with a cover member 550 having an introduction cylindrical portion 552 which is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and connected to the first specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 composed of an L-shaped plate-like body in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right end portion of the main body member in front view, and a shaft support thereof. The first wall portion 513, which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a flat plate shape with the surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres from the lower left end of the first wall portion 513 to the left in the front view. The second wall portion 514, which is arranged at intervals of the above and is formed in a curved plate shape with the surface facing in the left-right direction, and the sphere, which is arranged on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514. The flow-down passage 515, the shaft support 516 arranged in the lower left of the front view of the shaft support hole 512 and projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, and the locking arranged around the shaft of the shaft support 516. It mainly includes a wall portion 517 and a detection sensor 518 arranged above the shaft support portion 516 to detect the phase of the transmission device.

The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support portion 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 swings around the shaft support hole 512.

The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side.

The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centered on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending to the lower right in the front view. ..

The arc wall portion 517a is an end face of the detection sensor 518 and extends to the circumferential end face of the shaft support portion 516.

The first passage forming member 520 is provided on the long rod-shaped distribution base member 521, which is a member pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 512, and the distribution base member 521 arranged on the front side of the distribution base member 521. A passage cover member 522, which is fastened and fixed and forms a passage through which a ball can flow down from the distribution base member 521, is mainly provided.

The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, and one sphere along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. An intermediate plate portion 521b arranged at a position separated by a minute gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c that is projected in a columnar shape on the back surface side near the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a and is inserted into the shaft support hole 512. And the elongated hole 521d formed along the extending direction in the plate-shaped portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c, and the back side from the end portion of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the hanging plate portion 521a side. A distribution convex portion 521e that is convexly provided and whose width is shortened toward the outside of the shaft support portion 521c in the radial direction, and a gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e as viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a curved wall portion 521f that extends along the front side and curves along an arc shape having a center at the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a.

The hanging plate portion 521a has a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared with the middle portion to the upper side, and the plate thickness portion on the front side is shaved at the lower end portion to make the ball feed portion thinner. 521a1 is provided.

The gap V1 is a space through which the sphere that has reached the right side of the front view of the distribution convex portion 521e passes in the front direction.

The passage cover member 522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 521 and the plate-shaped portion 522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 522b are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light-transmitting raw resin material, and has a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent to the back side at a portion arranged on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521 at the lower end portion thereof. Be prepared.

The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions that roll the sphere that has passed through the gap V1 and, like the hanging plate portion 521a, the inclination angle changes with the intermediate portion as a boundary, so that the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

Of the upper and lower wall portions 522b, the lower wall portion is provided with a step inside the tip portion. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in the direction facing the upper and lower wall portions 522b (direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) and decelerating the sphere.

Further, the ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the back side by the ball feeding portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. As a result, the speed of the ball before ejection can be reduced, and the ejection of the ball can be stabilized.

The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is pivotally rotated around the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the drive gear 532 is meshed with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

The transmission device 540 is provided with a main body gear portion 541 that is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshed with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member that is projected in a columnar shape on the front side from an eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541. The eccentric convex portion 542 inserted through the elongated hole 521d of the 520 and the eccentric convex portion 542 extending in the radial direction from the main body gear portion 541 are configured to be in contact with the locking wall portion 517 and can pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. The extension portion 543 and the extension portion 543 are mainly provided.

The cover member 550 is connected to a plate-shaped main body member 551 that is overlaid on the base member 510 and a first specific winning opening 82 at the right end portion of the main body member 551 in the front view, and the back side end portion is the first. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that abuts on the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 extending downward from the left-right end portion of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the back surface side surface of the main body member 551. Mainly prepare.

The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 and flows downward.

The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 to 40 are front views of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 38 to 40, the cover member 550 is not shown, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 viewed in cross section at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a is shown, and the passage cover member is shown. The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. 39 (a), the first passage forming member 520 is shaken by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 38. In FIG. 39 (b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the dividing convex portion 521e is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a. In FIG. 40, the state immediately before the contact with the connecting member 424 is shown, and the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) and arranged at the connecting position is shown. To.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 occurs when the transmission device 540 is rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d is moved as the eccentric convex portion 542 moves.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extension direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the release position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is arranged in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and is brought into contact with the end portion of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extension portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a detent member.

As shown in FIG. 38, at the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and is discharged to the outside of the game area through the flow passage 515. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 39A, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the intermediate position of the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connecting member 424, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while riding on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e). stay). As a result, in the state of FIG. 39B, the ball passes through the first passage forming member 520, is sent to the connecting member 424, and the ball is prevented from reaching the facing wall portion 422f2.

Here, since the facing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upward inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion is the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is configured to project from the lower end of the upper side wall portion 424b to the left in the front view. Therefore, if a ball is thrown to the connecting member 424 in a downwardly inclined state and the ball collides with the upper end portion of the facing wall portion 422f2, the facing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39B, the introduction of the sphere into the first passage forming member 520 is prevented, so that the sphere can be prevented from colliding with the facing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the facing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 40, at the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support portion 516 and the eccentric convex portion 542 and the direction X2 corresponding to the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support portion 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the rotation operation of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load for rotating the transmission device 540. As a result, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, at the connection position, the extension portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is brought into contact with the inclined wall portion 517b. As a result, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b to stabilize the phase in which the transmission device 540 is stopped, and the extension portion 543 is locally loaded as compared with the case where the extension portion 543 is locally loaded. The durability of 543 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the front view of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side of the front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front side through the gap V1. Rolls along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37) of the passage cover member 522.

The flow of spheres in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the first variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth toward the front side through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520, and moves back and forth toward the front side, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522. Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

That is, the sphere is fed in the front-rear direction before the sphere flows down the inside of the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the first specific winning opening 82 in a string of beads, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 by suppressing the bouncing of the balls. Further, by letting the sphere sent in the front-rear direction flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), the direction of the velocity of the sphere can be changed, and the sphere smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made to.

In the first passage forming member 520, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 change in the extending direction with the intermediate portion as a boundary. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the proximal end side (shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the distal end side (opposite side of the proximal end side). Is extended along a straight line Y2 that is inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

Therefore, the speed of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower from the base end side to the intermediate portion than from the intermediate portion to the tip portion. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the ball is thrown from the first passage forming member 520 at the connecting position (see FIG. 42) , The angle with the direction in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c (vertical direction) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the rotation of the transmission device 540 causes the first passage forming member 520 to swing, and the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e switches the path through which the ball flows down.

Here, when a wall member arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged, the distribution convex portion 521e is brought closer to the wall member to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere. If the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position shown in FIG. 40, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion No wall member is arranged on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 with the 521e in between, and the wall member is opened. Therefore, the situation that the ball is bitten in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and the malfunction can be prevented.

The connection of the flow path between the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is cross-sectionally viewed to make the connecting member 424 visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The illustrated distribution convex portion 521e is visible.

Further, in FIGS. 41 and 42, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31) is shown, and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). In FIG. 42, the state in which the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 40) is shown.

When the first passage forming member 520 swings from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip end portion thereof abuts on the lower side surface of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is brought into contact with the lower side surface. Swing. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even if the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, the first It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. Can be done.

When the connecting member 424 is swung, the lower side wall portion 424c on which the ball flowing down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in a direction close to the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the 1-passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the ball is prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the 1st passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). As a result, the ball can be rolled along its downward inclination, and the throwing of the ball to the second passage forming member 422 can be stabilized.

The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting the passage of the ball of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) and the sensor member 422c. For example, in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the spheres remain in the first passage forming member 520). By starting the swing of the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at the timing (not shown), it is possible to prevent the ball from being ejected from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the spheres are distributed by moving the distribution convex portion 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 are contacted by swinging the first passage forming member 520. The driving force required for the operation of contacting each other to form the flow path of the sphere is also used (the driving force of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 is provided). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 in a state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged out of the game area from the tip of the first passage forming member 520.

Further, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and is a wall portion that partitions (forms the upper end) the passage of the sphere flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36). Also serves as. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts as compared with the case of sorting with other parts, and the ball distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side is surely placed on the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. It can be introduced in the passage to and from 522.

Next, the rotating unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. FIG. 43 is a front view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotating unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one side open, a guide member 620 covered on one side of the case member 610, and their cases. A drive mechanism 630 arranged between the members 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotary member 640 rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive mechanism 630, and a pitch arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotary member 640. The device 650 and a guide member 680 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 are mainly provided.

The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 that is substantially circular in front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front. It is formed in the shape of a container with an open side. The guide member 620 is formed in the shape of a disk having a front view ring, and is arranged (fixed) at the erected tip of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. As a result, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is arranged in the internal space.

The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 in a displaceable manner, and a connecting link action groove 621 and an undulating link action groove 622 are recessed in front of the guide member 620. The connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section extending along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link described later of the rotating member 640. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted, respectively.

The groove widths of the connecting link working groove 621 and the undulating link working groove 622 are set to have the same or slightly larger diameters as the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622.

When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link acting groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the distance between the dividing members DV (see FIG. 73), while the undulating link acting groove 622 has an undulating link acting groove 622. It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the rotating unit 600 in a state where the rotating member 640, a part of the pitching device 650, and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a front schematic view of the guide member 620. In FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated by using a two-dot chain line. Such an alternate long and short dash line is shown as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each action groove 621 and 622.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R1 centered on the axis O, and a large diameter portion 621a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R2 centered on the axis O. It is composed of a small-diameter portion 621b and a pair of connecting portions 621c that connect between the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to a size larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2 <R1).

The undulating link action groove 622 has a large diameter portion 622a that curves in an arc shape with a radius R3 centered on the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b that curves in an arc shape with a radius R4 centered on the axis O, and these large diameter portions. It consists of a pair of connecting portions 622c that connect between the 622a and the small diameter portion 622b. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to a size larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4 <R3).

In the present embodiment, the large-diameter portion 621a and the small-diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large-diameter portion 622a and the small-diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically with the axis O as the center. In this case, the axis O coincides with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, the large diameter portions 621a, 622a and the small diameter portions 622a, 622b of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622 act on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648, respectively. The force can be suppressed to reduce the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

Further, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, a force exerted on the connecting link member 644 from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and a force acting on the connecting link member 644 from the other connecting portion 621c. Can be offset. Similarly, the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 and the force acting on the undulating link member 648 from the other connecting portion 622c can be offset. As a result, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. ..

In the present embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed so as to have different phases. That is, in a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a or a small diameter of the undulation link action groove 622. In a state where the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is inserted through the connection portion 622c of the undulation link action groove 622 while being inserted into either one of the portions 622b, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is connected. It is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621a or the small diameter portion 621b of the working groove 621.

Since the connecting portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the interval of the dividing member DV or displace the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, the insertion portion receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portions 621c and 622c. By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted into the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the required driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Returning from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a gear (first gear) leading to the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train to which the transmission gear 633a) is meshed, a gear 634a meshed with a gear at the end of the transmission gear train (second transmission gear 633b), and a central transmission member 634 thereof. One-sided distribution gear train and other-side distribution gear train in which the first gear (first distribution gear 635a, 636a) is meshed with gear 634a, and the last gear (first gear) of those one-side distribution gear train and other-side gear train. It mainly includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the three distribution gears 635c and 636c). The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members at the end of a transmission path (output end in the drive mechanism 630) for transmitting the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631, and are members of the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotating member 640 to rotate. Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) is a front view of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51 (b) shows the one-side rotation member 637 and the other in the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51 (a). It is sectional drawing of the side rotating member 638.

Since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members formed in the same shape as each other, only the one-side rotation drive member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described. Only reference numerals are given in the drawings of FIG. 51, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disk shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer edge portions thereof. It is formed.

The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) in the split member DV of the rotating member 640, and has a width (distance between the facing surfaces) from the open side toward the recessed back side. ) Is narrowed. Front view (axial view) is formed in a substantially V shape. As will be described later, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641, and the rotating member 640 is transmitted. Can be rotated.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the opposing inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b. The connecting wall 637c is formed in a shape that curves in an arc shape in a front view (axial direction view) around the axial center of the one-side rotation drive member 637, and is also formed on the open side (one-side rotation drive member 637) of the engaging portion 637b. Only the inner surfaces of the outer edge side of the) are connected to each other, and the inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b on the back side of the recess are not connected to each other.

Here, when the rotary member 640 is driven by the one-side rotary drive member 637, the engagement and disengagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load is input, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-side rotation drive member 637 increases, a large output is required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, reinforcement against an impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start to engage is reinforced. And weight reduction can be effectively achieved at the same time. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed on the case member 610, except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back surface side of the guide member 620. Here, the holding structure of the central transmission member 634 to the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 52.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 600 cut in a plane including the rotating shaft of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmitter 634 has a circular shape in the front view and is formed in a hat shape having a recessed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the recessed portion in the center, and the outermost edge thereof. The overhanging portion 634b is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction in a flange shape.

On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIGS. 47 and 48) are superposed at three locations (that is, positions at 120 degree intervals) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. The overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 facing each other. As a result, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) can be regulated by abutting the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 on the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634. The displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 52) is regulated by abutting the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 on the facing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surfaces of the central transmission member 634 can be circumscribed (that is, point-contacted) with each other, so that the contact area between them can be reduced. Therefore, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Further, by adopting a structure for holding the outer edge side (overhanging portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 in this way, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is pivoted to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since it is not necessary to support the pitch and the space for arranging the parts for the shaft support is not required, the space for arranging the pitching device 650, which will be described later, can be secured accordingly.

Next, the operation of the drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and shows a state in which the central transmission member 634 is viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is arranged at a position concentric with the axis O which is the center of rotation of the rotating member 640, and the second transmission is performed on the gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in a meshed state. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between).

Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b. The central transmission member 634 is rotated.

When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are rotated along with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotations are the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 rotate. Will be done.

In this way, the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a. Therefore, by rotating the central transmission gear 634 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, the one-side rotation drive member The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, the drive of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is arranged concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and other-side rotating drive members 637, 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In the above, it can be arranged inward (on the axial center O direction side) from the outer edge portion of the rotating member 640. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the rotation drive members 637 and 638 on one side and the other side do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the rotation member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the state where the guide member 620 is arranged on the case member 610, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are radially outward from the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. The 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 in the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portions 637b, 638b and the engaged portion 641. The rotating member 640 can be rotated.

In this case, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase (that is, positions that face each other with the axis O in between). Therefore, as will be described later, the position (engagement position) for applying the driving force to the rotating member 640 can be separated as much as possible to stabilize the rotation of the rotating member 640.

Further, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged in postures (rotation positions) in which the phases of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b are different from each other. That is, in a state where one of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is not engaged with the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b or the engaging portion 638b is engaged with the engaged portion 641. (It is avoided that one and the other are disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to suppress intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the rotation member 640, and to stabilize the rotation of the rotation member 640.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the rotating member 640 is a front view ring-shaped member that is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and is in a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guide member 620. It is arranged on the front side of the. In the present embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

54 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of the arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 in the direction of arrow LV in FIG. 54 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in this embodiment) dividing member DVs, and the plurality of dividing member DVs are connected to each other in an endless manner along the circumferential direction. As a result, it is formed in an annular shape in the front view.

In this case, the plurality of split member DVs are formed so that the distance between the plurality of split member DVs can be changed. That is, in the rotating member 640, there is a first section S1 in which the dividing members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and a second interval in which the dividing members DV are narrower than the first interval. A second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed at. Between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the dividing members DV changes from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). A section is formed.

FIG. 56A is a front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 56B is a rear perspective view of the split member DV. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the split member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the split member DV. In addition, in FIGS. 56 to 58, in order to understand the connecting structure of the dividing member DVs, the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent dividing member DVs is schematically illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

Here, in the present embodiment, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DVs, while the remaining divided member DVs The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted have the same other configurations except for the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, in the following, the split member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the split member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the split member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a back side main body 642 in which the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the back side, and a front side of the back side main body 642. The front side main body 643 is arranged on the front side main body 643, the connecting link member 644 whose base end side is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and the front side main body 643. It is displaceably arranged between the plate holding member 645 to be displaced, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 displaceably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front main body 643 and the plate holding member 645. It is mainly composed of an undulating link member 648.

As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in the front view. The rear side main body 642 is arranged so as to project from the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 56B).

On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the back side main body 642, an opposing portion 641a facing the back surface of the back side main body 642 at a predetermined interval is formed, and the opposing portion 641a and the back side main body are formed. The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, a pair of sliding rollers 641b formed in a columnar shape are rotatably supported on the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The sliding roller 641b can make its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV) and can bring its outer peripheral surface into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. As a result, the sliding resistance when the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620 can be reduced.

On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed overhanging on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 on the back surface side main body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion detected by the detection sensor 684 arranged on the guide member 680, and is in a horizontal posture with respect to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV). To.

The back surface of the back surface side main body 642 is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620, and is a portion that slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 is rotated, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front. In the state where the rotating member 640 is arranged on the guide member 620, the back surface side main body 642 is arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is arranged in a radial linear shape centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

The back side main body 642 has a groove-shaped opening 642a and an undulating link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and a front surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed and pivotally supports the base end side of the connecting link member 644 with the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b), and a bent portion that protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). 642d and.

The connecting link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 of the adjacent split member DV is slidably inserted, and the split member is inserted by inserting the insertion portion 644a into the connecting link opening 642a. The DV can be connected to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted into the connecting link opening 642a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

The opening width of the connecting link opening 642a is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the connecting link opening 642a.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 receives an action from the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a opens the connection link opening 642a. By sliding along the line, it is possible to allow the posture of the connecting link member 644 to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connecting link member 644 with respect to the back side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the dividing members DV can be increased or decreased.

The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is slidably inserted, and the undulating link member 648 guides the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted through the undulating link opening 642b. It is inserted into the undulating link action groove 622 of 620.

The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to a size equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can slide (guide) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 receives an action from the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a opens the undulating link opening 642b. The display plate 646 and the division plate 647 can be undulated by sliding along the above.

As described above, the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57) of the back side main body 642, so that the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is viewed from the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivotally supported at overlapping positions. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotational drive members 637 and 638 and the split member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacements are adjacent to each other. It can be easily transmitted to the split member DV to be performed via the connecting link member 644.

The bent portion 642d is projected from the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58), and the protruding tip thereof faces the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 at a predetermined distance. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the bent portion of the protruding tip and the facing surface of the back surface side main body 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642) from the front of the guide member 620.

Further, the bent portion 642d is arranged so that its base can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge of the guide member 620, and the distance between the base of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b described above is increased. The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. As a result, the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, so that the main body member DV (rear side main body 642) remains in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Therefore, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

The front side main body 643 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view having substantially the same size as the back side main body 642, and is an undulation which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support portion 643b formed on the back surface of one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58) and supporting the base end side of the connecting link member 644 between the link slide groove 643a and the back side main body 642 (shaft support portion 642c). , A support plate 643c that is projected from the front and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably arranged, and extends in parallel with the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 is slid along the undulating link slide groove 643a to slide the insertion portion 648a along the undulating link opening 642b.

The width dimension of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 is smaller in the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction than in the width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction in the front view. That is, it is formed in a front view wedge shape in which the width dimension of the portion located on the inner peripheral side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller so that the divided members DV can be brought close to each other, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the second embodiment, in the second section S2, the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 are brought into contact with the adjacent back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 in the circumferential direction (see FIGS. 54 and 73). ..

The connecting link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a columnar insertion portion is provided on the front end side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, the connecting link of the guide member 620 is provided through the connecting link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent split member DV. It is inserted into the working groove 621.

The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the connecting link opening 642a and the connecting link working groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, the positional deviation of the dividing member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link 644 can be suppressed to a minimum, and the distance between the dividing member DVs can be easily maintained constant. As a result, the positional variation of the detected portion 641c can be suppressed, so that the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71) can be improved.

The base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of each main body 642 and 643) rotatably supported by the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connecting link member 644 is from the connecting link opening 642a. Is also arranged at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in the front view (viewing in the axial center O direction of the rotating member 640).

As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the rotation of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 causes the engaging portions 641. When the split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the split member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via the connecting link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The undulating link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the undulating link slide groove 643a of the front body 643, and has a columnar insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644, and as described above, is formed in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the undulating link opening 642b of the back side main body 642. It is inserted.

The action groove 648b is a portion for undulating the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 by acting on the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 by sliding displacement of the undulation link member 648, and is a portion of the undulation link member 648. It is formed in a groove shape extending linearly along the slide direction, and the actuated portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the facing surfaces of the groove-shaped portion.

The display plate 646 has a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an action groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. It is provided with a plate-shaped actuated portion 646d to be inserted between the surfaces. Since the acted portion 646d is formed by bending in a substantially S shape in front view, when the undulating link member 648 is slidably displaced, the acted portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The display plate 646 can be rotated around the shaft portion 646b as the center of rotation.

The partition plate 647 has a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a front view trap shape, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and a pair of shaft portions 647b on the same side as the pair of shaft portions 647b. It is provided with a shaft support portion 647c that is formed and rotatably supports the connecting shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

Here, as described above, the rotating unit 600 is an effect device configured to imitate a roulette wheel in which a plurality of pockets rotate a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are connected in the circumferential direction and a thrown ball is dropped into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the partition member DV of 1 and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent division member DV is used as a pocket, and the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is red. Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed for each.

In the present embodiment, the display board 646 of 1 is colored green and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Further, as for the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is visible to the player. That is, the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member arranged on the front side thereof, and is invisible to the player.

The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646, and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the shaft support by 645a and 645b.

In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated around the shaft portion 646b with the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated around the shaft portion 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the dividing member DV in a state of being arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are views. It is a top perspective view and the bottom perspective view of the split member DV in the state of being arranged in the second section S2. In addition, in FIGS. 59 and 60, in order to facilitate understanding, a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through is shown, and the connecting link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 59, when the dividing member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is formed in the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. It is inserted. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axial center O side). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in the horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in the upright posture.

The horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the back side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture of being orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back surface side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV).

As shown in FIG. 60, when the dividing member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted into. Therefore, the undulating link member 648 is slid-displaced on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and arranged in the inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted toward the plate portion 646a and arranged in an inclined posture.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c. Therefore, by rotating the display plate 646 with the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648, the display plate 646 is rotated. The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c.

As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulating link action groove and the undulating link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and the undulations in both mechanisms. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the state in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. 59 (that is, the display). When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright posture), the rotational action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) is used. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it can form a horizontal posture by being rotated by its own weight in the direction of being tilted downward, and the rotation (own weight) of the display plate 646 can be formed. Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the partition plate 647 can be lifted to form an upright posture. Therefore, even when the rotation is hindered by the adhesion of dirt, dust, etc., the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and quickly.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is set so that the overhang length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the overhang length of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the display plate 646 in the plate portion 646a can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the partition plate 647 in the plate portion 647a can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and quickly by utilizing the weight of the display board 646.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. The pitching device 650 is a device for throwing a ball B into the rotating member 640, is housed in a central recess in the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. In addition, in FIG. 62, the state in which the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651 is shown, and the passage member 655 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece infestation. It mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 arranged on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

The case body 651 has a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is radially outside the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. It is provided with an overhanging wall portion 651c formed by projecting in a flange shape toward the direction, and the overhanging wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the back side of the guide member 620, whereby the vertical tip (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b is provided. Is arranged at a position substantially aligned with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

A ball holding portion 652 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 651a. A spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface of the sphere holding portion 652, and the recess is used as a holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the sphere B is arranged on the sphere holding portion 652, the sphere B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged in a posture in which the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 is located at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B becomes an outer wall portion. The inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b is rolled and held on the holding piece 677 at the protruding position of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. Further, FIG. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is arranged at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in which the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is arranged at a separated position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the state of being a pitcher. In addition, in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is shown for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651, a front case 662 arranged on the front surface of the back case 661, and the front case 662. A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, and a drive motor 665 and a pinion gear 666 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664. Be prepared.

Shafts 661a and 661b are projected from the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a to which the pinion gear 676 is meshed is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is projected at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (shaft 661a). Further, in the arm member 664, a sliding groove 664a through which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted is extended in a straight line, and the center of rotation (shaft 661b) with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ) Is formed on the opposite side of the ring, and a front-view curved portion 664b is formed by dividing the ring shape in half.

Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, the crank member 663 is rotated via the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with the shaft 661b as the center of rotation.

That is, the arm member 664 holds the curved portion 664b at a holding position (see FIG. 64) for holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 along the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652, and holds the curved portion 664b on the sphere. It is possible to rotate (swing) between the ball B and the separation position (see FIG. 65) at which the ball B is separated from the portion 652 and dropped from the ball holding portion 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (the range of the central angle of about 90 degrees on the side (lower side) separated from the shaft 661b) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided on the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the curved portion 664b and is supported on the tip side. It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction) by the elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 arranged on the back surface side (outer peripheral surface side) of the limit switch 667.

Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position, the cantilever plate 664c is pushed down with the shaft 664c1 as the center of rotation by the weight of the ball B. While the limit switch 667 is turned on, when the ball B is not held by the ball holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is in the lifted posture as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence or absence of the ball B in the ball holding portion 652 can be detected.

In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed in a size that allows the ball B to be displaced while the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is hit or shaken by the player and an external force (vibration) is input, the ball B can be displaced according to the input of the vibration. That is, when the sphere B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced according to the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on and off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, it is possible to detect the input of an external force to the pachinko machine 10 by using the arm rotation mechanism 660.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 61 and 62. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the sphere B is rolled on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b, and the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 It is held on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position (see FIG. 68). In the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, the holding piece 677 is formed so as to be retractable between the protruding position and the immersion position, and when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, the sphere B is formed into a plurality of rotating members 640. The pitch is thrown on any of the dividing member DVs (display board 646) of the above. Here, the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position. It is an exploded front perspective view of.

FIG. 68 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at a protruding position, and FIG. 68 (b) is a holding taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the single-sided haunting mechanism 670. Further, FIG. 69 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the immersion position, and FIG. 69 (b) is a line LXIXb-LXIXb of FIG. 69 (a). It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 in.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 is formed by being curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is arranged on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. A back case 671, a front case 672 arranged in front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 held so as to be slidable between the facing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof. It includes a drive motor 675 and a pinion gear 676 for driving the 673, and a holding piece 677 that appears and disappears with the slide displacement of the slide member 673.

The rear case 671 includes two sets of one-to-one sets of roller members 674 that are arranged to face each other at predetermined intervals, and holds the slide member 673 so that the slide members 673 can be slidably displaced between the sets of roller members 674 facing each other. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a having a rectangular plate shape in a top view formed by projecting from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side, and the upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672. Guides the slide displacement (protrusion to the front side and immersion to the back side) of the holding piece 677 with and from the lower surface (outer peripheral surface) of the holding piece.

A pin portion 673a projects from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b to which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is formed on the inner circumference of the slide member 673 on the other end side (information portion) in the circumferential direction. Engraved along the surface. Further, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape in the holding piece 677. That is, one end side (right side of FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side of the other end side (left side of FIG. 66).

Therefore, the drive motor 675 is rotationally driven in the forward or reverse direction, and the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675 is rotated to slide and displace the slide member 673 via the rack gear 673b. By acting the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be projected to the front side or immersed in the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slidably displaced between the protruding position protruding toward the front side (see FIG. 68) and the immersion position immersed toward the back side (see FIG. 69).

Here, on the upper surface of the holding piece 677, the back surface side (right side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)) is located, and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved with and smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is connected to the edge of the curved surface 677b and heads toward the front side (left side of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b)). An ascending inclined surface 677c that is ascended according to the above, and a descending inclined surface 677d that is connected to the edge of the ascending inclined surface 677c and is ascended toward the front side are formed.

Therefore, in the state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the protruding position (see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B that has reached the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68 (b)) by the ascending inclination of the ascending inclined surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). Can be done.

On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the back side from this protruding position and placed in the immersive position (see FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b)), the front of the front case 672 causes the back side (FIG. 69 (b)). ) The ball B whose movement to the right side) is restricted is positioned on the descending inclined surface 677d, overcoming the ascending inclined surface 677c as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the immersion direction (back surface side). As a result, the sphere B can be rolled along the descending inclination of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the sphere B can be thrown to the front side (dividing member DV of the rotating member 640).

Since both sides of the curved surface 677b are smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1, the ball B that has been dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolled on one of the inner peripheral passages 651c1 is curved by the holding piece 677. It can be passed over the surface 677b and rolled to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the momentum of the sphere B is lost and the rolling is converged, the sphere B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made to.

It returns to FIG. 61 and will be described. As described above, the passage member 655 is arranged on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersion operation (immersion to the immersion position) of the holding piece 677 is divided into the rotating member 640. The plate 646) includes a throwing passage 655a that serves as a passage for throwing the ball onto the plate 646) and a return passage 655b that serves as a passage for returning the ball B thrown from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

The throwing passage 655a has a substantially U-shaped groove portion 655a1 having substantially the same width dimension as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece infestation mechanism 670 and extending to the front side, and the front surface from the groove portion 655a1. The front portion 655a2 which is connected to the side edge portion and is substantially flush with the display plate 646 in the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, and the split member DV of the rotating member 640 which is erected from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2. A pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing as the facing spacing of the partition plates 647 are provided.

Therefore, when the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is immersed in the immersion position, the ball B that is rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1. By rolling along the line, the ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

Further, since the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance of the dividing member DV partition plate 647, the pitch is thrown. The formed sphere B can be smoothly arranged on the display board 646 of the dividing member DV. When the ball B is thrown, the rotating member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) at which the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV coincides with the facing portion 655a3 based on the detection result by the detection sensor 684 described later.

The return passage 655b is provided on the rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when the ball B thrown from the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is received on the upstream side, and on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. It is provided with an erection portion 655b2 which is formed so as to be erected and curved so as to direct the rolling direction of the sphere B toward the back surface side.

The rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the inner peripheral side edge portion of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side and on the front side of the ball holding portion 652b on the downstream side in the front view of the pitching device 650. Further, the rolling portion 655b1 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side and downwardly inclined toward the ball holding portion 652 on the downstream side.

The sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is within the radial direction due to the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball is pushed toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled to the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1 and is dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the upright portion 655b2. To.

It will be described back from FIG. 43 to FIG. 48. As described above, the guide member 680 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member arranged along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 during transportation accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is,). The sphere B is supported from below), and a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is held. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base portion 681 disposed on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 disposed on the front side of the base portion 681, and a back surface side of the transmission plate 682. The cantilever plate 683 arranged in the base portion 681 and a plurality of detection sensors 684 (six in the present embodiment) arranged in the base portion 681 are mainly provided.

The base portion 681 is a member formed by dividing the annular shape at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in a front view arc shape), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. .. The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the dividing member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the sphere B that is arranged on the split member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is supported from below.

Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b connected to the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a portion for sending the ball B conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, is formed to have a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a, and is formed in the radial direction. By being formed in a shape protruding inward, the rotating member 640 is disposed so as to face the dividing member DV (display plate 646) (see FIGS. 43 and 44).

Therefore, when the sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction with the rotation of the rotating member 640, the return guide is provided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the dividing member DV. The sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the sphere B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b, and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

Here, even if the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotating member 640 is rotated to a position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is tilted downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate is formed. The ball B can be dropped into the return passage 655b along the downward slope of 647. However, in this case, since the sphere B is conveyed upward by the time the sphere B starts rolling due to its own weight, the drop position when the sphere B is dropped becomes higher, and the partition plate 647 Since the sphere B is rolled along the downward slope and then dropped, the momentum when the sphere B is dropped is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is thrown to the return passage 655b while being carried, the throwing speed can be weakened. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

The transmission plate 682 is a portion facing the dividing member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval in which the sphere B can be held), and a part of the upper edge side portion in the center in the width direction is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the throwing passage 655a (front portion 655a2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 into the split member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping out.

Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the dividing member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front portion 655a2 of the throwing passage 655a), but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (of the ball B). Since it is also formed in a size (width dimension) that can partially face the split member DV adjacent to the (downstream side in the transport direction), the rampage of the ball B thrown from the throwing passage 655a can be caused by the transmission plate 682. It is possible to easily converge between them, and the sphere B can be stably conveyed to the return guide 681b.

On the other hand, the transmission plate 682 has a size (width dimension) that allows the ball B to face the split member DV to which the ball B is thrown and the split member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the split member DV, and the split member DV to which the ball B is thrown. And the split member DV located on the downstream side of the adjacent split member DV is not faced. That is, the ball B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side in the transport direction (right side in FIG. 70) and the return guide 681b, so that the player can visually recognize the transport of the ball B. It can be done easily.

Since the transmission plate 682 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting material, the player can see through the member or the ball B located on the back surface side thereof. Therefore, the thrown ball B passes through the throwing passage 655a and is dropped between the display plate 647 of the dividing member DV and the transmission plate 682 facing each other, and is supported by the guide surface 681a by the rotation of the rotating member 640. The player can visually recognize a series of modes of transportation.

The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). One end side of the cantilever plate 683 is rotatably supported by a shaft 685 on the base portion 681, and the other end side in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported by the elastic force of a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) arranged on the base portion 681. It is maintained in a lifted position upward (inward in the radial direction).

In the posture in which the other end side of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is lifted upward, the limit switch is turned off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B is thrown. Due to the weight, the cantilever plate 683 is pushed down with the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. Thereby, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

On the other hand, when the sphere B is conveyed with the rotation of the rotating member 640 and the weight of the sphere B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Is returned to, and the limit switch is turned off.

The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other, and the detection region (light emitting portion and the light receiving portion) thereof. The facing spaces of the portions) are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction while being positioned on the movement locus of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54). The distance between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the distance between the dividing members DV (detected unit 641c) in the first section S1 (first distance).

Therefore, a plurality of (six in this embodiment) dividing member DVs adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction can be arranged at positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, and the rotating members 640 correspond to a predetermined amount (that is, the first interval). Each time the rotation amount) is rotated, the split member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be shifted in the circumferential direction.

In this case, as described above, the detected portion 641c is formed in the divided member DV of a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of divided member DV, while the remaining divided member DV is formed. The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is formed is arranged, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned on. The detection sensor 684 in which the dividing member DV on which the detected portion 641c is not formed can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion by the light receiving portion, and the detection signal is turned off (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of each detection sensor 684.

In the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so 64 (= 2 to the 6th power). Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of the divided member DVs arranged is 30, as will be described later, the detection sensor 684 detects which of the plurality of divided member DVs the divided member DV is located at the reference position. It can always be determined based on the result.

Next, the operation of the rotating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, the operation of changing the interval between the dividing members DV when the rotating member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. Further, FIG. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73 (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

In addition, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the back side main body 642, the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 among the components of the dividing member DV are shown in FIGS. 72 and 73. In addition, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are hatched.

As shown in FIG. 72, the rotating member 640 is a member rotatably formed with the axis O as the center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and the plurality of divided members DV are circumferentially formed. It is formed in an endless shape connected to. That is, in each dividing member DV, the base end side of the connecting link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the tip end side of the connecting link member 644 is adjacent to the back side of the split member DV. It is inserted into the connecting link action groove 621 through the connecting link opening 642a in the main body 642.

As described above, in the back side main body 642 of the split member DV, the sliding roller 641b on one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction are in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture with respect to the guide member 620 radiates from the posture in which the axis O is located on the extension line in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (that is, the axis O is the center). It is maintained in a linear posture). That is, only movement while maintaining that posture is allowed.

In this case, the large-diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the small-diameter portion 621b. In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the working groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connecting link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set to a large distance (first distance).

On the other hand, since the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (rotatably axially supported side) of the connecting link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a, such connecting link action In a state where the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the small diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73B), the connecting link member 644 is placed on the back surface in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rear side main body 642. The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the distance between the dividing members DV (rear side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small distance (second distance).

Here, as described above, the rotating member 640 is an effect device formed by imitating a roulette wheel, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, the effect is performed by making the player visually recognize the identification information to be displayed on the display board 646. Therefore, considering the visibility of the player, it is preferable that the display board 646 (display of identification information) is large, and in order to secure variations in the effect of the effect, the number of display boards 646 (display of identification information) is large. It is preferable that there are many types).

In this case, in consideration of the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, and the size is maintained. However, if the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 becomes large and the rotating member 640 cannot be accommodated in the predetermined arrangement space, while the rotating member 640 is accommodated in the predetermined space. If the diameter is reduced, the number of identification information displayed (the number of display boards 646) is reduced, and it becomes impossible to secure variations in the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the dividing member DVs are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the interval narrower than the first interval in the first section S1 are set. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 can be formed on the rotating member 640 with the second section S2 in which the dividing member DV is connected in the circumferential direction at intervals of 2. The player is made to visually recognize (the display board 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

Therefore, as compared with the case where the plurality of divided member DVs are all connected at the first interval, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. At the same time, the display number of the identification information (that is, the number of display boards 646) can be increased while ensuring a certain size or more for the display of the identification information (that is, the display board 646). As a result, it becomes impossible to secure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

Here, in the first section S1, the split member DV is such a display board because the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is arranged in a horizontal posture (a posture parallel to the moving plane of the split member DV) as described above. The identification information displayed on the 646 can be easily seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the second section S2, the split member DV is in a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display board 646 is in a posture in which the tip side is raised more than the horizontal posture in the first section S1, so that the split members are adjacent to each other. Interference with DV can be suppressed, and the dividing members DV can be brought closer to each other by that amount. That is, the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for its arrangement can be suppressed.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is displaced (rotated) on the upper surface of the front main body 643, and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is placed on the adjacent dividing member DV (plate holding). It can be lifted above the upper surface of the member 645) (that is, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the split member DV can be brought close to the position where the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 come into contact with each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the rotating member can be suppressed.

Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 (a) to 74 (d) are state transition diagrams for each time the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the front-view one-side rotation drive member 637 is shown.

Note that FIGS. 74 (b), 74 (c) and 74 (d) correspond to states rotated by 30, 60 and 90 degrees from FIG. 74 (a), respectively. Further, in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 has a two-dot chain line. Illustrated with.

Here, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by these, the same driving operation will be described only by the driving operation by the one-side rotating driving member 637, and the description of the driving operation by the other-side rotating driving member 638 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (d), the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is partially the same as the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and at the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637b is made rotatable in a state of being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circular shape of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circular shape of the moving locus of the engaged portion 641.

When the one-side rotation drive member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the split member DV via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. Then, the split member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent split member DV via each connecting link member 644, so that the rotating member 640 rotates. Rotated in the direction.

In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640 with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 can be reduced (the amount of rotation of the one-side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent reduction ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotational torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotary drive of the rotary member 640 (particularly, the rotary drive from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and a other-side rotation drive member 638, and they are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed at different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided member DVs. That is, even when the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of dividing members DV in an endless manner in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53). The driving force from each rotation driving member 637, 638 can be applied to the two most separated positions of the rotating member 640 (plural divided member DVs), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 is caused. Can be stabilized.

In this case, in the state of the dividing member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. There are three types, a second state inserted through the small diameter portion 621b, and a third state inserted through the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side are present. The rotation drive member 638 can apply a driving force to the split member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV in the third state. ) Is placed.

As a result, a driving force can be applied to the dividing member DV in a state where the interval between the adjacent dividing member DV is changed from the first interval to the second interval (or vice versa). Since the split member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which the plurality of split member DVs are endlessly connected (movement of each split member DV in the circumferential direction) is performed. By directly driving the split member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638, the plurality of split member DVs are endless. The entire rotating member 640 connected to the above can be stably displaced (rotated).

The period in which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 to the division member DV completely coincides with the period in which the division member DV is in the third state described above. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient that the period in which the driving force of the former is transmitted and the period in which the latter is in the third state overlap at least in part.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed at positions having different phases. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-mentioned third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 arranged in the dividing member DV is formed in the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. It is inserted.

Therefore, when the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 pivotally supported by the dividing member DV passes through the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link action groove 621. Later, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

As a result, the reaction force is not received from both the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 at the same time, and the timing of receiving the reaction force can be different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, since the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so that their phases (rotation positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b) are different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640 is performed. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the phase and the engagement or disengagement state of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 with respect to the split member DV. In FIG. 75, the upper state relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower state relationship diagram corresponds to the other side rotation drive member 638, respectively. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis indicates the phase, and the vertical axis indicates the engaged or disengaged state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. If the phase at the time of starting the above is defined as 0 ° (reference position), the one-side rotation drive member 637 has a th-order until the phase reaches approximately 100 ° (that is, until it rotates 100 ° from the reference position). The engaging portion 637b of 1 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, and the driving force is transmitted to the split member DV, while the engagement is released while the phase is approximately 100 ° to 120 °. The transmission of the driving force to the dividing member DV is released.

After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at three positions of the one-side rotation drive member 637 are the case of the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement states (ie, engagement between rotation angles of approximately 100 ° and disengagement between rotation angles of approximately 20 °) are repeated.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other side rotation drive member 638, each of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three positions is the same engagement and disengagement as in the case of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. (That is, the engagement between the rotation angles of about 100 ° and the disengagement between the rotation angles of about 20 °) are repeated.

In this case, in this embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged so as to be out of phase with each other (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b and 638b). To. That is, the other side rotation drive member 638 has a phase in which the first engaging portion 638b of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three locations starts engaging with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. The first engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is set to a phase delayed by approximately 40 ° from the phase (reference position) at which engagement starts.

As a result, while one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, the transmission of the driving force is disengaged), one side is released. The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set so that the other of the rotary drive member 637 or the other side rotary drive member 638 engages with the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to prevent both the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 from being in a state of being disengaged from the split member DV at the same time. As a result, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized by suppressing the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640.

That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing member DVs in an endless manner, when the driving force is intermittently transmitted from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640, Due to the transmission and release of the driving force, the distance between the dividing members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if either one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the other side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is in the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Can form a state in which is always transmitted, so that the distance between the dividing members DV can be easily kept constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by connecting the plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner can be stabilized, and the displacement (rotation) thereof can be stabilized.

Next, the operation of detecting the rotation position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram for each unit rotation amount of the rotating member 640, and shows a state in which the arrangement of the detection sensor 684 and the dividing member DV is developed in a straight line.

In FIG. 76, for convenience of explanation, the reference numerals “A to F” are shown on the detection sensor 684, and the reference numerals “1 to 10, 30” are shown on the dividing member DV, and the detection sensor 684 is shown. The detection state is illustrated by the sign "on, off". Further, in FIG. 76, hatching is added to the detected portion 641c for easy understanding.

Here, in the description of FIG. 76, the detection sensors A, the detection sensors B, ... , The detection sensor F, and each division member DV is referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV, ..., A thirty division member DV, and distinguish between them.

As shown in FIG. 76A, when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first dividing member DV reaches the phase (rotational position) that can be detected by the detection sensor A, the second dividing member DV to the sixth The dividing member DV is arranged in a phase that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

Therefore, in the detection sensors A, C to F, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c of the first dividing member DV and the third to sixth dividing member DV. The detection state is turned on by detecting the detected unit 641c, while the detection sensor B is capable of receiving the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, and the detected unit 641c is not detected. Therefore, the detection state is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the dividing member DV is moved in the circumferential direction (FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b)). By moving to the left), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned on by shading the third to seventh partition members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned off. To.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76 (b), the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned on by shading the third to sixth dividing members DV and the eighth dividing member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection is detected. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned off.

After that, every time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount, the dividing member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is the number of the dividing member DVs (this implementation). When it is repeated only (30 in the form) (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), it returns to the state shown in FIG. 76 (a).

In this case, as described above, there are two types of the rotating member 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the other in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting these two types of dividing members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged at predetermined intervals that are unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement is a combination of the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A) even if any of the adjacent 6 dividing member DVs is taken out from the 30 dividing member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. It means an array in which the detection states of ~ F) are all different combinations.

Therefore, a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F and the dividing member DV to be detected at the time of detection are associated with each other) is created in advance and stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. By setting this, the phase (rotation position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table each time the detection sensors A to F perform detection. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) dividing member DV is located at the reference position.

Here, the rotating member 640 is provided with a slit continuous in the circumferential direction, the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. , The amount of rotation (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position can also be detected. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684, the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulse numbers are deviated, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurate. Can no longer be detected. That is, if a detection failure occurs even once, the subsequent detection result is affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the effect on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 and the plurality of detected portions 641c are moved. Since a plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the detection sensors A to F, and the past of the detection sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Since the detection result of the above is not required, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and therefore the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the dividing members DV (detected portion 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by a rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV, the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be changed. That is, the phase (rotation position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the distance between the divided members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to any of the split member DVs (that is, any pocket of the rotating member 640 that imitates the roulette wheel) among the plurality of split member DVs connected in the circumferential direction. be able to.

Further, in this way, the arrangement interval of the detection sensors A to F is set with reference to the interval of the dividing member DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are set by the dividing member DV in the first section S1). By arranging the detected portion 641c of the above in a detectable position), the space required for arranging the detection sensors A to F is compared with the case where the interval of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at positions where the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV in the second section S2 can be detected, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in narrowing the interval (second interval) between the dividing members DV. On the other hand, since the detection sensors A to F are arranged on the first section S1 side, there is no limitation on the setting of the interval (second interval) of the dividing member DV in the second section S2, and the second interval is such. The interval between 2 can be a narrower interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, two detection results (on / off) based on the presence / absence of the detected portion 641c of the dividing member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, and therefore 64 (= 2 to the 6th power) combinations can be formed.

In this case, since the number of the divided member DVs is 30, it is sufficient to have 5 detection sensors 684 (that is, a combination of 32 (= 2 to the 5th power) can be formed). However, in this case, a state occurs in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shaded by the detected unit 641c), and therefore, in a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. , The timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, the detection result is off in all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 (a state in which the detection unit 641c does not block light). ) Can be avoided. That is, in at least one detection sensor 684 out of the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (shielded by the detected unit 641), so that all phases (rotation) can be set. At the position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, the display plate 646 of the dividing member DV has the plate portion 646a arranged in a horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface opposite to the side surface (left side in FIG. 77) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent dividing member DV.

In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed by bending the side surface of the plate portion 646a on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated around the shaft portion 646b and arranged in the horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the split member DV adjacent to the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a. As a result, the distance between the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be further narrowed.

As a result, in the first section S1, when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 Since the side surface is in contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645, such relative displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of narrowing their intervals, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684.

On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 ends the connecting link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent dividing member DV (the end on one side in the extending direction, FIG. 73 (a). ) Since it is located on the lower side (see FIG. 73 (a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of widening their distance (first distance), By contacting the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 with the end of the connecting link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portion 641c of the divided member DV from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor 684.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes a passage. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

As shown in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a ball to the rear on the right side of the front view of the first wall portion 513, an extension direction of the distribution base member 2521, and an elongated hole 2521d. It is mainly composed of a first passage forming member 2520 having a substantially linear extension direction, and a tip wall member 2560 that opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea thereof is the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted in the present embodiment.

The side flow passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a forming one side of the flow passage of the sphere, an elongated hole 2521d extending along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. The second distribution convex portion 2521g arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side of the front view of the above, and the back side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g on the right side of the front view toward the front side of the hanging plate portion. It is provided with a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower side wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion thereof, and a passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3 formed in a circular shape in a direction facing the passage cover member is provided on the side opposite to the 2522.

The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower side surface of the first passage forming member 2520 jointly with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by a rotational operation.

The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body portion 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is pivotally supported by a pin member on a rod, and is arranged at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. Axle.

The second distribution convex portion 2521g is a portion having substantially the same shape as the distribution convex portion 521e, and is a portion that distributes the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 to the left and right. The discharge recess 2521h is arranged so as to provide a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, and reaches the first wall portion 513 to the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. The sorted balls are introduced from the discharge recess 2521h into the side flow passage 2515, and then discharged out of the game area.

The passage cover member 2522 extends in a plate shape from both ends of the plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 2522a that is covered on the front side of the distribution base member 2521 and the plate-shaped portion 2522a in the lateral direction toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b to be formed are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment and the shaft support hole 2522a2 coaxially bored with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower tip portion. Be prepared. The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2, and include a recessed portion 2522b1 that constitutes an opening through which a ball can pass jointly with the recessed portion 2521a2.

The tip wall member 2560 is arranged between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates into a rod-shaped pin member coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. It mainly includes a main body member 2561 having a substantially Z-shaped front view that is pivotally supported, and a torsion spring 2562 that urges the main body member 2561 clockwise in the front view.

The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm abuts on the locking pin 2561e projecting from the tip wall member 2560 to the back surface side.

The main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. 79 (a) and 79 (d) are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79 (b) is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, FIG. 79. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 79 (b). In addition, in FIG. 79 (a) and FIG. 79 (d), the shape of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79 (a), the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position ( The state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged is shown in FIG. 79 (d), and the state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in the connecting position (see FIG. 81) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560 has a tubular main body portion 2561a coaxially supported with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78) and a radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-shaped plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the flow-down hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the side opposite to the main body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b. A curved wall portion 2561d extending from the end of the main body portion 2561a along an arc centered on the main body portion 2561a, and a locking pin projecting at the tip portion of the curved wall portion 2561d in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a push-in portion 2561f which is a portion arranged on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary and is formed in a shape smaller than the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Mainly prepare.

The plate portion 2561b is formed so that the radial length (extension direction length) of the main body portion 2561a is longer than the dimension in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction in FIG. 80) of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. To. As a result, the rotation stop position of the tip wall member 2560 in the urging direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper side wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b come into contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 79 (d)).

In the released state (see FIG. 79 (d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the flow by causing the ball to collide with the contact wall 2561d1 which is arranged to face the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball is allowed to pass by moving below the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is arranged on the back side of the contact wall 2561d1. By rolling over 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow.

Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. In addition, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position is shown, and in FIG. A state in which the one passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount is shown, and FIG. 82 shows a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at a connecting position. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is shown by an outline at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is shown.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is set to the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is on the right side of the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. The first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise and the discharge recess 2521h is arranged on the front side of the side flow passage 2515. As a result, the ball can flow down the side flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged out of the game area. Thereby, in the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that the next ball enters the discharge recess 2521h. It can be prevented, and the next ball can be kept outside the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g (upper side in FIG. 80).

In the sphere fastened to the outside of the rotation locus of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise in the front view, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides the ball. By being arranged along the wall portion on the right side of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced on the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. To. As a result, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, the balls introduced into the discharge recess 2521h can be kept as one.

As shown in FIG. 80, in a state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, the first passage is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be tilted upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the supplied sphere remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and reaches the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere is reached. Flows toward the base end due to the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip end.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in a state between the release position and the connection position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and has reached the first wall portion 513 has a second distribution convex. Riding on the tip of the part 2521g, the flow is stopped. As a result, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in a state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip end portion. Therefore, when the opening of the tip portion is always open, the sphere is brought into the state shown in FIG. 81 with the sphere remaining between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be bitten by another unit (rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)), causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the tip wall member 2560 is arranged in the opening of the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening. Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position, the ball that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is left in front of the second distribution convex portion 2521 g. It is distributed to the direction, moved to the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and extends in the extension direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Flow down along.

At the connecting position, the pushing portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f of the drive side slide member 420 abut (the wall surface of the accommodating recess 422f is arranged on the displacement locus of the pushing portion 2561f), and the tip ends. The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction of projecting to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is generated by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can be shared with the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

At this time, at the connecting position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to a posture in which the plate portion 2561b is in a surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the ball reaching the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. The ball can be thrown into the flow-down hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is formed between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

The sphere that has passed through the flow-down hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive-side slide member 420 by rolling the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d has a role of stopping the ball that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 and a role of guiding the ball sent from the first passage forming member 2520 through the flow-down hole 2561c. Also used for.

At the connecting position (see FIG. 82), the plate portion 2561b is positioned with the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. It is assumed that the plate portion 2561b has entered the inner side (upper side of FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the flow-down hole 2561c only after reaching the connecting position (a state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until the connecting position is reached).

As a result, even if the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate from the connecting position to the releasing position in a state where the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520, the sphere is at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. It can be surely prevented from falling from. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are thrown in a row.

A case where a plurality of balls are continuously thrown to the first passage forming member 2520 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. 83 (a) to 83 (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. In addition, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectionally viewed, and in FIG. 83A, the first passage is viewed. The state in which the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 83 (a). In FIG. 83 (c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and the tip wall member 2560 is rotated and partitioned. The state is illustrated.

Further, in FIGS. 83 (a) to 83 (c), a sphere flowing down in a row at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the accommodating recess 422f in the connected state, and the recessed portion 2561f1 is provided on the lower side in FIG. 83 (a) starting from the contacted position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed on the shaft support portion 516 side of the arc C21 centered on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates from FIG. 83A, the tip wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the urging force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83A, the sphere arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d is referred to as a feed ball P21, and the sphere arranged on the left side is referred to as a residual sphere P22.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the first passage forming member 2520 is about to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters the inside of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is brought into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is arranged on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, the flow is not stopped by the contact wall 2561d, and passes through the flow hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to throw a ball.

In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83B), but the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b are arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, the feed ball P21 is pushed by the wall portion thereof, so that the feed ball P21 can be ensured to pass through the flow-down hole 2561c. As a result, the diameter of the opening of the flow hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same level as the diameter of the sphere, and the flow path of the ball flowing down the flow hole 2561c can be stabilized.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), from the state shown in FIG. 83 (b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83 (c), and the curved wall portion 2561d is the drive side slide member 420. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when it is moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a rolling portion of the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall thereof. The feed ball P21 is allowed to flow down while the distance between the lower end portion of 2561d2 and the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (the first passage is formed during the period until the feed ball P21 partitions the flow down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position shown in FIG. 83 (c) or slowing down the speed near FIG. 83 (c)), it is ensured that the sphere flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. can do.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described, but the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 in the third embodiment has the third symbol display. The device 81 is arranged on the left side of the driven side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 in the third embodiment in which the elevating and lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 are illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 is partially enlarged.

Further, in FIG. 84, immediately after the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 comes into contact with the driven side slide member 3430 is shown, and in FIG. 85, the rack 452 is raised from the state shown in FIG. And the state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the ascending position is shown, and in FIG. 86, the state in which only the driving side slide member 420 is lowered and arranged in the descending position from the state of FIG. 85 is shown. Then, from the state shown in FIG. 86, the driven side slide member 3430 is dropped, and the separation action surface 434b, which is the lower side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and the separation inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417 are brought into contact with each other and the ascending regulating member The state in which the 417 is rotated by a predetermined amount is shown, and in FIG. 88, the state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. 87 and the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the lowered position is shown. ..

As illustrated in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front surface. It mainly includes a plate portion 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 and operates in a manner of preventing the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

In the base member 410, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged only on the left side portion in the front view, and the arrangement of the right side portion in the front view is omitted.

The driven side slide member 3430 has a main body member 3431 having a third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in the front view from the left and right center position and is elongated in the left-right direction, and the main body member 3431 in the left-right direction. Functional parts 432 arranged at both ends, guide holes 433 that are holes formed in the functional parts 432 in the vertical direction and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and lower ends of the functional parts 432 that rise in the left-right outward direction. A hook-shaped portion 434 that is inclined and extended, and a fall prevention portion 435 that extends to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (the side close to the other guide hole 433). Mainly prepared.

The main body member 3431 includes a locking convex portion 3431a that is projected to the left in the front view at the upper end portion thereof. The locking convex portion 3431a is a portion that is locked to the solenoid 3480 arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 to prevent the cover member from falling. The locking convex portion 3431a is inclined downward as its upper surface toward the tip in the convex direction.

The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 that can appear and disappear to the right in the front view, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is tilted upward toward the tip in the overhanging direction. The solenoid 3480 is in an immersive state when energized and in an extended state when it is not energized. In the overhanged state, the tip of the rod member 3481 is projected toward the left and right center side from the tip of the locking convex portion 3431a. Consists of.

As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the areas divided into the left and right sides of the third symbol display device 81 are collected in one place (to the right of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84). By configuring it as a large area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the vacant area.

Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in the front view, the load applied to the rack 452 from the driven side slide member 420 is asymmetrical (the left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive-side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to tilt the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring storage member 423 is arranged at the lower end on the left side of the front view of the second passage forming member 422. At this time, since the center of gravity position G31 of the wiring storage member 423 is arranged to the left from the center position of the drive side slide member 420, the drive side is affected by the weight of the wiring accommodated in the wiring storage member 423 and the wiring storage member 423. The slide member 420 may be loaded and tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In this way, the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are prevented from rattling during the ascending / descending operation of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452. It can be limited to the rattling between the state where the 452 keeps the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and the state where the drive side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive side slide). It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting clockwise from the horizontal posture.

Therefore, the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the left side in the front view guide the ascending / descending operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the rack 452 while effectively suppressing the inclination of the driving side sliding member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not tilted to the right side of the front view, it is not necessary to dispose the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 outside the functional portion 432 on the right side of the front view. Costs (material costs and assembly man-hours) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the wiring storage member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity position G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. It is moved to the left in front view.

Therefore, the load in the direction of tilting the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front becomes large, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in a state where the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the ascending position, the convex plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the descending regulating member 415. As a result, it is possible to prevent the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from tilting counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the locking convex portion 3431 gets over the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking convex portion 3431 is placed on the rod member 3481. ..

At this time, the rod member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 3431, so that the locking convex portion 3431 can get over the rod member 3481. As a result, the locking convex portion 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive side slide member 420 is lowered while the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 keeps the locking convex portion 3431a of the driven side slide member 3430. By supporting the driven side slide member 3430, it is prevented that the driven side slide member 3430 moves downward in conjunction with the driving side slide member 420, and the driven side slide member 3430 is maintained in the ascending position.

At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is closer to the left side in the front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is closer to the left side. Also, it is possible to prevent the driven side slide member 3430 from falling.

That is, when the position of the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is in the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may wobble both clockwise and counterclockwise due to vibration and the like. If the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise in the front view while the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking convex portion 3431a may slip off from the rod member 3481.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the position of the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer to the left side in the front view, the driven side slide member 3430 is tilted clockwise from the horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

Therefore, the locking convex portion 3431a is likely to incline in the direction close to the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking convex portion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained, so that the locking convex portion 3431a is the rod member 3481. It is suppressed from slipping off.

Therefore, the driven side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained in the ascending position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both the left and right sides of the driven side slide member 3430, so that the number of solenoids 3480 arranged can be reduced. , The operation of the driven side slide member 3430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is immersed, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process of dropping the driven side slide member 3430, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulating member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught by the lowering regulating member 415 and causes a malfunction. It can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 falls in a state of being in contact with the separated inclined portion 417f of the ascending restricting member 417, whereby the ascending regulating member 417 is rotated outward (counterclockwise in FIG. Release state).

As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the ascending restricting member 417 and The hook-shaped portion 434 and the hook-shaped portion 434 are arranged so as to face each other in the vertical direction (engaged state).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, since the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430, the state changes from the disengaged state to the engaged state, so that there is no change in posture. The load and posture change amount required to change the disengaged state and the engaged state are increased as compared with the case of engaging with (such as when the disengaged state and the engaged state are changed by the elasticity of the member). be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the engaged state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven side slide member 3430 and the ascending restricting member 417 are engaged with each other.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the ascending restricting member 417 is rotated by the fall of the driven side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive device in order to form the engaged state of the ascending restricting member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the facing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 at the downward inclined position has been described, but the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment is curved. The facing wall portion 4422f2 arranged to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a wall portion on a plane extending in the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

89 (a) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a side view of the drive-side slide member 4420 in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a). 89 (c) is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. In addition, in FIGS. 89A and 89C, the drive side slide member 4420 is cross-sectionally viewed at the center position in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. Further, FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b) show a downward tilted state of the connecting member 4424, and FIG. 89 (c) shows an upward tilted state of the connecting member 4424.

The connecting member 4424 includes an extended claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right side in the front view.

The extended claw portion 4424f is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in an upwardly inclined state, is recessed and curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is curved in a front-rear direction (FIG. 89) as shown in FIG. 89 (b). (B) Left-right direction) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the intermediate portion.

The second passage forming member 4422 includes an opposing wall portion 4422f2 that is arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The facing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion extending in the vertical direction along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged so as not to interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f, and the recessed portion is arranged in FIG. 89 (a). In the state, it is extended to a position where it overlaps with the extended claw portion 4424f.

According to the present embodiment, in the downward tilted state shown in FIG. 89 (a), a portion (protrusion portion or the like) that is damaged by the collision of the sphere with the sphere is not arranged, so that the first passage forming member. When a ball is thrown from 520 to the connecting member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

Since the extending claw portion 4424f and the facing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere in the upward tilted state shown in FIG. 89 (b), it is possible to prevent the sphere from being clogged in the vicinity of the sensor member 422c.

<First control example>
Next, the first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 179. In this control example, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the probabilistic state, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. ing. More specifically, it is compared with the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol 1 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Then, the one who wins a big hit by the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol 2 lottery) executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a wins a large amount of prize balls. It is configured so that the jackpot type that can be acquired (the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) can be easily selected. That is, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is easily opened, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily executed. It becomes easier to win the prize ball. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player in the time saving state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a, and it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery of the special symbol 1 is difficult). It will be easier to execute), so even if it becomes a big hit, it will be difficult to win a large number of prize balls. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in this control example, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set with a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit. The time saving state of this normal symbol continues until the next big hit. That is, once a big hit occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the big hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol are repeated with a high probability (97.5%). Therefore, as long as the time saving state is continuously set after the big hit, the big hit can be repeatedly won without reducing the number of balls held, which is an advantageous state in which a large number of prize balls are expected to be won. Hereinafter, the state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit is set is referred to as "ream villa mode".

On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, even if it becomes a big hit, it is difficult to set the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol is given, most of the set time saving state is completed by the time when the lottery of the special symbol is executed seven times. That is, most of the time saving periods of ordinary symbols set after the big hit are 7 times or less (1 time or 7 times). As mentioned above, if you win the jackpot during this time saving state, there is a high probability (97.5%) that you will shift to the "renso mode", but after the jackpot ends, you will win the jackpot again in a limited number of lottery. Since it is difficult to become, in many cases, it returns to the normal state of the normal symbol without becoming a big hit. That is, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol in which the number of balls to be held tends to decrease and the jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball (the jackpot in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened) are likely to be repeated. Therefore, the normal state of the normal symbol becomes a disadvantageous state for the player. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol is referred to as "normal mode". In addition, a time-saving state in which the number of times is limited (finished when a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is executed after the end of the big hit), which may shift after the end of the big hit, is referred to as a "preparation mode".

By providing a "renso mode" that is advantageous for the player and a "normal mode" that is disadvantageous for the player, the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

First, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 96, various modes of production performed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 90 and 91 (a) are diagrams showing an example of a variation display (variation pattern effect) executed when a special symbol lottery is executed in the "normal mode" (normal state of the normal symbol). Yes, FIGS. 91 (b) and 92 are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode executed in the big hit when a big hit is made in the "normal mode", and FIGS. 93 to 96 are big hits. An effect mode that suggests whether or not to shift from the "preparation mode" to the "renso mode" when the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" after the end (a time saving period of 1 or 7 times is given). It is a figure which showed an example.

First, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 (a), an effect mode when the variable display is executed in the "normal mode" will be described. In the "normal mode", the number (number) displayed on the effect unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300 notifies whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. More specifically, out of the five types of numbers (predetermined) selected in advance by the player, any four types are displayed one by one on each of the display units 331a to 331d constituting the effect unit 331. By doing so, the jackpot is notified. On the other hand, by displaying a number different from any of the five predetermined numbers on at least one of the display units 331a to 331d, the deviation of the special symbol is notified.

The combination of five kinds of numbers indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), a combination of five types of numbers is formed inside a vertically long substantially rectangular small area Ds2 formed on the right side of the front view in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Lucky number) is displayed. In the example of FIG. 90 (a), five types of "2", "7", "13", "17", and "25" are displayed as a combination of five types of predetermined numbers (lucky numbers). ing. Further, in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "Get the lucky number !!" are displayed. According to these display contents, five kinds of numbers ("2", "7", "13", "17", "25") displayed as lucky numbers are displayed on the director 331, so that a special symbol is displayed. It is possible to easily make the player recognize that it will be a big hit. The five types of lucky numbers displayed in the small area Ds2 can be selected by the player from, for example, the game menu screen. This game menu screen is a screen displayed by operating the frame button 22 in, for example, the game stopped state. By making the lucky number selectable by the player, the combination of the numbers (designs) displayed on the production unit 331 when the special symbol is hit is set to the player's favorite number (symbol). Can be done. That is, the winning symbol can be changed according to the taste of each player.

Further, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved symbol indicating the current number of reserved balls is displayed inside the vertically long substantially rectangular small area Ds1 formed on the left side of the front view. In the example of FIG. 90A, since the case where the number of reserved balls is four is shown, four reserved symbols displayed by black circles are displayed in the small area Ds1. By visually recognizing the number of reserved symbols, the player can easily recognize the number of reserved balls.

As shown in FIG. 90A, when the lottery of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the symbol is executed in each display unit 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a number different from the lucky number is displayed on at least one display unit (see FIG. 90 (b)). In FIG. 90 (b), numbers (“8” and “1”) different from the lucky numbers are displayed for the display unit 331b and the display unit 331c in the deviation display, and the display unit 331a and the display. Part 331d shows an example in which lucky numbers (“17” and “2”) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the combination of deviations is stopped and displayed on the effect unit 331, the characters "Sorry ..." are displayed in the large area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the lottery result of this special symbol was out of order.

The numbers displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 are set in different modes depending on whether or not they are lucky numbers. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90B, when any number defined as a lucky number is displayed, a white number is displayed (display units 331a, 331d). On the other hand, when a number different from the lucky number is displayed, the number is displayed in black characters (display units 331b, 331c). By making the display mode of the numbers different depending on whether or not the numbers are lucky numbers, the player can more easily recognize whether or not the numbers displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are lucky numbers. be able to.

In this control example, the lucky number is displayed in white and the numbers other than the lucky number are displayed in black, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by displaying the lucky number in red letters, it may be configured so that it can be easily distinguished whether or not it is a lucky number, or the background of the lucky number is set to red and the background of the numbers other than the lucky number is set to white. By doing so, it may be configured so that it can be easily distinguished whether it is a lucky number or not, or it may be configured so that it can be easily distinguished whether it is a lucky number or not by increasing the character size of the lucky number.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, one of the five types of lucky numbers is displayed for each display unit 331a to 331d. In the example of FIG. 91 (a), among the five types of lucky numbers ("2", "7", "13", "17", "25"), "17", "25", " "2" and "13" are displayed as white numbers, respectively. In addition, the lucky numbers are displayed on the display units 331a to 331d, and the characters "success !!" are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the jackpot has been achieved.

In this control example, four of the five types of lucky numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed one by one for each display unit 331a to 331d to notify the jackpot. , Not limited to this. For example, the lucky number may not be specified, and the same number may be displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d to notify the jackpot. As a result, it is only necessary to pay attention to whether or not the same numbers are aligned, and it is not necessary to compare the lucky numbers with the numbers displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d. It can be made easier. Further, for example, the symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be executed by the display units 331a to 331d, and the symbol variation display may be executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display units 331a to 331d can be omitted, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, by reducing the number of parts, the yield rate at the time of production can be improved. Moreover, the failure rate can be reduced.

Next, the effect executed in the jackpot in the "normal mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 (b) and 92. Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the first variable winning device 82a repeats opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times per round (opening pattern A). ) And an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds per round. In FIG. 91B and FIG. 92, a jackpot effect when the opening pattern A is set will be described.

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing an example of the display contents in the jackpot in which the opening pattern A is set. Here, when the jackpot type in which the opening pattern A is set in the "normal mode" is won, first, the drive side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected. Placed in position. After that, the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern A. By connecting the drive-side slide member 420 and the first passage forming member 520 before setting the opening pattern A, all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are transferred to the first passage forming member. It can flow down to the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via 520. In this control example, every time the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (every time the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422 detects the passage of the ball). , The time saving suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is executed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the characters "Align lucky numbers !!" are displayed in the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Further, on each of the display units 331a to 331d, the lucky number displayed at the time of notifying the jackpot continues to be displayed even during the jackpot. Further, the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 executes a variable display of the symbol. Depending on these display contents, the remaining one type of numbers different from the numbers displayed on the respective display units 331a to 331d among the five types of lucky numbers (see the small area Ds2) is displayed on the effect unit 422a, so that the player It is possible to easily make the player recognize that the time saving state which is advantageous to the player is set. As for the variation display of the symbol executed by the effect unit 422a, the stop display is executed every time the sphere reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c).

FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a case where a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and is notified of the disconnection. As shown in FIG. 92A, when the disconnection is notified, the number is different from the lucky number (see the small area Ds2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the effect unit 422a. 3 ”is stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "failure ..." are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is uncertain whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. Even if the disconnection is notified, if the opening period of the opening pattern A remains, the effect unit 422a restarts the variable display of the symbol (see FIG. 91 (b)). That is, the more the ball is entered into the first variable winning device 82a (winning), the more the variable display is executed, so that it is possible to make the ball positively want to win the first variable winning device 82a. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a case where the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the time saving state of the normal symbol is notified. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92B, when it is determined that the sphere has passed the sensor member 422c of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, "7", which is one type of lucky number, is assigned to the effect unit 422a. Stop is displayed. That is, among the five types of lucky numbers, a number different from the four types of lucky numbers that are stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d in order to notify the jackpot is stopped and displayed. In addition, the characters "Great success !! Roulette chance GET !!" are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With these displays, the player can easily recognize that the player will shift to the "preparation mode" (normal symbol time saving state) after the jackpot is completed.

In this control example, a number (design) different from the lucky number is displayed on the director 422a when the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode", and is defined as the lucky number when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". One of the numbers (designs) is configured to be displayed on the effect unit 422a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image of a wall may be displayed on the effect unit 422a at the start of a big hit, and an effect may be executed in which the displayed wall gradually collapses each time the sensor member 422c detects the passage of a sphere. Then, as the wall collapses, the lucky number displayed behind the wall is exposed, and when the wall completely collapses, the lucky number can be obtained (the "preparation mode" is notified). You may. In this way, every time the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a is detected by the sensor member 422c, the player is given an effect as if the lucky number is approaching. On the other hand, the ball can be launched more aggressively during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

In this control example, the lucky number is displayed to the effect unit 422a when the "preparation mode" is notified, but the number (design) displayed to the effect unit 422a is not necessarily lucky. It is not limited to numbers. A symbol unrelated to the lucky number may be displayed. For example, the transition to the "preparation mode" may be notified by displaying the symbol with the letter "V".

In this control example, in the jackpot where the "opening pattern A" is set, the variation display is executed every time the sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the variation display is not necessarily performed every time the sphere is detected ("" It is not necessary to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode"). For example, the variable display may be performed only once during the jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of spheres have passed through the sensor member 422c, an effect (variable display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed is executed. May be good. With this configuration, the ball can be launched more aggressively in order to quickly know whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game. In this case, if the number of balls that have passed through the sensor member 422c by the end of the final round of the jackpot is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10), the mode is entered into the "preparation mode" in the ending period. It may be configured to notify whether or not the transition is made, or when the jackpot is finished and the first fluctuation display is executed, it may be notified whether or not the transition to the "preparation mode" is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined number of balls cannot be entered into the first variable winning device 82a during the jackpot, it is possible to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode". Therefore, it is possible to make the player accurately grasp the game state after the big hit. Further, the number of balls to be won by the first variable winning device 82a before the effect (variable display) of whether or not the lucky number is displayed does not have to be fixed every time, and the "open pattern A" is used. May be changed by lottery or the like each time a big hit is set.

In this control example, in the jackpot where the "opening pattern A" is set, the variation display is executed every time the sphere is detected by the sensor member 422c, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variation display may be executed every time the sensor member 422c detects the passage of the sphere a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.). With this configuration, even if the ball continuously wins the first variable winning device 82a, a sufficient time interval can be left between the completion of each fluctuation and the start of the next fluctuation. (It is possible to prevent the start condition of the next fluctuation from being satisfied during the fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely confirm the result of each variation display.

Although not shown, in the jackpot of the opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the opening is performed only once for 0.052 seconds per round, whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" is immediately notified. To. That is, when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" after the big hit, the lucky number is displayed to the effect unit 422a when the first variable winning device 82a is opened, regardless of whether or not the ball has won a prize. On the other hand, if the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode", a number (design) different from the lucky number is displayed when the first variable winning device 82a is opened.

The jackpot on which this "opening pattern B" is set will be described in detail. The jackpot for which "open pattern B" is set consists of an opening period of 3 seconds, a round period of 0.052 seconds (for 2 rounds), an interval period of 0.5 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds. Has been done. That is, the jackpot ends in about 6.6 seconds. Using this 6.6 seconds, the effect unit 422a executes the variable display of the symbol. Then, when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot, the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the director 422a after 5.6 seconds, and the lucky number continues to be displayed for the remaining 1 second of the jackpot. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the mode has been changed to the “preparation mode”. On the other hand, when the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the big hit, a number different from the lucky number is stopped and displayed on the effect unit 422a. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize the transition to the "normal mode". By executing the effect of whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" during the jackpot in which the "open pattern B" is set, the effect unit 422a can be attracted attention during the jackpot period. That is, even if the "opening pattern B" in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened for only a short time (0.052 seconds) (that is, it is extremely difficult to win a prize ball) is set, it is very short. The player's attention can be distracted from the first variable winning device 82a during the opening period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the "open pattern B" has become a big hit, so that it can be recognized as if it were one mode of the variation effect selected in the "normal mode". That is, the player can be made to recognize as if the "normal mode" is directly shifted to the "preparation mode". Therefore, it becomes a big hit in which the "open pattern A" is set, and a lucky number is given to the directing unit 422a by the time saving suggestion effect executed by winning the ball to the first variable winning device 82a during the big hit. Is it easier for the player to shift to the "preparation mode" because it is possible to recognize that the transition to the "preparation mode" may occur without going through the multiple stages of displaying Can make you feel like. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, an example of the effect in the case of shifting to the “preparation mode” (given one or seven time saving periods) after the end of the big hit will be described. As described above, in this control example, when a big hit is made in the time saving state of a normal symbol, there is a high probability (for example, 97.5%) after the end of the big hit, which is advantageous for the player. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until it becomes. In the "renso mode", the lottery for the special symbol 2 is easily executed. When a big hit is achieved by the special symbol 2 lottery, the big hit type (probability variable big hit HK, normal big hit B) in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened is selected, so more prize balls are given to the player. Can be acquired. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with one goal of shifting to the advantageous "ream villa mode".

In order to shift from the "normal mode" to the "renso mode", it is basically necessary to shift to the "preparation mode" and win a big hit during the "preparation mode". Therefore, whether or not a big hit is achieved in the "preparation mode" affects the degree of advantage of the player who plays the game in the pachinko machine 10, and is one of the most important scenes in the game. Therefore, in this control example, in this "preparation mode", a relatively large-scale (flashy) "renso mode suggestion effect" accompanied by a rotational operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) (see FIGS. 94 and 95). Is configured to run.

The details will be described later, but in this "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 during the rotating operation of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 45) configured to imitate the roulette wheel. Depending on the type of pocket (display board 646 and division board 647) on which the ball B falls, an effect of notifying whether or not the mode has shifted to the "renso mode" is executed. More specifically, 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 are divided into a hit pocket and a miss pocket, and the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 falls into the hit pocket. By doing so, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the "renso mode". A rear LED 625 is provided on the back side of the rotating member 640 (see FIG. 97). The back LED 625 is controlled to be lit so that the back side of the hit pocket is lit and the back side of the detached pocket is turned off. Therefore, by visually recognizing the lit pocket, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket.

Specifically, the "renso mode suggestion effect" is an effect of setting (lighting up) a hit pocket (an effect of increasing the lucky number) and an effect of throwing the ball B into one of the pockets of the rotating member 640 (roulette chance). It consists of a production) and an ending production. In the lucky number increase effect, a lottery is performed every time a ball enters the second entry port 640a to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number). By increasing the number of hit pockets, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is easier to shift to the "renso mode", so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, in the lottery to decide whether to increase the winning pocket, whether the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed (whether the hit of the probability change jackpot is fluctuating, or the "renso mode" is in the reserved ball. Depending on whether or not there is a probabilistic jackpot inside), the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is different. Specifically, if the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed, the number of hit pockets will increase with a high probability (25% rate each time a ball enters the second entrance 640a). Is determined. On the other hand, if the transition to the "renso mode" is undecided, or if it is confirmed that the mode will return to the "normal mode" without shifting to the "renso mode" (the last within the set time saving period). In the case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed), the increase of the winning pocket is determined with a low probability (5% rate every time the ball enters the second entry port 640a). When the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed, the hit pockets are more likely to be increased. Therefore, by increasing the hit pockets, the player's expectation for the "renso mode" should be improved. Can be done.

Before increasing the number of hit pockets, a pocket with the same number as the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the hit pocket. That is, the lucky number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shifts to the role of notifying the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode" (see FIG. 91 (a)) and to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot ends. In addition to the role of notifying whether or not to shift to (see FIG. 92 (b)), it also serves to notify whether or not to shift to the "renso mode". Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of each effect by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more understandable effect. In addition, the notification of the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) executed in the jackpot, and the "consecutive mode" executed in the "preparation mode" With the notification of, the production aimed at acquiring all the lucky numbers is executed. Therefore, these three types of different notifications can be made to feel as if the player is one effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production.

The details of the lucky number increase effect will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), during the lucky number increase effect, the characters "preparing for roulette chance" are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can easily understand that the roulette chance effect is executed by the rotating member 640 configured to imitate the roulette.

In addition, below the words "Preparing for roulette chance", the words "Right-handed to increase your lucky number !!" are displayed. By displaying this character, the player is informed that the hit pocket may increase by launching (striking right) the ball toward the right side of the game board 13 during the execution of the lucky number increase effect. It can be notified. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" in which the lucky number increase effect is set, the player can be made to hit right, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is advantageous for the player is executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It will be easier. Therefore, since the game can be performed under the favorable conditions of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 93B is a diagram showing the display contents when the winning pocket (lucky number) is increased in the lucky number increase effect. As shown in FIG. 93, when a winning (winning ball) to the second entrance 640a is detected during the execution of the lucky number increase effect and the winning pocket increase lottery is won, an additional lottery is added to the third symbol display device 81. The winning pocket (lucky number) is notified. That is, the characters "10 GET !!" are displayed in the large area Dm. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the number of hit pockets has increased by one, so that the player can be pleased. When the increase of the hit pocket is notified, the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lit state. Thereby, the position of the contact pocket on the rotating member 640 can be easily determined.

In this first control example, when the ball enters the second entry port 640a, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number). The opportunity to increase the pocket (lucky number) is not limited to this. For example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the player passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, or the lottery is performed according to the elapsed time (for example, the jackpot ends). It may be configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not to increase the pocket (lucky number) per 3 seconds (every 3 seconds have passed since), or depending on the number of ejected balls (for example, every time 5 balls are launched). It may be configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number).

In this first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed during the execution of the lucky number increase effect. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed and when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" (the number of start prizes during the time saving state is the set time saving period. The probability (ratio) of determining the increase in the winning pocket may be different depending on whether the mode is less than the above) and the case where it is confirmed that the mode does not shift to the "renso mode". Specifically, for example, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed at the time of the lottery, there is a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a). If it is determined that the winning pocket (lucky number) will be increased by the ratio of) and it is confirmed that the mode will not shift to the "renso mode", there is a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a). It may be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", the probability between the above two cases (for example, the ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a). It may be configured to increase the number of hit pockets. With this configuration, it is possible to have variations in how to increase the number of winning pockets, which further improves the interest in the lucky number increase production. Furthermore, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", for example. In the case of, the probability that the winning pocket is increased may be different according to the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode". That is, when the "preparation mode" with one time saving period is set, the probability that the winning pocket is increased is lower than when the "preparation mode" with seven time saving periods is set. You may. More specifically, for example, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased at a rate of 8% when the time saving period is once and 12% when the time saving period is seven times. As a result, it is possible to predict the time saving period from the degree of increase in the hit pocket (lucky number), so it is possible to expect the transition to the "renso mode" by increasing the hit pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect a time saving period of 7 times, which is advantageous for the player (there are many chances to shift to the "renso mode").

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, a roulette chance production, which is one of the productions constituting the “renso mode suggestion production”, will be described. In this roulette chance production, as described above, it is a production for notifying whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" depending on whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket.

When the roulette chance effect is executed, first, the characters "Roulette chance !!" are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and "a ball is in the shining pocket" below the characters. If you fall, the words "Roulette mode" will be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to understand that the ball B falls into the pocket in which the back side of the rotating member 640 is set to be lit, thereby shifting to the "renso mode". ..

FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the arm member 664 of the pitching device 650 is rotated (see FIG. 65), and the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position. In FIG. 94 (b), the contact pocket of the rotating member 640 is hatched and the detached pocket is shown in white.

In the roulette chance production, when the swinging motion cycle of the ball B is less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped into the target pocket (either the detached pocket or the hit pocket). (The holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position). By swinging the sphere B once on the holding piece 677 and dropping the sphere B after the swing cycle becomes small, it is possible to make the sphere B seem to fall naturally. That is, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the movement of the ball B can be paid more attention to, so that the player's interest in roulette chance production can be improved. In the following description, among the roulette chance effects, a series of effects from when the ball B is thrown toward the holding piece 677 until it falls into one of the pockets is referred to as a swing effect.

FIG. 95A is a diagram showing a case where the sphere B comes off and falls into the pocket. Here, the case where the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket is specifically a case where the swing effect is executed without a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol during the "preparation mode" (start of the swing effect). At the time point, the deviation fluctuation is being executed or the fluctuation is stopped). In this case, since the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed at the start of the swing effect, the ball B is controlled to fall into the out-of-pocket.

When the swinging effect is started without becoming a big hit of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the rotation of the rotating member 640 causes an detached pocket (pocket shown in white) directly under the holding piece 677. The sphere B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 as it is arranged. In addition, the characters "sorry" are displayed on the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As a result, the player can easily understand that the transition from the "preparation mode" to the "renso mode" could not be performed.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the mode shifts to the "renso mode" at the start of the rocking effect, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), it hits directly under the holding piece 677 and has a pocket (hatched display). The sphere B is controlled to fall from the holding piece 677 as the pocket) is arranged. In addition, the characters "great success" are displayed on the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. As a result, the player can easily recognize the transition to the "renso mode".

When the ball B falls into the detached pocket or the hit pocket, the cantilever plate 683 of the guide member 680 is pushed down by the weight of the ball B as described above, so that the limit switch is turned on. By detecting the ON state of the limit switch, it can be easily determined that the sphere B has fallen normally. When the fall of the sphere B is detected, the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped. In other words, the pocket with the number (identification information) indicating the effect result in this "Renso mode suggestion effect" (the pocket where the ball B fell) is stopped directly under the holding piece 677 as the ball B falls. To. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the result of the effect by observing the same position (directly below the holding piece 677) in each "consecutive villa mode suggestion effect". Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in which the result of the effect is easier to understand.

As for the arrangement of the pockets while the rotating member 640 is rotating, as described above, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F (see FIG. 76) arranged on the guide member 680 are monitored and the outputs thereof. It is determined by the combination of. That is, the type of the pocket arranged directly under the holding piece 677 is determined by the combination of the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F (rotational position detection sensor 684). In the following description, the position directly below the holding piece 677 is referred to as a drop position.

In this control example, in a state where the sphere B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the pocket type of the drop position is specified (determined) from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Then, according to the determination result, the type of the pocket arranged to the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position (the pocket adjacent to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position) is determined. Will be done. Next, the pocket type arranged at the drop position matches the pocket type (whether it is a hit pocket or a detached pocket) in which the ball B is dropped in this swing effect, and the ball B swings. When the operation cycle is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 second), the ball B is dropped into the pocket arranged at the next drop position.

Here, the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position is determined not by the type of the pocket at the drop position but by the rotational operation of the rotating member 640 after it is determined that the ball B is to be dropped. This is because it takes time for the ball to reach the pocket at the drop position. That is, there is a time lag between the time when the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position by driving the drive motor (holding piece motor) 675 and the time when the ball B actually falls. If the pocket type of the drop position is determined and the drop control of the sphere B (the operation of the holding piece 677 to the immersion position) is executed, the time until the sphere B actually falls becomes long. For example, the ball B may fall after the target pocket has passed. Further, for example, while the ball B is falling down the throwing passage 655a, the partition plate 647 provided on the right side of the front view of the pocket arranged at the falling position moves by the rotational operation, so that the ball B is thrown. It may be sandwiched between the passage 655a and the partition plate 647, which may hinder the rotational operation of the rotating member 640.

On the other hand, in this control example, the type of the pocket to be placed at the drop position is determined next, and the drop control of the sphere B based on the determination result is executed before the pocket is placed at the drop position. It is configured to do. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing that allows the ball B to be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the drop position). Can be immersive. Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket. Therefore, the ball B hits and falls into the pocket even though it does not shift to the "renso mode", and conversely, even though the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

In this control example, the type of the pocket currently arranged in the drop position next to the pocket arranged in the drop position is determined, and the drop control of the ball B is executed. It is not limited to this. For example, the type of the pocket two or three ahead of the current drop position may be determined in advance, and the drop control of the sphere B may be executed for the determined pocket. With this configuration, the fall control can be executed with a greater margin, so that the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target type of pocket.

The rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is stopped based on the detection that the ball B has fallen into the detached pocket or the hit pocket, and when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the stop, the "ream villa" The ending indicating the end of the "mode suggestion effect" is started. In the ending, the result of the effect is notified again by the third symbol display device 81, and the rotating member 640 is set in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotation operation (that is, the front view clockwise direction) in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect". Rotate. This rotational operation is performed until the rotating member 640 is arranged at a position where the ball B dropped from the holding piece 677 can be rolled to the return passage 655b (for example, five pockets in the counterclockwise direction). continue. In the process of rotating the rotating member 640, when the pocket in which the sphere B has fallen is arranged in the upper right direction of the front view with respect to the return passage 655b, the sphere B falls from the opening of the pocket into the return passage 655b. .. When the ball B falls into the return passage 655b, the ball B rolls along the inclination of the rolling portion 655b1 and is arranged at the ball holding portion 652. In this way, by returning the ball B to a state where it can be pitched by the pitching device 650 during the ending, the effect of dropping the ball B into any pocket is executed in each "ream villa mode suggestion effect". can do.

When the rotation operation for returning the ball B executed during the ending to the ball holding portion 652 is completed, the rotating member 640 is kept in the stopped state until the next "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is executed. Dripping. That is, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the end of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" differs depending on the pocket in which the ball B has fallen. The time until the end of the rotation operation can be shortened by simply rotating the sphere B from the position where the sphere B is dropped by five pockets without returning the arrangement of the rotation member 640 to a fixed position. Therefore, the operation of the rotating member 640 can be reliably terminated during the ending of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, an additional effect executed in order to expect the player to shift to the “preparation mode” or the “renso mode” in the “normal mode” will be described. "Addition" here means to add (add) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance production of "Renso mode suggestion production", until all the reserved balls are exhausted. If the "Roulette mode suggestion effect" is executed in the meantime, the number of pockets added by the additional effect will be increased. By adding a winning pocket (lucky number), it is possible to make the player feel that it is easier to hit the roulette chance production, so that the player's expectation for the roulette chance production can be increased.

Whether or not to execute the additional effect is determined by a lottery (additional lottery) executed when the winning of the first entrance 64 is suspended in the "normal mode". In this additional lottery, the ratio at which the additional effect is determined differs depending on the content of each reserved ball. Specifically, in the reserved ball, the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (a jackpot in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set) and the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode" When there is a (probability change jackpot during the time saving state of a normal symbol) (when it is confirmed that the roulette chance effect will succeed), the execution of the additional effect is determined at the highest rate (25%). On the other hand, when the reserved ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode" or the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (when the roulette chance production is not executed). Is determined to perform the additional effect at the lowest ratio (5%). Furthermore, if the reserved ball does not include the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode", but only the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "preparation mode" (only the execution of the roulette chance effect). Is confirmed and the effect result is undecided), the execution of the additional effect is determined at an intermediate ratio (15%) between the above two cases.

In this way, the more advantageous the lottery result contained in the reserved ball is to the player, the easier it is to determine the execution of the additional effect. Therefore, when the additional effect is executed, the additional effect is easily determined. By digesting the reserved ball, it can be expected that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

Next, a specific mode of the addition effect will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (a). As shown in FIG. 96A, when the number of reserved balls increases in the "normal mode", the number of reserved symbols (symbols displayed by black circles) displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 increases by one. Will be three. In addition, when the execution of the additional effect is decided by the additional lottery executed when the number of reserved balls increases, the characters "addition !! + 1" are displayed for the large area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, "+1" indicating the cumulative number of additions is displayed below the lucky number displayed in the small area Ds2. The display of the number of additions to the small area Ds2 is until the effect of increasing the number of pockets added in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is executed when the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is executed. It keeps being displayed. On the other hand, if the additional effect is executed but the "Renso mode suggestion effect" is not executed (when the hold ball does not include the jackpot that sets the time saving state), the additional effect is decided to be executed. The cumulative number of additional balls will continue to be displayed until the reserved balls that triggered the game are exhausted (the lottery for special symbols based on the reserved balls ends).

FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when one hit pocket (lucky number) is added by the additional effect and then the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is started during the digestion of the reserved ball. is there. As described above, the "renso mode suggestion effect" is executed when the special symbol is a jackpot in the "normal mode" and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends. Therefore, at the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the lucky numbers (that is, "17", "25", "2", "13" displayed at the time of the jackpot notification to each display unit 331a to 331d The symbol) continues to be displayed, and the lucky number (that is, the symbol of “7”) displayed at the time of notification of the “preparation mode” continues to be displayed to the effect unit 422a (see FIG. 96 (b)).

In addition, when the "renso mode suggestion effect" is started in the added state, an effect of notifying the added lucky number in the added effect in the "normal mode" is executed as a part of the lucky number increase effect. To. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the characters "the added lucky number" are displayed for the large area Dm. Then, the characters "5GET !!" are displayed below the characters. Since this character is displayed inside the balloon generated from the place where the cumulative number of additions is displayed, the player had a lucky number of "5" added by the addition effect before becoming a big hit. You can recognize that. Further, the pocket of the rotating member 640 corresponding to the lucky number notified by this effect is newly set as a hit pocket. That is, the pocket with the number "5" is set to the lit state. By performing an effect that increases the hit pocket (lucky number), it makes you feel as if there is a high possibility that the hit (transition to "renso mode") will be notified in the subsequent roulette chance effect. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the roulette chance production.

As described above, in this control example, in the "normal mode", an additional effect that is so easy to be executed that the lottery result advantageous to the player is reserved is provided. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, the extra effect is usually executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is held after the jackpot, so it is usually a jackpot (when the extra effect is not executed). You can have them play the game with a stronger expectation. This is because if it becomes a big hit, the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" will increase.

In addition, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). , It is possible to expect the production unit 422a to display the lucky number during the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode" is held at the time of executing the additional effect, the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed is compared with the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed. Since the execution rate of the additional effect is high, when the "preparation mode" is notified as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "renso mode" more than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the "renso mode". Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this control example, there are cases where it is confirmed that the transition to the "ream villa mode" is made within the range of the reserved ball, and cases where only the transition to the "preparation mode" is confirmed within the range of the reserved ball. , The ratio (probability) of executing the additional effect was different in the three cases of not even shifting to the "preparation mode" (25%, 10%, 5%, respectively), but the additional effect is executed. The lottery probability of whether or not it may be divided into more detailed cases. More specifically, for example, when all the reserved balls are out, the additional effect is executed at a rate (probability) of 3%, the reserved balls include the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot, and as the jackpot type. If only the jackpot type that shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot is included, the additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 5%. In addition, 7% if the reserved ball includes a jackpot type that shifts to "preparation mode" and it is confirmed that it will not shift to "renso mode" at the time of the additional lottery. It may be configured so that the additional effect is executed at the ratio (probability) of. Here, when it is confirmed that the mode does not shift to the "renso mode", for example, only the lottery result corresponding to the jackpot type to which one time saving period is given is held, and the result is out of order. This is a case where an additional lottery is executed because a reserved ball corresponding to the lottery result is newly held. Furthermore, if only the transition to the "preparation mode" is confirmed at the time of the additional lottery, the additional production is determined at a rate (probability) of 10%, and the "ream villa mode" is entered. If the transition is confirmed, the additional effect may be executed at a rate (probability) of 25%.

With such a configuration, it is possible to divide into finer stages and have a sense of expectation for various advantageous states. That is, at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to expect a big hit more strongly than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). This is because if it becomes a big hit, expectations for the transition to the "preparation mode" and the transition to the "renso mode" will increase. Then, when the jackpot is as expected by the player, it is possible to expect the jackpot to be notified of the transition to the "preparation mode" more strongly than usual. This is because if the shift to the "preparation mode" is performed after the additional production, the degree of expectation for the shift to the "renso mode" will increase. Furthermore, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, it is more strongly expected that the hit (that is, the transition to the "renso mode") will be notified by the roulette chance effect executed in the "preparation mode". Can be made to.

Next, the lighting control of the rear LED 625 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 102. As described above, the rear LED 625 is provided to illuminate the contact pocket of the rotating member 640 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 97, the rear LED 625 is composed of three arc-shaped LED bars 625a, 625b, and 625c, and these are combined to form an annular shape in the front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 97, each LED bar 625a, 625b, 625c is provided with six lighting areas in which four LED chips are densely packed at equal intervals (lighting areas A1 to A18). By lighting each of the lighting areas A1 to A18, it is possible to emit light in an area having substantially the same area as one pocket of the rotating member 640. Therefore, by lighting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the hit pocket can be made to look shining.

Here, each LED chip included in the rear LED 625 is lit and controlled by a known LED driver. This LED driver can switch the ratio (DUTY ratio) between the on period and the off period of the LED and change the lighting frequency based on the lighting control command received from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, when a lighting control command indicating an on period of 80% (DUTY ratio 80%) and a frequency of 320 Hz is output to the LED driver, the LED driver takes 80% of the time of one cycle (1/320 seconds). The width on period and the 20% time width off period are repeatedly set. This operation continues until a new lighting control command is received.

A method of specifying the on period by a lighting control command output to the LED driver will be described more specifically. The above-mentioned data (lighting rate data) indicating the length of the on period (lighting rate) is composed of data of a plurality of bits (for example, 8 bits). If the lighting rate data is 00H (decimal notation 0), it means the lighting rate (DUTY ratio) 0%, and if the lighting rate data is FFH (decimal notation 255), the lighting rate (DUTY ratio). It means 100%. Further, as the lighting rate data goes from 00H to FFH, the lighting rate is set to increase at equal intervals. For example, when 80H (128 in decimal notation) is set as the lighting rate data, the lighting rate is 50% (that is, 128/255).

The reference signal (synchronous signal), which is the reference of the LED lighting frequency, can be generated by the LED driver itself (set to free run) at the frequency specified by the lighting control command, or is input from the outside of the LED driver. The synchronization signal (external synchronization signal) can also be used. Further, whether to use the free run or the external synchronization signal can be specified by the lighting control command, and when the external synchronization signal is input to the LED driver, it is not necessary to set the lighting frequency by the lighting control command.

In addition, the position of the ON period can be changed by the lighting control command in one cycle of turning the LED on and off. That is, the LED on period can be set at the same time as the synchronization signal is detected, and the LED off period can be set after the end of the on period. For example, the LED off period can be set at the same time as the synchronization signal is detected and turned off. You can also set the on period after the period ends.

A specific example of the lighting control command for setting the position of this on-period will be described in detail. The setting start position of the on period is specified by, for example, 8-bit data. Specifically, one cycle is divided into 255 equal parts, and it is possible to specify from which section the on period is started by 8-bit data. If the data specifying the position of the on period is 00H, the on period is started from the first section of the 255 equal divisions of one cycle (that is, at the same time as the start of one cycle). If the data that specifies the position of the on period is 1 EH (that is, 30 in decimal notation), the on period is started from the 31st section of the 255 equal divisions of one cycle.

In addition, the lighting control command includes data for designating the lighting area. That is, it is possible to specify a part or all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 and set the above-mentioned lighting rate, lighting frequency, lighting phase, and the like. The setting of this lighting area is specified by, for example, 3 bytes (24 bits) of data. Specifically, bits corresponding to each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 are set (for example, the lighting areas A1 to A18 are associated in order from the lower bits), and the lighting area corresponding to the on bit is set. Then, the lighting state specified by the lighting control command is reflected by the LED driver.

As described above, the LED driver for controlling the LED of the present embodiment is configured to be able to accept a lighting control command including a plurality of data. The plurality of data are output by a serial transfer method such as an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) method. That is, from the voice lamp control device 113, what data (what bit of the data) is the signal corresponding to various lighting control data (serial data) such as the lighting rate and the serial data currently being output. It is configured to output a signal (serial clock) indicating.

More specifically, for example, from the voice lamp control device 113, as serial data, 24-bit data corresponding to the lighting area, 8-bit data corresponding to the lighting rate of the specified lighting area, and lighting frequency are supported. 8-bit data to be used, 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the on period, and the like are output. The LED driver outputs a signal (so-called ACK) indicating that the data has been normally received to the voice lamp control device 113 every time, for example, every 8-bit data is received. The voice lamp control device 113 waits until the ACK is received, and when the ACK is received, outputs the data for the next 8 bits. As a result, it is possible to prevent data reception omission. Further, since the output order of each type of data output by the voice lamp control device 113 is fixed every time, and the order of the data types output from the voice lamp control device 113 is also stored in the LED driver. , It is possible to easily grasp what data has been received. Each data is output in synchronization with a serial clock that repeats on (1) and off (0) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 100 kHz). That is, the bit indicated by the serial clock is on in the output data depending on whether the state of the serial data in the state where the serial clock is on (1) is on (1) or off (0). Determine if it is off or off.

Here, a specific example of the mode of the serial clock and the serial data will be described with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting control command composed of a serial clock and serial data. The serial clock and serial data can be set to either on or off values, respectively. Depending on the state of the serial data when the serial clock is on (1), the data of each bit constituting the lighting control command can be notified. In this example, a command for setting a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% for the lighting areas A1 and A2 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 234, the serial clock and the serial data are set to on (1) when no data is output. Then, when the lighting control command is output, the serial data is displaced from on (1) to off (0) while the serial clock is on (1). Due to this displacement, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command will be notified from now on.

When the serial data is displaced from on (1) to off (0) and the output start of the lighting control command is notified, first, the lighting area data (data for specifying which of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is to be output). Is output. This data is composed of 24 bits and is output in 3 batches of 8 bits each. As shown in the figure, the serial data is set to on while the serial clock repeats on and off twice after notifying the output start of the lighting control command. That is, it is notified that the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data are on. Then, although not shown, the serial data is set to off while the serial clock repeats on and off 22 times thereafter. That is, it is notified that all the 3rd to 24th bits of the lighting area data are off. As a result, the LED driver can easily recognize that the lighting control command this time is a command for notifying the lighting state for the lighting areas A1 and A2 corresponding to the 0th bit and the 1st bit of the lighting area data. Can be done.

The serial data on period is configured so that the start period is earlier than the timing at which the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end period is later than the timing at which the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be. As a result, the serial data can be more reliably kept on during the period when the serial clock is on. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the LED driver from determining that the off data has been received even though the on data has been output, and to notify various data more accurately. For the same reason, the beginning of the serial data off period is configured to be earlier than the timing when the serial clock rises from off to on, and the end is set to be earlier than the timing when the serial clock falls from on to off. It is configured to be slow.

The lighting area data is output in 3 batches of 8 bits each, and ACK is returned from the LED driver for each of the 3 outputs (notifying that the LED driver has normally received each 8-bit data). If so, then 8 bits of data are output as lighting rate data. As described above, in this specific example, since the lighting rate of 100% (11111111B in binary notation) is notified, the serial data is set to be on while the serial clock is set to be on eight times. As a result, "11111111B" can be notified to the LED driver as the lighting rate data. Although not shown, other data (8-bit data corresponding to the lighting frequency, 8-bit data indicating the setting start position of the on period, etc.) are also output according to the same rule. Then, when all the data constituting the lighting control command is output, the serial clock is first set to the on (1) state, and then the serial data rises from the off (0) state to the on (1) state. .. By raising the serial data from the off (0) state to the on (1) state during the on (1) state of the serial clock, it is possible to notify the LED driver that all the data has been output.

As described above, in this control example, the lighting state can be accurately notified by using two types of signals, the serial clock and the serial data. Since it is not necessary to use different wiring for each data type, the number of wirings can be saved. Therefore, the unit price of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of wires.

The LED driver is not limited to the one that accepts the lighting control command of the above-described embodiment. For example, a driver that can specify the position and length of the on period with a simpler lighting control command may be adopted. For example, an LED driver that can accept a lighting control command associated with the lighting state of each section when one cycle is divided into eight equal parts may be used for each bit of 8-bit data. Specifically, in order from the lower bits, the sections corresponding to the earlier bits in time are associated, the section corresponding to the bit with data 1 is set to the lighting state, and the section corresponding to the bit with 0 data is turned off. For example, if the control data is 07H (that is, 00000111B in binary notation), the first three sections of each section obtained by dividing one cycle into eight equal parts are turned on, and the latter five sections are turned off. As a result, the lighting control command output from the MPU 221 to the LED driver can be simplified, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced. Further, as the LED driver, a driver capable of varying the LED current value (anode voltage value) in each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 may be adopted.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a state in which the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state (lighting rate 100%), and the other lighting areas are set to the extinguishing state (lighting rate 0%). .. The dotted line in FIG. 98 is the outer shape of the rotating member 640 arranged on the front surface of the rear LED 625. As shown in FIG. 98, of each dividing member DV (each pocket) arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) in which the dividing member DVs (each pocket) are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval. The arrangement matches the arrangement of the lighting areas A1, A2, A12 to A18.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the appearance of the rotating member 640 when the lighting state is set as shown in FIG. 98. As shown in FIG. 99, when the lighting areas A13, A15, and A17 are set to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the pockets P2, P28, and P30 arranged on the front side thereof have a shining appearance. (Hatching display location in FIG. 99). In this way, by setting the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, the hit pocket can be made to look shining. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish between the hit pocket and the miss pocket from the appearance.

The rear LED 625 is controlled to follow the rotating member 640 and rotate at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640, centering on the rotating axis O of the rotating operation of the rotating member 640. Therefore, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the hit pocket can be made to follow the lighting region with a lighting rate of 100%, so that the hit pocket can be kept as it is in the roulette chance effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the miss pocket because the correspondence between the lighting position and the hit pocket is broken.

As described above, the rotating member 640 has a first section S1 in which the dividing members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at the first interval, and a second interval in which the dividing members DV are narrower than the first interval. A second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed, and a total of 30 dividing members DV are formed in the circumferential direction in an annular shape in the front view. On the other hand, in the rear LED 625, 18 lighting areas are arranged at equal intervals. That is, since the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 laps while the rear LED 625 goes around, the type of each dividing member DV (pocket) and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the dividing member DV (pocket) The type is different depending on the progress of the rotation operation. For example, in the examples of FIGS. 98 and 99, since the lighting area A17 is set to the lighting rate of 100%, the pocket P2 looks shining, but the rotating member 640 and the back surface remain in this state. When the LED 625 is rotated until the rear LED 625 makes a full turn, the pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes. That is, since the rotating member 640 moves by 18 pockets while the rear LED 625 goes around, the type of pocket arranged on the front side of the lighting area A17 changes to pocket P20. Therefore, if the same position is simply kept lit, the shining appearance pocket changes each time the rear LED goes around, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in this control example, every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is corrected, and the hit pocket is always It is controlled so that it looks shining. More specifically, each time any LED bar matches the correction section RA shown in FIG. 98, the lighting state of the LED bar matching the correction section RA is adjusted to the deviation from the arrangement of the rotating member 640. It is configured to correct (switch).

Here, the correction section RA is a section that is invisible to the player by the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 arranged at the ascending position. Therefore, even if the lighting state of each lighting area arranged in the correction section RA is switched, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to visually recognize the switching. That is, from the appearance of the player, the hit pocket is always kept shining. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely distinguish between the hit pocket and the miss pocket from the appearance of the pocket.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, the correction (switching) of the lighting state will be described with reference to specific examples. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example in which pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, and P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets. In this control example, when the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is started, the arrangement of the LED bar 625a and the correction section RA first coincide with each other after the rotating member 640 is rotated. Lighting control of the lighting area is started. Here, whether or not the correction section RA and the LED bar 625a are arranged in the same state is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 684 (not shown) for detecting the rotation position of the rear LED 625.

In the example of FIG. 100, when the LED bar 625a is arranged to match the correction section RA for the first time after the rotating member 640 starts the rotation operation, the pocket arranged at the drop position is the pocket P1. (See FIG. 100 (b)). In this case, the types of six pockets (pockets P25 to P30) (whether they are hit pockets or out-of-pockets) in the direction of travel of the rotation from pocket P1 are opposite to the direction of the rotation. The types of 12 pockets (pockets P1 to P12) are read out in the direction, and the lighting state corresponding to each pocket type is set for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18. That is, the types of pockets P25 to P30 are read out, and the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A7 to A12 are reflected. Further, the types of pockets P1 to P12 are read out to reflect the lighting states corresponding to the lighting areas A6 to A13, respectively.

More specifically, since the pockets P28 to P30 are the hit pockets among the pockets P25 to P30, the corresponding lighting areas A10 to A12 are each set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. Further, since the pockets P3 and the pockets P9 to P11 are the hit pockets among the pockets P1 to P12, the lighting areas A15 corresponding to the pockets P3 and the lighting areas A3 to A5 corresponding to the pockets P9 to P11 have lighting rates. It is set to a 100% lighting state (see FIG. 100 (a)). As a result, of the lower half of the rotating member 640 (arrangement that is visible to the player), the pockets P3 and the pockets P28 to P30 have a shining appearance (see FIG. 100 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that these shining appearance pockets are hit pockets. The type of each pocket P1 to P30 (whether it is a hit pocket or a detached pocket) is stored in the hit position storage area 223k provided in the RAM 223.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the rear LED 625 and the rotating member 640 at the time when the rear LED 625 makes a 1/3 turn from the state of FIG. 100. As shown in the figure, each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is maintained in the state set in FIG. 100 until it makes a 1/3 turn. That is, the lighting areas A3 to A5, A10 to A12, and the lighting area A15 make one-third rotation at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640 while being maintained in the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%. As a result, the LED bar 625b is arranged to match the correction section RA. Since the rear LED 625 rotates in the state described with reference to FIG. 100, each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b is in a lighting state according to the type of pockets P25 to P30 (whether or not they are pockets). It remains. However, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the arrangement order of the pockets in the correction section RA is the arrangement of the pockets P13 to P30. That is, if the rotation operation is continued while maintaining the states of the respective lighting areas A7 to A12 of the LED bar 625b, the six pockets P13 to P18 are lit corresponding to the pockets P25 to P30. The state will be applied. Therefore, the correspondence between the hit pocket and the miss pocket may be broken, and the player may be confused.

Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar included in the correction section RA is corrected (switched). It is configured as follows. More specifically, six types of pockets arranged in the correction section RA were read from the beginning of the section (that is, in order of earliest placement in the non-correction section NA by the rotation operation), and the readings were made. Control is performed so that the lighting state according to the type is reflected in each lighting area included in the correction section RA. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the type of all pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA from the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a case where the states of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b are corrected according to the types of the pockets P13 to P18. As described above, of the pockets P13 to P18, there are two hit pockets, P15 and P16. That is, due to the rotation operation, the third and fourth pockets among the six pockets to be arranged in the non-correction section NA in the future become the hit pockets. Therefore, the lighting areas A9 arranged in the third and fourth of the lighting areas A7 to A12 constituting the LED bar 625b so that the third and fourth pockets have a shining appearance. , A10 are each set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (see FIG. 102). As a result, the appearance of the pockets P13 to P18 to be arranged in the non-correction section NA by the rotation of the rotating member 640 in the future is changed to the appearance corresponding to each pocket type in advance (lighting state of 100% lighting rate or 0% lighting rate). Can be set to the off state).

Even after that, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, every time any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged in the correction section RA, the lighting state of the lighting area constituting the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is lit. Is corrected. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can see only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the miss pocket.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, when the sphere B is swinging on the holding piece 677, a configuration for determining the cycle of the swinging motion will be described. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the movable piece 677 and the front case 672 arranged on the back side of the movable piece 677 and the ball B that swings at the upper part of the movable piece 677 have a horizontally long rectangular shape. An opening 678 is provided. Inside the opening 678, a sphere detection sensor 679 for determining whether or not the sphere B is arranged on the front side is provided. When the sphere B is not arranged on the front side of the front view with respect to the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103 (a)), the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is L (low). On the other hand, when the sphere B swings and the sphere B is arranged in front of the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103 (b)), the sphere B is detected and the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is output. It becomes H (high). In this control example, when the sphere B is swinging, the cycle of the swinging motion of the sphere B is determined by the interval (period) at which the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 becomes H. For example, if the period from the detection of the H output of the sphere detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103 (b)) to the next detection of the H output is 1 second, the sphere B is currently performing. Since it means that half of the swinging motion cycle is 1 second, it is determined that the swinging motion cycle is 2 seconds.

As described above, in this control example, in the state where the sphere B is swinging, the cycle of the swinging motion is determined, and when the cycle is less than a predetermined cycle (1 second), the ball B is allowed to fall. It is configured to do. That is, the period of the swinging motion is sufficiently shortened, and even if the ball B is dropped, the ball B is dropped at a timing that does not cause the player to feel unnatural. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving the impression that the type of pocket into which the ball B falls is intentionally manipulated in the roulette chance production. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the production to the end without making doubts about the result of the roulette chance production.

The holding piece 677 in this control example is configured to have a width that allows the sphere B to be sufficiently held above the holding piece 677 when the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is a predetermined period (1 second) or less. Therefore, by immersing the holding piece 677 in the immersion position in a state where the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is equal to or less than a predetermined period (1 second), the sphere B can be reliably dropped.

Next, various drive motors (upper elevating motor 341, liquid crystal elevating motor 441, left swing motor 531, rotary motor 631, pitching motor 665, holding piece motor 675) will be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and are provided in plurality in association with each accessory in order to operate each accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10. These various drive motors are driven by a corresponding motor control IC (motor driver). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotation direction (positive or negative direction), and the rotation speed from the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). Is output. The control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. The motor control IC (motor driver) may be a single IC whose operation can be set for a plurality of drive motors, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. It may be configured to operate the drive motors corresponding to different accessories. When adopting a motor control IC (motor driver) whose operation can be set for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc. includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. You can output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described by taking the upper elevating motor 341 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the upper elevating motor 341 based on the set command, the operation is executed for the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 every time the operation of one step is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the signal has been made is output. From this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has operated from the origin (evacuation) position. That is, the origin (evacuation) position is set as the position of 0 step, and the value is updated by 1 each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is added by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (evacuation) position to the end point (extension) position. Further, the value is subtracted by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (evacuation) position. Therefore, the operating position of each accessory can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is a position where the origin shifts when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position, and if the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is turned on. The accessory is changed until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position serves as a reference position for the operation of each accessory. The above-mentioned step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory reaches the origin position by returning to the origin (that is, when the origin sensor detects on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by 1 based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper elevating motor 341) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one revolution in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual upper elevating motor 341 has one step. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

First, FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of an upper elevating motor 341 composed of a stepping motor. The upper elevating motor 341 is configured to excite a portion corresponding to the excitation control data by sending excitation control data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by the excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 104 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the upper elevating motor 341 is "1", the excitation is performed, and the excitation control data is "0". If so, it will not be excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)) provided in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used for selecting and setting one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 104 (b)). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3", the value returns to "0". It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the upper elevating motor 341 operates without a time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). In addition, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"-> "3"-> "2"-> "1"-> "0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the rotation direction of the upper elevating motor 341 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (whether it is in the positive direction or the negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are predetermined for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of this excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, it takes 360 steps for the motor to rotate once), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". It becomes a loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper elevating motor 341 will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table in which the excitation control data is defined and the state of the upper elevating motor 341 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. .. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), as sequence data corresponding to the upper elevating motor 341, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3". Each data is specified. Further, when "1100", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "0", is set, the positions A and B of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited. Further, when "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. When the sequence data "0011" corresponding to the excitation counter value "2" is set, the positions C and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. Further, when "1001", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "3", is set, the positions A and D of the upper elevating motor 341 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 104, each time the value of the excitation counter is updated once in the positive direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates 90 degrees clockwise. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the upper elevating motor 341 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the upper elevating motor 341 has been described by a simplified operation model, but in the upper elevating motor 341 actually used in the present embodiment, the excitation counter is set to 1 for each step (that is, the excitation counter is set to 1). It can be rotated once (for each update). That is, when each accessory is changed, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 as many times as the number of steps to be changed, and the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set each time the excitation counter is updated. Each accessory can be changed accurately.

As described above, in this control example, by setting a command for the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of production operations using the accessory.

In addition, each accessory has a unique operation pattern (operation scenario) set according to the effect. Although the details will be described later, this operation pattern (operation scenario) defines the command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in this control example, whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the command set for the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors are operated. That is, has the operation set for each drive motor completed based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times the execution signal output from the motor driver is received each time the operation of one step is set by the motor driver? It is judged whether or not, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time from setting a command for operating various drive motors and determine whether or not the operation of various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. ..

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 105, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to make settings and the like.

For the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used to set the initial value, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The value random number counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 139). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a common execution area and a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a composed of four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is provided with a first prize. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64 and the second ball entry port 640a. A special symbol lottery is executed based on various counter values stored in the common execution area. On the other hand, for the various counter values stored in each holding area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the execution of the lottery is suspended until the lottery conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. In this control example, only the lottery of the special symbol 1 is held, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held. Therefore, when a ball entering the second entry port 640a is detected, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is not held, and when the symbol is not changing, various counter values are stored in the common execution area and special. The lottery for symbol 2 is executed.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), for example, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It can be divided into two types, one for (the period during which the symbol is in a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) is composed of a first random number table for low probability and a first random number table for high probability, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers that are big hits is different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when a special symbol is a big hit, and is sequentially 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999). It is configured to be added one by one, reach the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 999), and then return to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. It is stored in the common execution area of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, a random number that is out of the special symbol. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same common execution area or the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are 40 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random numbers "0 to 39" are the first random numbers for the low probability. It is stored in table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 40 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/25".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 41 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "500 to 540" are the first random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 106 (b). ) Is stored in). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 41 while the total number of random numbers is 1000, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1 / 2.4". That is, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is almost the same when the probability of the special symbol is high (probability change state of the special symbol) and when the probability of the special symbol is low. This is because the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has little benefit to the player just by being a big hit in the "normal mode". That is, as described above, in the "normal mode", the first variable winning device 82a is likely to be a big hit (that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is relatively small), and in many cases, the big hit is achieved. After that, it shifts to the "normal mode" again without shifting to the "renso mode". Therefore, since the jackpot with relatively few prize balls and the normal mode are likely to be repeated, it is disadvantageous for the player while staying in the "normal mode".

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, it is very advantageous for the player by shifting to the "ream villa mode". Then, in order to shift to the "renso mode", it is necessary to be a big hit mainly during the "preparation mode", and in order to shift to the preparation mode, a jackpot that is given a time saving state in the "normal mode". It is necessary to assign the type. Therefore, the jackpot in the "normal mode" merely plays the role of shifting to the "preparation mode", and the player plays the game in the "normal mode" with the main purpose of becoming a jackpot itself. is not it. In this situation, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is extremely low compared to the high probability state of the special symbol, instead of shifting to the "renso mode" or "preparation mode", Since the situation in which even the jackpot, which is the previous stage, is not won may continue for a long time, there is a risk that the motivation of the player for the game will be significantly impaired. Therefore, in this control example, the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the special symbol have almost the same probability of winning a jackpot, and in either case, the jackpot is relatively easy to win. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation in which the jackpot, which is the pre-stage of the "ream villa mode" or the "preparation mode", does not continue for a long time, so that the player's motivation for the game can be kept high.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 106 (c)). The correspondence between the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the determined jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIGS. 106 (c) to 108.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640a. Is stored in the common execution area of, or in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the fine variation mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 139) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 110 (b)) that stores a random number value that determines one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. , It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 110 (a)), it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there is one random value that is a hit of the normal symbol, and the value is "5". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is "○". Is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second entry port 640a is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is used. The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640a is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

As described above, in this control example, the probability of hitting the normal symbol when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly lower than that of hitting the normal symbol when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly lower than that when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high. By reducing the number of times the mouth 640a is opened and reducing the one-time opening period of the second entry port 640a, the ball is seconded at a low probability of a normal symbol (that is, "normal mode"). It is configured so that it is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry port 640a. As a result, a jackpot (the second specific winning opening 65a is opened) in which a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained by entering the second entry opening 640a at a low probability of a normal symbol (that is, "normal mode"). It is possible to suppress the irregular game method of aiming at the jackpot type). If an irregular game method is performed and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened in succession to win a jackpot, the payout rate will greatly exceed the design payout rate of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, there is a risk of giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. On the other hand, in this control example, it is extremely difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640a when the probability of the normal symbol is low (that is, "normal mode"). It is possible to prevent (suppress) a person from executing an irregular game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 in the "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to realize the ball output rate as designed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 139).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are set according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. As described above, the ROM 202 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

FIG. 106 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 106a, the ROM 202 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, and a state setting table 202f. Is provided at least.

As described above, the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, 40 judgment values of "0 to 39" are defined as jackpot judgment values in the low probability state of the special symbol, and "500" as the jackpot judgment value in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Forty-one determination values of "~ 540" are specified. When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106 (b)), a special symbol is used. It is determined that it is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 106 (c)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is specified in association with each other. Here, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (c) to 108.

FIG. 106 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first type selection table 202b described above. As shown in FIG. 106 (c), the first hit type selection table 202b is a special figure 1 hit type selection table 202b1 used to determine the big hit type when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 1. And, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the hit type selection table 202b2 for the special figure 2 is used to determine the big hit type. First, the details of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 107.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the type selection table 202b1 per special figure 1. In this special figure 1 per type selection table 202b1, eight types of jackpots of "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot G" and "normal jackpot A" are associated with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

More specifically, "probability variation jackpot A" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". As described above, the first type counter C2 is a counter capable of taking 1000 values of "0 to 999". Of these, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot A" is 5 of "0-4", so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery, the probability of becoming "probability variation jackpot A" is 0.5%. (5/1000).

"Probability change jackpot A" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two, and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in each round. is there. If the player keeps launching balls in succession, 10 balls can be sufficiently won into the second specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds elapse, so that the player often wins. A relatively large number (300) of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, after the end of the "probability change jackpot A", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, and also shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of "Probability change jackpot A" is regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether it is "normal mode", "preparation mode", or "renso mode"). , Continue until the next big hit. That is, after the end of the "probability change jackpot A", the mode directly shifts to the "renso mode" without going through the "preparation mode". Since a relatively large number of prize balls can be obtained and the player directly shifts to the "renso mode", which is the most advantageous for the player, "probability change jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types that can be selected in the special symbol 1 lottery. , The jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, especially in the "normal mode", when a jackpot is notified (lucky numbers are displayed in all of the production units 331a to 331d), the player is strongly expected to become a "probability variation jackpot A". Can be made to.

A "probability variation jackpot B" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 84". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot B" is 80, which is "5 to 84". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot B" is 8% (80/1000).

"Probability change jackpot B" has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a opens pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). It is a big hit that opens and closes according to. The maximum opening time per round is 12 seconds (0.6 seconds x 20 times), which is shorter than the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the second specified winning opening 65a, and one opening period is Since it is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is difficult to win the ball continuously. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened, and therefore, compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

In addition, after the end of "Probability change jackpot B", the state shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. In addition, the type of the time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of the "probability variation jackpot B" is the game state at the time of becoming the "probability variation jackpot B" (the time saving state of the normal symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol). Is it). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, when the "probability variation jackpot B" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the process shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". As described above, since the "renso mode" is the most advantageous state for the player, the player can be pleased by becoming the "probability change jackpot B" in the time saving state of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, if the probability change jackpot B is reached in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 7 times after the jackpot ends. To do. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". As described above, if a special symbol is a big hit in the "preparation mode", there is a high probability (97.5%) of the transition to the "renso mode", which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" that shifts after the end of the "probability change jackpot B", it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be a jackpot. Also, if you do not win a big hit with a limited number of lottery (7 times), you will not shift to the "renso mode", so you will feel anxious about returning to the "normal mode" without a big hit. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for shifting to the "renso mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "preparation mode".

As described above, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640a, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed. Conversely, it is unlikely that the special symbol 1 lottery will be executed in the "normal mode". However, since the lottery of special symbol 1 is held up to 4 times, it is possible that the reserved ball includes "probability change jackpot B" in "preparation mode" at the time of transition to "preparation mode". There is sex. In this case, it would be terrible for the player not to shift to the "renso mode" (shift to the "preparation mode"). Therefore, in this control example, there is a case where the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 that is digested in the "preparation mode" or the ball is accidentally launched in the direction of the first entry port 64 in the "renso mode". In order to provide relief, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ("preparation mode" or "ream villa mode") becomes "probability change jackpot B", it is configured to shift to the "ream villa mode". As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling dissatisfied with the game and to have the player enjoy the game more enjoyably. Similarly, for other probabilistic jackpots (that is, "probability variable jackpots C to G") specified in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, if the winner is won in the time saving state of the normal symbol, "ream". It is configured to shift to "villa mode".

"Probability variation jackpot C" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "85-274". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot C" is 190, which is "85-274". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot C" is 19% (190/1000).

"Probability change jackpot C" has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a opens pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). It is a big hit that opens and closes according to. Therefore, as in the case of "probability change jackpot B", the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced, so that the player can obtain a prize ball in terms of the number of prize balls as compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It will be disadvantageous to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when the "probability change jackpot C" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time shortening of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit while shifting to the probabilistic change state of the special symbol. Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is low (non-time saving state) and the probability is changed to "probability change jackpot C", the probability of the special symbol is changed to the probability variation state, and the lottery of the special symbol is completed once after the jackpot is completed. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probability change jackpot C" has a smaller number of lottery of special symbols than the "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probability change jackpot B", so the "normal mode" (non-probability change) In the state), the "probability change jackpot C" is more disadvantageous than the "probability change jackpot B".

A "probability variation jackpot D" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "275-774". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot D" is 500, which is "275-774". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot D" is 50% (500/1000).

"Probability change jackpot D" has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a opens pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). It is a big hit that opens and closes according to. Therefore, as with "Probability change jackpot B" and "Probability change jackpot C", the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot is reduced, so that the prize balls are compared with the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. It is disadvantageous to the player in terms of number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when the "probability change jackpot D" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time shortening of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit while shifting to the probabilistic change state of the special symbol. Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, when the "probability change jackpot D" is obtained in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set although it shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol. That is, since the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no chance to shift to the "renso mode". Therefore, when the "probability change jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "probability change jackpot A" that directly shifts to the "renso mode" and the "probability change jackpot A" that shifts to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B" or "probability change jackpot C".

A "probability variation jackpot E" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "775-804". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot E" is 30 of "775-804", so the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery. The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot E" is 3% (30/1000).

"Probability change jackpot E" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two, and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) in each round. is there. The maximum opening time per round is 0.052 seconds, which is a significantly shorter opening period than when the second specific winning opening 65a is opened or when the opening pattern A is set, so it is a big hit. It becomes difficult to win a ball to the first variable winning device 82a, and in many cases, the jackpot ends without being able to win even one ball. Therefore, "probability change jackpot E" is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types in terms of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when the time saving state of the normal symbol becomes "probability variation jackpot E", the time shortening of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot while shifting to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, when the "probability change jackpot E" is reached in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the probability variation state of the special symbol as in the "probability variation jackpot B", and after the jackpot ends, It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 7 times. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". Except for "Probability change jackpot A" which directly shifts to "Renso mode", "Preparation mode" (time saving state of normal symbol) continues for the longest number of lottery, so it is a kind of jackpot type, so "Normal mode" In the case of "probability change jackpot E", it is advantageous to the player as compared with "probability change jackpot C" in which the number of lottery is small in the "preparation mode" and "probability change jackpot D" in which the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode".

A "probability variation jackpot F" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "805-874". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot F" is 70, which is "805-874". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot F" is 7% (70/1000).

The "probability variation jackpot F" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once). Therefore, like the "probability change jackpot E", it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when the "probability change jackpot F" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time shortening of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit while shifting to the probabilistic change state of the special symbol. Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is low (non-time saving state) and the probability changes to the jackpot F, the probability of the special symbol changes to the probability variation state, and after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probability change jackpot F" has a smaller number of special symbol lottery than the "preparation mode" set after the end of the "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change jackpot E". In the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "probability change jackpot F" is more disadvantageous than the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability change jackpot E". On the other hand, as compared with the "probability change jackpot D" in which the "preparation mode" is not set, the player is given a chance to shift to the "renso mode" even if it is only once, which is advantageous for the player.

A "probability variation jackpot G" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "875-974". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot G" is 100, which is "875-974". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot G" is 10% (100/1000).

The "probability change jackpot G" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two, and the first variable winning device 82a is opened and closed according to the opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) in each round. is there. Therefore, like the "probability change jackpot E" and the "probability change jackpot F", it is one of the most disadvantageous jackpot types for the player in terms of the number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when the "probability change jackpot G" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time shortening of the normal symbol continues until the next big hit while shifting to the probabilistic change state of the special symbol. Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, when the probability change state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol becomes "probability change jackpot G", the probability change state shifts to the special symbol probability change state, but the time reduction state of the normal symbol is the same as "probability change jackpot D". Is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no chance to shift to the "renso mode". Therefore, when the "probability change jackpot D" is reached in the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "probability change jackpot A" that directly shifts to the "renso mode" and the "probability change jackpot A" that shifts to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot It is disadvantageous for the player as compared with the case of "B", "probability change jackpot C", "probability change jackpot E", and "probability change jackpot F".

A "normal jackpot A" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "975-999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot A" is 25, which is "975-999". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "normal jackpot A" is 2.5% (25/1000).

"Normal jackpot A" has two rounds, and in each round, the first variable winning device 82a opens pattern A (opening pattern in which opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds are repeated 20 times). It is a big hit that opens and closes according to. Therefore, as in the case of "probability change jackpot B" to "probability change jackpot D", the number of prize balls that can be obtained is smaller than that of the jackpot type in which the second specific winning opening 65a is opened. On the other hand, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is larger than that of the jackpot type in which the opening pattern B is set. Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls, the "normal jackpot A" is more disadvantageous than the "probability jackpot A", but is more advantageous than the "probability variation jackpot E" to "probability variation jackpot G".

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, when "normal jackpot A" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, but does not shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol. .. That is, the mode shifts to the "normal mode". Therefore, when the "normal jackpot A" is set in the "preparation mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" regardless of the remaining number of time reductions, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with other jackpot types. Further, even when the "normal jackpot A" is set in the "consecutive villa mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot, so that the most advantageous "rensou mode" for the player ends. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" and the "renso mode", the "normal jackpot A" is a disadvantageous result for the player.

On the other hand, if it becomes "normal jackpot A" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot ends, the lottery of the special symbol ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until it is done. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of "normal jackpot A" has a smaller number of special symbol lottery than the "preparation mode" set after the end of "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change jackpot E". In the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "normal jackpot A" is more disadvantageous than the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability change jackpot E". On the other hand, compared to "Probability change jackpot D" and "Probability change jackpot G" where "Preparation mode" is not set, it is advantageous for the player because it gives a chance to shift to "Renso mode" even if it is only once. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, which is referred to for determining the big hit type when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit type selection table 202b2 for special figure 2. In this special figure 2 hit type selection table 202b2, five types of jackpots, "probability variation jackpot H" to "probability variation jackpot K" and "normal jackpot B", are associated with possible values of the first hit type counter C2. The type is specified.

A "probability variation jackpot H" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot H" is 5 of "0-4", so a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery. The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot H" is 0.5% (5/1000).

The "probability change jackpot H" is a jackpot in which the number of rounds is two and the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win). Therefore, as in the case of "probability change jackpot A", the number of prize balls by the player is larger than that of the jackpot type ("probability variation jackpot BG", "normal jackpot A") in which the first variable winning device 82a is opened. Can be earned. For all jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the second specific winning opening 65a is opened as in the case of this "probability variation jackpot H" and the above-mentioned "probability variation jackpot A". To. Therefore, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more advantageous than the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained (excluding "probability change big hit A").

In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, when the "probability change jackpot H" is obtained, the state shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol regardless of the state at the time of winning (whether or not the time is shortened for the normal symbol). , It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. That is, it directly shifts to the "renso mode". Therefore, especially in the "normal mode" (non-time saving state), when the "probability change jackpot H" is reached, the player is compared with the jackpot type that shifts to the "preparation mode" and the jackpot type that shifts to the "normal mode". It will be advantageous.

A "probability variation jackpot I" is associated with the value "5" of the first hit type counter C2. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that will be "probability variation jackpot I" is one, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, " The probability (ratio) of "probability change jackpot I" is 0.1% (1/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, when the "probability change jackpot I" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the state shifts to the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, when the "probability change jackpot I" is obtained in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol is performed in the same manner as the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot E". At the same time, after the big hit is completed, the time is reduced to the normal symbol, which continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 7 times. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". It is a kind of jackpot type in which "preparation mode" (normal symbol time saving state) continues for the longest number of lottery, except for "probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot H" that directly shift to "renso mode". Therefore, when "Probability change jackpot I" is set in "Normal mode", "Probability change jackpot C", "Probability change jackpot F", "Normal jackpot A", and "Preparation mode" are set to "Preparation mode". It is advantageous to the player as compared with the "probability change jackpot D" and the "probability change jackpot G" that do not shift.

As described above, when the "probability variation jackpot I" is reached in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it is in the "normal mode" that the time saving period is shifted to the "preparation mode" of 7 times. This is to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entry port 640a. More specifically, even if any of the probabilistic jackpots (that is, "probabilistic jackpots HK") is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "normal mode", the mode is shifted to the "renso mode". In the case of the configuration, a player who launches a ball (so-called right-handed) aiming at the second entrance 640a may appear even in the "normal mode" for the purpose of shifting to the "renso mode". There is sex. If the game is changed directly from the "normal mode" to the "renso mode" due to an irregular game method, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls that greatly exceeds the design ball output rate will be paid out, and the hole will be dealt with. There is a risk of giving an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in this control example, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the gaming state after the big hit is changed depending on whether or not the time when the big hit is the time saving state of the normal symbol. It has a structure. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the merit for the player when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal mode"). Can be prevented (suppressed). As a result, the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall can be more reliably contained within the design range, so that it is possible to easily make a sales forecast of the hall.

A "probability variation jackpot J" is associated with the value "6" of the first hit type counter C2. Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that will be "probability variation jackpot J" is one, so if a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery The probability (ratio) of "probability change jackpot J" is 0.1% (1/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 108, when the time saving state of the normal symbol becomes "probability change jackpot J", the time saving of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit while shifting to the probability variation state of the special symbol Move to the state. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, if the probability of a normal symbol is low (non-time saving state) and the probability changes to the jackpot J, the probability of the special symbol changes to the probability variation state, and after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of "probability jackpot J" has a special symbol than the "preparation mode" set after the end of "probability change jackpot B", "probability change jackpot E", and "probability change jackpot I". Since the number of lottery is small, in the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "probability change jackpot J" is more disadvantageous than the "probability change jackpot B", the "probability change jackpot E", and the "probability change jackpot I". On the other hand, compared to "Probability change jackpot D" and "Probability change jackpot G" where "Preparation mode" is not set, it is advantageous for the player because it gives a chance to shift to "Renso mode" even if it is only once. Become.

A "probability variation jackpot K" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "7 to 974". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "probability variation jackpot K" is 968, which is "7 to 974". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "probability change jackpot K" is 96.8% (968/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, when the "probability change jackpot K" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the process shifts to the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. And migrate. That is, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". On the other hand, when the probability change state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol becomes "probability change jackpot K", it shifts to the probability change state of the special symbol, but it is the same as "probability change jackpot D" and "probability change jackpot G". The time saving state of the normal symbol is not set. That is, since the mode does not shift to the "preparation mode", there is no chance to shift to the "renso mode". Therefore, when the "probability change jackpot D" is set in the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

A "normal jackpot B" is associated with the range in which the first hit type counter C2 is "975-999". Of the 1000 judgment values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of judgment values that are "normal jackpot B" is 25, which is "975-999". The probability (ratio) of becoming a "normal jackpot B" is 2.5% (25/1000).

As shown in FIG. 108, when "normal jackpot B" is obtained in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, but does not shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the mode shifts to the "normal mode". For this reason, as with "normal jackpot A", when "normal jackpot B" is set in "preparation mode", it shifts to "normal mode" regardless of the remaining number of time reductions, so it is compared with other jackpot types. Therefore, it becomes disadvantageous to the player. Further, even when the "normal jackpot B" is set in the "consecutive villa mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" after the jackpot, so that the most advantageous "rensou mode" for the player ends. Therefore, in the "preparation mode" and the "ream villa mode", the "normal jackpot B" is a disadvantageous result for the player.

On the other hand, if it becomes "normal jackpot B" in the low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, and after the jackpot ends, the lottery of the special symbol ends once. It shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until it is done. That is, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode". The "preparation mode" set after the end of "normal jackpot B" is a lottery of special symbols than the "preparation mode" set after the end of "probability change jackpot B", "probability change jackpot E", and "probability change jackpot I". Since the number of times is small, in the "normal mode" (non-probability change state), the "normal jackpot B" is more disadvantageous than the "probability change jackpot B", the "probability change jackpot E", and the "probability change jackpot I". On the other hand, compared to "Probability change jackpot D", "Probability change jackpot G", and "Probability change jackpot K" for which "Preparation mode" is not set, there is a chance to shift to "Renso mode" even if it is only once. , It will be advantageous for the player.

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of jackpot types having different numbers of prize balls that can be acquired and the state after the jackpot (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “renso mode”) are provided. By providing a wide variety of jackpot types, it is possible to make the player more interested in which jackpot type will be used in the event of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this control example, even if the special symbol 2 is a jackpot in the "normal mode", the jackpot shifts to the "renso mode" (that is, the "probability variation jackpot H") or the "preparation mode". It is configured to provide a jackpot that shifts to (that is, "probability change jackpot I" and "probability variation jackpot J"), but it is not always necessary to provide all of them. For example, in the case of a big hit by lottery of special symbol 2, "probability variable big hit K" is determined with a probability of 97.5%, and "normal big hit B" is determined with a probability of 2.5%. May be good. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the "normal mode", the mode shifts to the "normal mode" again after the big hit (in the case of "probability variable big hit K"), or the time saving period is 1 after the big hit. It may be configured to shift to the "preparation mode" of the times (in the case of "normal jackpot B"). With such a configuration, the demerit for launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640a in the "normal mode" can be further increased, so that the irregular game method ("normal mode") can be more reliably performed. In the game method of launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640a).

Next, about the state transition performed by determining the jackpot type based on the hit type selection table 202b1 for special symbol 1 (see FIG. 107) and the hit type selection table 202b2 for special symbol 2 (see FIG. 108). , FIG. 109 will be described.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing conditions for switching between three types of states (“normal mode”, “preparation mode”, or “renso mode”) in this control example. First, the state transition in the "normal mode" (non-time saving state), which is the most disadvantageous for the player, will be described. This "normal mode" is shown on the upper side of FIG. 109. As shown in FIG. 109, in the "normal mode", when a big hit occurs, the game shifts to another gaming state. As described above, the jackpot probability in this control example is approximately equal to 1 / 2.4 in the low probability state of the special symbol and 1/25 in the high probability state of the special symbol. For the sake of simplicity, the jackpot probability is expressed as 1/25 in FIG. 109. As described above, since this "normal mode" is a low probability state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol, it is difficult for the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a to be opened, so that the player is basic. Aiming at the first entrance 64, the ball is launched. Therefore, since the lottery for the special symbol 1 is executed, the jackpot type is basically determined from the special symbol 1 per type selection table 202b1.

In the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state and non-probability change non-time saving state), if a big hit is obtained by lottery of special symbol 1, "probability change big hit D" (50%) or "probability change big hit G" (10%) is determined (see FIG. 107). When these jackpot types are selected in the "normal mode", the game shifts to the "normal mode" again after the jackpot ends (see the upper left side of FIG. 109). That is, it loops the "normal mode". Even if you win "Probability change jackpot D" or "Probability change jackpot G", you can still win "Probability change jackpot D" and "Probability change jackpot G" (loop "normal mode"). In many cases, more balls will be consumed in "normal mode" than prize balls obtained by jackpots. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

In addition, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery, it will be either "probability variable big hit B, C, E, F" or "normal big hit A" at a rate of 39.5%. In this case, after the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (non-probability change non-time saving state) (see the upper central part of FIG. 109). That is, since the state shifts to a state in which it is relatively easy to shift to the "renso mode", it is more advantageous to the player than the "probability change jackpot D" and the "probability change jackpot G".

Then, in the case of "probability change jackpot A", which is won at 0.5% of the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery, the game directly shifts to the "renso mode" after the jackpot ends (Fig. 109). See top right). In this "renso mode", as described above, the time saving state that continues until the next jackpot and the jackpot that makes it easy to obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls ("probability variation jackpot H" to "probability variation jackpot K", "normal jackpot B"" ) And are easily repeated, which is the most advantageous for the player.

In this way, in the "normal mode" (probability change non-time saving state, non-probability change non-time saving state), the same state (that is, "normal mode") is looped at a rate of 60% when a big hit is made, while 40 At a rate of%, it is configured to shift to "preparation mode" or "ream mode", which is more advantageous than the current state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game by paying attention to the state after the big hit.

Next, the state transition in the "preparation mode", which is more advantageous for the player than the above-mentioned "normal mode" (easy to shift to the "renso mode"), will be described. This "preparation mode" is shown in the central portion of FIG. 109. Since this "preparation mode" is a time-saving state of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is likely to be opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. However, if the lottery of the special symbol 1 is suspended before or during the jackpot, the lottery of the reserved special symbol 1 is executed after the "preparation mode" is started. Therefore, in the "preparation mode", when the player is playing the game as usual, the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be a big hit, or the lottery of the special symbol 2 may be a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the "preparation mode", the state shifts to another state when the jackpot is reached or the time saving period of the normal symbol given after the previous jackpot elapses. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, in the "preparation mode", when a normal jackpot is won at a rate of 2.5% (when a "normal jackpot A" is obtained in the lottery of special symbol 1). , And when the lottery for the special symbol 2 results in "normal jackpot B"), the mode shifts to "normal mode" after the jackpot ends (see the lower left of the central portion of FIG. 109). That is, since the player falls into a disadvantageous state, the player can be made to play the game in the "preparation mode" hoping that the player will not normally win a big hit.

On the other hand, in the "preparation mode", the probability variation jackpot that is won at a rate of 97.5% (when the lottery of the special symbol 1 becomes either "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot G", and the lottery of the special symbol 2 When "Probability change jackpot H" to "Probability change jackpot K" is obtained), the mode shifts to the "renso mode" (see the central part of FIG. 109). For this reason, the player can be expected to acquire a large amount of prize balls by the "renso mode", so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 109, when the set number of time reductions (1 or 7 lottery times for special symbols) has elapsed in the "preparation mode", it is more disadvantageous than the current situation, as in the case of a normal jackpot. Shift (fall) to the "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the "preparation mode" with the expectation that one of the probabilistic jackpots will be achieved before the number of time reductions elapses. In a general game machine, the time saving state of a normal symbol is just that it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held, and the benefit of the big hit does not change depending on whether it is a big hit in the time saving state or a big hit in the non-time saving state. Is most of the time. On the other hand, in this control example, the player shifts to the most advantageous "ream villa mode" by becoming a probabilistic jackpot during the "preparation mode" (time saving state), but the "normal mode" (non-time saving state) ) Even if it becomes a big hit, the majority will loop the most disadvantageous "normal mode". Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which whether or not the probability change jackpot can be won during the time saving state has a great influence on the subsequent development. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the "ream villa mode" shown at the bottom of FIG. 109 will be described. As described above, since the "ream villa mode" is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is easily opened. Therefore, since the player basically plays the game aiming at the second entrance 640a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. In addition, in many cases, the "ream villa mode" shifts from the "preparation mode" in which the lottery for the special symbol 2 is likely to be performed. That is rare. Therefore, in the "renso mode", the lottery of the special symbol 2 is basically executed.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 109, in the "renso mode", there is a possibility of shifting to another state only when the special symbol is a big hit. Specifically, in the "renso mode", when the "normal jackpot B" is determined at a rate of 2.5% when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the "normal mode" is completed after the jackpot ends. (See the lower left side of FIG. 109). That is, it falls from the most advantageous state to the most unfavorable state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, when the "probability change jackpot H" to "probability change jackpot K", which are determined at a rate of 97.5% when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the jackpot is completed, the mode is changed to the "renso mode" again. Transition (loop "Renso mode"). Therefore, in the "renso mode", as long as you continue to win one of the probabilistic jackpots, a jackpot that allows you to win a relatively large number of prize balls (a jackpot that opens the second specific winning opening 65a) and the following It is extremely advantageous for the player because the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the big hit is repeated. Therefore, in the "renso mode", the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that he / she will continue to win the probabilistic jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game in the "renso mode" can be improved. Can be done.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to shift to the "preparation mode", which is a part of the jackpot in the "normal mode" and is easy to shift to the "renso mode". Then, by winning one of the probabilistic jackpots in the "preparation mode", the mode shifts to the "renso mode" after the jackpot ends. In this "renso mode", it is easy to become a big hit that can win a large number of prize balls, and when it becomes a probabilistic big hit that is determined at a rate of 97.5% when it becomes a big hit, "renso" again after the big hit Mode "is set. Therefore, by continuing to win the probabilistic jackpot, a large number of prize balls can be continuously obtained, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the player shifts to the "renso mode" and loops the "renso mode" more times. It is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 110 (a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, as described above, "5" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol (see FIG. 110 (a)). Further, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as the determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 110 (a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is hit. It is judged whether or not there is.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table that defines the variation time of the symbol variation indicating the lottery result of the special symbol this time in association with the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (b) to 113.

FIG. 110B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in this control example. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202d is for determining the variation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode"). The normal medium jackpot table 202d1 and the normal mid-out table 202d2 for determining the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal state of the normal symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, "preparation mode"). , Or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the "Renso mode"), the time saving medium big hit table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation time and the lottery result of the special symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol are out of order. Is provided with a time saving table 202d4 for determining the fluctuation time. Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 111-113.

First, the normal medium-sized jackpot table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). FIG. 111A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal medium-sized jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the normal medium jackpot table 202d1 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot in the normal state of the normal symbol. There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns, a hit normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and a hit long fluctuation (10 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as a determination value for each fluctuation pattern. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), “0 to 99” fluctuates for the hit normal fluctuation (7 seconds), and “100 to 198” fluctuates for the hit long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as a determination value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit in the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal medium jackpot table 202d1.

FIG. 111B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal center deviation table 202d2. As described above, the normal center deviation table 202d2 is a data table used to determine the fluctuation time (variation pattern) when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment in the normal state of the normal symbol. There are two types of deviation patterns, the deviation normal fluctuation (7 seconds) and the deviation long fluctuation (10 seconds), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is used as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern. It is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), “0 to 150” fluctuates for the off-normal fluctuation (7 seconds), and “151 to 198” fluctuates for the off-long fluctuation (10 seconds). It is defined as a determination value of the type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the normal medium jackpot table 202d1.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the contents of the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3. As described above, the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot in the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, "preparation mode" or "ream villa mode"). It is a data table used for. There are nine types of fluctuation patterns when a big hit occurs during a short time state: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), and long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) differs depending on the previous jackpot type and the number of lottery (variation count) of the special symbol executed after the previous jackpot is completed. Is configured to be selected. This is to secure a sufficient production period for executing the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the "preparation mode". It should be noted that the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" executed in the "preparation mode" has a fixed effect time of 90 seconds. However, as described above, there are two types of maximum fluctuations in the "preparation mode", one or seven (see FIGS. 107 and 108). Furthermore, even in the "preparation mode" in which the time reduction period of 7 times is set, if a big hit is made before the end of the 7 fluctuations, it will be changed to another state before all the 7 fluctuations are displayed. Transition. Therefore, the number of times the special symbol lottery in which the "preparation mode" continues is different each time depending on the set number of time reductions and the lottery result during the time reduction state.

Therefore, in this control example, regardless of the set number of time reductions and the lottery result during the time reduction state, the previous jackpot type and its The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected according to the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) after the jackpot is completed. The selected variable time is the same time (90 seconds, which is the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production", regardless of the set number of time reductions (1 time or 7 times) and the lottery result during the time reduction. ) Is configured to end all variable displays. With this configuration, it is possible to sufficiently secure the production period of the "ream villa mode suggestion production" executed in the "preparation mode". Further, since the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a production mode of a plurality of patterns having different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

The specified contents of the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type was any of "probability variation jackpot A, D, G, H, K", the number of fluctuations since the jackpot was completed (the number of lottery of special symbols). ), The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the table for consecutive villas (at the time of jackpot) shown at the bottom of FIG. 112. This table for consecutive villas (at the time of big hit) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the "continuous villa mode". In addition, regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols), determining the fluctuation time as the "consecutive villa mode" shifts to the "preparation mode" after "probability variation jackpot A, D, G, H, K". This is because there is no such thing. That is, when the time is shortened for the normal symbol after the end of each of the above jackpots, the "renso mode" is always set, so that it is not necessary to secure the effect period of the "renso mode suggestion effect".

As shown at the bottom of FIG. 112, in the table for consecutive villas (at the time of big hit), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99" as the variation type. There is. On the other hand, in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "100 to 198", a middle fluctuation of 3 seconds is associated with the fluctuation type. In this way, in the "renso mode", a shorter fluctuation time is determined as compared with the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so that the game is played in the "renso mode". Can be executed speedily. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous.

As shown in FIG. 112, when the previous jackpot type was any of "probability variation jackpot B, E, I", the fluctuation time (the number of fluctuations after the jackpot (the number of lottery of special symbols)) differs Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, if a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after "probability change jackpot B, E, I", long fluctuation A as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", so that the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes a big hit and the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" It is possible to match the timing at which the "directing" ends.

In addition, if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery after "probability change jackpot B, E, I", long fluctuation B (87 seconds) is used as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is determined. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 113, but in this control example, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the "preparation mode", the fluctuation time is irrespective of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, the middle fluctuation of 3 seconds is determined. For this reason, after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", if the first special symbol lottery is missed and the second lottery wins a jackpot, the middle fluctuation is 3 seconds and the long fluctuation B is 87. After a total fluctuation time of 90 seconds with seconds, the "preparation mode" ends, and a big hit is obtained. That is, even if a big hit is obtained by the second special symbol lottery executed after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", the fluctuation time until the end of the "preparation mode" is the "consecutive villa mode suggestion effect". It can be adjusted to the production time of 90 seconds.

Similarly, even if a big hit is obtained in the 3rd to 7th special symbol lottery after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", the fluctuation indicating the deviation of the special symbol executed until the jackpot is reached. Long fluctuation C so that the total of the fluctuation time of the display (middle fluctuation) (3 seconds x number of deviations) and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (any of long fluctuations C to G) indicating the jackpot is 90 seconds. The fluctuation time of ~ G is set. For example, if the 5th big hit is made after the big hit ends, the fluctuation time of the 1st to 4th deviation display will be 3 seconds each (middle fluctuation), and the fluctuation time of the 5th fluctuation display will be 78 seconds (78 seconds) Since the long fluctuation E) is determined, the fluctuation time is 90 seconds (3 seconds x 4 + 78 seconds) in total. Therefore, even if a big hit is made in any of the 1st to 7th fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) in the "preparation mode" in which the time saving period of 7 times is set, it is executed until the big hit. The total of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (middle fluctuation) corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (long fluctuation A to long fluctuation G) corresponding to the jackpot is calculated as "Renso mode suggestion production". It can be adjusted to 90 seconds, which is the production time of. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the production period of the "ream villa mode suggestion production" executed in the "preparation mode". Further, since the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a production mode of a plurality of patterns having different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

If the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) since the end of "probability change jackpot B, E, I" exceeds 7, the table for consecutive villas (big hit) shown at the bottom of FIG. 112. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to (hours). When the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I" is completed, the time saving period of 7 times is always set. Therefore, after the completion of the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", 7 This is because if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it means that it is in the "renso mode".

Here, even if the player shifts to the "renso mode" after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I" is completed, the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, so seven times after the "renso mode" is entered. If it becomes a big hit within, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds to 90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the "ream villa mode", the period until the jackpot is reached becomes long, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the "probability variation big hit I" is set to be extremely low at 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the "renso mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "renso mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "renso mode" is looping), the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability change jackpot E" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "renso mode" becomes long.

As shown in FIG. 112, when a jackpot is obtained in the first special symbol lottery after "probability variation jackpot C, F, J", long fluctuation A is used as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", so that the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes a big hit and the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" It is possible to match the timing at which the "directing" ends.

If the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) since the end of "probability change jackpot C, F, J" is 2 or more, the table for consecutive villas shown at the bottom of FIG. 112 (at the time of jackpot). The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected with reference to. When the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" after the "probability change jackpot C, F, J" is completed, the time saving period is always set only once, so after the end of the "probability change jackpot C, F, J", 2 This is because if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it means that it is in the "renso mode".

As shown in FIG. 112, if the previous jackpot type is "normal jackpot A, B" and then a jackpot is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the previous jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C, F, J". , The long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", so that the timing when the preparation mode ends and the jackpot becomes a big hit and the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" It is possible to match the timing at which the "directing" ends.

On the other hand, the fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) is 2 or more is not specified. There is no case of shifting to the "consecutive mode" after the end of "normal jackpots A and B" (see FIGS. 107 and 108), and the time saving state is set after the end of "normal jackpots A and B". This is because the "preparation mode" always has one time saving period.

In this way, regardless of the number of time reductions in the "preparation mode" and the lottery result of the special symbol in the "preparation mode", the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 shows the total fluctuation time until the jackpot is reached in the "ream villa mode". It is configured to match the production time of "suggestion effect" of 90 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the production period of the "ream villa mode suggestion production" executed in the "preparation mode". In addition, since the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a production mode of a plurality of patterns having different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

Further, the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is configured so that the fluctuation time in the "renso mode" is shorter than that in the "normal mode". As a result, the game can be executed speedily in the "renso mode". In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous.

Here, even when the mode is changed to the "renso mode" after the end of the "probability change jackpot C, F, J", the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3 is referred to, so that it is the first time since the "renso mode" is entered. When it becomes a big hit, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the "ream villa mode", the period until the jackpot is reached becomes long, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the "probability variation big hit J" is set to be extremely low at 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the "renso mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "renso mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "renso mode" is looping), the "probability change jackpot C" and the "probability change jackpot F" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "renso mode" becomes long.

Next, the time saving middle deviation table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 113. As described above, the time saving middle deviation table 202d4 determines the fluctuation time when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, "preparation mode" or "ream villa mode"). It is a data table used for. There are four types of fluctuation patterns when the time is shortened: short fluctuation (0.2 seconds), middle fluctuation (3 seconds), long fluctuation A (90 seconds), and long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 113, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) differs depending on the previous jackpot type and the number of lottery (variation count) of the special symbol executed after the previous jackpot is completed. Is configured to be selected. This is to secure a sufficient production period (90 seconds) for executing the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" (see FIGS. 93 to 95) in the "preparation mode" as in the time saving medium jackpot table 202d3. Is.

As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type was any of "probability variation jackpot A, D, G, H, K", the number of fluctuations since the jackpot was completed (the number of lottery of special symbols). ), The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to the table for consecutive villas (at the time of disconnection) shown at the bottom of FIG. 113. This table for consecutive villas (when off) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in the "continuous villa mode". In addition, regardless of the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols), determining the fluctuation time as the "consecutive villa mode" shifts to the "preparation mode" after "probability variation jackpot A, D, G, H, K". This is because there is no such thing. That is, if the time is shortened for the normal symbol after the end of each of the above jackpots, the "renso mode" is always set, so it is not necessary to secure the production period (90 seconds) of the "renso mode suggestion effect". Is.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 113, in the table for consecutive villas (when off), a short variation (0.2 seconds) is associated with the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 160" as the variation type. There is. On the other hand, in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "161 to 198", a middle fluctuation of 3 seconds is associated with the fluctuation type. In this way, in the "renso mode", a shorter fluctuation time is determined as compared with the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so that the game is played in the "renso mode". Can be executed speedily. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous. In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed in the "renso mode", the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds) is less likely to be selected than in the case of winning. As a result, in the "renso mode", a relatively long (3 seconds) fluctuation time is determined, so that the expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol can be increased. Therefore, since the game can be played while paying attention to the fluctuating time, it is possible to prevent the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 113, when the previous jackpot type is any of "probability variation jackpot B, E, I", the fluctuation time differs depending on the number of fluctuations after the jackpot (the number of lottery of special symbols) ( Fluctuation pattern) is determined. More specifically, if the 1st to 6th special symbol lottery is missed after "Probability change jackpot B, E, I", it will be treated as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Middle fluctuation (3 seconds) is determined. On the other hand, if the 7th special symbol lottery is missed after "Probability change jackpot B, E, I", long fluctuation G (72 seconds) as a fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is determined. As a result, after the end of the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", the mode shifts to the "preparation mode" (7 times of time saving period), and when all 7 special symbol lottery is missed, the fluctuation time The total can be 90 seconds (3 seconds x 6 + 72 seconds). That is, the total fluctuation time from the end of the "preparation mode" to the transition to the "normal mode" can be matched with the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production".

If the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) since the end of "probability change jackpot B, E, I" exceeds 7, the table for consecutive villas (big hit) shown at the bottom of FIG. 112. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to (hours). When the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I" is completed, the time saving period of 7 times is always set. Therefore, after the completion of the "probability change jackpot B, E, I", 7 This is because if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it means that it is in the "renso mode".

Here, even when the mode is changed to the "renso mode" after the "probability change jackpot B, E, I" is completed, the time saving middle-out table 202d4 is referred to, so seven times after the "renso mode" is entered. If it is continuously deviated, a long fluctuation time (72 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the "ream villa mode", the period until the jackpot is reached becomes long, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the "probability variation big hit I" is set to be extremely low at 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the "renso mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "renso mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "renso mode" is looping), the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability change jackpot E" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "renso mode" becomes long.

As shown in FIG. 113, if the player loses the lottery for the first special symbol after the "probability variation jackpot C, F, J", the long variation A is used as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (90 seconds) is determined. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production", so that the "preparation mode" with one time saving period ends and the "normal mode" It is possible to match the timing of transitioning to "" and the timing of ending "Renso mode suggestion effect".

In addition, when the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) since the end of "probability change jackpot C, F, J" is 2 or more, the table for consecutive villas shown at the bottom of FIG. The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected with reference to. When the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" after the "probability change jackpot C, F, J" is completed, the time saving period is always set only once, so after the end of the "probability change jackpot C, F, J", 2 This is because if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues beyond the number of times, it means that it is in the "renso mode".

Here, even when the mode is changed to the "renso mode" after the "probability change jackpot C, F, J" is completed, the time saving middle-out table 202d4 is referred to, so that it is the first time since the "renso mode" is set. If the lottery for the special symbol is missed, a long fluctuation time (90 seconds) is set. If a long fluctuation time is set in the "ream villa mode", the period until the jackpot is reached becomes long, and there is a risk that the game will be delayed. In this regard, in this control example, when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the probability (ratio) of determining the "probability variation jackpot C" is set to be extremely low at 0.1%. (See FIG. 108). Further, in the "renso mode", since the ball is launched aiming at the second entrance 640a, it becomes difficult to draw the special symbol 1. That is, while the "renso mode" and the jackpot of the special symbol are repeated (the "renso mode" is looping), the "probability change jackpot C" and the "probability change jackpot F" do not occur. Therefore, in an actual game, it is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "renso mode" becomes long.

As shown in FIG. 113, if the previous jackpot type is "normal jackpot A, B" and then the first special symbol lottery is missed, the previous jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C, F, J". , The long fluctuation A (90 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) can be matched with the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production", so that the timing when the "preparation mode" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode" And the timing at which the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" ends can be matched.

On the other hand, the fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery of special symbols) is 2 or more is not specified. There is no case of shifting to the "consecutive mode" after the end of "normal jackpots A and B" (see FIGS. 107 and 108), and the time saving state is set after the end of "normal jackpots A and B". This is because the "preparation mode" always has one time saving period.

In this way, regardless of the number of time reductions in the "preparation mode", the total fluctuation time until the end of the preparation mode is 90 seconds, which is the production time of the "ream villa mode suggestion production". It is configured to match. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently secure the production period of the "ream villa mode suggestion production" executed in the "preparation mode". In addition, since the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" can be unified, it is not necessary to prepare a production mode of a plurality of patterns having different production times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the storage capacity.

Further, the time saving middle-out table 202d4 is configured so that the fluctuation time in the "renso mode" is shorter than that in the "normal mode". As a result, the game can be executed speedily in the "renso mode". In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115, the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the effect mode when the time reduction number of 7 times of the normal symbol is set in the "preparation mode" will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is set to 7 times and all the special symbols are drawn out. That is, it is a figure which showed the case where the deviation is notified by the roulette chance production.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the variation effect corresponding to the deviation is executed 7 times in the "preparation mode", the variation display of the 1st (time reduction 1) to the 6th (time reduction 6) is a variation of 3 seconds. The time is set. On the other hand, in the 7th fluctuation display (time reduction 7), a fluctuation time of 72 seconds is set. Then, when the 7th special symbol lottery is completed, the time reduction state of the normal symbol ends due to the passage of the time reduction number, and the mode shifts to the "normal mode". In this total of 90 seconds, the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is executed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the jackpot ends and the mode shifts to the "preparation mode", the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)) is first executed. Will be done. As described above, this lucky number increase effect is an effect of executing a lottery every time a ball enters the second entrance 640a and increasing the lucky number (winning pocket) when the lottery is won. .. This lucky number increase effect is an effect in which the effect time is fixed for 20 seconds.

When the lucky number increase effect is completed, the roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 94 and 95) is started. As described above, this roulette chance effect is an effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" depending on the type of pocket in which the ball B falls. This roulette chance production is a production in which the production time is fixed for 65 seconds. After the end of the roulette chance effect, a 5-second ending effect is set to notify the end of the "renso mode suggestion effect". The production time of this ending effect may be extended depending on the situation of the game in the "preparation mode".

In this way, the "renso mode suggestion effect" of this control example basically consists of a 20-second lucky number increase effect, a 65-second roulette chance effect, and a 5-second ending effect for a total of 90 seconds. , Executed in this order. According to this 90-second effect time, the variation time of each variation display (variation effect) executed in the "preparation mode" is set, seven variation displays are executed without intervals, and all variation displays are displayed. When it is finished, it is configured so that the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is just finished. As a result, the "Renso mode suggestion production" ends even though the "Preparation mode" has not ended, or conversely, the "Renso mode" ends endlessly even though the "Preparation mode" has ended. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the "suggestion" effect from being continuously executed, and to link the gaming state and the effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current state is the "preparation mode" by the effect to be executed.

By setting the lucky number increase effect to 20 seconds, the roulette chance effect can be executed in consideration of the lottery results of all the special symbols executed in the "preparation mode". That is, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed without interruption, the seventh lottery is executed after 18 seconds at the longest, so whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol executed the seventh time is a hit is determined. It is possible to start the roulette chance production after making a determination and determining whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" according to the determination result. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" in the middle of the roulette chance production, and to rewrite the result in the middle of the production, and the result of the production at the start of the roulette chance production. Since it can be set including up to, the processing load can be reduced while the roulette chance effect is being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114 (b), when the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is set to 7 times and all the special symbols are missed in the lottery, the special symbol is displayed in the middle of the 7 fluctuation displays corresponding to the miss. An effect mode when the lottery of symbols is interrupted will be described. That is, a case where a period during which the ball does not enter the second entry port 640a occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode" will be described. Note that FIG. 114 (b) shows the second variation display and the third variation display because the ball did not enter the second entry port 640a for 5 seconds after the second variation display was completed. It shows the case where the fluctuation stop state for 5 seconds occurs between the two.

As shown in FIG. 114 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode", the effect time of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect is not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, the lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and then the roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. On the other hand, the execution period of the ending effect is extended by 5 seconds in accordance with the fluctuation stop period. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the ending effect is executed for 10 seconds. In this way, in this control example, when a variable stop state occurs in the "preparation mode" and the period in the "preparation mode" deviates from 90 seconds, the production time of the ending effect is changed. It is configured to be able to absorb the deviation. As a result, even if the fluctuation stop state occurs, the period in which the "preparation mode" is set and the production period in the "renso mode suggestion effect" can be matched.

In this control example, the variable stop period is absorbed by changing the effect period of the ending effect, so that the period of the "preparation mode" and the effect period of the "renso mode suggestion effect" are matched. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the effect time of the lucky number increase effect may be changed, or the effect period of the roulette chance effect may be changed. Further, it may be configured to interrupt the "consecutive villa mode suggestion effect" when the fluctuation stop is detected, and then restart the effect when the fluctuation start is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the relationship between the effect mode and the fluctuation time when a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol in the “preparation mode” will be described. FIG. 115 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a big hit is obtained in the fourth special symbol lottery among the time reduction times of the normal symbol set to 7 times. As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the special symbol lottery executed in the "preparation mode", the first (time reduction 1) to the third (time reduction 3) are missed, and the fourth (time reduction 4) is a big hit. Then, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first time (time reduction 1) to the third time (time reduction 3), and 81 seconds (long fluctuation D) is set as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the fourth time (time reduction 4). Will be done. As a result, the total fluctuation time can be matched with the production period of 90 seconds of the "renso mode suggestion production". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), a total of 90 seconds of "Roulette mode suggestion effect", which is a 20-second lucky number increase effect, a 65-second roulette chance effect, and a 5-second ending effect, ends. The "preparation mode" can be terminated at the timing. Therefore, since the gaming state and the effect to be executed can be linked, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the current state is the "preparation mode" by the effect to be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 115 (b), when the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is set to 7 times and a big hit is obtained in the 4th special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is performed in the middle of the 4 fluctuation displays. The mode of production when is interrupted will be described. That is, a case where a period during which the ball does not enter the second entry port 640a occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode" will be described. Note that FIG. 115 (b) shows the third variation display and the fourth variation display because the ball did not enter the second entry port 640a for 40 seconds after the third variation display (time reduction 3) was completed. It shows the case where the fluctuation stop state for 40 seconds occurs between the fluctuation display and the fluctuation display of.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), even if the fluctuation stop state occurs in the middle of the "preparation mode", the effect time of the lucky number increase effect and the roulette chance effect is not changed. That is, when the "preparation mode" is started, the lucky number increase effect for 20 seconds is executed, and then the roulette chance effect for 65 seconds is executed. At the start of execution of this roulette chance production, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", so in this roulette chance production, a miss is notified (the ball B falls into the miss pocket). ). Then, in the example of FIG. 115 (b), the ball enters the second entrance 640a in the middle of the roulette chance effect of notifying the deviation, and a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol. Therefore, in this control example, in order to notify the transition to the "renso mode", the roulette chance effect that is being executed once notifies the deviation, and after setting the ending effect of 5 seconds as usual, It is configured to execute the roulette chance effect again (execute the resurrection roulette chance effect). This revival roulette chance production is executed for 30 seconds, and finally the ball falls into the hit pocket and the transition to the "renso mode" is notified. Then, after the end of the resurrection roulette chance production, a 10-second ending production is set. This ending effect is set to absorb the difference between the effect period due to the fluctuation stop period and the period of the "preparation mode", and the effect period can be changed according to the deviation.

In this way, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed in the middle of the roulette chance production to notify the deviation, the player can be pleased by executing the revival roulette chance. In addition, even if a fluctuation stop period occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of a length corresponding to the fluctuation stop period, so that the effect period and the "preparation mode" period are prevented (suppressed) from being deviated from each other. can do. If the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds and the revival roulette chance cannot be executed, a short display effect that ends in a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds) without rotating the rotating member 640 is executed. Will be done. If the fluctuation stop period is shorter than 30 seconds, this short display effect notifies whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", so it is a game to determine whether or not to shift to the "renso mode". It is possible to make a person surely grasp.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 106 (a). The game result setting table 202e is a data table that defines information (state setting information) for determining the game state after the jackpot is completed by the lottery of the special symbol. Further, the state setting table 202f determines various setting values (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) regarding the game state after the end of the jackpot based on the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e. It is a data table used to do this.

In the pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the state setting information according to the winning jackpot type is provided in the RAM 203 from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 116 (a)). It is stored in the storage area 203j (see FIG. 117). The state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is held during the big hit, and at the end timing of the big hit, various setting values (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium) regarding the game state after the big hit ends. The counter 203h) is read from the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116B) and used for setting. More specifically, the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 116 (b)) that defines various setting values related to the game state (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) for each value of the state setting information. It is used to select and set a combination of various setting values from. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random value (counter value) itself acquired when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640a (starting winning) is the end of the jackpot. It keeps holding until the time point, and the game state after the end of the big hit is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640a ( Only the state setting information value selected from the game result setting table 202e based on the random number value (counter value) acquired with the start winning is held in the jackpot.

Here, if the random number value that becomes the jackpot is held during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of winning the jackpot or during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read by the fraudulent player, and the jackpot becomes a jackpot. Random number values may be identified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears is analyzed, and there is a risk that a jackpot may be liable to be illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in this control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is determined based on the state setting information value. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. Therefore, the timing at which the random value that becomes the jackpot appears is analyzed, and the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on the so-called hanging board, the random number is acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling so as to judge the success or failure of the jackpot is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various set values (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) related to the game state after the big hit is displayed while the symbol for notifying the big hit is displayed. , It is configured to hold only the state setting information instead of holding it during the subsequent jackpot (privilege game state). Since it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

The game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) and 116 (b), respectively. As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game result setting table 202e, the jackpot ends for each game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the type of jackpot won by the special symbol lottery. The value of the state setting information, which is the information for setting the game state after the game is played, is specified. Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, set values related to the game state after the end of the big hit are defined for each value of the state setting information.

More specifically, in the game result setting table 202e, "00H" is associated with the "probability variation jackpot A to K" in the time saving state of the normal symbol as the value of the state setting information, and the time saving state of the normal symbol is associated. "05H" is associated with the "normal jackpots A and B" in the above as the value of the state setting information. Similarly, "00H" is associated with the "probability variation jackpot A, H" in the normal state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol as the value of the state setting information, and the normal state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol is associated. "01H" is associated with the "probability variation jackpot B, E, H" in the above as the value of the state setting information. Further, "02H" is associated with the "probability variation jackpot C, F, J" in the normal state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol as the value of the state setting information, and the normal state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol is associated. ), "03H" is associated with the value of the state setting information for "probability variation jackpot D, G, K", and for "normal jackpot A, B" in the normal state (non-time saving state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, "04H" is associated with the value of the state setting information.

Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the state setting table 202f, the probability variation flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h are set to “ON” for the value “00H” of the state setting information. , "On", and "0" are associated with each other. Although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and the time reduction flag 203g is the time reduction state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, ". It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the consecutive villa mode), and the time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the time saving number of times of the normal symbol (that is, the remaining time saving number of times in the “preparation mode”). Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203f is "on", the time reduction flag 203g is "on", and the value of the time reduction medium counter 203h is "0", the probability variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and the normal continuation until the next jackpot It shifts to the time saving state of the symbol (that is, "ream villa mode"). As described above, when the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A to K) is reached in the time saving state of the normal symbol, or when the probability variation jackpot A, H is reached in the normal state of the normal symbol, the direct "renso mode" is set. (See FIGS. 107 and 108), the correct game state can be set after the jackpot ends by referring to the game result setting table 202e and the state setting table 202f.

Further, in the state setting table 202f, for the value "01H" of the state setting information, "on", "off", and "7" are set as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h, respectively. It is associated. Therefore, when "probability variation jackpot B, E, I" is set in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode") and "01H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (FIG. 116). a)), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time reductions is 7 times.

In the state setting table 202f, "on", "off", and "1" are associated with the value "02H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h, respectively. Has been done. Therefore, when "probability variation jackpot C, F, J" is set in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode") and "02H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (FIG. 116 (Fig. 116)). a)), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time reductions is one.

In the state setting table 202f, "on", "off", and "0" are associated with the value "03H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h, respectively. Has been done. Therefore, when "probability variation jackpot D, G, K" is set in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode") and "03H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (FIG. 116 (Fig. 116)). a)), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the "normal mode".

In the state setting table 202f, "off", "off", and "1" are associated with the value "04H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h, respectively. Has been done. Therefore, when "normal jackpots A and B" are set in the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode") and "04H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (FIG. 116 (a)). (See), after the big hit, it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, and to shift to the "preparation mode" in which the number of time reductions of the normal symbol is one.

In the state setting table 202f, "off", "off", and "0" are associated with the value "05H" of the state setting information as the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, and the time saving medium counter 203h, respectively. Has been done. Therefore, when the time saving state of the normal symbol (that is, "preparation mode" or "ream villa mode") becomes "normal jackpot A, B" and "05H" is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j. (See FIG. 116 (a)), after the jackpot, it is possible to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol and to the normal state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal mode").

In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the value of the state setting information corresponding to the big hit type is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, and the big hit. At the end of, various setting values corresponding to the state setting information are read from the state setting table 202f and set, so that the state transition as shown in FIG. 109 can be realized. That is, it is possible to realize playability that goes back and forth between three types of states: "normal mode", "preparation mode", and "ream villa mode".

Further, in this control example, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a state setting information value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the state setting information value. Therefore, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself, which is the jackpot of the special symbol, is held for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. Therefore, the timing at which the random value that becomes the jackpot appears is analyzed, and the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on the so-called hanging board, the random number is acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling so as to judge the success or failure of the jackpot is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various set values (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) related to the game state after the big hit is displayed while the symbol for notifying the big hit is displayed. , It is configured to hold only the state setting information instead of holding it during the subsequent jackpot (privilege game state). Since it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 117. As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of this control example includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , The winning information storage area 203e, the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, the time saving medium counter 203h, the winning number counter 203i, the state setting information storage area 203j, the state storage area 203k, and the look-ahead probability changing flag 203m. And at least a counter buffer 203y and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing the winning of the first winning opening 64, and has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the common execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the common execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the original special symbol jackpot lottery is performed. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. Store in 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted. In addition, this prediction (look-ahead) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) at the time when the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning is started. .. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize can be accurately predicted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding first area). Among the vacant areas (4 areas), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes vacant. The shift process is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is a reserved ball for variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B based on the entry into the first winning opening 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts a number (waiting count) up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 131).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 131 and S405 in FIG. 133). ). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a reserved ball number (standby) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added up to 1 (see S704 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 135).

When a ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. (S703: No in FIG. 136).

The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). When the value of the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when it is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Indicates that there is. The initial value of the probability change flag 203f is set to off, and each time the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The probability change flag 203f is set. That is, when "on" is read from the state setting table 202f, the probability change flag 203f is set to "on", and when "off" is read, the probability change flag 203f is set to "off". The flag. Then, it is referred to in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 132) and the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (S302 and FIG. 134 in FIG. 132). (See S505 in FIG. 131), which is set to off when the next jackpot game is started (see S213 in FIG. 131).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) or the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134), the value of the probability variation flag 203f is referred to, and if that value is on, the first random number table for high probability is used. While the special symbol lottery is performed based on 202a, if the value of the probability variation flag 203f is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for the low probability time.

The time saving flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit (that is, whether it is in the “renso mode”). If the value of the time saving flag 203g is on, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol that continues until the next big hit, and if it is off, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "consecutive villa mode". Shown. As described above, in this control example, in addition to the "ream villa mode", the time saving state of the normal symbol is also obtained in the "preparation mode". The remaining number of time reductions in the "preparation mode" is counted by the time reduction counter 203h. That is, in this control example, the normal state (that is, "normal mode") of the normal symbol is obtained only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0.

The initial value of the time saving flag 203g is set to off, and each time the jackpot ends, the state corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. , The time saving flag is set to 203 g. That is, when "on" is read from the state setting table 202f, the time saving flag 203g is set to "on", and when "off" is read, the time saving flag 203g is set to "off". The flag. Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614,619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. Is set to off (see S213 in FIG. 131).

The time reduction medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the number of time reductions of a normal symbol (that is, the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”). When the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is larger than 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 has the number of time reductions of the normal symbol remaining (that is, it is in the “preparation mode”), and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is 0. If there is, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the "preparation mode". As described above, even if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0, if the time reduction flag 203g is on, it means that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is in effect. That is, in this control example, the normal state (that is, "normal mode") of the normal symbol is obtained only when the time saving flag 203g is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0.

The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 0, and each time the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to the state setting information value stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read from the state setting table 202f. It is set as the value of the time saving and medium counter 203h. That is, when "0" is read from the state setting table 202f, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to "0", and when "1" is read out, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set. When it is set to "1" and "7" is read, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to "7". Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state (see S608, S614,619 in FIG. 135), and the next jackpot game is started. The value is initialized to 0 (see S213 in FIG. 131).

The winning number counter 203i is a counter for counting the cumulative number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in each round of big hits. In each round of jackpots, it is determined whether or not the end condition of each round is satisfied according to the value of the winning number counter 203i. The winning number counter 203i is incremented by 1 each time a winning is detected in the first variable winning device 82a or the second variable winning device 65 in the jackpot (see S1203 in FIG. 141). Then, when it is detected that the winning number counter 203i becomes 10 or more in the jackpot, the running round is terminated (see S1207 in FIG. 141). The initial value of the winning number counter 203i is set to 0, and the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 at the end of each round. The value of the winning number counter 203i is backed up even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The state setting information storage area 203j stores (retains) the state setting information read from the game result setting table 202e according to the big hit type when the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol until the big hit is completed. It is a storage area for storing. As described above, based on the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j, various setting values corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot are read from the state setting table 202f and set (FIG. 140). See S1115).

The state storage area 203k is a storage area in which information indicating which period is currently in the jackpot is stored. Here, the jackpot is an opening period for notifying the start of the jackpot, a round period for opening and closing the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a, and an ending period for notifying the end of the jackpot. At least composed of and. The state storage area 203k stores information for distinguishing which of these plurality of types of periods is the current period. More specifically, the jackpot is started, and in the opening period, "01H" is stored in the state storage area 203k, and in the first round, "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k, and two rounds. In the eyes, "03H" is stored in the state storage area 203k, and in the ending period, "04H" is stored in the state storage area 203k. On the other hand, in a state other than the jackpot, "00H" is stored in the state storage area 203k.

The initial value of the state storage area 203k is set to "00H", and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the stored value is backed up. The value stored in the state storage area 203k is referred to when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the current gaming state is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the value stored in the state storage area 203k. The state command to do is set. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the game, the game state grasped by the main control device 110 when the power is restored can be matched with the game state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a discrepancy between the actual game state and the production.

The look-ahead probability changing flag 203m is a probabilistic state of the special symbol (high of the special symbol) when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the random number value (counter value) acquired according to the start winning prize. A flag indicating whether the winning data should be analyzed as a (probability state) or the winning data should be analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol (low probability state of a special symbol). Is.

When the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is off, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This look-ahead probability change flag 203m is initialized to off at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S916 in FIG. 138), and is set to on every time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be a probability change jackpot (FIG. 133 S410, FIG. 134 S514). On the other hand, each time the pre-read lottery result is determined to be a normal jackpot, it is set to off (see S412 in FIG. 133 and S515 in FIG. 134).

The counter buffer 203y includes the above-mentioned counters (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, first initial value random number counter CINI1, variable type counter CS1, second hit random number counter C4. , Second initial value This is a storage area for storing the value of the random number counter CINI2). The counter value stored in the counter buffer 203y is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

The other memory area, 203z, is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201. A stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by MPU201 are stored, and a work area (work area) where various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. Have.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 139) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 138) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 137) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 defines at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, an operation scenario table 222b, a rotation position determination table 222c, and an additional determination table 222d.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough variation indicated by the variation pattern command is shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the contents (variation time) from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The operation scenario table 222b is an operation of the accessory when at least one of the accessory (upper elevating unit 300, liquid crystal elevating unit 400, left swing unit 500, rotation unit 600, etc.) is movable. It is a data table that defines the contents (operation scenario). More specifically, it is a data table in which set values (operating speed, number of operating steps, operating direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory are specified. Details of this operation scenario table 222b will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120.

FIG. 119 (a) is a block diagram showing an operation scenario table 222b. In this operation scenario table 222b, data is stored for each type of accessory that can be driven (variable). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the upper elevating unit table 222b1 referred to when the effect of driving the upper elevating unit 300 and the effect of driving the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are set. The liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2 referred to when the above is performed, the left swing unit table 222b3 referred to when the effect of driving the left swing unit 500 is set, and the effect of driving the rotation unit 600 are set. A rotating unit table 222b4, which is referred to in the case of the above, is specified. In addition, when the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other as a jackpot type (specific jackpot type), a specific opening in which the operation contents of each accessory during the jackpot opening period are defined. Table 222b5, a specific ending table 222b6 in which the operation contents of each accessory in the ending period of a specific jackpot type are defined, and the operation contents of the initial operation of each accessory executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The initial operation table 222b7 specified for each accessory is specified.

Each of these tables will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 119 (b) to 120. FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned upper elevating unit table 222b1. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is set for each value of the operation pointer 223 g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario for the motor control IC (motor driver). Values (operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are specified.

Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency with which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the corresponding drive motor (upper elevating motor 341), and per second. It is represented by the number of signals (pulses) output to (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operating speed is 333 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 333 times per second to the upper elevating motor 341. That is, it means that the upper elevating motor 341 is driven at a speed of 333 steps per second. Further, the number of operation steps indicates the number of operations executed by the upper elevating motor 341, in other words, a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step from the motor driver to the upper elevating motor 341. ) Is output. For example, the number of operation steps 127 means that the operation of one step is set 127 times for the upper elevating motor 341. Further, the operating direction means the driving direction (rotational direction of the motor) of the upper elevating motor 341, and two kinds of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the upper elevating motor 341, the direction from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position is the positive direction, and the direction from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position) is the negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the upper elevating motor 341, the corresponding operation can be accurately executed.

As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is an operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position (outward route operation). Are associated with each other. Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the upper elevating unit 300 is reached in the effect. Note that 127 steps means the number of steps to the descending position.

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (stationing) the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 at the descending position. Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 1000 is specified as the operation step, and "stop" is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is stipulated that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operating speed of 333 pps. As a result, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 can be stopped at the descending position for about 3 seconds (1000 times / 333 pps).

The value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position). Specifically, 333 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Further, END data is associated with the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Similarly, for the liquid crystal elevating unit table 222b2, the left swing unit table 222b3, and the rotating unit table 222b4, the motor driver corresponding to the drive motor for driving each accessory is set for each value of the operation pointer 223 g corresponding to each accessory. The setting contents to be set in are specified.

Further, FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned specific opening table 222b5. As described above, the specific opening table 222b5 has a jackpot type (specific jackpot type) in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected, and each accessory in the jackpot opening period. It is a data table that defines the operation contents of. The specific jackpot type is specifically, in each round of jackpot, the opening pattern A (opening for 0.6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds) is performed 20 times for the first variable winning device 82a. It is a jackpot type in which a repeating opening pattern) is set.

As described above, when the jackpot type in which the opening pattern A is set in the "normal mode" is won, the drive side slide member 420 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 are connected to each other. All the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are configured to flow down to the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520. Then, every time the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a reaches the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 (every time the sensor member 422c of the second passage forming member 422 detects the passage of the ball), a normal symbol is displayed. The time saving suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the time saving state of is set is executed.

In order to execute this time saving suggestion effect, in this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are driven during the opening period of the jackpot where the opening pattern A is set. , Before the first round of the jackpot is started (that is, before the ball is ready to enter the first variable winning device 82a), these accessories are configured to be moved to the connecting position. Has been done. The operation contents of each accessory during this opening period are defined in the specific opening table 222b5.

As shown in FIG. 119 (c), in order to drive the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 from the descending position to the connecting position (see FIG. 9) with respect to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g in the specific opening table 222b5. The operation of is associated. Specifically, 500 pps is specified as the operation speed, 250 is specified as the operation step, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 can be arranged at the connecting position.

Further, with respect to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g, the operation content for swinging the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position (origin position) to the connection position is defined. ing. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. By setting this operation content, the first passage forming member 520 can be arranged at the connecting position. Therefore, since the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 previously arranged at the connecting position and the first passage forming member 520 can be connected, the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a can be transferred to the first passage forming member. It can be guided (flowed down) to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 via the 520.

Further, the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with END data indicating the end of the operation. By reading this END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

As for the specific ending table 222b6, the operation content of the left swing unit 500 and the operation content of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are defined as in the specific opening table 222b5. Specifically, the setting contents for driving the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position and the setting for driving the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 from the connection position to the lower position. The contents are specified. Since the operation direction and the operation order of the accessory are only opposite to those of the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)), the specific ending table 222b6 is not shown.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned initial operation table 222b7 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the initial operation table 222b7. As shown in FIG. 120, in the initial operation table 222b7, the type of the accessory for which the operation is set and the set value for setting in the motor driver corresponding to the accessory are associated with the value of the operation pointer 223g. Is stipulated.

Unlike the other tables specified in the operation scenario table 222b, the initial operation table 222b7 does not specify the number of operation steps, but defines the operation end condition and the number of steps to be determined as abnormal. That is, in the initial operation in this control example, one-step operation is performed in the operation speed and the operation direction specified in the initial operation table 222b7 until the arrival at various sensors provided corresponding to each accessory is detected. It is configured to run repeatedly. For example, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is provided with a plurality of sensors for determining the elevating position. That is, the liquid crystal origin sensor 418 whose output is H (high) when the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged at the descending position (origin position) and the output is H (high) when it is arranged at the connected position. At least an intermediate sensor 419 for liquid crystal is provided. In the initial operation of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g, the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 detects that the connection position has been reached (the output of the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 becomes H). It is driven step by step in the positive direction (ascending direction) at an operating speed of 500 pps.

If it is determined that the abnormality determination step value specified in the initial operation table 222b7 has been reached without detecting the arrival at the connection position by the liquid crystal intermediate sensor 419 during the execution of the initial operation, the connection position is reached. It means that the connection position has not been reached even though the operation of a sufficiently reachable number of steps is set. Therefore, in this case, the liquid crystal elevating motor 441 for driving the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 fails and the operation corresponding to the instruction of the motor driver cannot be executed, or the gear and the motor are displaced, and the liquid crystal is displayed. There is a possibility that a problem such as the lifting motor 441 idling has occurred. Therefore, if the abnormality determination step value (1050 steps) is reached before the operation end condition of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is satisfied in the initial operation, an error is notified. By notifying this error, the clerk in the hall can immediately recognize the occurrence of a defect, so that appropriate measures such as repair can be taken.

The operation in the case of the operation pointer "01H" has been described as an example, but for other operation pointer values, as shown in FIG. 120, the operation speed of each accessory, the operation end condition, the number of abnormality determination steps, and the number of abnormality determination steps, and The operating direction is specified in the same way. By executing the initial operation according to the initial operation table 222b7, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the accessories are operating normally every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by letting the player play the game after the initial movement is completed, it is possible to make the player play the game in a state in which each accessory always operates normally.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 118 (a). The rotation position determination table 222c is a data table in which information for specifying the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 is defined from the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684. The details of the rotation position determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 121.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rotation position determination table 222c. As shown in FIG. 121, the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are pockets provided with the detected portion 641c so as to differ depending on the phase (arrangement) of the rotation member 640. (Split member DV) and a pocket (split member DV) that is not provided are set. The rotation position determination table 222c in this control example is a data table in which the combination of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F specified by the presence / absence of the detected unit 641c is defined for each pocket arranged at the drop position. Since the pockets P1 to P30 are arranged counterclockwise in this order, the arrangement of all the pockets can be specified if the pocket at the drop position can be specified.

As shown in FIG. 121, for the combination “L, L, H, H, L, H” of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F, the pocket P1 is defined as the pocket at the drop position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F is L, L, H, H, L, H, respectively, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the current state It is determined that the rotating member 640 is the rotating position where the pocket P1 is arranged at the falling position.

Similarly, for the combination of outputs "L, L, L, H, H, L" of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F, P2 is defined as a pocket at the drop position. Therefore, when it is detected that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensor A to the detection sensor F is L, L, L, H, H, L, respectively, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, it is the current state. It is determined that the rotating member 640 is the rotating position where the pocket P2 is arranged at the falling position.

Similarly, for the pockets P3 to P30, the combination of the outputs of the corresponding detection sensors A to F is specified for the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121). In this way, since different combinations of detection sensor outputs are associated with the pockets P1 to P30, the phase (arrangement) of the rotating member 640 is changed each time any pocket is arranged at the drop position. It can be identified accurately.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 118 (a). The addition determination table 222d is special when it detects that the ball has entered the second entry port 640a during the execution of the lucky number increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)), and in the "normal mode". This is a data table used to determine whether or not to increase the winning pocket (lucky number) when the lottery of symbol 1 is newly held. Although not shown, the additional discrimination table 222d includes an additional high probability table in which an increase in the lucky number is determined with a relatively high probability (25%) and a lucky number with a relatively low probability (5%). There is an additional low probability table in which the increase in the number is determined, and an additional medium probability table in which the increase in the lucky number is determined with an intermediate probability (10%) between the two. If the determination condition for determining whether to increase the lucky number is satisfied, the above-mentioned three types of tables are selected according to the situation (for example, whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed). Any one of them is selected and used to determine whether or not to increase the lucky number. Here, a random number value (counter) used for determining (determining) whether or not to increase the lucky number (hit pocket) is provided in, for example, the RAM 223, and is the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 145). The value is updated each time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 118 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a step counter 223e, an operation scenario flag 223f, and an operation pointer 223g. , Origin return flag 223i, initial operation flag 223j, hit position storage area 223k, lighting position storage area 223m, probability change state flag 223n, time reduction state flag 223o, time reduction state counter 223p, and hit state. Storage area 223q, operable type storage area 223r, correction position counter 223s, initial setting flag 223t, rotation position storage area 223u, swing undetected flag 223v, swing timer 223w, and designated pocket storage. Area 223x, additional counter 223av, production timer 223bv, increasing production flag 223cv, roulette flag 223dv, swing effect flag 223ev, ball drop enable flag 223fv, winning counter 223gv, discharge counter 223hv. , The power off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. To. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is the main. The control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (win / fail, fluctuation pattern, etc.) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area. It is stored in 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas) of the special symbol. Be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and held. When the number of balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2107 in FIG. 150). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on in the variation pattern reception process executed when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 151), and is turned off when the variation display is set. (See S3302 in FIG. 162). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 uses the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, such as the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81, and the effect unit 331). ), The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2104 in FIG. 150), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3307 in FIG. 162). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The counting reference (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223e is configured to be able to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of accessory. That is, the step counter 223e is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the ascending / descending operation of the elevating body 330 in the upper elevating unit 300, and the number of operating steps of the oscillating operation of the first passage forming member 520 in the left swing member 500. There are as many separate counters as there are drive motors for driving the accessory, such as a counter for counting.

The step counter 223e outputs an execution signal (execution command) every time an execution signal indicating that the operation of one step is executed is received from any of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The counter value corresponding to the motor type is updated one by one (see S2601 in FIG. 155). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the origin return operation for returning various accessories to the origin position is executed, but when the various accessories return to the origin by the origin return operation, the step counter 223e 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223e becomes 0 can be surely set to the origin position of each accessory, so that the operation status (drive position) of each accessory can be accurately grasped. it can.

The operation scenario flag 223f is a flag indicating which of the operation scenarios defined in the operation scenario table 222b and corresponding to the effect operation of each accessory is set. The operation scenario flag 223f is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and each bit is associated with the type of operation scenario. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223f corresponds to the upper elevating unit table 222b1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is set as the operation scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the upper elevating unit table 222b1 is not set. Similarly for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is 0. Set to (off).

When an operation scenario is set based on the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151) (see S2204 in FIG. 151), the operation scenario flag 223f has a bit corresponding to the scenario of 1 (see FIG. 151). On) is set. Further, each time the variation effect in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). With this operation scenario flag 223f, the type of the currently set operation scenario can be easily determined.

The operation pointer 223g is a pointer used to identify the progress status of the set operation scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222b is defined by associating the value of the operation pointer 223g with the operation content (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) to be set. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set in the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223g is updated.

Further, the operation pointer 223g can update the pointer value separately for each set operation scenario. That is, the operation pointer 223g is a general term for different pointers provided for each operation scenario. For each pointer constituting the operation pointer 223g, "01H" is set as the value by newly setting the corresponding operation scenario. After that, every time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (see S2612 in FIG. 155 and S2706 in FIG. 156), and the operation content corresponding to the updated pointer value is set. Further, when the variation effect in which the corresponding operation scenario is set is completed, the pointer value is reset to "00H". By using this operation pointer 223g, it is possible to accurately grasp the set operation scenario.

The home-returning flag 223i is executing a home-return operation (an operation for returning an accessory deviated from the home position to the home position) that is executed when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the home return flag 223i is on, it indicates that the home return operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the home return operation is not being executed. The homing flag 223i is set to on when the homing operation is set in the homing process (see FIG. 144) (see S1505 in FIG. 144). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, it is set to off when it is determined that all the accessories have returned to the origin position (see S2605 in FIG. 155). By using the home return flag 223i, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the home return operation is in progress.

The initial operation flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the initial operation, which is executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the origin return operation is completed, is being executed. .. If the initial operation flag 223j is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being executed. This initial operation flag 223j is set when it is determined that all the accessories are arranged at the origin position at the time of turning on the power (S1507 in FIG. 144), or after the origin return operation executed after the power is turned on is completed. It is set to on (see S2605 in FIG. 155) and turned off when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222b7 are completed (see S2709 in FIG. 156). By using the initial operation flag 223j, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

The hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the types of the pockets P1 to P30 (whether the hit pocket or the detached pocket) of the rotating member 640 in the “ream villa mode suggestion effect”. In this control example, the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is set with reference to the contact position storage area 223k. That is, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket is set to the extinguishing state. Further, when the sphere B is dropped from the holding piece 677 to any pocket, the type of each pocket stored in the contact position storage area 223k is compared with the pocket arranged at the drop position, and the sphere B is compared. Is determined whether or not it can be dropped into the pocket next to the pocket arranged at the drop position.

The details of the hit pocket storage area 223k will be described with reference to FIG. 122. As shown in FIG. 122, the hit pocket storage area 223k is provided with a storage area corresponding to each pocket, and each storage area has information corresponding to whether it is a hit pocket or a missed pocket. Can be stored. One bit is assigned to the storage area corresponding to each pocket, and when each bit is H (1), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket, and if it is L (0), it means that the corresponding pocket is a hit pocket. , Means that the corresponding pocket is a detached pocket.

Here, as described above, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed at the start of the roulette chance production (in the "ream mode suggestion production" in the "preparation mode", the probability changes by lottery of special symbols. In the case of a big hit), it is allowed to drop the ball B into one of the hit pockets, and it is restricted to drop the ball B into the out-of-pocket. On the other hand, if the transition to "Renso mode" is not confirmed at the start of the roulette chance production (when all the lottery of special symbols executed by the start of the production is out), the ball goes to one of the out pockets. It is allowed to drop B, and it is restricted to drop the ball B into the hit pocket. In this control example, when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied (when the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is 1 second or less), the type of each pocket is determined by referring to the hit position storage area 223k. Then, it is determined whether or not the pocket arranged in the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged in the drop position is the pocket in which the ball B is allowed to fall in this roulette chance production. Then, when the next pocket is a pocket that is allowed to fall, the ball B is controlled to fall with respect to the pocket. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from falling into a pocket different from the target type pocket, so that the ball B tells the player whether or not the player has shifted to the "ream villa mode". Accurate notification can be made according to the type of pocket that has fallen.

FIG. 122 is stored in the hit position storage area 223k when pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, P28 to P30 are set as hit pockets and the remaining other pockets are set as detached pockets. It is a figure which showed the data. In this case, as shown in FIG. 122, H (1) indicating a hit pocket is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pockets P3, P9 to P11, P15, P16, P20, P28 to P30, and the other pockets. L (0) indicating an out-of-pocket is stored with respect to the storage area corresponding to.

The lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% or a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m.

The details of the lighting position storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lighting position storage area 223 m. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the lighting position storage area 223m is 3 of the first storage area 223m1 to the third storage area 223m3 indicating the lighting positions of the three LED bars 625a to 625c constituting the rear LED 625. It consists of two storage areas.

The first storage area 223m1 is a storage area for storing the states of the lighting areas A1 to A6 of the LED bar 625a. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), of the lighting areas A1 to A6, H (1) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area having a lighting rate of 100%, and the storage corresponding to the lighting area in the off state is stored. L (0) is stored in the area. In the example of FIG. 123 (b), H (1) indicating a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% is set in the storage area corresponding to the lighting areas A3 to A5. On the other hand, L (0) indicating a lighting state of 0% is set in the storage area corresponding to the lighting areas A1, A2, and A6.

The second storage area 223m2 corresponding to the LED bar 625b and the third storage area 223m3 corresponding to the LED bar 625c have the same configuration as the first storage area 223m1. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 123 (c) and 123 (d), data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A7 to A12 is set in the second storage area 223m2. A storage area is provided, and a storage area for setting data (H or L) corresponding to the lighting state of the lighting areas A13 to A18 is provided in the third storage area 223m3.

By sequentially updating these three storage areas according to the arrangement of the hit pockets and controlling the state of each lighting area A1 to A18 according to the information stored in each storage area, only the hit pockets appear to shine. can do. As described above, since the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 laps while the rear LED 625 goes around, the type of each pocket and the type of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket rotate. It shifts according to the progress of. Therefore, in this control example, every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar), the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is corrected, and the hit pocket is always It is controlled so that it looks shining. That is, every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected according to the deviation caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can see only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the miss pocket.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 118 (b). The probability change state flag 223n is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. When the probability change state flag 223n is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not in the probability change state. The probability change state flag 223n is updated according to the state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. That is, when the probability change state of the special symbol is notified by the state command, the probability change state flag 223n is set (updated) on, and when the low probability state of the special symbol is notified, this probability change state flag is set. 223n is set (updated) to off (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The time saving state flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not it is a time saving state (that is, "ream villa mode") of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. If the time saving state flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is in "continuous villa mode", and if it is off, it means that it is not in "continuous villa mode" (that is, it is in "normal mode" or "preparation mode"). Is shown. This time saving state flag 223o is updated according to the state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the game state is changed in the main control device 110, similarly to the probability change state flag 223n. That is, when the "renso mode" is notified by the state command, the time saving state flag 223o is set (updated) to on, and when the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode" is notified, this The time saving state flag 223o is set (updated) to off (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The time reduction state counter 223p is a counter for counting the remaining number of time reductions in the “preparation mode”. If the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more, it indicates that the "preparation mode" (that is, the time reduction state of the normal symbol) continues until the lottery of the special symbol is executed for the number of times corresponding to the counter value. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, it indicates that the mode is not "preparation mode". Similar to the probability change state flag 223n and the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p responds to a state command output to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the game state is changed in the main control device 110. Will be updated. That is, when the state command notifies the number of time reductions (1 time or 7 times) in the "preparation mode", the value of the time reduction state counter 223p is updated to 1 or 7 according to the number of notifications. .. On the other hand, when the "normal mode" or "consecutive villa mode" is notified by the state command, the value of the time saving state counter 223p is set (updated) to 0 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The hit-middle state storage area 223q is a storage area for storing information indicating which period is currently in the big hit, and has the same configuration as the state storage area 203k of the main control device 110. That is, in the opening period of the jackpot, "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, "02H" is stored in the first round, "03H" is stored in the second round, and "03H" is stored in the ending period. 04H ”is stored. On the other hand, in a state other than the big hit, "00H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q. The time saving state counter 223p is updated according to the state command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S3001 in FIG. 159).

The operable type storage area 223r is information indicating whether or not it is permissible to operate each accessory in the origin return operation or the initial operation executed for each accessory when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is the storage area where is stored. The operable type storage area 223r is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each accessory of the pachinko machine 10 (upper elevating unit 300, left swing unit 500, etc.) is associated with each bit of 1 byte. There is. When 0 is stored in each bit (set to H), the operation of the accessory corresponding to that bit is restricted (the origin return operation or the initial stage for the accessory). It means that the operation cannot be executed), and when 1 is stored (set to L), it means that the accessory corresponding to the bit is allowed to be operated.

The state in which the operation of the accessory (origin return operation or initial operation) is restricted is, for example, when the power is cut off during the jackpot in which the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a. Is. As described above, when the opening pattern A is set, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected to the first variable winning device 82a. The winning ball can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Therefore, if the home position return operation and the initial operation are executed for all the accessories regardless of the state when the power is cut off, the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 are connected when the power is cut off. Even if this is the case, the connection will be disconnected by the home-return operation or the initial operation. Therefore, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is momentarily cut off and the power is immediately restored while the ball has entered the first passage forming member 520, the pachinko machine 10 passes through the first passage forming member 520. There is a possibility that the origin return operation or the initial operation is started during the process, and the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is disconnected. That is, the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 may enter the back side of the pachinko machine 10 or the like without entering the second passage forming member 422. This may cause problems such as short circuits in wiring and circuits.

On the other hand, in this control example, the state command output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on. Then, when the game state grasped from the state command is in the middle of the jackpot set in the open pattern A, it corresponds to the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 in the operable type storage area 223r. For a bit, 1 is stored (set to L), which means that the operation is restricted. Therefore, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, the connection is prevented (suppressed) from being released when the power is restored. be able to. Therefore, even if the power is restored while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520, the sphere can be reliably flowed down from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a problem such as a short circuit in the wiring or the circuit.

When the correction position counter 223s rewrites the data of the lighting position storage area 223m in order to correct the deviation of the correspondence between the state of the lighting area provided on the rear LED 625 and the pocket of the rotating member 640, any storage area It is a counter indicating whether or not the data stored in (first storage area 223m1 to third storage area 223m3) should be rewritten. As described above, the rotating member 640 is provided with 30 pockets P1 to P30. On the other hand, 18 lighting areas A1 to A18 are provided as lighting areas for turning on or off each pocket. Further, in order to make the pocket arranged in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54) (that is, visible to the player) follow the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof and operate the rotating member 640. It is configured to rotate the rear LED 625 at the same rotation speed. Therefore, since the rotating member 640 makes only 18/30 laps while the rear LED 625 makes one lap, the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area is deviated every time the second section S2 is entered. Therefore, in this control example, when any of the LED bars 625a to 625c is arranged for the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) which is invisible (difficult) to the player, each of the LED bars constituting the LED bar is formed. By switching the state of the lighting area, it is configured to correct the deviation of the correspondence between the pocket and the lighting area. When the correction is executed, the type of the LED bar 625 to be corrected is specified from the value of the correction position counter 223s. As a result, no matter how much the rear LED 625 rotates, the correspondence between the type of each pocket in the first section visible to the player and the lighting state of the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket. Can be fixed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the position of the hit pocket from the appearance of each pocket.

The correction position counter 223s is configured as a loop counter that counts up by 1 in the range of "0" to "2" and returns to "0" when the value is updated in the state of "2". If the value of the correction position counter 223s is "0", it indicates that correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A1 to A6 constituting the LED bar 625a, and if the value is "1", the LED bar 625b is configured. It indicates that the correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A7 to A12 to be performed, and if the value is “2”, it indicates that the correction is performed for each of the lighting areas A13 to A18 constituting the LED bar 625c. The correction position counter 223s is updated one by one in the lighting setting process for setting and correcting the lighting states of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18 (see S2912 in FIG. 158).

The initial set flag 223t is set to light the first lighting areas A1 to A18 after the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) configured to imitate the roulette wheel starts the rotation operation in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect". A flag that indicates whether the state setting has been completed. If this initial setting flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has been executed after the start of the rotation operation, and if it is off, the setting of the first lighting state has not been executed. Means that. During the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625, the initial set flag 223t is referred to, and when the initial set flag 223t is off, all the lights are turned on when the origin position of the rotation of the rear LED 625 is reached. The lighting state of the areas A1 to A18 is set. On the other hand, when the first set flag 223t is on, it means that the setting of the first lighting state has already been executed, so that the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn and the arrangement of one of the LED bars is corrected. Every time it matches the section RA, the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected. For this initial set flag 223t, it is detected that the arrangement of the rear LED 625 is at the origin position (the output of the origin sensor is H) after the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", and each lighting area. It is set to ON when the lighting state of A1 to A18 is set (see S2908 in FIG. 158). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of "Renso mode suggestion effect".

The rotation position storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the current arrangement of the rotation member 640. In the rotation position storage area 223u, every time it is detected that any pocket is arranged at the drop position based on the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 during the rotation of the rotation member 640. Information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is stored in (S2803 of FIG. 157). Based on the information stored in the rotation position storage area 223u, the current arrangement of the rotation member 640 can be specified while the rotation member 640 is rotating.

The swing undetected flag 223v is a flag indicating whether the sphere B has been detected at least once by the sphere detection sensor 679 after the swing effect has started. If the swing undetected flag 223v is on, it means that the sphere B has never been detected by the sphere detection sensor 679. On the other hand, if the swing non-detection flag 223v is off, it means that the sphere B is detected at least once by the sphere detection sensor 679 during the execution of the swing effect.

As described above, in this control example, the cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation of the sphere B is determined based on the time interval in which the sphere detection sensor 679 detects the sphere B during the execution of the swing effect, and the cycle is sufficiently long. It is configured to allow the ball B to fall when it becomes shorter (the cycle becomes 1 second or less). However, when the sphere B is detected first by the sphere detection sensor 679, the previous detection result does not exist and the time interval cannot be calculated. Therefore, in this control example, whether or not the swing undetected flag 223v is provided and the passage of the sphere B has already been detected by the sphere detection sensor 679 once or more (whether the cycle can be determined from the previous detection result). Is determined, and the cycle of the swinging operation of the ball B is determined only when the ball detection sensor 679 is off. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B.

The swing non-detection flag 223v is set to ON based on the fact that the ball B has been thrown by the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 during the execution of the “renso mode suggestion effect” (see S3507 in FIG. On the other hand, the swing undetected flag 223v is set to off based on the detection of the passage of the sphere B by the sphere detection sensor 679 in the on state (see S1704 in FIG. 146).

The swing timer 223w is used to measure the time interval in which the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679 when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677. The initial value of the swing timer 223w is set to 0, and the value is counted up by 1 each time the swing effect process for executing various settings during the swing effect is executed (see S1707 in FIG. 146). .. Since this rocking effect processing (see FIG. 146) is a processing executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the rocking timer 223w Update is also executed in 1 millisecond units. On the other hand, the value is reset every time the passage of the sphere B is detected by the sphere detection sensor 679 (that is, the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 becomes H) (see S1704 and S1710 in FIG. 146). The swing timer 223w determines the cycle (amplitude) of the swing operation, and when the cycle becomes sufficiently small (after the cycle becomes 1 second or less), the sphere B is dropped, so that the sphere B naturally becomes. It can make you feel as if you are falling. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be suspicious that the swinging motion of the ball B is controlled, so that the player can enjoy the swinging motion of the ball B more.

The designated pocket storage area 223x is a hit symbol in the “normal mode” (see FIG. 91 (a)), a “preparation mode” notification symbol in the jackpot (see FIG. 92 (b)), and a hit pocket position in the roulette chance effect (FIG. This is a storage area in which information corresponding to the lucky number (hit pocket) used as 95 (b)) is stored. According to the information stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is used for displaying the lucky number in the "normal mode" (see Ds2 in FIG. 90A), controlling the lighting of the hit pocket, and the like. The player can select the five types of lucky numbers.

Here, the lucky number can be selected by the player from the displayed game menu screen by pressing the frame button 22 when the fluctuation is stopped, for example. Specifically, one of the items on the game menu screen is the selection of a lucky number. Then, on the lucky number selection screen, five numbers can be selected from the 30 types of numbers shown in each pocket (divided member DV). In the designated pocket storage area 223x, information corresponding to the five types of numbers selected on the lucky number selection screen is stored.

When the lottery result of the special symbol in the "normal mode" is displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 based on the stored contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x, it is stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x. The display content is determined according to the lucky number. That is, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, four of the five types of lucky numbers are selected and controlled so that one type is displayed for each display unit 331a to 331d (FIG. 163). See S3408). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, at least one of the display units 331a to 331d is controlled so that the out-of-lot number other than the lucky number is displayed (see S3407 in FIG. 163).

In addition, when the jackpot type shifts to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot, one type of lucky number that was not displayed for each display unit 331a to 331d at the time of the jackpot notification is the notification of the "preparation mode". It is set as a number and is controlled so as to be displayed to the effect unit a during the jackpot. Furthermore, in the "renso mode suggestion effect" that is executed when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode", the pocket corresponding to the lucky number selected by the player is first hit based on the stored contents of the designated pocket storage area 223x. Is set as (S3102 in FIG. 160).

In this way, the lucky number specified (selected) by the player is the notification of the jackpot in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" during the jackpot, and the "renso mode" in the "renso mode suggestion production". It is commonly used for notifications, which are advantageous for three types of players. As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting the lucky number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The addition counter 223av is a counter for counting the total number of additional winning pockets in the "addition effect" (see FIG. 96A) executed in the normal mode. The addition counter 223av is added one by one when the "addition effect" is set (see S2312 in FIG. 152). At the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the hit pocket is added by the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) based on the count value of the addition counter 223av.

The effect timer 223bv is a timer that measures the elapsed time from the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. The initial value of the effect timer 223bv is set to 0, and the value is counted up by 1 each time the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect". (See S2007 in FIG. 149). Since the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed every 1 millisecond, the effect timer 223bv is counted up in 1 millisecond units. For example, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is 1000, it means that 1 second (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed from the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect". Whether or not the effect time has ended is determined according to the value of the effect timer 223 bv, and the effect mode is switched. That is, the lucky number increase effect in the "renso mode suggestion effect" is switched to the roulette chance effect, and the roulette chance effect is switched to the ending effect (S2004, S2008: Yes in FIG. 149). For the sake of simplification of the explanation, in the following description, the lucky number increase effect is simply referred to as "increase effect".

The increase effect in progress flag 223cv is a flag indicating whether or not the increase effect is being executed. If the increase effect flag 223cv is on, it indicates that the increase effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the increase effect is not being executed. The flag 223cv during the increase effect is notified of the transition to the "preparation mode" in the state command output from the main control device 110 after the jackpot ends (1 or 7 is set to the value of the time saving state counter by the state command). (See S3006 in FIG. 159). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the increase effect (start of the roulette chance effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the "renso mode suggestion effect"). If so, it is set to off.

The roulette flag 223dv is a flag indicating whether or not the roulette chance effect is being executed. If this roulette 223dv is on, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the roulette chance effect is not being executed. The roulette flag 223dv is a value at which the value of the effect timer 223bv indicates the start timing (end of the increase effect) of the roulette chance effect (that is, the counter value indicating 20 seconds after the start of the "renso mode suggestion effect"). When it is determined that the value is (see S2005 in FIG. 149). On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the roulette chance effect (start of the ending effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the "renso mode suggestion effect"). If so, it is set to off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

The rocking effect flag 223ev is a flag indicating whether or not the rocking effect is being executed. When the rocking effect flag 223ev is on, it indicates that the rocking effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the rocking effect is not being executed. This swing effect flag 223ev is the drive timing of the pitching device 650 during the execution of the roulette chance effect, and is set to ON when the ball B is thrown (see s3505 in FIG. 164). In this control example, the drive timing of the pitching device 650 is set to be 50 seconds after the start of the "roulette chance effect". On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is a value indicating the end timing of the roulette chance effect (start of the ending effect) (that is, a counter value indicating 85 seconds after the start of the "renso mode suggestion effect"). If so, it is set to off (see S2009 in FIG. 149).

The ball dropable flag 223fv is a flag indicating whether or not the ball B can be dropped into any pocket when the ball B is swinging on the upper part of the holding piece 677. .. If the ball dropable flag 223fv is on, it means that the ball B can be dropped, and if it is off, it means that the ball B is restricted from being dropped. To do. In this control example, when the momentum of the sphere B performing the oscillating motion is weakened and the period (amplitude) of the oscillating motion becomes a predetermined cycle (1 second) or less, the sphere B may be dropped. It is determined that the state is possible, and the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S1711 in FIG. 146). Further, it is set to off when the drop of the sphere B is set (see S1807 in FIG. 147).

The winning counter 223gv is a counter that counts the number of winning balls for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a in the jackpot. The value of the winning counter 223 gv in the jackpot (probability variation jackpot B to D, normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected. The number of balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 82a is counted based on the above, and a match with the number of balls discharged through the second passage forming member 422 is determined. Then, when the number of winnings and the number of dischargings match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the first passage forming member 520 is passing, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a is surely transferred to the second passage forming member 422. It can be made to flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a problem such as a short circuit in the wiring or the circuit. The initial value of the winning counter 223gv is set to 0, and one is added to the value each time a large opening winning command for notifying the winning of a ball is received (see S2413 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, it is determined that the number of winnings and the number of dischargings match, and when the disconnection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

The discharge counter 223hv is used at the jackpot (probability variation jackpot B to D, normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected. 2 It is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the passage forming member 422. The value of the discharge counter 223hv is compared with the value of the winning counter 223gv described above in the ending period of the jackpot. Then, when the values match, the disconnection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set. The initial value of the discharge counter 223hv is set to 0, and a value is added by 1 each time the discharge of a sphere is detected (passage of the sensor member 422c is detected) (see S1902 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, it is determined that the number of winnings and the number of dischargings match, and when the disconnection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is set, it is initialized to 0 (S2505 in FIG. 154). reference).

The power off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). Since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (for example, 100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 142) (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 142), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (for example, 100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 142). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 150) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, on the output side of the output port 239, the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300, and the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected.

The pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the lottery probability of the special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 includes a third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit) based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. It controls the display contents of the 331 and the effect unit 422a). The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115. Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes the setting instruction of the instruction pointer 231a, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). ing.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is diversified and complicated by using the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The production can be easily performed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). , MPU231 is connected via bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 uses the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 for the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 or for normal use. Transfer to video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, A second program storage area 234a1 for storing fixed value data for driving the effect unit 331 and the effect unit 422a), a third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit). It has at least a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed in 422a).

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, it is possible to diversify and complicate the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). it can.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed in the effect unit 422a), the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. It is possible to process in parallel with the process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) can be executed. Yes, the MPU231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory 234a in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There is a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, And the control of the effect unit 422a) can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) executed after the boot process (see S3601 in FIG. 165) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (3rd symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on a third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) at a predetermined timing. DSP). The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol). The display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) display the image. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Parallel processing is performed within the image display time of one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and displays the image developed by drawing in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit). The process of displaying on 331 and the effect unit 422a) is executed.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image is drawn immediately and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Can be done.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) is provided. Can be kept high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the image data can be omitted, the image is drawn immediately and the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, The drawn image can be displayed on the effect unit 331 and the effect unit 422a).

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) from being in time.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) are unused for display processing, and the processing can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entry 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640a is detected. This fluctuation display (variation effect) based on the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is set to the game state (whether it is the "normal mode", the "preparation mode", or the "renso mode") when the power is turned on. Regardless, it is executed in the third symbol display device 81. By configuring the third symbol display device 81 to display both the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on, the parts displayed according to the type of the image (third symbol display device 81, effect unit). Since it is not necessary to discriminate between 331 and the effect unit 422a), the processing speed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further shorten the period from when the power is turned on until the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are displayed.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3603 and S3604 in FIG. 165).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 125 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 125 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 125 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is a "special symbol off", it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 125 (c) are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 126 is an explanatory view illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 126 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 126 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

As shown in FIG. 126, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 125 (a) and 125 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the above, the initial position of the back B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 124) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed. Further, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap the image data corresponding to the image between the position b'and the position b. Is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the effect unit 331. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 30 types of numbers (main symbols) with numbers "1" to "30", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the effect unit 331 performs the variation effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the effect unit 331 quickly starts the variation effect. be able to. Therefore, even though the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640a, the effect unit 331 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "1" to "30", a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a rear symbol and a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the effect unit 331 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the effect unit 331, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing it from the display image of the effect unit 331 without numbers.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). This is an area for storing image data that has not been created. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (3rd symbol display device 81 and the like) are read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information to the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a), the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) are transmitted. The process of displaying the image for one frame on 422a) is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. , The image for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the read one frame is read by the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The image of the minute can be displayed.

Then, an image for one frame is displayed in order to display the image on the frame buffer that develops the image for one frame and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The frame buffer from which the information is read is designated by the MPU 231 by alternately alternating between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively, every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Will be done.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b has a third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit) with the passage of time, as opposed to one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. The display data table that describes the display contents to be displayed in 422a), the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the display data table, and the transfer data information. This is the area where the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing is stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 will use the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b to display the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device). The display of 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) is controlled. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a), diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) based on a command from the main control device 110. One is prepared for each, and for example, a display data table corresponding to a variable effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is started by the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) when the display variation pattern command from the voice lamp control device 113 is received. It is a production. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is set to "0" for the effect unit 331 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numbers "9" is stopped and displayed, and the rear image of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the rear image for demonstration. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the effect unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table is the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example). Corresponds to the address expressed as one unit, and the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) to draw sprites, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined. ing.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates of the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, as the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, four third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage" or "empty stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from the backs A and B, the back type also describes information for specifying which back image to display.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. Etc.) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information Information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the above is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the like) is started. Information indicating whether or not the image is) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 127). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device). It is displayed on 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331) can be simply replaced with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. , And the effect image to be displayed on the effect unit 422a) can be changed.

Here, like a conventional pachinko machine, every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) is changed, the MPU 231 executes the operation. When the program is configured to be started, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited because a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes complicated and enormous due to the diversification of the effect images. Therefore, there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable production images. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. In the pachinko machine 10, based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect) can be created in advance. This is because the effect to be displayed in the unit 422a) is determined. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize by the pachinko machine 10. This can only be realized based on the configuration that determines the production mode.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 128). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 128).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 128, in the example of FIG. 128). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 128, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (No. 3). 3 It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 165) (see S3605 in FIG. 165). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the image transfer process. , Is set to off (see S5205 in FIG. 176 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3901 in FIG. 167 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 167 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See S3909 in 167 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S5101 in FIG. 176 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d is a third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, etc.) in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing the display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed on the effect unit 422a). The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113. Then, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) display the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. ..

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 for each frame A drawing list (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 129) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 167 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4805 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one (see S5001 in FIG. 175).

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 129), the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily display the effect on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Can be changed. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. This drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 127, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (design 1). , Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., For each sprite such as an error pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is an effect of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is a counter that counts time. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. In this time data, the effect time is the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) (20 milliseconds in this control example). It is the value divided by.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 167 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4807 in FIG. 173). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5402 in FIG. 178).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display). By transferring the image information to the device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a), the image information is transferred to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Execute the display process to display the image.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S3906 in FIG. 167 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b is read out to the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). It is a flag. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S4601 in FIG. 172 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 177), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S5310 in FIG. 177). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 172 (a). ) S4602). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (see S4821 in FIG. 173), and is other than the demo display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. See S4506 in 171). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 173) (S4814 in FIG. 173), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S4106 in FIG. 169 (a), S4305 in FIG. 170 (a), S4405 in FIG. 170 (b), FIG. See S4506 in 171). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently in progress.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 130 to 141. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then started up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 999,999,99,239, respectively, they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). The details of this special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132.

After executing the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105) accompanying the passage of the ball at the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640a is executed. The details of this start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process that performs the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the through gate passage process (S107), which performs the process associated with the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, is executed. The details of this through-gate passing process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136. After executing the through-gate passage process (S107), the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), and the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the symbol performed by the effect display units 331a to 331d.

In this special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 131, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot game (S201). As for the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect display units 331a to 331d are displaying the jackpot of the first special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol). , During a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the first special symbol is included. If it is determined that the current is the jackpot of the first special symbol (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202).

If it is determined in the processing of S202 that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not being performed (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N of the special symbol 1) is acquired (S202: No). S203), it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, if the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c (S204: Yes). S205), a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c changed by subtraction is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

If the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S210), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S209 that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S209: Yes), the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are stopped. The display mode corresponding to (S211) is set. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 132. When this special symbol 1 fluctuation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot type (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is determined.

After the processing of S211 is completed, when the variable display being executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol 1 variation start processing (this lottery result). ) Is a jackpot for a special symbol (S212). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of the first special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f and the time saving flag 203g are set to off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is initialized to 0 (S213). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S214), and the process proceeds to the process of S218. When the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed, it branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command. Is set. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is larger than 0 (S215), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is from 0. If it is large (S215: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S216), a status command for notifying the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h after the subtraction is set (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. To do. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the hitting state storage area 223q according to the game state notified by the state command. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S215: No), the processes of S216 and S217 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 132, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S208). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol 1 variation process (see FIG. 131) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol are performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. (S301).

Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is undergoing the probability change of the special symbol (S302). If it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probabilistic change of a special symbol (that is, the probability change flag 203f is on) (S302: Yes), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table 202a for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, 41 random numbers of "500 to 540" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random number values of these hits. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not undergoing probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the first special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). .. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 40 random number values stored in the first big hit random number table 202a for low probability one by one. As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the big hit random numbers of the first special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that hit these If they match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol 1, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the current jackpot type is specified (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the hit type selection table 202b1 for special figure 1, and the jackpot of eight kinds of special symbols is compared. It is determined what type of jackpot is among (probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot G, normal jackpot A). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0-4", it is determined that it is the probability variation jackpot A (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "5 to 84", it is determined. It is determined that the probability variation jackpot is B (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "85-274", it is determined that it is the probability variation jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "275-774", it is determined. It is determined that the probability variation jackpot is D (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "775-804", it is determined that it is the probability variation jackpot E (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "805-874", it is determined. It is determined that the probability variation jackpot is F (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "875-974", it is determined that it is the probability variation jackpot G (2R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "975-999", it is determined. It is determined that it is a normal jackpot A (2R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 107).

In the processing of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed according to the determined jackpot type (any of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot G and the normal jackpot A). Set. Further, the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot G, normal jackpot A) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e (S307), and the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S308). After that, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S309), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S310). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S310, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110 (b)), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Determine (variation time).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is out of order (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of order is set (S311). In the process of S311, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set to the display modes corresponding to the outlier symbols, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is set. Based on the value of, the stop type to be displayed in the effect unit 331 is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S312). Here, the display times of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect unit 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S310, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( Fluctuation time) is determined.

When the processing of S310 or the processing of S312 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S310 or the processing of S312 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S309 or S311 is set (S314). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 139). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114 (S315). When the processing of S315 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol 1 variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640a. , This is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the held values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball slot 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N) of the ball counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c after addition is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. Special symbol 1 Stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

After the processing of S406, each value of the look-ahead probability changing flag 203m and the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Based on the above, the winning / failing of the special symbol lottery, the stop type and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (look-ahead) (S407), and the winning information command including the predicted winning / failing of the special symbol lottery, the stop type and the fluctuation pattern is set ( S408). Next, in the process of S408, it is determined whether or not the lottery of the predicted (look-ahead) special symbol is a probabilistic jackpot (S409), and if the prediction (pre-reading) of the lottery of the special symbol is a probabilistic jackpot (S409). : Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S413.

On the other hand, in the processing of S409, if the winning or failing of the predicted special symbol lottery is not a probabilistic jackpot (S409: No), then it is determined whether or not the predicted special symbol lottery is a normal jackpot (S411). If the predicted success or failure of the special symbol lottery is a normal jackpot (S411: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing flag 203m is set to off (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. Further, in the process of S411, if the predicted success or failure of the special symbol lottery is not a normal big hit (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S413.

In the process of S413, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640a (S413). If there is no prize in the second entrance 640a (S413: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball opening 640a (S413: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the winning (ball winning) in the second ball opening 640a has been detected. Special figure 2 A winning command is set (S414). The special figure 2 winning command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 winning command during the execution of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to increase the lucky number (winning pocket).

When the processing of S414 is completed, then, the special symbol 2 winning process for executing the lottery of the special symbol 2 based on various counter values (random values) acquired based on the start winning of the second entrance 640a. (S415) to end this process and return to the timer interrupt process. The details of the special symbol 2 winning process (S415) will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 winning process (S415). As described above, the special symbol 2 winning process (FIG. 134, S415) is based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area when the starting winning to the second entrance 640a is detected, and the "special symbol 2 winning process" is performed. A process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331 while performing a lottery (win / fail determination) of "big hit" or "out of special symbol". Is.

In the special symbol 2 winning process, first, it is determined whether the current display mode is changing (S501), and if it is determined that the current display mode is changing (S501: Yes), this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not changing (S501: No), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether the value is 0 (S503). ). If it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S503: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S503: Yes), each counter (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop). The value of the type selection counter C3) is stored in the common execution area (S504). Next, with reference to the state of the probability change flag 203f, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change of the special symbol (S505), and the probability change of the special symbol is in progress (that is, the probability change flag 203f is on). If it is determined (S505: Yes), is it a big hit of a special symbol based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for high probability? The lottery result of whether or not is acquired (S506). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 41 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability one by one. As described above, 41 random numbers of "500 to 540" are set as the big hit random numbers of the second special symbol, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to hit these If they match, it is determined that the second special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S508.

On the other hand, in the process of S505, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not undergoing probability change (that is, the probability change flag 203f is off) (S505: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S504 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S507). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 40 random number values stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability one by one. As described above, 40 random numbers of "0 to 39" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values of these hits. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S508.

In the processing of S508, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol 2 acquired by the processing of S506 or S507 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S508), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S508). S508: Yes), the current jackpot type (see FIG. 108) is specified based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S504, and the state setting information corresponding to the specified jackpot type is used for the game. Read from the result setting table 202e (S509).

Next, the value of the read state setting information is stored in the state setting information storage area 203j (S510). After that, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S511), and the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S512). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S512, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 110 (b)), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Determine (variation time).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot determined in the process of S512 is a probability variation jackpot (S513), and if the determined jackpot is a probability variation jackpot (S513: Yes), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203m is set to ON. (S514), the process proceeds to S518. On the other hand, if the determined jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (S513: No), the look-ahead probability variation flag 203m is set to off (S515), and the process proceeds to S518.

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S508: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S516). In the process of S516, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set to the display modes corresponding to the outlier symbols, and the effect unit is based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the common execution area. Set the stop type to be displayed in 331.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S517). Here, the display times of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the effect unit 331 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S512, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d, and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( Fluctuation time) is determined.

When the process of S517 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S512 or the process of S517 is set (S518). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S511 or S516 is set (S519). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 139). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S519 is completed, the process returns to the start winning process.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 135), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S602), and the normal symbol is displayed. When it is determined that is not in the variable display (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 1 or more (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608). In the process of S608, if the time saving flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on or the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the effect unit 331 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is within the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239". , It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 110 (a)).

In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the second hit random number table 202c for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is "5", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 6 to 239", the normal symbol is out. (See FIG. 110 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it was determined whether the normal symbol was in the time saving state (S614), and it was determined that the normal symbol was in the time saving state (the time saving flag 203g was on, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203h was 1 or more). In the case (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S614, if it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S614: No), the process shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S619), and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (the time saving flag 203g is on, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more). If it is determined (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S619, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds. Set to (S621) to end this process. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball enters the second entry port 640a. It will be in a state where it is easy to do.

In the process of S602, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S602: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621, which will be described later, before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83 (not shown).

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). .. In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is displayed as a normal symbol (second symbol). ○ ”The symbol is set to be stopped (lit). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the loss is set by the process of S618, the second symbol display device 83 (not shown) is displayed as a normal symbol (second symbol). The "x" symbol is set to be stopped (lit). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S613 and the process of S618. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S624). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is set (S625). When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 139) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 138), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S914. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S914 in this case as well.

In the process of S905, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907). : No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S914 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 139, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S914, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S914). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. .. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S915, S916) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S915, S916) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S915, S916) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S915, S916), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S915), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S916). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the processing of S910, each value of the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, the time saving medium counter 203h and the state storage area 203k is read (S910), and the read probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, the time saving medium counter 203h and the state storage area 203k are read. A state command is set based on each value of (S911). The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. By receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of turning on the power (whether it is a probabilistic state of a special symbol, whether it is a big hit, etc.). As a result, it is possible to specify the types of accessories that can be operated in the origin return operation and the initial operation, and to execute the effect corresponding to the state.

When the processing of S911 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are allowed to execute various effects (S912), and interrupts are permitted (S912). S913), the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 130), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 130) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 131) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 133) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the ending command, etc. set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 140) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first A jackpot control process for opening or closing the 1 variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the round ends. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 135), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, the variation pattern is formed by the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). When is set, the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the process of S310 or S312 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 132) and the process of S512 or S517 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134) are performed. When the fluctuation time corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the processing of S309 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 132) is terminated. Alternatively, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the processing of S311 and the processing of S511 or the processing of S516 of the special symbol 2 winning process (see FIG. 134). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 executes a variable display in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 135), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 135) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), it means that the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the remainder until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 255 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 137 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. In this process when the power is cut off, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (payout control device 111 or voice lamp control device 113). Etc.) (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S901 in FIG. 138). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first variable prize is won. This is a process for executing open / close control of the device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a.

In this jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S214 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 131) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), "01H" indicating that the opening period is set is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1102), and the opening command is set. (S1103), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a according to the jackpot type is opened. The pattern is set (S1106). Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is either a probabilistic jackpot B to D or a normal jackpot A, the opening pattern A (0) is used as the opening pattern of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a. If an opening pattern (opening pattern that repeats opening for 6 seconds and closing for 0.9 seconds 20 times) is set and the jackpot type is probabilistic jackpot EG, the first variable winning device (first large opening port) 82a As the opening pattern, opening pattern B (opening pattern in which opening for 0.052 seconds is performed only once) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is any of the probability variation jackpot A, the probability variation jackpot H to K, or the normal jackpot B, the second specific winning opening (second jackpot opening) 65a is set for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, an opening pattern is set that is opened (until 10 balls are won).

When the processing of S1106 is completed, next, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

After the processing of S1107, the state storage area 203k is updated according to the number of rounds (S1108), and this processing is terminated. Specifically, as described above, if the current round is one round of big hits, "02H" is stored in the state storage area 203k, and if it is two rounds, "03H" is stored. The reason why the updated value is not notified to the voice lamp control device 113 is that the voice lamp control device 113 is made to grasp the number of rounds started by the round number command set in the process of S1107. Because it can be done. Since the number of command outputs can be reduced, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (all two rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110), 04H is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1111), and this process is performed. finish. The ending command set in the process of S1110 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending (S1109: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1112: Yes), the state setting table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is read (S1113), and the current jackpot is notified. At the start of the variation display for the purpose, the state setting information stored in the state setting information storage area 203j is read out (S1114).

Next, from the read state setting table 202f, a combination of setting values (probability change flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) corresponding to the state setting information is read out (S1115), and the read setting value is read out as the probability change flag 203f, The time saving flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are set (S1116). As described above, in this control example, the state setting information selected from the game result setting table 202e is held during the jackpot, and the game state is set based on the held state setting information at the end of the jackpot. doing. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the game state after the big hit from the various counter values (random value) acquired at the time of starting winning, so the state setting information can be set to the state in which the various counter values are held. It can be limited to a short time until it is stored in the state setting information storage area 202j. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally obtained from the outside. Therefore, the timing at which the random value that becomes the jackpot appears is analyzed, and the fraudulent act of assigning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing is performed. It can be suppressed. Specifically, the analysis timing is set on the so-called hanging board, the random number is acquired at the timing when the random number value that becomes the jackpot appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling so as to judge the success or failure of the jackpot is suppressed. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, various set values (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, and time saving medium counter 203h) related to the game state after the big hit is displayed while the symbol for notifying the big hit is displayed. , It is configured to hold only the state setting information instead of holding it during the subsequent jackpot (privilege game state). Since it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the state setting information value instead of providing a storage area for temporarily storing all the various setting values in the RAM 203, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. can do.

After the processing of S1116, "00H" meaning that the jackpot is not being hit is stored in the state storage area 203k (S1117), and the gaming state after the jackpot (probability variation flag 203f, time saving flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, state). A status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the storage area 203k, etc.) is set (S1118), and this process is terminated. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the probability change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the hitting state storage area 223q according to the game state notified by the state command. To do.

In the process of S1112, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (special game state) (S1112: No), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a, or the second specific winning opening (second) The winning process for executing the control corresponding to the case where the ball wins the large opening) 65a is executed (S1119), and this process is terminated. The details of this winning process (S1119) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S1119). In this winning process (FIG. 141, S1119), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1201). The round validity period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, an opening pattern is set for the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It is a general term for the period that has been set and the interval period (3 seconds) after the end of the round. If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the round is out of the valid period (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1201: Yes), the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is entered. It is determined whether or not a winning is detected (S1202), and if it is determined that a winning is detected (S1202: Yes), the winning number counter 203i is added and updated (S1203), and the winning during the jackpot is controlled by the voice lamp. A large opening winning command for notifying the device 113 is set (S1204), and the process shifts to S1205. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine the number of winning balls based on the received large opening winning command.

Further, in the jackpot (probability variation jackpot B to D, normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are connected, this large opening is achieved. The number of balls that won the first variable winning device 82a was counted based on the number of winnings (value of the winning counter 223gv) grasped based on the mouth winning command, and was discharged via the second passage forming member 422. Matching with the number of spheres is determined. Then, when the number of winnings and the number of dischargings match, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the first passage forming member 520 is passing, so that the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 82a is surely transferred to the second passage forming member 422. It can be made to flow down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a problem such as a short circuit in the wiring or the circuit.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the winning of the first variable winning device (first large opening) 82a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 65a is not detected (S1202: No), S1203, and S1204 are skipped, and the processing is shifted to S1205. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203i is 10 or more (S1205), and if the value is 10 or more (S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1207. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203i is less than 10 (S1205: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1206). Here, the round time means the end time of the opening pattern set in the first variable winning device 82a or the opening time (30 seconds) set in the second specific winning opening 65a.

If it is determined in the process of S1206 that the round time has not elapsed (S1206: No), it means that the end condition of the round is not satisfied, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1206, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1207. This process of S1207 is executed when the upper limit number of balls wins the first variable winning device 82a or the second specific winning opening 65a (S1205: Yes), or when the round time has elapsed (S1205: Yes). S1206: Yes). That is, it is a case where the end condition of the round is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the end of the running round is set (S1207), the value of the winning number counter 203i is initialized to 0 (S1208), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 164. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1620 (see FIG. 145) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S1617: Yes in FIG. 145), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1620. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1620 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1620 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1620 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is judged to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S1308. ..

If the power-off processing flag is on in the processing of S1302 (S1302: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1620. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1305). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S1305, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1305: Yes). S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

After the processing of S1306, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed (see S1619 in FIG. 145). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing (see S1620 in FIG. 145) is executed, it is the current stand that the processing of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned on. This is the case where the raising process is started after the momentary power failure has occurred and the execution of the power off processing (see S1620 in FIG. 145) has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power cutoff flag 223y is set to off (S1310). , The process shifts to S1311. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and S1310, which is the process of setting the power off flag 223y to off, are skipped, and the process shifts to S1311.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that when the processing of S1308 is reached via the processing of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1311, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311), and then the interrupt enable is set (S1312). After that, the on-time state setting process for identifying the game state at the time of power-on is executed based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1313), and the accessory mutated from the origin position is moved to the origin position. The origin return process for returning to the original position is executed (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main process. The details of the on-time state setting process (S1313) and the origin return process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, respectively.

Next, the on-time state setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing this on-time state setting process (S1313). This on-time state setting process (S1313) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 142), and is a process for identifying the gaming state at the time of power-on as described above.

In the on-time state setting process (S1313), first, the probability change state flag 223n, the time reduction state flag 223o, the time reduction state counter 223p, and the hit are hit according to the state command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the state storage area 223q is updated (S1401).

As described above, the state command notifies each value of the probability change flag 203f, the time saving flag 203g, the time saving medium counter 203h, and the state storage area 203k at the time of turning on the power in the start-up process of the main control device 110. Is output (see S911 in FIG. 138). Based on this state command, in the process of S1401, the probability change state flag 223n is updated so as to match the state of the probability change flag 203f, and the time reduction state flag 223o is updated so as to match the state of the time reduction flag 203g. The time saving state counter 223p is updated so as to match the value of the counter 203h, and the hit medium state storage area 223q is updated so as to match the storage value of the state storage area 203k. As a result, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the gaming state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched in the start-up process.

Next, it is determined whether the stored value of the hit state storage area 223q after the update is a value indicating a big hit (S1402). Here, as described above, if "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, it indicates that it is the opening period of the big hit, and if "02H" is stored, it is a round of one round. It indicates that it is a period, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a round period of two rounds, and if "04H" is stored, it indicates that it is an ending period. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the current is not a big hit.

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is not a value indicating a big hit (that is, "00H" is stored) (S1402: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1403. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit state storage area 223q is a value indicating a big hit (that is, any one of "01H" to "04H") (S1402: Yes), then the hit is hit. It is determined whether or not "04H" indicating the end period is stored in the state storage area 223q (S1404).

In the process of S1404, if it is determined that the current ending period is in progress (S1404: Yes), a weight period of 1.5 seconds is set (S1405), and the process proceeds to the process of S1403. The weight period set here is set to delay the execution of the home return processing (see FIG. 144). By setting this weight period, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being executed and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 being released while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 does not enter the second passage forming member 422 but enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

More specifically, in the jackpot (probability variation jackpots B to D, and normal jackpot A) in which the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected, the connection is released during the ending period, and each accessory is used. Is configured to drive to the origin position. This drive to the origin position is executed after confirming that the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the value of the discharge counter 223 hv match in the ending period and no sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520. To. However, if the power is cut off during the ending period and the power is turned on again, the RAM 223 is initialized during the start-up process (see S1311 in FIG. 142), and the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the discharge counter 223 hv Since the value is also cleared, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not the sphere remains in the first passage forming member 520 when the power is turned on. Therefore, in this control example, when it is determined that the power is cut off and turned on during the jackpot ending period, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected to each other. Even if a sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 520, the sphere in the first passage forming member 520 can sufficiently reach the second passage forming member 422 for 1.5 seconds. It is configured to wait for the home return operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the origin return operation from being executed while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520 and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 being released. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 without entering the second passage forming member 422 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S1402: No), and in the processing of S1403 executed after the processing of S1405, the bits corresponding to all the accessories of the operable type storage area 223r are operated. Set 1 indicating the possibility (S1403), end this process, and return to the start-up process. By setting the value (1) indicating that all the accessories can be operated by the process of S1403, the origin return operation and the initial operation can be executed for all the accessories. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether all the accessories are in a state in which they can operate normally.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, if it is determined that the current is not in the ending period (a value other than "04H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1404: No), then the present is It is determined whether the opening period is in progress (whether "01H" is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406). In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the opening period is in progress (“01H” is stored in the hit state storage area 223q) (S1406: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member Each of the 422s is set to the connection position (S1407), and the process proceeds to the process of S1408. On the other hand, if the processing of S1406 is not currently in the opening period (S1406: No), the processing of S1407 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1408.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 142) is executed during the opening period, setting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 at the connecting position is the initialization of the RAM 223 in the start-up process (see FIG. 142). This is because the step counter 223e is initialized by (see S1311 in FIG. 142). Therefore, if the power is cut off during the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 during the opening period of the probabilistic jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A, the power is turned on again. Sometimes the arrangement of each member becomes unknown. Therefore, in this control example, the drive to the connecting position is set again regardless of the arrangement of each member. As a result, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be reliably connected during the opening period.

In the processing of S1408, in the operable type storage area 223r, the bit corresponding to the accessory (liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and left swing unit 500) set at the connection position is set to 0, and 1 is set to the other bits. Set (S1408) and end this process. As a result, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded from the targets of the origin return operation and the initial operation. Therefore, in the jackpot, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 can be excluded. Can be kept connected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being disconnected from the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the sphere is the first. It is possible to suppress a problem that the injection is ejected from the opening of the 1-passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the origin return process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the origin return process (S1314). This origin return process (S1314) is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 142) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the accessory that is mutated from the origin position at the time of turning on the power is set to the origin. This is a process for returning to the position.

In the origin return process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is in the weight period (S1501), and if it is in the weight period (S1501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. As described above, this weight period is set when the throw-in state setting process is executed during the jackpot ending period (see S1405 in FIG. 143), and the origin is while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is set to prevent the return operation from being executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, when it is determined that the current time is not in the weight period (S1501: No), the value stored in each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read (S1502), and the value is set to 1 bit. It is determined whether the origin sensors of the corresponding accessories are all in the H output state (S1503). When it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of at least one of the accessories corresponding to the bit having a value of 1 is in the L state (S1503: No), it corresponds to the origin sensor in the state of L An operation in the origin direction (origin return operation) is set for the accessory to be used (S1504). Then, in order to indicate that the home return operation is being executed, the home return flag 223i is set to ON (S1505), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, when it is determined that all the outputs of the origin sensor of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value in the operable type storage area 223r are 1 (S1503: Yes), the origin is restored. Since it is not necessary to execute the operation, the start of the initial operation is set (S1506), and the initial operation flag 223j is set to on to indicate that the initial operation is being executed (S1507). End the process.

By executing this origin return process (S1314), each accessory can be returned to the origin position, so that the subsequent initial operation can be started from the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1614 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1613. In the processing of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1602 to S1613 are mainly processing related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1614 and the variation display setting process of S1615 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1614 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1615 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1616 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1607 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the effect unit 331 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the effect unit 331.

When the process of S1610 is completed, the oscillating effect process of controlling the sphere B during the oscillating effect of oscillating the upper part of the holding piece 677 is executed (S1611). Next, the ball (discharged from the pachinko machine 10) that has passed through the second passage forming member 422 is detected, and the discharge detection process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1612). Next, the effect setting process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect" is executed (S1613), and the process proceeds to the process of S1614. The details of the swing effect processing (S1611), the emission detection process (S1612), and the effect setting process (S1613) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149.

In the process of S1614, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1614). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1615). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect (variation display) in the effect unit 331. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. Then, after the variation display setting process (S1615) is completed, the accessory operation setting process for setting the operation of each accessory is executed (S1616). The details of this accessory operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 164.

When the processing of S1616 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1617). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1617 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1617: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S1619), and the power is supplied. The disconnection process is executed (S1620). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1621), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1617 (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1618), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1618: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1618: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed. Therefore, the display contents on the effect unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81 do not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the swing effect process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing this rocking effect processing (S1611). This rocking effect process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, various controls are performed during the execution of the rocking effect. Be told.

In the rocking effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the rocking effect flag 223ev provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is on (S1701), and if the rocking effect flag 223ev is off (S1701: No). ), Since the rocking effect is not being executed, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S1701: Yes), then it is determined whether the swing undetected flag 223v is on (S1702), and the swing is not yet detected. If the detection flag 223v is on (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the output of the ball detection sensor 679 (see FIG. 103) is in the H state (S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the sphere B has passed the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679 provided in the upper central portion of the holding piece 677.

In the process of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is not in the H state (that is, the output is in the L state) (S1703: No), the ball passes in front of the ball detection sensor 679. Since it means that it has not been done, this process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S1703, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1703: Yes), the ball B is first thrown by the pitching device 650 and then the ball B is the ball detection sensor 679. Since it means that it was detected by, the swing undetected flag 223v is set to off, and the swing timer 223w is reset (S1704) to end this process. As a result, every time the ball detection sensor 679 detects the passage of the ball B, the cycle of the swing operation can be determined from the measured value of the swing timer 223w.

In the process of S1702, when it is determined that the swing undetected flag 223v is off (S1702: No), then it is determined whether the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the period (amplitude) of the swing operation performed by the ball B is sufficiently small, and the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied. Therefore, the drop control process (S1706) for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and controlling the fall of the sphere B is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the drop control process (S1706) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when it is determined that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is off (S1705: No), 1 is added to the value of the swing timer 223w (S1707), and then the output of the ball detection sensor 679 is performed. Is in the H state (S1708). If it is determined in the process of S1708 that the output of the sphere detection sensor 679 is not H (that is, the output is in the state of L) (S1708: No), the sphere B has not returned to the upper center of the holding piece 677. Since it is not possible to determine the period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1708, when it is determined that the output of the ball detection sensor is in the H state (S1708: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709). ). In the process of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is 500 or less (S1709: No), the period from the previous detection of the passage of the sphere B by the sphere detection sensor 679 to the detection of the passage again this time is It means that it is 500 milliseconds or less. That is, since it means that the swing cycle has been reduced to 1 second (500 milliseconds × 2) or less, the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (S1711), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1709, if the value of the swing timer 223w is larger than 500 (S1709: Yes), it means that the cycle of the swing operation performed by the sphere B is relatively long (the amplitude of the swing operation is large). If the ball B is dropped in this state, it may look unnatural. Therefore, the value of the swing timer 223w is reset without satisfying the dropping condition (keeping the ball drop enable flag 223fv off). Then (S1710), the process returns to the main process.

Next, the drop control process (S1706) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this drop control process (S1706). This drop control process (S1706) is executed in the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the drop control process (S1706), first, it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are all L (S1801). When it is determined that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S1801: Yes), the positions of the detected portions 641c and the detection sensors A to F are misaligned, and the rotating member. Since the arrangement of 640 cannot be specified, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that at least one output of the detection sensors A to F is not L (that is, at least one output is H) (S1801: No), the detection sensors A to A to Based on the output of F and the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), the pocket arranged at the drop position (immediately below the holding piece 677) is specified (S1802). Next, from the hit position storage area 223k (see FIG. 122), the pocket type (whether it is a hit pocket or a detached pocket) of the pocket that is placed in the drop position next to the pocket that is currently placed in the drop position. ) Is specified (S1803). Then, the specified pocket type is compared with the success or failure of this roulette chance (whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed) (S1804), and it is determined whether or not the comparison results match (S1804). S1805).

If the comparison results do not match in the process of S1805 (S1805: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the comparison results match (S1805: Yes), the ball B is set to fall after 100 steps (that is, the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position). (S1806), the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and this process ends. The 100 steps is the number of steps in which the holding piece 677 is driven to the immersion position 0.2 seconds before reaching the next pocket. This 0.2 second is set to be substantially the same as the falling time of the ball B that has fallen from the holding piece 677. As a result, the ball B can be put into the next pocket at the timing when the next pocket is arranged at the drop position.

As described above, in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in this control example, the pocket is determined to determine the type of the pocket to be arranged at the drop position, and the ball B is controlled to drop based on the determination result. It is configured to run before it is placed in. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing that allows the ball B to be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the drop position). Can be driven (immersed). Therefore, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target type of pocket. Therefore, the ball B hits and falls into the pocket even though it does not shift to the "renso mode", and conversely, even though the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B will be dropped into the next pocket, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position after 100 steps of rotation by the rotating member 640 regardless of the arrangement of the sphere B. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed in the immersion position at the timing when the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging motion. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion is determined each time the sphere B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The period of the swing operation can be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the 100 steps are reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the previous ball detection sensor 679 detected the passage of the ball B) is referred to, and for example, the latest swing stored in the RAM 223 is used. When it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the dynamic operation (for example, a value of 90% or more of the cycle of the latest rocking operation), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the cycle of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the cycle of the latest rocking operation, the holding piece 677 is immersed after waiting until the predetermined ratio is reached. It may be controlled to immerse itself in the position. With this configuration, when the sphere B is rolling toward the outer side (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is arranged near the end portion (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. When this is done, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing in the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the sphere B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in the other direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position until the ball B starts to fall can be shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

In this control example, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped with respect to the pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position, the rotation operation for 100 steps is executed. However, the structure is such that the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range in which the ball B does not fall into the pocket at the drop position and the pocket next to the two at the drop position, and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket at the drop position (for example, after 100 steps to 120 steps). It may be configured to drop randomly each time (within the range). With this configuration, the timing at which the sphere B falls can be varied, so it looks more natural (the action of the sphere B only by gravity) compared to the case where the sphere B is dropped at the same timing each time. The sphere B can be dropped as if it were falling.

Next, the emission detection process (S1612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 148. This emission detection process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and has passed through the second passage forming member 422 (pachinko machine) as described above. This is a process for detecting a sphere (discharged from 10) and performing corresponding control.

In the discharge detection process (see FIG. 148), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entering the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is detected (S1901), and if the ball entering is not detected (S1901:). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1901 that a ball has been detected in the second passage forming member 422 (S1901: Yes), the ball winning in the first variable winning device 82a passes through the first passage forming member 520. Since it means that the second passage forming member 422 has been normally reached, 1 is first added to the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S1902).

When the processing of S1902 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the discharge standby flag (not shown) is on. This discharge waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (discharge waiting period) set after all the rounds of the jackpot are completed in order to discharge all the winning balls to the first variable winning device 82a. is there. In the processing of S1903, when it is determined that the discharge waiting flag is off (S1903: No), it means that it is not the discharge waiting period, and it means that it is in the jackpot round period. Is set to execute the time-saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b)) that suggests whether or not is set (S1904), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1903, when it is determined that the discharge standby flag is on (S1903: Yes), the value of the winning counter 223gv is read (S1905), and the read value of the winning counter 223gv is the discharge counter. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of 223 hv (S1906). In the process of S1906, if the read-out value of the winning counter 223 gv does not match the value of the discharge counter 223 hv (S1906: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the discharge waiting period.

On the other hand, in the process of S1906, when it is determined that the value of the read winning counter 223gv matches the discharge counter 223hv (S1906: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are normally second. It means that it was discharged from the passage forming member 422. Therefore, the process for breaking the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is executed. Specifically, "01H" is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the table 222b6 for the specific ending (S1907), and an operation command for notifying the operation content according to the value of the operation pointer 223g is set. (S1908). Then, the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the value of the discharge counter 223 hv are reset to 0 (S1909), and this process is terminated.

By executing this discharge detection process, all the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a are discharged via the second passage forming member 422, and then the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage are formed. The connection (connection) with the member 422 can be released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a problem such as a short circuit in the wiring or the circuit.

Next, the effect setting process (S1613) in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 149. This effect setting process (S1613) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 145), and as described above, is a process for controlling various effects executed during the execution of the “renso mode suggestion effect”. Is.

In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the increase effect flag 223 cv is on (S2001), and if the increase effect flag 223 cv is on (S2001: Yes), the effect timer 223 bv is set to 1. (S2002), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (lucky number increase effect) (S2003).

In the processing of S2003, if it is determined that the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), the roulette chance effect is set (S2004), and the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is turned off. At the same time as setting, the roulette flag 223dv is set to on (S2005), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the processes of S2004 and S2005 are skipped, and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the increasing effect flag 223cv is not on (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the roulette flag 223dv is on (S2006), and it is determined that it is off. If this is done (S2006: No), it means that the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is not being executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the roulette flag 223dv is on in the processing of S2006 (S2006: Yes), the roulette chance effect (see FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b)) is currently being executed. Next, 1 is added to the effect timer 223 bv (S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect timer 223 bv after the addition is a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008). ).

If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the effect timer 223bv is not a timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the roulette chance effect. On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is the timer value indicating the end of the roulette chance effect (S2008: Yes), the roulette chance effect is ended and the "renso mode suggestion effect" is performed. First, the roulette flag 223dv and the swinging effect flag 223ev are set to off in order to set the ending effect of (S2009).

When the processing of S2009 is completed, next, in the roulette chance production this time, it is determined whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is notified (the ball B is hit and dropped into the pocket) (S2010). When the transition to "Roulette mode" (falling into the hit pocket) is notified (S2010: Yes), the display time of the ending image is displayed so that the ending image will continue to be displayed until the running jackpot fluctuation is completed. Is set (S2011), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2010, if it is determined that the transition to the "renso mode" is not notified in the current roulette chance production (S2010), then the deviation is notified in the current roulette chance production (disengagement). If it is determined whether the ball B has been dropped into the pocket (S2012) and the detachment has not been notified (the ball B has not been dropped into the pocket) (S2010: No), a roulette chance effect is produced. Since it means that the ball B has not been dropped (the result of the roulette chance production has not been notified) even though the end timing of the above has been reached, a problem such as a malfunction of the holding piece 677 occurs. It may be. Therefore, in this case, the error display is set by setting the display error command (S2013), and the present process is terminated. By executing the error display by the display error command, the clerk in the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Therefore, it is possible to promptly take appropriate measures such as repairs.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2012, if it is determined that the detachment has been notified (the ball B has been dropped into the detached pocket) (S2012: Yes), then whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner is determined. It is determined (S2014), if it is not changing (S2014: No), the display of the ending image is set to 5 seconds (S2015), and this process is terminated. At the end timing of the roulette chance production (85 seconds after the start of the "Roulette mode suggestion production"), the fluctuation stop state is the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode". This is the case when the fluctuation stops before is executed. Therefore, if a probabilistic jackpot is reached within the remaining number of time reductions after that, the mode shifts to the "renso mode" after the probabilistic jackpot ends. In this case, the revival roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115 (b)) is executed, and the ball B is controlled to fall into the hit pocket.

In the processing of S2014, if it is determined that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is currently being displayed (S2014: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation type is an outlier variation (S2016), and if the outlier variation is being executed. (S2016: Yes), the remaining time until the end of the disengagement fluctuation during execution is set as the display time of the ending image (S2018), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2016, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not out of alignment (that is, the jackpot fluctuation is being executed) (S2016: No), a revival roulette chance effect (see FIG. 115B) is set (S2017). , End this process. By executing this effect setting process (see FIG. 149), an appropriate effect can be executed in the "renso mode suggestion effect".

Next, the command determination process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1614). This command determination process (S1614) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In this command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2101). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2102), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this fluctuation pattern command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2103). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2103: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2104), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2105), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2103: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2106). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2106: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. A value (number of times of holding of variable display in the special symbol N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2107). Further, in the process of S2107, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S2107 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S2107 to the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S2107 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2106: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S2108). In the process of S2108, if the prize information command is received (S2108: Yes), the prize information command process for setting the effect according to the prize information is executed (S2109), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 152.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2108, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2108: No), then the command related to the jackpot (that is, the opening command, the number of rounds command, the large opening winning command, the ending command) It is determined whether any) has been received (S2110). If it is determined that a command related to a jackpot has been received in the process of S2110 (S2110: Yes), a hit-related command process for executing a process corresponding to various commands related to the jackpot is executed (S2111), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.

On the other hand, in the process of S2110, if the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not the execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (S2112). In the process of S2112, if an execution command is received (S2112: Yes), the progress of the operation of the accessory driven by the motor driver is determined according to the execution command output from various motor drivers, and the progress is made. Execution command processing for performing control according to (S2113) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of the execution command processing (S2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

On the other hand, in the process of S2112, if the execution command is not received (S2112: No), then it is determined whether the state command is received (S2114), and if the state command is received (S2114: Yes), The game state notified by the state command is determined, a state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S2115), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S2115) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

On the other hand, in the process of S2114, if the status command has not been received (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 winning command has been received (S2116). In the processing of S2116, if the special figure 2 winning command is received (S2116: Yes), the special figure 2 winning command processing for setting the corresponding effect according to the entry into the second entry port 640a is performed. It is executed (S2117), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described later with reference to FIG. 161.

On the other hand, in the process of S2116, when it is determined that the special figure 2 winning command has not been received (S2116: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command. Is executed (S2118), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command to be sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation pattern command processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern command processing (S2102). This variation pattern command process (S2102) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for identifying the variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command and setting the operation of the accessory. is there.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151), first, the variation start flag 223c is set to ON (S2201), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2202). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203), and if there is no accessory operation scenario (S2203: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2203, when it is determined that there is an accessory operation scenario (S2203: Yes), the corresponding accessory operation scenario is set (S2204), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the winning information command processing (S2109) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 152. This prize-winning information command process (S2109) is a process executed when a prize-winning information command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, a process for setting an effect according to the prize-winning information. Is.

When this winning information command processing (see FIG. 152) is started, first, the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are extracted from the received winning information command, and these are used as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233. Store (S2301). Next, each process of S2302 to S2313 for setting the additional effect (see FIG. 96A) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is executed. As described above, this additional effect is executed when the winning of the first ball opening 64 is suspended in the "normal mode", and the mode is changed to the "preparation mode" or the "renso mode" in the reserved ball. It is a production to make the player expect the transition.

The processing of S2302 to S2313 for setting the additional effect will be described more specifically. First, in the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is on (S2302), and if it is determined that it is on (S2302: Yes), the present is the "consecutive villa mode" ("" It means that it is not "normal mode"), and the additional effect is not executed regardless of whether the winning information is correct or not, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is off (S2302: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S2303).

In the processing of S2303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S2303: Yes), it means that the current state is the "preparation mode" (not the "normal mode"), and the winning information is correct or not. Regardless of, the additional effect is not executed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2303, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 0 (S2303: No), then whether or not the value of the additional counter 223av (additional number) is 3 which is the upper limit value. (S2304), and if it is the upper limit value, the present process is terminated as it is without setting the additional effect. In this control example, the upper limit of the number of additional numbers is uniformly set to 3, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the maximum number may be increased as the lottery result advantageous to the player is reserved. As a result, the more the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is reserved, the more the number of times the additional effect is executed is likely to be increased. Therefore, the more the additional effect is executed, the higher the player's expectation can be.

In the processing of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the addition counter 223av is less than the upper limit value (less than 3) (S2304: No), then each hold currently held from each area of the winning information storage area 223a. The winning information corresponding to the ball is read (S2305), and whether the read winning information includes (holds) any of the probabilistic jackpots B, C, E, F, and the normal jackpot A. Whether or not it is determined (S2306). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type that shifts to the "preparation mode" is reserved.

In the process of S2306, if it is determined that the jackpot that shifts to the "preparation mode" is not held (S2306: No), the jackpot type is out of the hold and the "preparation mode" is not given ("preparation mode" is not given after the jackpot. Since this is the case where only the "normal mode") is included, the lottery result which is disadvantageous to the player is reserved as compared with other cases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the additional effect based on the additional low probability table in which the ratio of the additional effect is determined is the lowest (that is, 5%) in the additional effect determination table 222d (that is, 5%). S2310), the process shifts to S2311.

On the other hand, in the process of S2306, if it is determined that the jackpot type that shifts to the "preparation mode" is reserved (S2306: Yes), then it is set after the jackpot type that shifts to the "preparation mode" ends. When it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot is held in the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) to be performed (S2307), and when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" is reserved (S2307: Yes), because it means that the transition to the most advantageous "renso mode" has been confirmed, the ratio of the addition effect to be determined is the lowest (that is, 25%) in the addition determination table 222d. Based on the low-probability table, it is determined whether or not to execute the additional effect (S2308), and the process shifts to S2311.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when the probability variation jackpot in the "preparation mode" (the time saving state of the normal symbol) is not reserved (S2307), only the "preparation mode" which is relatively advantageous for the player is available. Since it is fixed, the addition effect is executed based on the addition medium probability table (that is, 10%) between the low probability table and the high probability table in the ratio of the addition determination table 222d. It is determined whether or not to do so (S2309), and the process shifts to S2311.

In the process of S2311 executed after any one of S2308 to S2310 is executed, it is determined whether the execution of the additional effect is determined in the processes of S2308 to S2310 (S2311), and the execution of the additional effect is determined. If (S2311: Yes), 1 is added to the addition counter 223av (S2312), execution of the addition effect is set (S2313), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2311 that the execution of the additional effect is not determined (S2311: No), the processes of S2312 and S2313 are skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

By this winning information command processing (see FIG. 152), it is possible to change the ratio at which the additional effect is determined according to the content of the reserved ball. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, the extra effect is usually executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is held after the jackpot, so it is usually a jackpot (when the extra effect is not executed). You can have them play the game with a stronger expectation. This is because if it becomes a big hit, the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" will increase.

In addition, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). , It is possible to expect the production unit 422a to display the lucky number during the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode" is held at the time of executing the additional effect, the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed is compared with the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed. Since the execution rate of the additional effect is high, when the "preparation mode" is notified as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "renso mode" more than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the "renso mode". Therefore, by executing the additional effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation step by step, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the hit-related command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 153. This hit-related command process (S2111) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for performing the corresponding control when a command related to the jackpot is received. is there.

When this hit-related command processing (see FIG. 153) is started, it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2401), and if the opening command has been received (S2401: Yes), the probability change jackpot B It is determined whether the opening indicates the start of any of ~ D and the normal jackpot A (S2402). That is, it is determined whether or not the opening pattern A is set for the first variable winning device 82a.

In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the opening command is for any of the probabilistic jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A (S2402: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are inserted. In order to drive to the connecting position, "01H" is set for the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) (S2403). Then, the operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific opening table 222b5, an operation command for setting the read operation content in the motor driver is set (S2404), and processing is performed. It shifts to S2405. On the other hand, in the processing of S2402, when it is determined that the opening command corresponding to the jackpot different from any of the probabilistic jackpots B to D and the normal jackpot A is received (S2402: No), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 520 and the second. Since it is not necessary to connect the passage forming member 422, the processing of S2403 and S2404 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S2405.

In the process of S2405, in order to start the opening effect of the jackpot, a display opening command is set (S2405), this process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 150). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the display control of the opening effect so that the opening effect of the big hit is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the opening command is not included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received. If the number of rounds command is received (S2406: Yes), first, the number of jackpot rounds is extracted from the received number of rounds command (S2407). Next, it is determined whether the specified number of rounds is the first round (S2408), and if it is the first round (S2408: Yes), the operation pointer corresponding to the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)). It is determined whether or not the value of 223 g is "00H" (S2409). That is, it is determined whether or not the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 are in operation. When it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g is a value other than "00H" (S2409: No), the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 despite the end of the opening period. This means that the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is in operation. Since the opening period is set to a length sufficient for arranging each of the above-mentioned accessories at the connecting position, it is specified in the specific opening table 222b5 (see FIG. 119 (c)) at the start of one round. If the operation content is not completed, it is possible that the drive motor has stopped or slipped due to some abnormality, or that there is an abnormality in the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, in order to display the error image for notifying the error, a display error command is set (S2410), and this process is terminated.

By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk in the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred can be subjected to appropriate measures such as repair.

In the processing of S2408, when it is determined that the number of rounds extracted from the round number command is not the first round (that is, the second round) (S2408: No), and in the processing of S2409, the specific opening table 222b5 (FIG. 119). When it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to (c)) is "00H" (S2409: Yes), a display round number command for displaying the number of rounds extracted in the processing of S2408 is issued. After setting (S2411), this process ends.

Further, in the processing of S2406, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not the large open opening winning command has been received (S2412). If the large open mouth winning command is received (S2412: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 223 gv (S2413), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2412, if it is determined that the large opening winning command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S2414), and if the ending command has been received. (S2414: Yes), it is determined whether the ending is any of the probabilistic jackpots B to D, or the normal jackpot A (S2415). That is, it is determined whether the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are the endings of the jackpot type driven to the connecting position. Then, in the process of S2415, when it is determined that the ending is either the probability variation jackpot B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: Yes), the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 The connection disconnection determination process for disconnecting the connection (connection) is executed (S2416), and the process shifts to S2417. The details of this connection disconnection determination process (S2416) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2415, if it is determined that the ending is not either the probability variation jackpot B to D or the normal jackpot A (S2415: No), the processing of S2416 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S2417. To do. In the process of S2417, the display ending command is set (S2417), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the connection disconnection determination process (S2416) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154. This connection disconnection determination process (S2416) is a process for disconnecting (connecting) the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422.

In this connection disconnection process (see FIG. 154), first, the values of the winning counter 223 gv and the discharge counter 223 hv are read out (S2501), and it is determined whether or not these counter values match (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the read counter values match (S2502: Yes), all the balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a have reached the second passage forming member 422 (first passage). Since there is no sphere passing through the forming member 520), the processes of S2503 to S2505 for releasing the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are executed. ..

Specifically, "01H" is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the specific ending table 222b6 (S2503), and the operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read from the specific ending table 222b6. Then, an operation command for notifying the motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2504). Then, both the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the value of the discharge counter 223 hv are reset to 0 (S2505), and this process is terminated. In this way, after determining that the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has reached the second passage forming member 422, the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 ( By making the configuration to release the connection), it is possible to prevent the connection from being released while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the ball is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2502, when the value of the winning counter 223gv and the value of the discharging counter 223hv do not match (S2502: No), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger than the value of the discharging counter 223hv (S2506). ), If the value of the winning counter 223gv is larger (S2506: Yes), it means that a part of the balls that have entered the first variable winning device 82a has not reached the second passage forming member 422. In order to wait until the unreachable sphere reaches the second passage forming member 422, the discharge waiting flag is set to ON (S2507), and this process ends. By setting this discharge standby flag to on, it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223 gv and the value of the discharge counter 223 hv match each time the above-mentioned discharge detection process (see FIG. 148) is executed, and these are determined. When they match, the connection (connection) between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is released.

Further, in the processing of S2506, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter 223gv is equal to or less than the value of the discharge counter 223hv (S2506: No), the number or more balls that have won the first variable winning device 82a are in the second passage. Since it means that the material is discharged through the forming member 422, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in this case, in order to display the error image for notifying the error, a display error command is set (S2508), and this process is terminated. By displaying the error image by the error command, the clerk in the hall can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the abnormality has occurred can be subjected to appropriate measures such as repair.

Next, the details of the execution command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 155. This execution command process (S2113) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the progress of the operation set for each accessory. ..

When the execution command process (see FIG. 155) is started, first, 1 is added to the value of the step counter 223e of the accessory corresponding to the received execution command (S2601). Next, it is determined whether the home-returning flag 223i is on (S2602), and if it is on (S2603: Yes), it means that the home-returning operation is in progress. It is determined whether or not it exists (S2603). That is, it is determined whether or not all the accessories have returned to the origin position by the origin return operation. In the process of S2603, when it is determined that the origin sensor whose output is L exists (S2603: Yes), it means that the origin return operation of the accessory corresponding to the origin sensor has not been completed. This process is terminated as it is in order to execute the home return operation.

On the other hand, in the process of S2603, when it is determined that the outputs of all the origin sensors are in the H state (all the accessories have returned to the origin position) (S2603: No), the origin return operation is completed. Then, the start of the initial operation is set (S2604). This initial operation is executed in order to determine whether or not each accessory can operate normally by setting a predetermined operation for each accessory. As described above, the operation contents in this initial operation are defined in the initial operation table 222b7. That is, in the process of S2604, "01H" is set to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation table 222b7, and the operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read from the initial operation table 222b7 for operation. Set the command. When the process of S2604 is completed, the origin return flag 223i is set to off and the initial operation flag 223j is set to on (S2605) to end this process.

In the process of S2602, when it is determined that the home return flag 223i is off (S2602: No), then it is determined whether the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606). That is, if it is determined whether the initial operation is being executed and it is determined that the initial operation flag 223j is on (S2606: Yes), the initial operation process for executing the control according to the progress of the initial operation. (S2607) to end this process. Details of this initial operation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

If it is determined in the processing of S2606 that the initial operation flag 223j is off (S2606: No), then whether or not the execution command received this time is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotating unit 600. (S2608). That is, it is determined whether the command is an execution command for notifying that the rotation operation for one step of the rotating member 640 has been executed. In the process of S2608, when it is determined that the command is an execution command output from the motor driver of the rotation unit 600 (S2608: Yes), the rotation setting process for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation member 640 (and the rear LED 625) is performed. It is executed (S2609), a lighting setting process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 is executed (S2610), and this process is terminated. Details of the rotation setting process (S2609) and the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158, respectively.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2608, when it is determined that the execution command received this time is not the command corresponding to the rotation unit 600 (S2608: No), then the execution command received this time is used to correspond to the execution command. It is determined whether or not the number of operation steps set for the object has been reached (S2611). For example, when an execution command corresponding to the motor driver of the upper elevating unit 300 is received, the number of operation steps is calculated from the set operation scenario (upper elevating unit table 222b1) and the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the operation scenario. Is read. Then, if the value of the step counter 223e is equal to or greater than the operation step specified in the operation scenario, it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached.

In the process of S2611, when it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S2611: Yes), then 1 is added to the operation pointer 223g of the accessory (operation scenario) corresponding to the execution command received this time (S2612). ), The operation content corresponding to the pointer value after addition is read from the operation scenario table 222b (S2613). Then, an operation command for instructing the corresponding motor driver of the read operation content is set (S2614), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the initial operation process (S2606) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 156. This initial operation process (S2606) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the progress of the initial operation.

When this initial operation process (see FIG. 156) is started, first, the operation pointer 223 g corresponding to the operation scenario of the initial operation is read (S2701), and it is determined whether the end condition of the operation corresponding to the pointer value is satisfied. (S2702). For example, if the value of the current operation pointer 223g is "02H", it is determined that the end condition is satisfied when the upper elevating unit 300 reaches the descending position and the left swing unit 500 reaches the connecting position. (See FIG. 120).

In the process of S2702, when it is determined that the end condition of the currently set operation is not satisfied (S2702: No), then the initial operation is performed from the value of the current operation pointer 223g and the value of the step counter 223e. It is determined whether or not the number of abnormality determination steps specified in Table 222b7 (see FIG. 120) has been reached (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that the number of abnormality determination steps has not been reached (S2703: No), an operation for one additional step is set (S2704), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of abnormal determination steps has been reached (S2703: Yes), it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied even though the operation of a sufficient number of steps is set to satisfy the end condition. means. Therefore, there is a possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally, or that there is an abnormality in the communication between the motor driver and the drive motor. Therefore, in this case, by setting the display error command, the error display is set (S2705), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S2702, when it is determined that the end condition of the currently set operation is satisfied (S2702: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the initial operation (S2706). The value of each bit of the operable type storage area 223r is read out (S2707). Then, it is determined whether the data in the initial operation table 222b7 corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g after addition is END data (whether the initial operation is completed) (S2708), and the END data is read (initial operation is completed). If (S2708: Yes), the initial operation flag 223j is set to off, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2708, when it is determined that the initial operation is not completed (S2708: No), then it is determined whether the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g can be executed. (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the bit whose value is set to 1 in the operable type storage area 223r. In the processing of S2710, when it is determined that the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g can be executed (S2710: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223g after 1 is added by the processing of S2706. The operation content corresponding to is read from the initial operation table 222b7 (S2711), an operation command corresponding to the read operation content is set (S2712), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2710, when it is determined that the initial operation of the accessory corresponding to the value of the operation pointer 223g cannot be executed (the corresponding bit of the operable type storage area 223r is 0), it is determined (S2710: No). ), The process is shifted to S2706, and the processes of S2706 to S2710 are repeated until the value of the operation pointer 223 g corresponding to the accessory capable of performing the initial operation is reached.

Next, the details of the rotation setting process (S2609) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 157. This rotation setting process (S2609) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and is executed to control the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625) as described above.

When this rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) is executed, first, it is determined whether the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are all L (S2801), and all the detection sensors. If the outputs of A to F are in the L state (S2801: Yes), the arrangement of the rotating member 640 cannot be specified (all non-detection portions 641c are arranged outside the detection range of the rotation position detection sensor 684). This process is terminated as it is because it means that it is in the state of

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, when it is determined that any of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S2801: No), then the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is used. , The arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket at the falling position) matching the combination of outputs this time is specified by comparing with the rotating position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121) (S2802). Then, the rotation position storage area 223u is updated from the specified arrangement (S2803).

When the processing of S2803 is completed, it is next determined whether the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2804), and if it is off (S2804: No), it means that the condition for dropping the ball B is not satisfied. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2804 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2804: Yes), it is based on the arrangement stored in the rotation position storage area 223u and the storage content of the hit position storage area 223k. Then, the types of five pockets (whether they are hit pockets or detached pockets) are read out from the pockets at the drop position (S2805). Then, the types of the five read pockets are compared with the types of pockets in which the ball B is dropped in this roulette chance production (S2806).

When the processing of S2806 is completed, it is next determined whether the comparison results in the processing of S2806 are all inconsistent (S2807), and if it is determined that they are all inconsistent (S2807: Yes), the ball B is dropped. The rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (for example, 300 pps) because the pockets that can be formed are not arranged in the falling position while rotating by at least five pockets by the rotation operation (S2808). As a result, it is possible to shorten the time until the target pocket type is placed in the drop position, so that the ball B does not fall for a long time after the swing operation cycle is short (1 second or less). It is possible to prevent the rocking operation from continuing. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2807, it means that the pockets of the target type are arranged at the drop position by the time the pockets of the target type are passed by the rotation operation. Therefore, in this case, since the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance without changing the rotation speed, the process of S2808 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the lighting setting process (S2610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 158. This lighting setting process (S2610) is one process in the execution command process (see FIG. 155), and is a process for controlling the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 as described above.

When this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, it is first determined whether the initially set flag 223t is on (whether the lighting states of the lighting areas A1 to A18 have been set) (S2901). If it is off (S2901: No), then it is determined whether the output of the origin sensor (not shown) of the rear LED 625 is on (H) (S2902). That is, it is determined whether or not the LED bar 625a is arranged so as to match the correction section RA (see FIG. 100A) (S2902). If it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is off (L) (S2902: No), it is not the timing to set the lighting state, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2902 that the output of the origin sensor is ON (H) (S2902: Yes), a process for setting the lighting state for each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is performed. .. More specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is reset (S2903), and the rotation position determination table 222c is read out (S2903). Next, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified based on the combination of the read rotation position determination table 222c and the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 (S2905).

When the processing of S2905 is completed, next, the types of all pockets arranged in the range from the pocket at the current drop position to the pocket 5 before to the pocket 12 ahead are read from the hit position storage area 223k (S2906). ). That is, the type of the pocket arranged on the front side of each of the lighting areas A1 to A18 is specified. Then, the lighting position storage area 223m (see FIG. 123) is updated according to the type of each pocket read by the process of S2906. As described above, H is stored as data in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, and data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket. L is stored as. Based on the data (lighting data) stored here, the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which H is stored is set to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% (that is, lighting corresponding to the lighting rate of 100%). A control command is output), and the LED in the lighting area corresponding to the storage area in which L is stored is set to the off state with a lighting rate of 0%. When the processing of S2907 is completed, the value of the correction position counter 223s is initialized, and the initial set flag 223t is set to ON (S2908) to end this processing.

Further, in the process of S2901 when it is determined that the initial set flag 223t is on (S2901: Yes), the states of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18 are switched according to the progress of rotation of the rotating member 640 (correction). Execute the process for). Specifically, first, the value of the step counter 223e corresponding to the rotational operation of the rotating member 640 is 864 (that is, the number of steps for 1/3 lap from the origin position) or 1728 (that is, 2/3 from the origin position). It is determined whether it is the number of steps for one lap) (S2909). In the process of S2909, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223e is neither 864 nor 1728 (S2909: No), it means that the LED bars 625b and 625c are not in the state of matching the correction section RA. It is determined whether the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910).

In the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is off (S2910: No), the LED bar 625a also does not match the correction section RA (all of the LED bars 625a to 625c are correction sections. It does not match RA). Therefore, in this case, since the lighting state cannot be corrected (switched), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2910, when it is determined that the output of the origin sensor of the rear LED 625 is on (S2910: Yes), the step counter 223e of the rotation operation is reset to 0, and the process shifts to S2912. If it is determined in the process of S2909 that the value of the step counter 223e is 864 or 1728 (S2909: Yes), each process of S2910 and S2911 is skipped, and the process shifts to S2912.

In the process of S2912, the value of the correction position counter 223s indicating the type of the LED bar for which the lighting state is corrected (switched) this time is updated by 1 (S2912). Next, the rotation position determination table 222c is read (S2913), and the current rotation member is based on the combination of the read rotation position determination table 222c and the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684. The arrangement of 640 is specified (S2914). Then, from the hit position storage area 223k, the type of each pocket (whether it is a hit pocket or a detached pocket) arranged in the correction section RA is read (S2915), and the lighting position is stored according to the read pocket type. In the area 223m, the storage area corresponding to the LED bar indicated by the correction position counter 223s is updated (S2916), and this process is terminated.

By executing this lighting setting process (see FIG. 158), the lighting state of each lighting area A1 to A18 is corrected every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn (that is, in units of one LED bar). Can be done. That is, every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is sent to each pocket of the rotating member 640 generated by the rotation operation and the lighting area. It can be corrected according to the deviation of the correspondence with A1 to A18. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can see only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the miss pocket.

Next, the details of the state command processing (S2115) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 159. This state command process (S2115) is one process of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a process for executing various controls according to the state command received from the main control device 110.

In this state command processing (see FIG. 159), first, the probability change state flag 223n, the time saving state flag 223o, the time saving state counter 223p, and the hit state storage area 223q are updated based on the received state command (S3001). .. Next, it is determined whether the current state command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002), and if it is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: No), this process ends as it is. .. Whether or not the output is made at the end of the big hit is determined by, for example, the stored value of the hit-in-state storage area 223q. Specifically, when a new state command is received in the state where "04H" indicating the ending period is stored in the hit state storage area 223q, the state command output at the end of the big hit To determine. This is because the state does not change during the ending period of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3002, if it is determined that the status command received this time is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S3002: Yes), the value of the time saving status counter 223p after being updated based on the status command. Is greater than 0 (S3003). That is, it was determined whether the number of time reductions was 1 or 7 after the big hit, and it was determined that the mode was not changed to the "preparation mode" (the time reduction counter 223p is 0). In that case (S3003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S3003: Yes), the hit pocket distribution process (S3004) for determining the arrangement of the hit pockets is executed. The details of the hit pocket sorting process (S3004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 160.

After the hit pocket is set (determined) by the hit pocket distribution process (S3003), the start of the increase effect (see FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b)) is set (S3005), indicating that the increase effect is in progress. Therefore, the flag 223cv during the increase effect is set to ON (S3006). Then, by resetting the effect timer 223bv, the time counting of the effect period after the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is started (S3007), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the hit pocket distribution process (S3004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 160. As described above, the hit pocket distribution process (S3004) is a process for determining the arrangement of the hit pockets.

When this hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) is started, first, the five pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are read (S3101), and the read pockets are used as the hit pockets in the hit position storage area 22k. Set (S3102). That is, H is stored in the storage area corresponding to the read pocket.

When the processing of S3102 is completed, the value of the additional counter 223av is then read (S3103), and it is determined whether the read value of the additional counter 223av is larger than 0 (S3104). If it is determined that the value of the addition counter 223av is 0 in the process of S3104 (S3104: No), it is not necessary to increase the hit pocket, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3104, when it is determined that the value of the read additional counter 223av is greater than 0 (1 or more) (S3104: Yes), a hit pocket corresponding to the value of the additional counter 223av is additionally set ( In order to add), the processes of S3105 to S3110 are executed. Specifically, first, the hit pocket (hit position) is read out from the hit position storage area 223k (S3105), and it is determined whether or not there is a position where five or more hit pockets (hit positions) are continuous. (S3106).

In the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is a place where 5 or more hit pockets are continuous (S3106: Yes), other than one place before and after the place where 5 or more hit positions are continuous among the detached pockets. Select one additional position from the detached pocket (S3108), and shift the process to S3109. The reason why the addition of the hit pockets is restricted before and after the five or more consecutive points is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. That is, when it is detected that the cycle of the swinging motion of the sphere B is shortened at the timing when the hit pockets reach the continuous points during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying the disengagement, the hit pockets are continuous. You have to drop the ball B after passing the spot. Therefore, since the swinging motion cycle is short (the swinging motion is weakened) for a long time, the player may feel uncomfortable when the ball B does not easily fall. Therefore, in this control example, the number of continuous hit positions is limited to prevent the ball B from being unable to drop for a long time.

On the other hand, in the process of S3106, when it is determined that there is no place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3106: No), one additional position is selected from all the detached pockets (S3107). ), The process shifts to S3109. In the processing of S3109 executed after the processing of S3107 or S3108, the hit position storage area 223k is updated (S3109) so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position, and the value of the additional counter 223av is subtracted by 1 (S3110). , The process shifts to S3104 again. After that, each process of S3104 to S3110 is repeatedly executed until the value of the additional counter 223av becomes 0, and when the value of the additional counter av becomes 0, this process ends.

Next, the special figure 2 winning command processing (S2117) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 161. This special figure 2 winning command process (S2117) is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 150), and is a hit pocket when a ball enters the second entry port 640a during the increase effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to increase.

In this special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the increase effect flag 223cv is on (S3201), and if it is off (S3201: No), the increase effect is not in progress. This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is on (S3201: Yes), then the data of the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3202). Then, it is determined whether the number of hit pockets is 5, which is the upper limit value (S3203), and if it is the upper limit value (S3203: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the number of winning pockets is less than the upper limit value (S3203: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a winning reserved ball in the winning information (S3204). If there is no reserved ball for hitting (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot fluctuation is being executed (S3205). Then, when there is no reserved ball for winning and the jackpot fluctuation is not being executed (S3204: No, S3205: No), the addition is performed based on the addition low probability table in which the ratio of selection of the addition is 5%. (S3206), and the process shifts to S3208. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot holding ball exists in the processing of S3204 (S3204: Yes), and when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed in the processing of S3205 (S3205: Yes), the addition is added. Based on the addition high probability table in which the selected ratio is 25%, it is determined whether or not to perform the addition (S3207), and the process shifts to S3208.

In the process of S3208 executed after the process of S3206 or S3207, it is determined whether or not the addition is determined (S3208), and if the addition is not determined (S3208: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3208, if the addition is determined (S3208: Yes), the hit pocket (hit position) is read from the hit position storage area 223k, and five or more hit pockets (hit position) are continuous. It is determined whether or not the portion exists (S3209).

In the process of S3209, when it is determined that there is a place where 5 or more hit pockets are continuous (S3209: Yes), other than one place before and after the place where 5 or more hit positions are continuous among the detached pockets. One additional position is selected from the detached pocket (S3211), and the process shifts to S3212. The reason why the addition of the hit pockets is restricted before and after the five or more consecutive points is that if the hits are made too continuous, it may be difficult to drop the ball B naturally. That is, when it is detected that the cycle of the swinging motion of the sphere B is shortened at the timing when the hit pockets reach the continuous points during the execution of the roulette chance effect for notifying the disengagement, the hit pockets are continuous. You have to drop the ball B after passing the spot. Therefore, since the swinging motion cycle is short (the swinging motion is weakened) for a long time, the player may feel uncomfortable when the ball B does not easily fall. Therefore, in this control example, the number of continuous hit positions is limited to prevent the ball B from being unable to drop for a long time.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3209, when it is determined that there is no place where five or more hit pockets are continuous (S3209: No), one additional position is selected from all the detached pockets (S3210). ), The process shifts to S3212. In the process of S3212 executed after the process of S3210 or S3211, the hit position storage area 223k is updated so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position (S3212), and the added hit position is notified (FIG. 93 (b)). Refer to) and end this process.

By executing this special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161), a lottery (determination) is made as to whether or not the pocket is increased each time the ball enters the second entry port 640a during the execution of the increase effect. ), And if you win the lottery, you can increase the number of winning pockets. Therefore, since the ball can be positively launched aiming at the second entrance 640a during the execution of the increase effect, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the special figure 2 winning command processing of the first control example, the lottery probability of whether or not to increase the winning pocket is made different depending on whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed. However, the variation of the lottery probability may be further increased. For example, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed and when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" (the number of start prizes during the time saving state is the set time saving period. The probability (ratio) of determining the increase in the winning pocket may be different depending on whether the mode is less than the above) and the case where it is confirmed that the mode does not shift to the "renso mode". Specifically, for example, when the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed at the time of the lottery, there is a relatively high probability (for example, 25% of the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640a). If it is determined that the winning pocket (lucky number) will be increased by the ratio of) and it is confirmed that the mode will not shift to the "renso mode", there is a relatively high probability (for example, the second entrance 640a). It may be configured so that the hit pocket is increased at a rate of 5% when the ball enters the ball. In addition, when it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", the probability between the above two cases (for example, the ratio of 10% when the ball enters the second entrance 640a). It may be configured to increase the number of hit pockets. With this configuration, it is possible to have variations in how to increase the number of winning pockets, which further improves the interest in the lucky number increase production. Furthermore, it is undecided whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", for example. In the case of, the probability that the winning pocket is increased may be different according to the number of time reductions set as the "preparation mode". That is, when the "preparation mode" with one time saving period is set, the probability that the winning pocket is increased is lower than when the "preparation mode" with seven time saving periods is set. You may. More specifically, for example, the winning pocket (lucky number) may be increased at a rate of 8% when the time saving period is once and 12% when the time saving period is seven times. As a result, it is possible to predict the time saving period from the degree of increase in the hit pocket (lucky number), so it is possible to expect the transition to the "renso mode" by increasing the hit pocket. In addition, it is possible to expect a time saving period of 7 times, which is advantageous for the player (there are many chances to shift to the "renso mode").

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the variation display setting process (S1615) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1615). This variation display setting process (S1615) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the main control device is used to execute the variation effect in the effect unit 331. This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3301: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3306 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S3302), and then the fluctuation is performed in the processing of S2202 of the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 151). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from RAM 223 (S3303).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3304). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation effect so that the effect unit 331 performs the variation display of the symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3305). In the process of S3305, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S3306.

In the process of S3306, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3306). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3306: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3307), and then in the process of S2105 of the command determination process (see FIG. 150), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3308).

Next, the display number selection process for determining the display number displayed on the effect unit 331 is executed (S3309). Details of this display number selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

When the processing of S3309 is completed, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is generated, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. It is set to be transmitted to (S3310), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 causes the effect unit 331 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. The stop display is controlled.

Next, the details of the display number selection process (S3409) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 163. This display number selection process (S3409) is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162), and is a process for determining the display number displayed in the effect unit 331 as described above.

When this display number selection process (see FIG. 163) is started, it is first determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S3401). That is, it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is on or the value of the time saving state counter 223p is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S3401: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3401, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, it is in the "normal mode") (S3401: No), then the lucky number (big hit symbol) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x. ) Is read out (S3402), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S3403).

In the processing of S3403, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is out of order (S3403: No), three different numbers are randomly selected from 30 types of numbers (numbers assigned to each pocket P1 to P30). (S3404). Then, it is determined whether all the selected three types of numbers are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) defined in the designated pocket storage area 223x (S3405), and at least one of the at least three types of numbers is a lucky number. If it is determined that the numbers are different (S3405: No), one of the remaining 27 types of numbers excluding the three types selected in the processing of S3404 is selected as the stop symbol (S3406), and the book End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3405, when it is determined that all three types are lucky numbers (big hit symbols) (S3405: Yes), the remaining one type of number (symbol) is selected as an unselected number. Randomly select from among (S3407) to end this process. The four types of numbers (designs) selected in the processes of S3404 to S3407 are set as the out-of-order stop symbols displayed on the effect unit 331.

In addition, in S3403, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S3403: Yes), four kinds from five kinds of lucky numbers (winning numbers) read from the designated pocket storage area 223x are selected. Randomly select (S3408). Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a jackpot to which the "preparation mode" (time saving state of the normal symbol) is given (S3409), and if the "preparation mode" is not given (S3409: No), the jackpot is set. In the time saving suggestion effect (see FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b)), one type of number (notification symbol) displayed on the effect unit 422a is selected from the outlier numbers (S3410), and this process is completed. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, when it is determined that the jackpot is given the "preparation mode" (S3409: Yes), in the time saving suggestion effect in the jackpot (see FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b)), One type of number (notification symbol) displayed on the effect unit 422a is selected from the lucky numbers (winning numbers) (S3411), and this process is terminated.

By this display number selection process (see FIG. 163), five types of lucky numbers selected in advance by the player can be set as jackpot symbols. In addition, the lucky number selected by the player can be set as the notification symbol of the "preparation mode".

Next, the details of the accessory operation setting process (S1616) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 164. This accessory operation setting process (S1616) is one process in the main process (see FIG. 145), and is a process for setting the operation of each accessory as described above.

When the accessory operation setting process (see FIG. 164) is started, it is first determined whether or not it is the end timing of the weight period (S3501). This weight period may be set at the time of turning on the power, and as described above, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of turning on the power is the ending period of the jackpot, the start of the origin return operation is delayed. 1 It is set to ensure that the ball in the passage forming member 520 is discharged.

In the process of S3501, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the weight period (S3501: Yes), next, the origin return process for returning the accessory mutated from the origin position to the origin position is executed. (S3502), this process is terminated. Since the origin return process (S3502) is the same process as the origin return process (S1314) described with reference to FIG. 144, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the weight period (S3501: No), then it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of any of the accessories (S3503), and the accessory If it is not the operation start timing (S3503: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the accessory (S3503: Yes), then "01H" is set to the value of the operation pointer 223 g corresponding to the accessory to start the operation (S3504). ), The operation content corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is read from the table corresponding to the accessory that starts the operation this time in the operation scenario table 222b (S3505).

When the processing of S3505 is completed, it is next determined whether the operation of the pitching device 650 is read (S3506), and when the operation of the pitching device 650 is read (S3506: Yes), the swing undetected flag 223v and the swing By setting each of the effect flags 223ev to ON, it is indicated that the ball B has been pitched (S3507), and the process proceeds to S3508. As described above, the pitching device 650 is set to operate 50 seconds after the start of the roulette chance effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3506, if it is determined that the operation of the pitching device 650 is not read (S3506: No), the process of S3507 is skipped and the process shifts to S3508. In the process of S3508, an operation command is set based on the operation content read in the process of S3505, and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 178. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 165, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) in the display control device 114 is immediately performed. There is a problem that it may not be started.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the third symbol display device 81 and the like in the display control device 114 (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, And the control of the effect unit 422a) can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3601), and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and The display control device 114 is activated so that various controls for the effect unit 422a) can be executed.

Here, the boot process (S3601) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S3601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81 and the like. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on (the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3701). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S3702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3702, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S3703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S3704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S3601 in FIG. 165) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S3602 in FIG. 165) (S3705), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S3601) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 166, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3701 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3701 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S3702. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3703 to S3705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S3701. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S3702 and S3702, the processes of S3703 to S3705 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S3703 to S3705 may be executed without performing the processes S3701 and S3702. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 165. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image of a specific color is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image and execute a display process so that the image is displayed as a whole. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) first display an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) immediately after the power is turned on depends on the model of the pachinko machine. It is set to have a different color. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). ) Is displayed, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 can start and start normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3603). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3603, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S3604). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3604, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S3605). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 176 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S5102 in FIG. 176 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 125 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)). The determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 125 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time when the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S3605, interrupt permission is set (S3606), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (a). FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 167 (b). FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and After specifying the image to be displayed in the effect unit 422a), a drawing list of the image (see FIG. 129) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, whereby the image controller 237 is notified of the image. It instructs the execution of drawing processing and display processing.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. The command determination process (S3902) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a), and then the display setting process (S3903) is performed. Execute.

In the command determination process (S3902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172.

In the display setting process (S3903), the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit) is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3902) or the like. In 331 and the effect unit 422a), the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 173 to 175.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S3904). In this task process, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) specified by the display setting process (S3903) or the simple display setting process (S3909). Based on the content of the image for the next frame to be done, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified, and for each sprite, various types necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified. Determine the parameters.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S3905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S3906). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3905), which are determined in the task process (S3904), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3907). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S3907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the 81 etc. (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S3909) is executed to display S3904. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 168, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4001), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4001: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S3903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4002), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S4003).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4004), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4005), the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (a). FIG. 169 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S4101).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). During the process, the next fluctuation pattern command for display is received from the main control device 110, and another fluctuation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. The display of the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) is displayed by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received. Since it is controlled, the player can continue to see the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) without discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

Next, the data table determination flag is set to on (S4103). After that, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4104), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4105), set both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z to off (S4106), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 169 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4105 is updated and set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101. The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified, and at the same time, The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is preliminarily stored. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4104, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. When it is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). To control the stop display setting.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 168. In the processing of S4004, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4006). If there is a stop type command for display (S4006: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4007), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4007) will be described with reference to FIG. 169 (b). FIG. 169 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S4201), and the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 167 (b)). Compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time is executed, the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). The later stop symbol is finally set (S4202).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S4203), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, And as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed in the effect unit 422a), offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S3904), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4203, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S4201, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4202.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol) actually, even if the "special symbol is out of order" is set. The display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a) display a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot", and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot". This may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol). Even if the completely off stop symbol is displayed on the display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a), the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4006, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4006: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4008), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command command (S4008: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S4009), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (a). FIG. 170A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4301). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4302), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S4303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S4305), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 168, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4008, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S4008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4010), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S4010: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4001.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4011) will be described with reference to FIG. 170 (b). FIG. 170B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S4401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4402).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S4404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S4405), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 168. In the processing of S4010, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S4010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S4012), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S4012: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S4013), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S4013) will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S4501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

Next, the data table determination flag is set to on (S4503). After that, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4501). S4505). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S4506), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 168. In the processing of S4012, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S4012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4014), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S4014: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4015), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4015) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (a). FIG. 172 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on. (S4601). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear image discrimination flags 233x are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S4602), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S4601 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S4602. Identify. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S3904), when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S4602 is specified. From 233x, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 168. In the processing of S4014, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4014: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4016), and there is an error command. If (S4016: Yes), the error command process is executed (S4017), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4017) will be described with reference to FIG. 172 (b). FIG. 172 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4702), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4701, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4702 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4702 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 168. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S4016 (S4016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4018), and the process returns to the process of S4001.

In the processing of S4001 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4001: Yes). ), The processing of S4002 to S4018 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4001 to S4018 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3908) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 125 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 169 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 169 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S4101, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4102, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S3903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 173, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4801), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4801: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S4802 to S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4801: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4802), S4803 to S4804 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4803). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4803: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4804).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). First, the error warning image corresponding to all the error discrimination flags set to be turned on is displayed with reference to the error discrimination flag, such as the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). ) Is expanded (S4901).

In the task processing (S3904), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4901, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 173. After the warning image setting process (S4804) or in the process of S4803, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4803: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4805.

In S4805, the pointer update process is executed (S4805). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5001). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S5001, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S5002). As a result, if it is End information (S5002: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S5003), and if it is a demo display data table (S5003: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S5004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S5005), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) can be expanded. ) Can display the demo effect repeatedly.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5003, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S5003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S5003: No). S5006), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S5002: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 173 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S4806 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4808). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4808: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S4808: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S4809).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on (S4809: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4810), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4811). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4813). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4814), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4815), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is set to the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third) in accordance with the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit) can be easily obtained. The effect displayed on 422a) can be changed to a final display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4815 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) in the next variation effect. It is used to identify the third symbol to be used. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S3904), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4815, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4809, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S4809: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S4816). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S4816: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S4817) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4818). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4820), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4821), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81 or the like) is automatically generated. 3 The drawing contents can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a).

In the process of S4816, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S4816: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a).

The simple display setting process (S3909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 125 (b) and (c)) to be stopped and displayed, is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S3905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 176 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5101: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. (S5102) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5101, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S5101: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5103), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5102), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S5102).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S5201), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S5201: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5202). In the process of S5202, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S5202 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5202: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5202: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5203. Further, as a result of the processing of S5201 even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5201: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S5203.

In the process of S5203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S5203), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S5203: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5204), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S5203 (S5203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S5205), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 167 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S3908 in FIG. 167 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S3909 in FIG. 167 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 168 to 172) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 173 to 175) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 and the like (see FIG. A normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect unit 331, and the effect unit 422a). Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 177) (see S5101: No in FIG. 176 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a) can maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, a normal image transfer setting process (S5103), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S3905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S5103).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4805) of the display setting process (S3903) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S5301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S5302), and if it is the transfer data information (S5302: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5303) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305.

Further, in the process of S5302, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S5302: No), the processes of S5303 and S5304 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5305. In the process of S5305, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5305), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5306).

In the process of S5306, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S5306 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5306: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5306: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5307. Further, as a result of the processing of S5305, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5305: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S5307.

In the process of S5307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5307), and if the transfer start flag is on (S5307: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5308), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5303 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S5313. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5307: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S5309).

If the rear image change flag 233w is on (S5309: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S5310), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5311). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S5312), and the process proceeds to S5313.

In the process of S5309, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S5309: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Image data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S5315, if the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S5313, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313). The discrimination in the process of S5313 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S5313, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5313: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5313 (S5313: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5314). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S5314, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5315), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S3906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S3904) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 129 is generated (S5401). That is, in the processing of S5401, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S3904). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S3905), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5402). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Etc. (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer is displayed on the third symbol display 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). It is possible to process the drawing process and the display process in parallel at the same time.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S5402 (S5403). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 167 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the like (third symbol display device 81, effect unit 331, and effect unit 422a). At the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured to provide three types of modes: "normal mode", "preparation mode", and "renso mode". Then, in order to shift to the most advantageous "renso mode", it is basically necessary to first shift from the "normal mode" to the "preparation mode". That is, it is necessary to shift to a time saving state in which the time saving period is once or seven times. Then, by becoming a probabilistic jackpot during the "preparation mode", it is possible to shift to the "renso mode" which is the most advantageous for the player.

Therefore, it is possible to strongly expect the player to become a probabilistic jackpot within the limited number of time reductions (1 time or 7 times) set as the "preparation mode". Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the "preparation mode".

Further, in this control example, a plurality of (five types) of identification information (lucky numbers) used for notifying a player's advantageous state are set. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. However, in this conventional game machine, only a predetermined combination of symbols is used for the hit notification, and different notification modes (for example, for example, notification of the probability change state) are performed when other notifications (for example, notification of the probability change state) are performed. It was common to use a display effect to fight the enemy). That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand the content of the notification because the notification mode is not uniform. In addition, as a notification mode for notifying a result advantageous to the player, a predetermined mode is generally executed, and there is little room for the player to intervene.

On the other hand, in this control example, the identification information (lucky number) for notifying the advantageous state has a role for notifying the jackpot of the special symbol in the "normal mode" (see FIG. 91 (a)). The role of notifying whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode" after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 92 (b)), and notifying whether or not to shift from the "preparation mode" to the "ream villa mode". It also serves as a role. Since the lucky number is used for various notifications that are advantageous to the player, the player can easily understand the result of each effect simply by grasping the lucky number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more understandable effect. In addition, the jackpot notification of the special symbol in the "normal mode", the notification of the "preparation mode" executed in the jackpot, and the notification of the "renso mode" executed in the "preparation mode" are all lucky. A production aimed at acquiring a number is performed. Therefore, these three types of different notifications can be made to feel as if the player is one effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a unified production. Further, in this control example, the player can arbitrarily select (set) the identification information (lucky number) for notifying the player of an advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to execute the notification mode according to the taste of each player, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in this control example, when a big hit occurs in the "normal mode", a big hit is performed to notify whether or not to shift to the "preparation mode", which is more advantageous than the "normal mode". It is configured to run inside. This time saving notification effect is executed every time it is detected that the ball has reached the second passage forming member 422 via the first passage forming member 520 provided on the downstream side of the first variable winning device 82a. .. Therefore, the player can be made to launch the ball in an attempt to positively enter the ball into the first variable winning device 82a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game.

Further, the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected during the opening period of the jackpot, and the connection is released when the jackpot ends. Here, if the connection is immediately released at the end of the final round (2 rounds) of the jackpot, if there is a ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 at the end of the final round, that ball There is a possibility that the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are separated from each other before reaching the second passage forming member 422. That is, the ball that has flowed down the first passage forming member 520 may be ejected in an unexpected direction from the opening portion of the first passage forming member 520 without entering the second passage forming member 422. .. In this case, the ejected sphere may enter the substrate portion or the wiring portion, causing a failure such as a short circuit.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 82a and the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422 match in the ending period of the jackpot, the first passage forming member 520 Is configured to be disconnected from the second passage forming member 422. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520, so that the ball entered into the first variable winning device 82a is formed into the second passage. It can be reliably flowed down to the member 422. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the base portion or the wiring portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a problem such as a short circuit in the wiring or the circuit.

In addition, in this control example, when the player enters the "preparation mode", the "ream villa mode suggestion" is used as an interesting effect to suggest whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode" which is the most advantageous for the player. It is configured to perform "directing". In this "Roulette mode suggestion effect", the mode shifts to the "Roulette mode" depending on which pocket of the plurality of pockets provided on the rotating member 640, which is configured to imitate the roulette wheel, the ball B falls. Notify you if you did. More specifically, it indicates that a plurality of (30 types) pockets are divided into a hit pocket and a miss pocket, and when the ball B falls into the hit pocket, the mode shifts to the "renso mode". Therefore, since it is possible to pay attention to the type of pocket in which the ball B falls, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

On the back side of the rotating member 640, a back LED 625 that illuminates the hit pocket from the back side is provided in order to make the hit pocket stand out (make it look shiny). The rear LED 625 is configured to rotate in the same direction at the same rotation speed as the rotating member 640. A plurality of lighting areas (lighting areas A1 to A18) for illuminating an area for one pocket from the back are arranged at equal intervals on the back LED 625. On the other hand, there are 30 types of pockets provided in the rotating member 640, and by providing a plurality of sections having different intervals between the pockets, the diameter of the rotating member 640 and the diameter of the rear LED 625 are substantially the same. Has been done. Therefore, since the rotating member 640 can make only 18/30 turns while the rear LED 625 makes one round, each pocket provided in the rotating member 640 and each lighting area A1 to A18 correspond to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 640. Correspondence relationship with is deviated.

Here, as a method of matching the correspondence between the lighting area and each pocket, a method of matching the number of areas of each lighting area of the rear LED with the number of each pocket provided on the rotating member 640 can be considered. When the number of regions is increased according to the number of pockets, the number of LEDs increases, which causes a problem that the cost increases and the power consumption increases. Further, since the size of the LED bar (LED substrate) is increased, there is a problem that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 is wasted. Further, in order to save space, when each lighting area of the rear LED 625 is configured such that the interval between the lighting areas is variable according to the rotation position (similar to the rotation member 640), the first section of the rotation member 640 Corresponding to S1, it is necessary to provide a section in which the LED bar is folded (that is, the distance between the lighting areas is narrow). Therefore, it is necessary to configure each LED bar so that it can be switched between a normal state (see FIG. 97) and a folded state according to rotation. However, unlike the pocket, the LED bar is provided with a circuit for lighting each LED, so when it is folded, the circuit pattern printed on the board, the wiring, etc. are broken, and the LED May not light up. On the other hand, when the number of pockets of the rotating member 640 is reduced to 18 and the spacing between the pockets is always constant (the spacing when arranged in the second section in this control example) (on the rear LED 625). (In the case of a structure in which each of the provided lighting areas A1 to A18 and each pocket has a completely one-to-one correspondence), there is a problem that the variation of the effect is reduced due to the decrease in the number of pockets.

On the other hand, in this control example, the operation (lighting state) of one of the members (rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that rotate with each other (that is, the rear LED 625) is set every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (rear surface). Every time the rotation amount of the LED 625 becomes 1/3 turn), it is corrected (switched) according to the operation of the other. By this correction, among each pocket of the rotating member 640, the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket is controlled so as to always have a shining appearance. That is, every time the rear LED makes 1/3 turn, the information of the storage area corresponding to the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA (see FIG. 98) is corrected according to the deviation caused by the rotation operation. ing. As a result, the pockets arranged in the non-correction section NA can always be kept in the appearance corresponding to the type of pocket (the appearance that the hit pocket shines and the detached pocket becomes dark). Since the player can see only a part of the non-correction section, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misidentifying the hit pocket and the miss pocket.

Further, in the present control example, in the "normal mode", the "additional effect" for expecting that the lottery result advantageous to the player is reserved can be executed. Here, conventionally, a game machine that executes a specific effect (so-called hold notice effect) every time the number of reserved balls increases has been known. This hold notice effect is generally controlled so as to be easily executed when an advantageous lottery result (for example, winning) is held. However, in this conventional game machine, it merely suggests whether an advantageous lottery result has been held, and a hold ball other than the hold ball on which the hold notice effect has been executed (for example, the hold on which the hold notice has been executed). I couldn't get a sense of expectation for the reserved ball that was held before the ball.

On the other hand, in this control example, a plurality of advantageous states are provided, and the state is gradually shifted (ranked up) to a more advantageous state according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Then, the more the reserved ball that shifts to a more advantageous state by pre-reading is held, the easier it is to execute the additional effect. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to shift to various advantageous states only by executing the additional effect. For example, the extra effect is usually executed when the jackpot type for which the "preparation mode" is set is held after the jackpot, so it is usually a jackpot (when the extra effect is not executed). You can have them play the game with a stronger expectation. This is because if it becomes a big hit, the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" will increase. In addition, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, the player can be made to recognize that the expectation for shifting to the "preparation mode" is higher than usual (when the additional effect is not executed). , It is possible to strongly expect that the lucky number is displayed to the production unit 422a during the jackpot game. Furthermore, when the lottery result corresponding to the transition to the "renso mode" is held at the time of executing the additional effect, the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed is compared with the case where the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed. Since the execution rate of the additional effect is high, when the "preparation mode" is notified as expected by the player, the player is expected to shift to the "renso mode" more than usual. Can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for shifting to the "renso mode". As described above, in this control example, it is possible to expect the player to gradually shift to a plurality of advantageous states by executing the additional effect of 1. Therefore, since it is possible to give a sense of expectation to all the lottery corresponding to the reserved ball that is held at the time when the additional effect is executed, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, when the sphere B is dropped into the pocket of the rotating member 640, the sphere B is swung on the holding piece 677, and then the sphere B is moved to the target type pocket (hit pocket or detached pocket). It is configured to drop.

Here, when the sphere B is swinging on the holding piece 677, if the configuration is such that the sphere B is allowed to fall regardless of the swinging condition (period, amplitude, etc.), the swinging motion is performed. Despite the state where the period (amplitude) is large (the state where the swinging motion of the sphere B is likely to continue for a while), the ball B falls or the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion is extremely small (the state where the swinging motion is extremely small). Despite the appearance of the sphere B being likely to fall), the sphere B may continue to be held on the holding piece 677. That is, there is a possibility that the movement of the sphere B may have an unnatural appearance (such as falling in an operating condition that is unlikely to fall, or not falling indefinitely in an operating condition that is likely to fall). In addition, a method of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the swinging motion and dropping the ball B when the elapsed time that will be a period (amplitude) that allows the ball to be dropped with a natural appearance is reached is also considered. However, since the swinging motion of the ball B can be affected by various conditions such as the angle at the time of throwing, the initial velocity, and the method of assembling the holding piece 677, the period (amplitude) at which the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance is obtained. There is a possibility that individual differences may occur in the time until.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the sphere B is dropped, the period of the oscillating operation is determined from the time interval at which the sphere B passes through the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the period of the oscillating operation is sufficiently small. It is configured so that the ball B is dropped after it is determined that the ball B has become. As a result, the ball B can be dropped with a natural appearance regardless of the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 and the conditions (angle and initial velocity) at which the ball B is thrown. That is, when the ball B is swinging on the holding piece 677, the player can be more noticed by the movement of the ball B, so that the player's interest in roulette chance production can be improved. it can.

Further, in this control example, each time any pocket is arranged at the drop position, the pocket arranged at the drop position can be specified from the outputs of the detection sensors A to F. Here, if it is configured to determine whether the ball B can be dropped into the pocket each time the pocket is placed in the drop position, the ball B falls after the pocket is placed in the drop position. Is started, so that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket at the drop position (it may fall into the next pocket). There is a time lag for the holding piece 677 to move from the protruding position to the immersion position, and there is also a time lag for the sphere B to fall from the upper part of the holding piece 677. This is because there is a risk that the pocket at the drop position will pass by the rotational motion before reaching.

On the other hand, in this control example, when any pocket is arranged at the drop position, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the drop position, and the pocket next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position is specified. The type of pocket arranged at the drop position is specified, and it is determined whether or not the ball B can be dropped into the pocket. Then, when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped into the pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position, the drop control of the ball B (immersion position of the holding piece 677) is performed. (Operation control to) is configured to be executed before the pocket is placed in the drop position. That is, when the ball B is dropped, the holding piece 677 is moved to the immersion position at a timing that allows the ball B to be sufficiently dropped into the next pocket (for example, 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is placed in the drop position). It is configured to be immersive. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type. Therefore, the ball B hits and falls into the pocket even though it does not shift to the "renso mode", and conversely, even though the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from coming off and falling into the pocket.

Further, in this control example, a specific effect (that is, "ream villa mode suggestion effect") can be executed over one or more (1 or 7 times) time saving times set as the "preparation mode". It is configured. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine capable of executing the same type of production over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls held at the start of the production). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations depending on the number of times the production of the same system is executed, the content of the production, and the like. However, in such a conventional game machine, the number of times the effect is executed, the effect time, and the like depend on the reserved ball. Therefore, if the reserved ball does not exist or is small, a sufficient effect time cannot be secured. There was a problem that the amount was reduced.

On the other hand, in this control example, a fixed-time effect (that is, "ream villa mode suggestion effect") can be executed regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls. There is. Then, in order to prevent the "preparation mode" from ending during the fixed time production, even if a big hit is made in the middle of the time saving number of times, or if all the lottery of special symbols for the time saving number of times is missed, the "preparation mode" The variation pattern selection table 202d is defined so that the total variation time of the variation display executed in "" is constant (or more than the effect time of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect"). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a sufficient execution time of the "preparation mode suggestion effect", so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the period of the ending effect is set according to the progress of the game at the time when the ending effect in the "renso mode suggestion effect" is started (the remaining fluctuation time of the variation display during execution, the remaining number of time reductions, etc.). It is configured to be variable. With this configuration, the end timing of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" can be matched with the timing at which the "preparation mode" actually ends, so that the player can more accurately grasp the game state. Can be made to. In addition, in this control example, the game is stopped in the "preparation mode suggestion effect", and after notifying the player of the deviation in the "preparation mode suggestion effect", the player restarts the game to become a probabilistic jackpot and "renso". When the transition to "mode" is confirmed, a special effect (revival roulette chance effect) can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from continuing endlessly for the time of the game stop period, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored. In addition, it is possible to appropriately notify the player whether or not the mode has been changed to the "renso mode".

In this control example, the identification information (lucky number) is used for the jackpot notification, the "preparation mode" notification, and the transition to the "renso mode", but the lucky number is used for notification. The favorable conditions to be achieved are not limited to this. For example, only a part of the above three advantageous states may be notified by using the lucky number, or the other advantageous states may be notified in addition to the above three states. Further, an advantageous state different from the above three states may be notified. As another advantageous state, for example, in the opening period of the jackpot, a lucky number may be used to notify whether the jackpot type is easy to win many prize balls. Further, for example, as an advantageous state, a lucky number may be used to notify whether or not a special symbol is in a probable change state.

In this control example, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625, which have different times required for one cycle of operation (rotational operation of one rotation), are configured to rotate at the same rotation speed, and a part of the section (rotational operation) in the rotation operation (rotational operation). Every time the lighting state of each lighting area becomes a predetermined rotation amount so that the correspondence between the pocket type and the lighting area arranged on the back side of each pocket is fixed in the section (visible section by the player). It was configured to correct every 1/3 rotation of the rear LED 625), but it is not limited to this, and it can be applied to any configuration as long as it is a plurality of movable objects operating in different operation cycles. it can. For example, on the back side of the rotating member 640, instead of the back LED 625, a rotating body capable of rotating at the same cycle as the back LED 625 is provided, and a movable object is provided with respect to the rotating body at equal intervals with the pocket of the rotating member 640. It may be configured to provide. As the movable object of the rotating body, for example, a movable object that can be changed between the immersion position on the back side of the front view and the projecting position on the front side of the front view may be provided. Then, a passing hole is provided for each pocket so that the movable object can pass through when the movable object changes to the protruding position, and the pocket in which the movable object protrudes toward the front side through the passing hole is hit and the pocket is hit. It may be configured as shown as. In this case, in the section visible to the player (for example, first section S1, see FIG. 54), the correspondence between the movable object and the hit pocket, which is variable to the protruding position, is controlled so as to be fixed, and the game is played. Movable objects arranged in an arrangement that is difficult (impossible) for a person to see may be corrected according to the pocket type of the pocket that is arranged in a section that can be seen by the subsequent rotation operation. As a result, the correspondence between the rotating member 640 and the rotating body can be made constant regardless of the amount of rotation or the like in the section visible to the player.

In this control example, the operation (lighting state) of one of the accessories (rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625) that rotate with each other (that is, the rear LED 625) is set every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (rotation amount of the rear LED 625). (Every time it becomes 1/3 lap), it is configured to correct (switch) according to the other operation, but it is not limited to the rotation operation. In a plurality of accessories that operate in a section that is visible to the player and a section that is invisible (difficult) to the player, the movement of some of the accessories is performed in another role in the invisible (difficult) section. This idea is applicable as long as it is corrected according to the movement of an object. For example, in two types of accessories that reciprocate between a section that is visible to the player and a section that is difficult to see by horizontal movement, the movement of the accessory placed in the section that is difficult to see is matched with the movement of the other accessory. By making the correction, the correspondence of the two types of accessories in the section visible to the player may be controlled to match.

In this control example, in the rotating member 640 that performs the rotational operation and the rear LED 625, the hit pocket is always illuminated by making the lighting area that illuminates the hit pocket of 1 different according to the timing (rotation amount of the rear LED 625). It was designed to keep its appearance, but it is not necessarily limited to rotating accessories. This idea may be applied to a display device whose display contents can be changed and a backlight that illuminates a part or all of the display device from the back side. Specifically, for example, an image of a rotating roulette is displayed on a display device, and a backlight arranged on the back side of a display area where an image of a hit pocket is displayed is provided by an out-of-pocket. The lighting state may be set to be brighter than the displayed display area. Then, the lighting position of the backlight may be dynamically switched by following the operation of the image of the hit pocket. With such a configuration, the hit pocket can always have a bright appearance, so that it is possible to more easily recognize whether or not the hit pocket is a hit pocket.

In this control example, when five types of identification information (lucky numbers) are displayed one by one for each display unit 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331, a jackpot is notified, and further, the effect unit 422a is notified of the jackpot. However, the "preparation mode" is notified when the remaining lucky numbers are displayed, but the notification is not limited to the lucky numbers. For example, a plurality of conditions (so-called missions) for shifting to an advantageous state may be notified to the player, and a jackpot may be notified when a part of the notified conditions is achieved. .. In addition, it may be configured to shift to the "preparation mode" by achieving a part or all of the remaining conditions that have not been achieved during the jackpot. Further, in the "preparation mode", the transition to the "ream villa mode" may be notified by achieving a part or all of the unachieved conditions. The conditions for shifting to an advantageous state include, for example, "generating an effect in which a specific character appears", "generating an effect prompting the pressing of the frame button 22", and "holding". "Accumulating one or more balls" and the like. These conditions may be displayed in place of the lucky number, for example, in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when displaying each condition, it may be displayed in a manner in which it is possible to easily recognize whether or not each condition has been achieved (for example, a double line is drawn for the achieved condition). In this way, by achieving a plurality of conditions, the game is stepped up to a more advantageous state, and the game is played with more attention to whether or not each condition is achieved. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In addition, a part or all of the achieved conditions may be returned to the unachieved state under specific conditions. The specific condition is, for example, when a predetermined number of special symbols have been drawn since the previous condition was achieved (for example, 10 times), or when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the previous condition was achieved. Is. In addition, the conditions may be configured to be selectable by the player, or may be configured to be automatically (for example, randomly selected at power-on).

In this control example, when the ball passes through the sensor member 422c provided in the second passage forming member 422, the winning ball is discharged to the first variable winning device 82a (the first passage forming member 520 is discharged. It was determined that it passed). Then, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 are connected until the number of winnings in the first variable winning device 82a and the number of discharges from the second passage forming member 422 match. However, it is not limited to this. It suffices if it is possible to prevent the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the ball is passing through the first passage forming member 520. A configuration may be configured in which the disconnection is restricted for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) after the detection. Note that 1.5 seconds is a value obtained by adding a margin to the time required for the ball to pass through the first passage forming member 520, and the ball that has won the first variable winning device 82a has a margin. It is a time during which the second passage forming member 422 can be brought down. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the connection between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 from being released while the sphere is passing through the first passage forming member 520. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the ball passing through the first passage forming member 520 is ejected from the opening of the first passage forming member 520 and enters the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this control example, the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket is set to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 100%, and the back side of the detached pocket is set to the lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, but this is limited to this. The lighting rate can be set arbitrarily. For example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the detached pocket may be set to 10%. As a result, the numbers attached to the pockets can be made easier to see while giving a darker appearance than the hit pockets. Further, for example, the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket may be set to 80%. By reducing the lighting rate of the lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced.

In this control example, only two types of pockets, a hit pocket and a miss pocket, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the pocket type, a pocket type may be provided in which there is a possibility of winning or a possibility of losing (for example, the expectation of winning is 50%). As a result, even if the ball B falls due to the roulette chance effect, if it falls into a pocket with an expectation of 50%, it is not certain whether or not to shift to the "renso mode", so that the player's expectation is raised. Can last longer.

In this control example, only two types of lighting states, a lighting state with a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%, are set as the lighting state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and variations may be increased. For example, a lighting area arranged on the back side of a part of the hit pocket is set to a lighting rate of 100% and a lighting frequency of 320 Hz, and a lighting area arranged on the back side of the hit pocket different from the part of the hit pocket. May be lit at a lighting rate of 80%. As a method of selecting different lighting rates, for example, the back side of the hit pocket, which has detached pockets on both sides, is lit at a lighting rate of 100%, and the part where the hit pockets are continuous has a relatively dark lighting rate of 80%. It may be set. When the hit pockets are continuous, the appearance is brighter than when both sides are off (lighting rate 0%), so even if the lighting rate is reduced to 80%, the appearance can be sufficiently bright. As a result, the power consumption of the LED can be reduced without significantly changing the appearance. Further, for example, the lighting area arranged on the back side of each hit pocket may be lit at a lighting rate of 50% and a frequency of 12 Hz, and the on-period may be reversed between the closest hit pockets. By lowering the frequency to 12 Hz, the on-period and off-period can be perceived by the player, and by reversing the on-period (lighting phase), each pocket can be made more conspicuous.

If there are variations in the lighting state of the lighting area on the back side of the hit pocket, a lighting control command may be output at different timings for each lighting state. As described above, in this control example, the lighting control command is output to the LED driver by the serial transfer method. Therefore, compared to the parallel transfer method, it takes time from the start to the end of data (lighting control command) output. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 234, in order to notify the LED driver of the command for notifying the lighting state of 1, a plurality of data such as lighting area data and lighting rate data are used. Need to be output in order (see FIG. 234). Further, in order to confirm whether each output data is normally received by the LED driver, every time 8 bits of data are output, a signal indicating that 8 bits of data have been received is received from the LED driver. It is configured to wait until. Therefore, if a configuration is configured in which a lighting control command for notifying the setting of a part of the lighting area is output and then a lighting control command for notifying the setting of another lighting area is output, the number of lighting states is increased. It will take a longer time to finish outputting all the lighting control commands to the LED driver. Therefore, there is a risk that the process cannot be transferred to another process for a relatively long time. On the other hand, a lighting control command may be output at different timings for each lighting state (for example, one lighting state for each loop of one main process (see FIG. 145)). With this configuration, the process of setting the lighting control command can be distributed to a loop of a plurality of main processes (see FIG. 145). Therefore, one processing time for outputting the lighting control command can be shortened, so that other processing can be executed normally. Further, since the number of lighting control commands generated per one loop of the main processing can be reduced, the processing load when generating the lighting control command can be reduced. As a method of distributing the setting timing of the lighting control command to a loop of a plurality of main processes, for example, the lighting position storage area 223m of the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is updated and the corresponding lighting control command is set. (Refer to S2907 and S2916 in FIG. 158), only the lighting control command corresponding to the lighting state of 1 is output, and a flag (lighting unset flag) indicating that another unset lighting state exists is set. You can set it to on. Then, in the next loop of the main process (see FIG. 145), or when the next execution command is received and the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) is executed, the lighting non-setting flag is on. For example, it may be configured to output a lighting control command corresponding to the unset 1 lighting state.

In this control example, in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", every time the rear LED 625 makes 1/3 turn, the lighting state of the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA is corrected so as to match the arrangement of the hit pocket. However, it is not always necessary to make corrections for each LED bar. The correction section RA can be arbitrarily determined within a range that is invisible (difficult) to the player. For example, the lighting areas arranged at symmetrical positions of the drop position may be corrected one by one, or the lighting states of the nine lighting areas arranged in the upper half may be corrected each time the rear LED 625 makes a half turn. It may be configured.

In this control example, every time any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the arrangement of the hit pocket is read from the hit position storage area 223k and switched to the corresponding lighting state. Although it was composed, it is not limited to this. A data table (lighting control scenario) that defines the combination of hit pockets and the timed change of the lighting state of each lighting area in each combination may be specified in advance in ROM 222. That is, the correspondence between the lighting state of the lighting area arranged in the lower half of the rear LED 625 visible to the player and the pocket arranged in front of each lighting area rotates according to the combination of the hit pockets. The timed change of the lighting state may be specified in ROM 222 so that it does not change regardless of the progress of the operation. In this case, in order to make the arrangement of the rotating members 640 at the start of the lighting control the same as the arrangement of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18, during the ending of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" or to the "preparation mode". During the jackpot game before the transition, the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625 are rotated until they reach a predetermined specific arrangement (for example, the arrangement in which the pocket P1 is in the drop position and the back LED 625 is in the origin position). You may let me. Then, in the lighting control scenario, the timed change of the lighting state may be defined starting from the predetermined specific arrangement. With this configuration, it is sufficient to simply set the lighting state of each lighting area according to the lighting control scenario during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect", and any LED bar is arranged in the correction section RA. Since it is possible to omit the process of determining the lighting state of each lighting area included in the LED bar arranged in the correction section RA, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. it can. Further, instead of defining the lighting control scenario in advance, a lighting control scenario is generated from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the arrangement of the rear LED 625 at the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" and stored in the RAM 223. It may be configured to be stored. With this configuration, the lighting control scenario can be set regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 and the rear LED 625.

In this control example, it is determined from the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" whether or not the transition to the "renso mode" is confirmed, and the pocket type (hit pocket or hit pocket) in which the ball B is dropped is determined. It was configured to identify the out-of-pocket). Then, after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes 1 second or less, when the pocket type capable of dropping the sphere B is first placed at the drop position, the sphere B is dropped into the pocket. Although it was designed to be dropped, the pocket to be dropped is not limited to this. For example, when the ball B is dropped to the detached pocket (the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed), even if the ball B is controlled to be dropped to the detached pocket adjacent to the hit pocket. Good. As a result, even if the ball B comes off, it can be expected that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket until just before it falls. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the production of the roulette chance. Similarly, when it is dropped into the hit pocket, it may be controlled so that it is dropped into the hit pocket adjacent to the detached pocket. As a result, even when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which pocket type the ball B falls into, so that the roulette chance effect can be enjoyed to the end.

In this control example, due to the game being stopped in the "preparation mode", the production time of the "ream villa mode suggestion production" with a constant (fixed) production time and the time until the "preparation mode" ends are set. In case of deviation, the deviation can be absorbed by changing the production time of the ending production of "Renso Mode Suggestion Production", but the deviation between the end timing of "Preparation Mode" and the production period has been eliminated. The configuration for doing so is not limited to this. For example, if it is determined that the player has stopped playing the game, the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" may be interrupted until the game is resumed. That is, the execution period of the "renso mode suggestion effect" may be adjusted to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In this case, whether or not the game is stopped may be determined by, for example, whether or not the handle 51 is operated, or a predetermined time (for example, 10) after entering the second entrance 640a. It may be determined by whether or not more than a second) has passed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the difference between the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" and the time until the end of the "preparation mode". In addition, in order to match the time until the end of the "preparation mode" with the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" (to reduce the deviation), the first special symbol after the transition to the "preparation mode" It may be configured to wait for the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" until the fluctuation of is executed. With this configuration, even if the game shifts to the "preparation mode" with no reserved balls, the start timing of the "preparation mode suggestion effect" and the first special symbol lottery in the "preparation mode" Since it is possible to match the execution timing of, the time until the end of the "preparation mode" and the production time of the "renso mode suggestion production" can be matched (reducing the deviation).

In this control example, when the number of hit pockets is increased in the increase effect, the number of consecutive hit pockets is limited to a predetermined number (5 consecutive) or less, but the number of consecutive hit pockets is limited to the number of hit pockets. It is not something that can be done. The number of consecutive detached pockets may be limited to a predetermined number (5 consecutive) or less. That is, in the increase effect, the hit pockets may be preferentially arranged in the section where the detached pockets are 6 or more consecutive. With this configuration, when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket in the "roulette chance effect", the ball B is dropped in a state where the swinging motion cycle (amplitude) of the ball B is a predetermined cycle (1 second) or less. It is possible to prevent the pockets from passing out of position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unnatural appearance such as the swinging motion of the ball B being stopped before the hit pocket is arranged at the drop position, which makes the player feel distrustful. Can be more reliably prevented from hugging.

In this control example, each time the addition effect is executed, the value of the addition counter 223av is incremented by one. That is, the configuration is such that the addition of one hit pocket is determined for each additional effect, but the number of hit pockets added in one additional effect is not limited to one, and is arbitrary. It may be determined by the number of. In addition, taking into account the reserved lottery results and the five types of winning pockets (lucky numbers) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x, the number of balls B that is convenient for dropping naturally is set. It may be configured. Specifically, for example, when the additional effect is executed based on the fact that the lottery result corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot in the "preparation mode" is held (when the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), the time saving period is short. If the additional effect is executed based on the fact that the jackpot that is given the 7 preparation modes is held (when there is a possibility that the ball B will be dropped into the hit pocket depending on the subsequent lottery result), the designated pocket From the storage area 223x, the hit pocket (lucky number) selected in advance by the player is read out, and the initial arrangement of the hit pocket and the detached pocket is determined. Then, the number of sections in which the number of out-of-pockets is 6 consecutive or more is determined, and a numerical value equal to or more than the number of the sections is added to the counter 223av (adding the number of hit pockets equal to or more than the determined number of sections). May be. Then, when determining the position of the added hit pocket in the "preparation mode", the hit pocket may be preferentially arranged in the section where the detached pockets are 6 consecutive or more. With this configuration, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes a predetermined period (1 second) or less, and when the sphere B is dropped into the hit pocket, the sphere B comes off at the drop position and the pockets are continuously provided. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped due to the arrangement. That is, the swinging operation of the ball B is performed between the time when the condition for dropping the ball B is satisfied and the time when the pocket (hit pocket) of the type corresponding to the effect result of the roulette chance effect is arranged at the drop position. Can be prevented (suppressed) from stopping, and the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target type pocket (hit pocket) while the ball B is swinging. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance. Further, for example, it is confirmed that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, the ball B may be dropped into the hit pocket, and the ball B is dropped into the out-of-pocket. The number of additional items to be selected may be different depending on the case where the items are added. That is, when it is confirmed that the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket, it is configured so that a larger number of additional balls can be easily selected, and it is confirmed that the ball B is dropped into the out-of-pocket. In some cases, it may be configured so that a small number of additional pieces can be easily selected. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" by the notified number of additions.

In this control example, when the sphere B is oscillating on the upper part of the holding piece 677, the amplitude of the oscillating motion is determined from the time interval at which the sphere detection sensor 679 detects the passage of the sphere B, and the amplitude is determined. Although the configuration is such that the ball is allowed to fall when the value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON), different control may be executed based on the detection result of the ball detection sensor 679. For example, the mode of the music may be changed according to the interval at which the passage of the ball B is detected by the ball detection sensor 679. More specifically, for example, when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the sound (musical piece) of the drum roll is set to flow, and the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the ball B becomes smaller. , The music may be controlled so that the tempo of the drum roll becomes faster. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel that the fall timing of the ball B is approaching as the tempo of the music becomes faster, so that the player's expectation can be improved according to the tempo of the music.

In this control example, during the rotation operation of the rotating member 640, the arrangement of the LED bars matches the correction section RA regardless of the arrangement of each lighting area (whether or not it is arranged at a position visible to the player). The configuration was such that the lighting state was not changed (switched) until, but it is not limited to this. For example, a lighting area arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, the correction section RA) may be set to a lighting state with a lighting rate of 0%. Then, when the arrangement of any of the LED bars matches the correction section RA, the new (correction) lighting state set for each lighting area constituting the LED bar is not immediately reflected. ) As a configuration that stores the new lighting state that has been stored for the lighting area that has passed through the correction section RA (moved to an arrangement that may be visible to the player). May be good. With this configuration, the correction is made while maintaining the correspondence between the type of pocket (hit pocket or out-of-pocket) arranged at a position visible to the player and the lighting area arranged on the back side thereof. All the lighting areas arranged in the section RA (positions that are difficult for the player to see) can be set to the extinguished state with a lighting rate of 0%. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the power consumption consumed by the rear LED 625 during the rotation of the rotating member 640.

In this control example, when it is determined in the drop control process (see FIG. 147) that the ball is dropped into the pocket next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position, the rotating member 640 is irrespective of the arrangement of the sphere B. The holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position after the rotation operation of 100 steps according to the above (about 0.2 seconds before the next pocket is arranged in the drop position), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding piece 677 may be immersed in the immersion position at the timing when the ball B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677 in the swinging motion. More specifically, for example, even after the pocket to be dropped is specified, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion is determined each time the sphere B reaches the central portion of the holding piece 677, and the determination is made. The period of the swing operation can be stored (updated) in the RAM 223. Then, when the 100 steps are reached, the value of the swing timer 223w (the elapsed time since the previous ball detection sensor 679 detected the passage of the ball B) is referred to, and the timer value is the latest stored in the RAM 223. If it is determined that the value is close to the cycle of the swinging motion (for example, a value of 90% or more of the cycle of the most recent rocking motion), the holding piece 677 may be controlled to be immersed as it is. On the other hand, if the timer value is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 90% of the cycle of the latest rocking operation) with respect to the cycle of the latest rocking operation, the holding piece waits until the predetermined ratio is reached. You may control to immerse the 677 in the immersive position. With this configuration, when the sphere B is rolling toward the outer side (left end or right end direction) of the holding piece 677, or is arranged near the end portion (left end or right end) of the holding piece 677. When this is done, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the holding piece 677 from immersing in the immersion position. That is, when the holding piece 677 is immersed, the sphere B can be reliably dropped in the direction of the drop position without advancing in the other direction. Therefore, the time from when the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position until the ball B starts to fall can be shortened, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

In this control example, when the sphere B is swinging, it is determined that the sphere B can be dropped with respect to the pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position. In this case, the holding piece 677 is immersed in the immersion position after executing the rotation operation for 100 steps, but the present invention is not limited to this. Randomly every time within the range where the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket placed next to the pocket currently placed in the drop position (for example, within the range after 100 steps to 120 steps). It may be configured to be dropped. More specifically, in the process of S1806 of the drop control process (see FIG. 147), instead of setting the drop after 100 steps, a process of randomly selecting the number of steps in the range of 100 steps to 120 steps and the process thereof. After the elapse of the selected number of steps, the process of setting the holding piece 677 to be immersed in the immersion position may be executed. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be varied. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance (as if the sphere B is falling only by the action of gravity) as compared with the case where the sphere B is dropped at the same timing each time.

In this control example, the type of the pocket placed in the drop position next to the pocket currently placed in the drop position is determined, and when it is determined that the ball B can be dropped, the ball B is dropped next. The sphere B is controlled to be dropped with respect to the pocket arranged at the position, but it is not always necessary to drop the ball B into the pocket arranged at the next drop position. For example, each time a new pocket is placed in the drop position, in addition to determining the type of pocket next to the pocket in the drop position, the type of pocket currently placed in the drop position is determined. More than as a configuration to do. Then, when it is determined that both the pocket currently arranged in the drop position and the pocket arranged in the next drop position are pocket types capable of dropping the ball B, the pocket is placed in the drop position. Drop control (immersion operation of the holding piece 677) may be set at a timing when the pocket may be dropped into the arranged pocket. More specifically, for example, the drop control timing may be randomly determined in the range of 5 steps to 120 steps. The range from 5 steps to 99 steps is the timing at which the ball B may fall into the pocket currently located at the drop position, and after 100 steps to 120 steps, the next drop position is reached. It is the timing when the ball B falls into the pocket arranged in. With this configuration, the timing at which the ball B falls can be made more random, so it is difficult for the player to have the suspicion that the ball B is intentionally dropped into a fixed pocket. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in producing the roulette chance. Further, for example, the pocket type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position may be discriminated from the pocket type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position. Then, when it is determined that both of the determined two types of pockets are pockets capable of dropping the ball B, the drop control (holding piece 677) is randomly performed within a range in which the ball B can be dropped into either of the two types of pockets. You may set the timing (immersive). Further, the type of the pocket to be arranged at the drop position, the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position, and the type of the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position may be discriminated. Then, the pocket arranged at the next drop position is a type capable of dropping the ball B, and any pocket adjacent to the pocket arranged at the next drop position is also a type capable of dropping the ball B. In this case, the timing of falling control of the sphere B (immersing the holding piece 677) may be randomly set within a range in which the sphere B can be dropped into any of a plurality of adjacent pockets. Good. Even in this configuration, the sphere B can be dropped with a more natural appearance in the same manner as described above. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in producing the roulette chance.

In this control example, the type of the pocket that is placed in the drop position next to the pocket that is currently placed in the drop position is determined to determine whether the ball B can be dropped, but it is not necessarily a new pocket. It is not necessary to determine the type of the next pocket each time the pocket is placed at the drop position. The structure may be such that the drop control of the sphere B can be set before the pocket of the type capable of dropping the sphere B is arranged at the drop position. For example, one of the pockets capable of dropping the sphere B can be set. It may be configured so that it can be identified whether or not it is a pocket arranged on the front side. That is, for each of the pockets P1 to P30, a flag indicating whether the pocket is one pocket before the pocket on which the ball B is dropped may be provided in the RAM 223. Then, at the stage where the type of dropping the ball B is determined in the roulette chance production, the flag corresponding to the pocket arranged in front of the pocket of the type in which the ball B can be dropped is set to on, and the other pockets are set. Set the flag corresponding to to off. After that, after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes a predetermined period (1 second) or less, every time a new pocket is placed at the drop position, a flag corresponding to the pocket at the drop position is displayed. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is set to on, and if it is on, for example, to set the fall control after 100 steps. With this configuration, it is not necessary to determine the pocket type of the pocket to be placed at the next drop position and determine whether the sphere B can be dropped, and only determine whether the flag is on or not. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to drop the ball B just by doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load required for determining whether or not the ball B can be dropped.

In this control example, in the rotation position determination table 222c of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the pocket arranged at the drop position when the combination of the outputs is obtained. It stipulated the correspondence with. Further, the order in which the pockets provided on the rotating member 640 are arranged is also specified. Then, the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is specified from the pocket at the drop position specified from the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the order in which the pockets are arranged. The method for specifying the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F and the arrangement of the pockets starting from the drop position in the combination may be specified for the rotation position determination table 222c. Then, the RAM 223 may be provided with a storage area for storing the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position. Then, each time a new pocket is placed at the drop position (that is, the output of the detection sensors A to F is displaced from the state of all L to the state of the output of any of the detection sensors being H), the detection sensor The current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position corresponding to the combination of outputs of the above may be read from the ROM 222 and stored in the RAM 223. In this way, by configuring the RAM 223 to store the current arrangement of pockets starting from the drop position, the ball B can be dropped in order to determine whether or not the ball B can be dropped. In the control process (see FIG. 147), when specifying the pocket to be arranged in the drop position next to the pocket arranged in the drop position, it is sufficient to read the pocket from the fixed storage area of the RAM 223 (that is, to drop). It is not necessary to perform the two-step process of specifying the position arrangement and the next pocket of the drop position), and the process can be simplified. The same applies to the case where the lighting states of the respective lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are changed. It is sufficient to simply read the pockets from the fixed storage area of the RAM 223 and determine the type of each read pocket. It can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 194. In the first control example described above, in the roulette chance effect, when the sphere B swings on the holding piece 677, the sphere B passes through the center of the holding piece 677 (the front side of the sphere detection sensor 679). It was configured to determine the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B from the interval. Then, when the determined cycle is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle (that is, 1 second), the sphere B is allowed to fall. As a result, the sphere B can be dropped into any pocket after the period (amplitude) of the swing operation is sufficiently narrowed. As a result, compared to dropping the ball B in a state where the period of the swinging motion of the ball B is large, such as immediately after the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, it is possible to make the ball appear to have fallen naturally. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the falling position of the ball B and having doubts about the result of the roulette chance production, so that the roulette chance production can be further enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the second control example, instead of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, a holding piece 6770 that can be driven so as to be inclined in the left-right direction is provided. Then, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 is changed according to the arrangement of the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. This inclination is configured so that as the sphere B moves away from the center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging motion, the inclination in the downward direction toward the center of the holding piece 6770 increases. As a result, the inclination of the holding piece 6770 while the sphere B is swinging is always in the direction of causing the sphere B to flow down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the excessive force of the swinging motion performed by the ball B, so that the ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770. It can be securely held on top and dropped into any pocket.

Further, in the first control example described above, the rotation member 640 is arranged (pocket arranged at the drop position) by combining the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. Was configured to identify. As a result, when controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set in the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. , The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. In addition, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (that is, whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode") is displayed. It was configured so that it could be dropped into the appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

In addition to this, in the second control example, after it is detected that the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are displaced (the output of at least one detection sensor becomes H), the detection sensors are spread over a plurality of operation steps. It is configured to monitor the outputs of A to F and determine the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket arranged at the drop position) based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. With this configuration, the output of any of the detection sensors may be displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket may move to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the timing of arrangement is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that a holding piece 6770 is provided instead of the holding piece 677, and the voice lamp control device 113 has. The configurations of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 have been partially changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. .. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the holding piece 6770 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b). As described above, the holding piece 6770 is provided in place of the holding piece 677 in the first control example, and is for temporarily swinging the ball B before dropping it into any pocket. Used for.

FIG. 179 (a) is a front perspective view of the holding piece infestation mechanism 6700. As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 6700 in this control example includes a holding piece 6770, a shaft support 6740 connected to the back surface side of the holding piece 6770, and an inclination provided on the shaft support. Gear 6730a, gear 6730b for infestation, drive gear 6730c meshed with gear 6730a for tilting, tilting motor 6750a for applying driving force to the drive gear 6730c, and gear for tilting 6730b It is composed of a drive gear 6730d and a hauling motor 6750b for applying a driving force to the drive gear 6730d. The configuration provided behind the holding piece 6770 (shaft support 6740, tilting gear 6730, etc.) is provided on the back side of the front case 672, making it impossible for the player to see. It is configured to be.

The holding piece 6770 is configured to be able to hold the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 on the holding piece 6770, similarly to the holding piece 677 in the first control example. By driving the retracting motor 6750b in the forward direction (clockwise direction), the holding piece 6770 pushes the retracting gear 6730b meshed with the driving gear 6730d toward the back side in the front view. As a result of being given, it changes from the holding position to the separated position. On the other hand, by driving the withdrawal motor 6750b in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), a driving force for pulling out to the front side of the front view is given to the withdrawal gear 6730b meshed with the drive gear 6730d. As a result, it changes from the separated position to the holding position.

Further, the holding piece 6770 in this control example can be tilted by driving the tilting motor 6750a. Specifically, by driving the tilting motor 6750a in the forward direction (clockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the forward direction, and the tilting gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is counterclockwise. Driven. As a result, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support portion 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates counterclockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is tilted downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view.

On the other hand, by driving the tilting motor 6750a in the negative direction (counterclockwise direction), the drive gear 6730c is also driven in the negative direction, and the tilting gear 6730a meshed with the drive gear 6730c is driven clockwise. .. As a result, the rotational force of the tilting gear 6730a is transmitted to the holding piece 6770 via the shaft support 6740, and the holding piece 6770 rotates clockwise. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is tilted downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view.

Next, a state in which the holding piece 6770 is tilted will be described with reference to FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 179 (b) is a front view when the holding piece 6770 is tilted in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 179 (b), the holding piece 6770 can be tilted (rotated) to the left and right about the shaft support portion 6740. When it is detected that the sphere B swings to the right, the holding piece 6770 is rotated counterclockwise by the tilting motor 6750a to form a tilting downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view. (See the solid line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum of the sphere B moving to the right in the front view due to the swinging motion is offset by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the sphere B from being ejected (jumped out) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. In this control example, the tilt angle when tilting the holding piece 6770 can be set in 1 degree increments. The maximum value of the inclination angle is 6 degrees in each of the left and right directions. This 6 degrees is an angle that the player cannot perceive (becomes difficult) even if the holding piece 6770 is tilted. By setting the inclination angle to an angle that the player cannot perceive, it is possible to make the sphere B feel as if it is naturally swinging.

When it is detected that the sphere B swings to the left, the holding piece 6770 is rotated clockwise by the tilting motor 6750a, and the ball B is tilted downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. (See the dotted line portion in FIG. 179 (b)). As a result, the momentum of the sphere B moving to the left in the front view due to the swinging motion is canceled by the inclination formed by the holding piece 6770, so that the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 (). It is possible to surely prevent it from popping out.

As described above, in the holding piece withdrawal mechanism 670 in this control example, two types of drive motors (tilt motor 6750a and withdrawal motor 6750b) are provided to project and immerse between the holding position and the separated position. In addition to the movement, it is configured to enable tilting movement in the left-right direction. As a result, when the ball B swings on the upper part of the holding piece 6770, the force of the swinging motion is too strong to prevent the ball B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 (suppression). )can do. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swing effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, a configuration for specifying the arrangement of the sphere B that swings on the holding piece 6770 will be described. FIG. 180 is a front view of the holding piece 6770. As shown in FIG. 180, on the back side of the ball B that swings on the holding piece 6770, instead of the ball detection sensor 679 provided in the front case 672 in the first control example, the ball detection sensors 6790a to The 6790i is provided. Each of these sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i has the same function as the sphere detection sensor 679 in the first control example, and when it is detected that the sphere B is arranged (passed) on the front side of the front view. The output becomes H, and when the front side is not blocked by the sphere B, the output becomes L. These ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i are arranged inside the opening 6780 provided in the front case 672 in the second control example.

As for the arrangement of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, specifically, the ball detection sensor (swing center sensor) 6790e is provided above the center position of the holding piece 6770. Further, when the holding piece 6770 is horizontally divided into eight sections (first section to eighth section), a sphere detection sensor (sensor for the first section) 6790a to sphere detection is located above the center position of each section. A sensor (sensor for the fourth section) 6790d and a ball detection sensor (sensor for the fifth section) 6790f to a ball detection sensor (sensor for the eighth section) 6790i are provided, respectively. That is, the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790d and 6790f to 6790i are arranged at equal intervals from the left direction to the right direction in the front view in this order. In this control example, when the sphere B is swinging, the arrangement of the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770 can be specified based on the output information of each sensor. For example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790g is on, it indicates that the sphere B is arranged (passing) in the sixth section. Further, for example, if the sphere detection sensor 6790b is on, it means that the sphere B is arranged (passing) in the second section.

In this control example, it is determined in which section the sphere B is arranged (passing) from the detection results of the sphere detection sensors 6790a to 6790i, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is changed according to the section. It is configured in. That is, as the position of the sphere B moves away from the center of the holding piece 677, the inclination angle toward the center of the holding piece 6770 is increased, and when the first section and the eighth section are reached, the maximum inclination angle ( That is, it is configured to be 6 degrees). As a result, the farther the sphere B is from the center of the holding piece 6770, the stronger the force (gravity) in the direction of returning the sphere B toward the center, so that the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770. Can be prevented. Therefore, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket in the swing effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 183. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. FIG. 181 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222.

The ROM 222 in the present control example is different in that the amplitude discrimination table 222e and the swing angle discrimination table 222f are provided in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of ROM 222 in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The amplitude discrimination table 222e shows the sphere B according to the outputs of the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the first section) 6790a to the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the eighth section) 6790i and the sphere detection sensor (sensor for the swing center) 6790e. This is a data table used to specify the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by. The amplitude determination table 222e is referred to when the output of any sensor is switched from L to H during the swinging motion of the sphere B, and the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is discriminated. In this control example, based on the amplitude specified by using the amplitude determination table 222e, it is determined whether or not the amplitude (cycle) of the swinging motion of the sphere B is sufficiently shortened, and the drop condition is satisfied (that is,). , Ball fall enable flag 223fv is set to on). The amplitude referred to here is in units of the width of the section (see FIG. 180). That is, it is a value indicating how many sections the sphere B is swinging over. For example, when the amplitude is "4", it means that the sphere B swings from the center of the holding piece 6770 to the left and right with an amplitude of 4 sections each. In this control example, when the amplitude becomes "1" (that is, for one section to the left and right), the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5511 in FIG. 187).

The details of the amplitude discrimination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 181 (b). As shown in FIG. 181 (b), the amplitude discrimination table 222e shows the type of the sphere detection sensor in which the previous output was detected as H and the sphere detection sensor in which the output was detected as H this time. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is defined in association with the combination with the type of. More specifically, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor 6790a for the first section and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790b for the second section, the amplitude is "4". Is stipulated. In this combination of sensor types, in the swinging motion, the sphere B reaches the first section by rolling to the left, and reaches the second section by changing the direction and rolling to the left. It means that you did. Therefore, since the sphere B swings with an amplitude of four sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, "4" is set as the amplitude.

Further, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor 6790b for the second section and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790c for the third section, "3" is specified as the amplitude. ing. This combination of sensor types is read out because the sphere B rolls to the left to reach the second section in the swinging motion, then changes direction and rolls to the left. This is the case when the 3 sections are reached. Therefore, since the sphere B swings with an amplitude of three sections from the center of the holding piece 6770, "3" is set as the amplitude. In addition, when the direction is changed in the first section and the second section and the third section are passed (when the amplitude is determined to be "4"), the amplitude is not overwritten. That is, in this control example, once the amplitude of the swing operation is determined based on the amplitude discrimination table 222e, the amplitude is not overwritten until the sphere B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e. .. Thereby, the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B can be determined more accurately.

Similarly, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor 6790c for the third section and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790d for the fourth section, "2" is set as the amplitude. The combination of the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor 6790d for the 4th section, the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790e for the swing center, and the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time are specified. For the combination of the fifth section sensor 6790f and the sensor type for which the H output is detected this time is the swing center sensor 6790e, "1" is specified as the amplitude. Further, for a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the 6th section sensor 6790 g and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the 5th section sensor 6790f, "2" is specified as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor for the 7th section 6790h and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790g for the 6th section, "3" is specified as the amplitude. For a combination in which the sensor type in which the H output was detected last time is the sensor 6790i for the 8th ward and the sensor type in which the H output was detected this time is the sensor 6790h for the 7th section, "4" is specified as the amplitude. ..

As described above, in this control example, the amplitudes of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i can be discriminated according to the order in which they are in the H output state. As a result, the amplitude of the sphere B can be accurately determined, so that the sphere B can be dropped into any pocket at a more natural timing (after the amplitude of the swinging motion becomes "1"). Can be done.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 181 (a). The swing angle determination table 222f is a data table used for setting the inclination angle to be set for the holding piece 6770 from the arrangement of the spheres B on the holding piece 6770. The details of the swing angle determination table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 182.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the swing angle determination table 222f. As shown in FIG. 182, the swing angle determination table 222f is referred to when the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is in the H state, and the amplitude of the swing motion and this time H are detected. The inclination angle (swing angle) set for the holding piece 6770 is defined in association with the type of the sensor (this time type).

More specifically, for a combination in which the amplitude is "4" and the type is the sensor 6790a for the first section this time, 6 degrees is specified as the inclination angle (swing angle) set in the holding piece 6770. Therefore, when the sphere B is swinging with an amplitude of four sections and is detected by the first section sensor 6790a, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, which is the upper limit value. Set. As a result, the holding piece 6770 is tilted 6 degrees in the downward direction from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view, so that the momentum of the swinging motion performed by the ball B is offset and the holding piece 6770 is changed in direction in the first section. Can be rolled toward the center of.

Similarly, for the combination of the amplitude of "4" and the sensor 6790b for the second section this time, 4 degrees is specified as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "4", and the type of this time is for the third section. For the combination of the sensor 6790c, the tilt angle (swing angle) is defined as 2 degrees, the amplitude is "4", and for the combination of the sensor 6790g for the sixth section this time, the tilt angle (swing angle) is-. Twice is specified. Further, for the combination of the amplitude of "4" and the sensor 6790h for the 7th section this time, -4 degrees is specified as the inclination angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "4", and the type of this time is for the 8th section. For the combination of the sensor 6790i, -6 degrees is specified as the tilt angle (swing angle). The negative angle means an angle at which the holding piece 6770 is tilted from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view.

Further, for the combination of the amplitude of "3" and the sensor for the second section this time 6790b, the inclination angle (swing angle) is defined as 5 degrees, the amplitude is "3", and the type of the sensor for the third section this time is the sensor for the third section. For the combination of 6790c, 3 degrees is specified as the tilt angle (swing angle), the amplitude is "3", and for the combination of the 6th section sensor 6790g this time, the tilt angle (swing angle) is -3. The degree is specified, the amplitude is "4", and -5 degrees is specified as the inclination angle (swing angle) for the combination of the sensor 6790h for the seventh section this time.

Furthermore, for the combination of the amplitude of "2" and the sensor for the third section this time 6790c, the inclination angle (swing angle) is defined as 4 degrees, the amplitude is "2", and the sensor of the sixth section this time For the combination of 6790 g, -4 degrees is specified as the inclination angle (swing angle).

In this way, the sphere B is ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770 by making the inclination angle (swing angle) variable according to the arrangement of the sphere B and the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B. It is possible to prevent it from popping out. The reason why the inclination angle is increased as the amplitude of the swing operation becomes smaller is to prevent (suppress) the vehicle from stopping immediately when the amplitude becomes smaller. If the period from when the amplitude becomes small and it is determined that the condition for dropping the sphere B is satisfied until the swinging motion of the sphere B stops is short, the pocket where the sphere B can be dropped is in the drop position. There is a risk that the swinging motion of the ball B will stop before it is placed in the ball B, and the player will feel distrust. On the other hand, in this control example, since the tilt angle (swing angle) becomes larger as the amplitude is smaller, the swing operation can be continued for a longer time. Therefore, while the swinging motion is being performed (before the swinging motion is stopped), the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket.

In this control example, the type of sensor that detected the sphere B and the swing angle are specified for each amplitude, but only the sensor type and tilt angle (swing angle) are specified regardless of the amplitude of the swing motion. May be specified. Specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship in the case of the amplitude "4" in this control example may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the sphere B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this control example, the upper limit of the tilt angle of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player may arbitrarily set the tilt of the holding piece 6770 to be variable within a range that makes it difficult for the player to perceive. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the sphere B does not eject out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 183. As shown in FIG. 183, in the RAM 223 in the present control example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, the amplitude counter 223iv, the previous type storage area 223jv, and the current type storage area 223kv are being specified. A flag 223mv, an arrangement specified flag 223nv, a detection value storage area 223ov, and an amplitude confirmation flag 223pv are provided.

The amplitude counter 223iv is a counter indicating the amplitude of the swing operation, and stores the amplitude (value of any of 1 to 4) read from the amplitude determination table 222e. In the amplitude discrimination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude counter 223iv is overwritten with the read amplitude each time a different amplitude is read (S5509 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, when it is determined that the amplitude of the swinging motion becomes 1, the value is initialized to 0 after the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to ON (see S5512 in FIG. 187). The amplitude counter 223iv determines whether or not the falling condition of the sphere B is satisfied and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770.

The previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv are both storage areas for storing information indicating the type of sensor (any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i). The type of the sensor in which the passage of the sphere B was detected last time (previous type) is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv, and the type of the sensor in which the passage of the sphere B is detected this time (this time) is stored in the type storage area 223kv this time. Type) is stored. The amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is determined based on the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv. This time, the type storage area 223 kv is the sensor that has reached the H output state when it is detected that any of the sensors has reached the H output state during the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185). The type is stored (see S1722 and S1727 in FIG. 185). Further, in the previous type storage area 223jv, the sensor type stored in the type storage area 223kv this time is transferred until a sensor whose output becomes H is newly detected (see S1726 in FIG. 185).

The arrangement specifying flag 223mv is a flag indicating whether the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified. If the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is being specified, and if it is off, it means that the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not being specified. The arrangement specifying flag 223mv is set to on when the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is all L and the output of any of the sensors becomes H (see S5903 in FIG. 193). On the other hand, it is set to off when the identification of the rotation position of the rotating member 640 is completed from the detection results over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194).

The arrangement specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether or not the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been specified. When the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on, it means that the identification of the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is completed, and when it is off, it means that the identification of the rotating member 640 is not completed. This arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to on when the identification of the rotation position of the rotation member 640 is completed from the detection result of the rotation position detection sensor 684 over a plurality of steps (see S5809 in FIG. 192 and S6009 in FIG. 194). ). On the other hand, it is set to off when it is detected that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are switched to L after the identification of the arrangement of the rotation member 640 is completed ( See S5906 in FIG. 193).

The detection value storage area 223ov is a storage area that can store the detection values of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 for a plurality of steps (15 steps). When the above-mentioned arrangement specifying flag 223mj is set to ON, the detection values of the detection sensors A to F are stored in the detection value storage area 223ov each time the rotating member 640 rotates for one step. Then, at the stage where the detected values for 15 steps are stored, if the stored values are normal, the rotation position member 640 is specified based on each stored value (S5807 and FIG. 194 of FIG. 192). See S6007).

The amplitude determination flag 223pv is a flag indicating whether or not the amplitude is determined based on the amplitude determination table 222e when the sphere B is swinging in the upper part of the holding piece 6770. If the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is on, it means that the amplitude has been determined (the sphere B is rolling toward the center of the movable piece 6770), and if it is off, the amplitude has been determined. (The ball B is rolling in a direction away from the center of the movable piece 6770). This amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON when the amplitude is determined from the detection result of the sphere detection sensor when the sphere B is performing the swinging operation (see S5506 in FIG. 187). On the other hand, it is set to off every time the passage of the sphere B is detected by the swing center sensor 6790e.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 194. First, with reference to FIG. 184, the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This main process 2 (see FIG. 184) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

Of the main processes 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, in each of the processes S1601 to S1610 and S1612 to S1621, the main processes (see FIG. 145) S1601 to S1610 and S1612 in the first control example, respectively, The same process as each process of ~ S1621 is executed. Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in the second control example, when the process of S1610 is completed, the swing effect process 2 (S1631) is executed instead of the swing effect process (S1611) in the first control example. Will be done. In the swing effect process 2 (S1631), similarly to the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, the ball B is the pitching device 650 when the “consecutive mode suggestion effect” is executed. This is a process for executing various controls from the time the ball is thrown to the time the ball B falls into any pocket (during the swinging effect). The details of the rocking effect processing 2 (S1631) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Further, in the main process 2 (see FIG. 184) in this control example, after the effect setting process (S1613) is completed, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) and the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) are executed to perform the process S1614. Move to. The rotation setting process 2 (S1632) is predetermined during the rotation of the rotating member 640, similarly to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 155) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. This is a process for changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under the conditions. Further, the lighting setting process 2 (S1633) is a process for controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, similarly to the lighting setting process (see FIG. 158) in the first control example.

Next, the above-described swing effect process 2 (S1631) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 185. In each of the swing effect processes 2 (S1631) in the second control example, S1701, S1702, S1704, and S1705, S1701, S1702 of the swing effect process (see FIG. 146) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1704 and S1705 is executed.

Further, in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the swing non-detection flag 223v is ON (S1701: Yes), the pitch detection sensor 6890a It was determined whether the outputs of ~ 6890i (see FIG. 180) were all in the L state (S1721), and when it was determined that all the outputs were L (S1721: Yes), the ball B was thrown, but the holding piece 6770. Since it means that has not been reached, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1721 when it is determined that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6890a to 6890i is in the H state (S1721: No), then the type of the detection sensor whose output is in the H state is selected. The corresponding information is stored in the type storage area 223 kv this time (S1722). Next, 4 which is the maximum value is stored in the amplitude counter 223iv, and the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to ON (S1723). Immediately after the ball B is thrown, the momentum of the ball B is the strongest, so the amplitude should be the maximum. After the processing of S1723, the processing shifts to S1704.

Further, in the swing effect processing 2 (see FIG. 185) in the present control example, when it is determined in the processing of S1705 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S1705: Yes), the drop control in the first control example. Instead of the process (see FIG. 147), the drop control process 2 is executed (S1724), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 186, but in the drop control process 2 (S1724), the sphere B is placed in any pocket in the same manner as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. This is a process for dropping.

Further, in the swing effect process 2 (see FIG. 185) in this control example, when it is determined that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is off in the process of S1705 (S1705: No), the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i (see FIG. 185). (See FIG. 180), it is determined whether all the outputs are in the L state (S1725), and if all the outputs are L (S1725: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1725, when it is determined that the output of any sensor is in the H state (S1725: No), the information stored in the type storage area 223kv this time is transferred to the previous type storage area 223jv. (S1726), the information corresponding to the type of the sensor whose output is H is detected in the processing of this time S1725 is overwritten in the type storage area 223kv this time (S1727). As a result, the type of the sensor that detected the output of H this time is stored in the type storage area 223kv this time, and the type of the sensor that detected the output of H in the previous processing of S1722 or S1727 is stored in the previous type storage area 223jv. Can be kept.

After the processing of S1727, the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is determined based on the stored contents of the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv updated in each processing of S1726 and S1727. Amplitude discrimination processing is performed (S1728). The details of this amplitude discrimination process (S1728) will be described later with reference to FIG. 187.

When the amplitude discrimination process (S1728) is completed, the swing angle control process for setting the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the sphere B is executed (S1729), and this process is completed. .. The swing angle control process (S1729) will be described later with reference to FIG. 188.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned drop control process 2 (S1724) will be described with reference to FIG. 186. As described above, the drop control process 2 (S1724) is a process executed in place of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example in order to drop the sphere B into any pocket. is there.

Of the drop control processes 2 (see FIG. 186) in the second control example, the processes S1803 to S1806 are the same as the processes S1803 to S1806 of the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, when the drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186) in this control example is started, it is first determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811). As described above, the arrangement-specified flag 223nv is a flag indicating whether or not the arrangement of the rotating member 640 has been specified. If it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, is off) (S1811: No), the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is unknown, and is it possible to drop the ball B? Since it means that it is in a state where it cannot be determined whether or not it is, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S1811: Yes), then the pocket at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u, and the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 is performed. (S1812), and the process shifts to S1803.

By this drop control process 2 (see FIG. 186), the ball B is dropped into an appropriate type of pocket depending on whether or not the transition to the “renso mode” is confirmed, as in the first control example. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player whether or not to shift to the "renso mode".

Next, the details of the amplitude discrimination process (S1728) will be described with reference to FIG. 187. This amplitude discrimination process (S1728) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and is a process for discriminating the amplitude of the swing motion performed by the sphere B as described above. In this amplitude discrimination process (see FIG. 187), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is in the H state (S5501), and if the output is in the H state (S5501). S5501: Yes), since it means that the sphere B has reached the upper center of the holding piece 6770 by the swinging motion, the amplitude determination flag 223pv is set to ON (S5502), and this process is terminated. Thereby, when the sphere B passes through the upper center of the holding piece 6770 and rolls to the opposite side, its amplitude can be determined. Therefore, each time the sphere B rolls (swings) to the upper right side or the left side of the holding piece 6770, the amplitude of the swinging motion can be determined, so that the amplitude can be determined more accurately.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5501, when it is determined that the output of the swing center sensor (sphere detection sensor) 6790e is not H (that is, the output is L) (S5501: No), then the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is turned on. (S5503). If the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is on (S5503: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swinging motion has already been determined and the holding piece 6770 is being rolled toward the center. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5503, when it is determined that the amplitude determination flag 223pv is off (S5503: No), the amplitude determination table 222e (see FIG. 181 (b)) is read out to determine the amplitude (S5504). ).

Then, the type of the sensor stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is compared with the specified contents of the read amplitude determination table 222e, and the sensor type is a combination defined in the amplitude determination table 222e. (S5505). In the process of S5505, when it is determined that a combination not specified in the amplitude determination table 222e is stored (S5505: No), it is determined that the sphere B has not reached the left end or the right end of the swing operation. This means that the amplitude cannot be determined from the current combination of sensor types (combination of sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and this time type storage area 223kv). Return to the effect process 2 (see FIG. 185).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5505, when it is determined that the combination of the sensor types stored in the previous type storage area 223jv and the current type storage area 223kv is specified in the amplitude determination table 222e (S5505: Yes), the amplitude is confirmed. The flag 223pv is set to on (S5506), and the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is read out (S5507). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read amplitude counter 223iv and the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors specified in the amplitude determination table 222e match (S5508).

In the processing of S5508, when it is determined that the amplitudes match (S5508: Yes), it means that the amplitude of the swing operation has not changed, so the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is not updated and is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5508 that the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is different from the amplitude corresponding to the combination of sensors specified in the amplitude discrimination table 222e (S5508: No), the amplitude discrimination table 222e is used. The read amplitude value is updated by overwriting the amplitude counter 223iv (S5509), and it is determined whether the updated amplitude counter 223iv has a value of 1 (S5510). Then, when the value of the amplitude counter 223iv is 1 (S5510), the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is sufficiently small (the condition for dropping the sphere B into any pocket is satisfied). Therefore, the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to on (S5511), the amplitude counter 223iv is initialized to 0, and the amplitude confirmation flag 223pv is set to off (S5512) to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5510, when it is determined that the value of the updated amplitude counter 223iv is not 1 (S5510: No), the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is relatively large, and the sphere B is dropped. Since there is a risk that the appearance will be unnatural, this process is terminated as it is.

By performing this amplitude discrimination process (see FIG. 187), the amplitude of the swing motion can be accurately discriminated based on the outputs of the plurality of ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i provided in the front case 661. Therefore, since the sphere B can be dropped after the amplitude of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B is sufficiently small, the sphere B can be dropped from the holding piece 6770 with a natural appearance.

Next, the details of the swing angle control process (S1729) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 188. This swing angle control process (S1729) is one of the swing effect processes (see FIG. 185), and as described above, the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 according to the arrangement of the spheres B. It is a process for setting.

When the swing angle control process (see FIG. 188) is executed, first, the value of the amplitude counter 223iv and the sensor type stored in the type storage area 223 kv this time are read out (S5601), and further, the swing angle determination table is read. Read 222f (see FIG. 182) (S5602). Next, it is determined whether or not the combination of the value of the amplitude counter 223iv read in the process of S5601 and the sensor type stored in the type storage area 223kv this time is specified in the swing angle determination table 222f ( S5603), when it is determined that the combination is not specified in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603), it means that it is not necessary to change the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770. , Ends this process as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, when it is determined that the combination read in the process of S5601 is defined in the swing angle determination table 222f (S5603: Yes), the swing angle is associated with the combination. The tilt angle (swing angle) defined in the discrimination table 222f is set to the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 (S5604), and this process is terminated.

By executing this swing angle control process (see FIG. 188), the inclination angle (swing angle) can be changed according to the arrangement of the sphere B and the amplitude of the swing operation of the sphere B (sphere B). The farther away from the center of the holding piece 6770, the greater the inclination toward the center of the holding piece 6770), so that the sphere B is ejected (jumped out) out of the range of the holding piece 6770. It can be suppressed more reliably. Further, as described above, the swing angle determination table 222f is configured so that the tilt angle increases as the amplitude of the swing operation decreases. Therefore, when the amplitude decreases, the swing operation immediately occurs. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the stoppage. Therefore, since the swinging motion can be continued for a longer period of time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket while the swinging motion is being performed (before the swinging motion is stopped). ..

Next, the rotation setting process 2 (S1632) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. This rotation setting process 2 is one process in the main process 2 (see FIG. 184), and as described above, is for varying the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 under predetermined conditions during the rotation of the rotating member 640. It is a process. Of the rotation setting processes 2 (see FIG. 189) in the second control example, in each of the processes S2801 and S2805 to S2808, the rotation setting processes (see FIG. 157) S2801 and S2805 to S2808 in the first control example, respectively, The same process as each process of is executed.

Further, in the rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189) in this control example, when it is determined in the process of S2801 that the ball drop enable flag 223fv is on (S2801: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is (S2811). When it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is not on (that is, it is off) (S2811: No), the current arrangement is unknown, and a pocket capable of dropping the sphere B is near the drop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not they are arranged, the main process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process 2 (see FIG. 184).

On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S2811: Yes), the information corresponding to the pocket arranged at the drop position is read from the rotation position storage area 223u (S2811: Yes). S2812), the process shifts to S2805.

By executing this rotation setting process 2 (see FIG. 189), the positional relationship between the current drop position and the nearest pocket where the ball B can be dropped is grasped, and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is positioned. It can be changed according to the relationship. As a result, it is possible to prevent the swinging motion from being continued for a long time after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed by the sphere B becomes small, so that the swinging motion can be prevented from being continued for a long time. The ball B can be dropped.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the execution command process 2 (S2121) executed in place of the execution command process (S2113, see FIG. 155) in the first control example in the command determination process (see FIG. 150) will be described. To do. This execution command processing 2 (see FIG. 190) is driven by the motor driver in response to the execution commands output from various motor drivers, as in the execution command processing (see FIG. 155) in the first control example. This is a process for determining the progress of the movement of an object and performing control according to the progress.

Of the execution command processes 2 (see FIG. 190) in the second control example, in each of the processes S2601 to S2608 and S261 to S2614, S2601 to S2608 of the execution command process (see FIG. 155) in the first control example, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S2611 to S2614 is executed. Further, in the execution command process 2 (see FIG. 190) in this control example, when the process of S2608 is completed, the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are monitored over a plurality of steps (15 steps). (Sampling) is performed, an arrangement specifying process for specifying the pocket arranged at the drop position is executed (S2621), and this process is completed. The details of this arrangement specifying process (S2621) will be described with reference to FIG. 191.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned arrangement specifying process (S2621). When this arrangement specifying process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the swing effect flag 223ev is on (S5701), and if it is determined that it is off (S5701: No), the sphere B swings. In the stage before the operation, the rotation specifying process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the swing effect flag 223ev is on in the process of S5701 (S5701: Yes), the swinging identification process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the execution of the swinging effect is performed. Execute (S5703) to end this process. Details of these rotating specific processing (S5702) and rocking specific processing (S5703) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 to 194.

First, the details of the during rotation identification process (S5702) will be described with reference to FIG. 192. When this rotation identification process (see FIG. 192) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement identification flag 223mv is on (S5801), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). In the case (S5801: No), whether or not the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is displaced (the output of any of the sensors is switched from the state where all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L to the state of H). Is determined, and when the output is displaced, a non-specific time process for starting the specification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is executed (S5802), and this process ends. Details of this non-specific time processing (S5802) will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, when it is determined that the placement identification flag 223mv is on (S5801: Yes), the combination of the detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is combined with each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, it is stored in a free area where data is not stored (S5803). Then, it is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is stored for the upper limit of 15 sets in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5804), and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S5804). : No), which means that the number of detections required to determine the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is not reached, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5804, when it is determined that the upper limit number (15 sets) of the combination of detected values is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov (S5804: Yes), it is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether or not all the combinations of the detected values are the same (S5805). Then, when it is determined that a combination of different detection values is stored in the detection value storage area 223ov (S5805: No), all the data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S5806). , End this process. By resetting all the data, the combination of detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

On the other hand, in the process of S5805, when it is determined that the combinations of all the detected values stored in the detected value storage area 223ov are the same (S5805: Yes), the rotation position determination table 222c is read out and the detection sensors A to F are read. The pocket specified in association with the combination of the detected values of is specified (S5807), and the information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotation position storage area 223u (S5808). Then, the placement-specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement-specification flag 223nv is set to on (S5809) to end this process.

By executing this specific processing during rotation (see FIG. 192), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and the detection result is changed. It is possible to identify the pocket corresponding to the detection result after determining whether or not there is. Therefore, the output of any of the detection sensors may be displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket may be arranged at the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if it is displaced, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

In this control example, if at least one set of the detection value combinations for 15 steps is different, the detection value is stored regardless of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times the different combination is stored. It was configured to reset area 223ov, but is not limited to this. For example, of each combination stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which the different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired and cleared for the number of times the different combination is stored. It may be stored and determined if all combinations match. This eliminates the need to acquire an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time when different detection value combinations are included, so that the time required to identify the pocket at the drop position can be shortened. it can.

Next, the details of the non-specific time processing (S5802) will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing this non-specific time processing (S5802). In this non-specific time processing (S5802), as described above, the output of the rotation position detection sensor 684 is displaced (from the state where all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L to the state where the output of any sensor is H). This is a process for determining whether or not the rotating member 640 has been switched, and when the output is displaced, the identification of the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is started.

When this non-specific time processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901), and if it is off (S5901: No), the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are output. It is determined whether all are L (S5902). In the process of S5902, when it is determined that all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F are L (S5902: Yes), it means that the pocket is not arranged at the drop position, and the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is detected. Since it cannot be done, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5902, when it is determined that any of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is in the H state (S5902: No), it is caused by the fact that one of the pockets is arranged at the drop position. This means that the output of the sensor has been displaced. Therefore, in this case, in order to monitor the outputs of the detection sensors A to F over a plurality of operation steps in the rotation operation, the placement identification flag 223mv is set to ON (S5903) and the rotation position is stored. The information corresponding to the pocket placed in the previously dropped position stored in the area 223u is cleared and reset (S5904), and this process is terminated. By turning on the placement identification flag 223mv, in the subsequent rotation identification processing (see FIG. 192), in the processing of S5801, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored over a plurality of steps. Each process of S5803 to S5809 can be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the arrangement specified flag 223nv is on (S5901: Yes), then whether or not the outputs of the detection sensors A to F constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are all L. If it is determined (S5905) and it is determined that the outputs of all the sensors are L (S5905: Yes), the arrangement specified flag 223nv is set to off (S5906), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is H (S5905: No), this process is terminated as it is. By executing the respective processes of S5905 and S5906, the period during which the arrangement specified flag 223nv is turned on can be limited only while the detected unit 641c has passed the positions of the detection sensors A to F. it can. That is, the period in which the arrangement of the rotating member 640 stored in the rotating position storage area 223u is referred to can be limited to the period during which the detected unit 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F. Therefore, the detected unit 641c passes through the positions of the detection sensors A to F, and suppresses a problem that the ball B is set to fall in a state where, for example, two pockets straddle the drop position. be able to.

Next, the details of the swinging identification process (S5704) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 194. This swinging identification process (S5704) is one of the arrangement specifying processes (see FIG. 191), and as described above, is a process for specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 during the execution of the swinging effect. is there.

When this swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the arrangement specifying flag 223mv is on (S6001), and it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off). If this is the case (S6001: No), the above-mentioned non-specific time processing is executed (S6002), and this processing is terminated. This non-specific time processing (S6002) is detailed because the same processing as the non-specific time processing (S5802, see FIG. 193), which is one of the rotation specific processing (see FIG. 192), is executed. The description will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6001, when it is determined that the arrangement identification flag 223mv is on (S6001: Yes), the combination of the detection values (outputs) of the detection sensors A to F is combined with each storage area of the detection value storage area 223ov. Of these, it is stored (stored) in a free area where data is not stored (S6003). Then, it is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is stored (stored) for 15 sets, which is the upper limit, with respect to the detection value storage area 223ov (S6004), and it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached. (S6004: No) means that the number of detections required for determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is less than the number of detections, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6004, when it is determined that the upper limit number (15 sets) of the combination of the detected values is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov (S6004: Yes), it is stored in the detected value storage area 223ov. It is determined whether 80% (2) or more of the 15 combinations of detection values have the same detection result (S6005). Then, when it is determined that the combination of the same detection results is less than 80% (S6005: No), all the data stored in the detection value storage area 223ov is reset (S6006), and this processing is terminated. To do. By resetting all the data, the combination of detected values can be stored again in the detected value storage area 223ov for each operation step until the upper limit (15 sets) is reached.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6005, when it is determined that 80% or more of the combinations of the detected values stored in the detected value storage area 223ov are the same (S6005: Yes), the rotation position. The discrimination table 222c is read out, the pocket defined in association with the combination of the detection values of the detection sensors A to F is specified (S6007), and the information corresponding to the specified pocket is stored in the rotation position storage area 223u ( (Remember) (S6008). Then, the placement-specification flag 223mv is set to off, and the placement-specification flag 223nv is set to on (S6009) to end this process.

By executing this swinging identification process (see FIG. 194), the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over 15 operation steps, and 80% or more. It is possible to identify the pocket corresponding to the matching detection result in the ratio of. That is, since the condition for specifying the pocket is relaxed as compared with the during rotation identification process (see FIG. 192), the arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket at the drop position) can be specified more quickly. It should be noted that the swinging specific process (see FIG. 194) is executed only during the swinging effect. As described above, the rocking effect is an effect of finally dropping the sphere B into any pocket. Therefore, if it takes time to specify the arrangement of the rotating member 640, the timing of dropping the ball B may be delayed, and the ball B may not be dropped into the target pocket. On the other hand, in this control example, the swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is executed in which the determination condition is loose (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) during the swinging effect. It is configured to be. As a result, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured to provide the holding piece 6770 whose inclination angle can be changed, and the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 can be changed according to the arrangement of the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770. It is configured to be used. Here, if the arrangement of the holding piece 6770 is fixed when the ball B is swung, the ball B holds the holding piece when the momentum when the ball B is thrown is too strong (the initial velocity is too fast). It may pass through the upper surface of the 6770 and enter an unexpected position such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, as a method of swinging the upper part of the holding piece 6770 regardless of the momentum of the ball B, a method of widening the width of the holding piece 6770 or making the inclination of the holding piece 6770 from both sides toward the center steep. However, if the width of the holding piece 6770 is widened, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the width of the holding piece 6770, which causes a problem that the degree of freedom in design is reduced. Further, when the holding piece 6770 is tilted toward the center steeply, the amplitude (cycle) of the swinging motion tends to be small, so that the time for the ball B to swing is shortened, and the ball B is dropped. There is a risk that the ball B will stop before it is made to move. That is, even though the sphere B is stationary, it may not fall into the pocket, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is variably configured. Then, the inclination angle is controlled so that the inclination of the sphere B in the downward direction toward the upper center of the holding piece 6770 increases as the sphere B moves away from the upper center of the holding piece 6770 due to the swinging motion. As a result, the inclination angle of the holding piece 6770 while the sphere B is swinging can be set so that the sphere B always flows down toward the center of the holding piece 6770. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball B from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770 due to the excessive force of the swinging motion performed by the ball B, so that the ball B can be prevented (suppressed) from being ejected to the outside of the holding piece 6770. It can be securely held on top and dropped into any pocket. Further, by changing the inclination angle (swing angle) to hold the sphere B on the upper part of the holding piece 6770, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the holding piece 6770, thus saving space. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased. Further, in the second control example, the inclination angle (swing angle) becomes smaller as the sphere B approaches the upper center of the holding piece 6770, so that the momentum of the swing operation is reduced. It can be difficult to do. Therefore, since the swinging motion can be continued for a longer period of time, the ball B can be reliably dropped into any pocket before the swinging motion of the ball B is stopped.

Further, in the second control example, when the outputs of the detection sensors A to F for detecting the rotation position of the rotating member 640 are displaced (the output of at least one detection sensor becomes H), a plurality of operation steps are performed. The outputs of the detection sensors A to F are monitored (sampled), and the current arrangement of the rotating member 640 (pocket arranged at the drop position) is determined based on the detection results over the plurality of operation steps. It is configured. With this configuration, the output of any of the detection sensors may be displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket may move to the detected position due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the timing of arrangement is shifted, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

In this control example, two types of specifying methods are provided as methods for specifying the rotation position of the rotating member 640. As the first method, the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over the operation steps for a predetermined step (15 steps), and all the detections for the predetermined steps (15 steps) are detected. When the combination of values is the same, a method for identifying the pocket corresponding to the detection result is set. In this method, if at least one combination of detection results is different from the combination of other detection results, the combination of detection results for a predetermined step is acquired again, and all the combinations of detection results match. Only if you do, specify the type of pocket. According to this first method, the output of any of the detection sensors is displaced due to noise or the like, or the detected portion 641c provided in each pocket is positioned to be detected due to rattling of the rotating member 640 or the like. Even if the timing of arranging the rotating member 640 is deviated, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately specified.

On the other hand, as a second method, the combination of the outputs (detection values) of the detection sensors A to F is monitored (sampled) over a predetermined step (15 steps) of operation steps, and the predetermined steps (15 steps) are monitored. When 80% (that is, 12 steps) or more of the detection value combinations are the same among the detection value combinations, a method for identifying the pocket corresponding to the detection result combination that occupies 80% is set. ing. Compared to the first method, this second method is configured to allow up to 20% of the displacement of the detection result, so it is inferior in terms of accuracy, but there is less re-detection, so until the pocket is specified. The time required for the displacement can be shortened. This second method is adopted when the ball B is dropped into the pocket. When specifying the arrangement of the rotating member 640 in order to determine whether or not to drop the ball B, if it takes time to specify the arrangement, the timing of dropping the ball B will be delayed, and the aim is There is a risk that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket of the ball B. On the other hand, in this control example, the swinging identification process (see FIG. 194) is executed in which the determination condition is loose (that is, the time until the arrangement is specified is relatively short) during the swinging effect. It is configured to be. As a result, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly, so that the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the pocket of the target type.

In this second control example, in the first method and the second method, the detection result of the rotation position detection sensor 684 for 15 steps is monitored (sampling), and based on the detection result for the 15 steps. Although the arrangement of the rotating member 640 was specified or the re-detection was determined, the number of monitoring (sampling) steps is not limited to 15 steps. The detected unit 641c may be arbitrarily determined according to the number of detectable steps and the like.

In the second control example, in the swing effect, it is determined which section of the eight sections (first section to eighth section) the sphere B is passing through, and the inclination angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is determined. It was variable, but it is not limited to this. The section may be increased and the number of sphere detection sensors may be increased, or the section may be decreased and the number of sphere detection sensors may be decreased. When the section is increased, the arrangement of the sphere B can be specified more accurately, so that the angle of the holding piece 6770 can be set more finely. On the other hand, when the section is reduced, the number of sensors can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. Moreover, the failure rate can be reduced.

In this control example, in the swing angle determination table 222f (see FIG. 182), the type of sensor that detects the sphere B and the swing angle are defined for each amplitude of the swing motion of the sphere B. Regardless of the amplitude of the dynamic motion, only the sensor type and the tilt angle (swing angle) may be specified. Specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship in the case of the amplitude "4" in this control example (see the amplitude "4" in FIG. 182) may be applied regardless of the amplitude of the swing operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in the swing angle determination table 222f while preventing the sphere B from being ejected out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this control example, the upper limit of the tilt angle (swing angle) of the holding piece 6770 is set to 6 degrees, but the player can arbitrarily perceive that the tilt of the holding piece 6770 has been changed. You may decide. Further, the correspondence relationship between the sensor type and the swing angle can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the sphere B does not eject out of the range of the holding piece 6770.

In this second control example, when the rotating member 640 is rotating and any pocket is arranged at the drop position before the ball B is thrown, the detection sensors A to 15 steps. If the output of F is monitored and at least one of the 15 steps of output combinations is different, the detection value storage area is irrespective of the timing at which the combination is stored or the number of times the different combination is stored. It was configured to reset 223ov (ie, monitoring the outputs of detection sensors A to F was performed for an additional 15 steps), but is not limited to this. For example, of each combination stored in the detection value storage area 223ov, only the storage area in which the different combination is stored is cleared, and the detection value is additionally acquired and cleared for the number of times the different combination is stored. It may be stored and determined if all combinations match. This eliminates the need to acquire an additional 15 steps of detection value combinations each time when different detection value combinations are included, so that the time required to identify the pocket at the drop position can be shortened. it can.

In this second control example, when any pocket of the rotating member 640 is arranged at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and all the combinations match. When it is determined that (the first method above) or 80% of the 15 steps match (the second method above), the pocket at the drop position is specified, but the pocket at the drop position is specified. The number of steps for specifying (arrangement of the rotating member 640) is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. By adopting a number of steps less than 15 steps (for example, 10 steps), the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) can be specified more quickly. Further, by adopting a number of steps larger than 15 steps (for example, 18 steps), the pocket at the drop position (arrangement of the rotating member 640) can be specified more accurately. Further, the number of steps for specifying the pocket (arrangement of the rotating member 640) at the drop position does not necessarily have to be the same in the first method and the second method, and different steps are adopted. May be good.

In this second control example, when any pocket of the rotating member 640 is arranged at the drop position, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is monitored for 15 steps, and the detection result for 15 steps. When at least one combination of different detection values is included in the above (first method above), or when it is determined that the matching of the combination of detection values is less than 80% in 15 steps (second method above). , Although it was configured to additionally monitor the detected values for 15 steps, it is not always necessary to monitor the detected values for 15 steps. For example, in the first method, when the detected value changes in the middle of 15 steps, monitoring of an additional 15 steps may be started at that time. Further, for example, in the second method described above, even if the number of steps is less than 15, if it is determined that the matching detection value is less than 80% (12 steps) of the 15 steps, an additional value is added at that time. It may be configured to start 15-step monitoring. With this configuration, the pocket can be identified more quickly.

In this control example, when it is determined that the output of any of the detection sensors A to F is displaced while the rotating member 640 is rotating (the output of the sensor has changed from the state where the output of all the detection sensors is L). In addition, regardless of the type of sensor whose output is displaced, the configuration is such that the combination of outputs of each detection sensor A to F is monitored during the rotation operation for 15 steps from that point, but this is limited to this. is not it. For example, taking into account the rattling of the rotating member 640, etc., the detection value of the sensor that is most likely to detect the detected portion 641c among the detection sensors (for example, after reaching the first section S1). The monitoring of the detected value for 15 steps may be started when the detection sensor A) arranged at the position where the rotation operation is performed for the shortest distance is displaced. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a combination of detected values that does not match the detected values for 15 steps exists, so that it is possible to prevent re-monitoring from occurring. Therefore, the arrangement of each pocket of the rotating member 640 can be specified more quickly.

In this control example, regarding the configuration for determining the arrangement from the combination of the outputs of the six detection sensors, the first method (when the outputs for a predetermined step are all the same, the outputs determined to be the same correspond to the outputs. However, the first method can be applied not only to the one composed of six detection sensors. The number of sensors may be large (for example, 10) or small (for example, a single sensor). In addition, the above-mentioned first method can be applied to applications other than those for specifying the arrangement. For example, when it is detected that the output of any of the ball detection sensors 6790a to 6790i is switched from the L state to the H state, the output of the detection sensor is output a predetermined number of times (for example, over 5 main processes). ) If the output is all H during a predetermined number of monitoring periods, the detection sensor may be configured to determine that the sphere B has passed. With this configuration, when the output of the detection sensor momentarily becomes H regardless of the passage of the sphere B due to the influence of noise or the like, the sphere B passes through the corresponding sensor from the H output. It is possible to prevent the user from mistakenly thinking that he / she has done so. Therefore, when the sphere B is swinging, the arrangement of the sphere B can be determined more accurately.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 206. In the first control example described above, it is configured to determine whether or not to increase (add) the winning pocket (lucky number) in a predetermined period after the start of the "normal mode" or the "preparation mode". .. Then, when the addition is decided, in the increase effect executed in the "preparation mode", the pocket to be increased (added) is randomly determined from the out pockets. As a result, in the "roulette chance production" that is executed after that, it is possible to make the ball B feel as if it is easy to hit and fall into the pocket. Expectations for "mode" can be increased.

On the other hand, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the hit pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section in which the ratio of the hit pocket is intentionally high is provided. As a result, the player can be made to watch more carefully the correspondence between the arrangement of the section having a high ratio of the hit pockets and the momentum (cycle) of the swinging motion performed by the ball B on the upper part of the holding piece 677. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the "roulette chance production".

Further, in the above-described first control example, the control and effect modes mainly in the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" have been described.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the chance eye continuous production, which is one of the entertainment effects executed in the "renso mode" in the third symbol display device 81, will be described. Although the details will be described later, the chance eye continuous production is a kind of hobby production for suggesting whether or not it is a big hit in the "renso mode".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is that the “chance eye continuous production” is an effect mode executed during the “renso mode”. Has been added, the method of sorting the hit pockets sorted during the "preparation mode" has been changed, the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and A part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 have been described above. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 195 to 196, the “chance eye continuous production” executed during the “renso mode” of the third control example will be described. This "chance eye continuous effect" is an effect of notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit by stopping and displaying the chance eyes a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.2 second interval).

Here, in the "renso mode" in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the fluctuation patterns at the time of a big hit are a hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and a hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds). Is configured to be selected in a ratio of about 1: 1. Further, as the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation, the deviation short fluctuation (0.2 seconds) and the deviation middle fluctuation (3 seconds) are selected at a ratio of about 4: 1.

As a result, in the "renso mode", a shorter fluctuation time is determined as compared with the fluctuation time (7 seconds or 10 seconds) determined in the "normal mode", so that the game can be played in the "renso mode". It can be executed speedily. In addition, since the period until the next big hit can be shortened, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the "renso mode" in which the time is shortened, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entry port 640a is likely to be opened, and the second entry port 640a is reached. Since it is easy to win a prize, the ball is launched toward the second entry port 640a so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and passes through the through gate 67. The electric accessory 640b is opened, and a game (so-called "right-handed game") is executed in which a prize is awarded to the second entrance 640a to win a big hit.

Similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example has a special symbol 2 lottery executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 640a. It is configured not to be held.

In a conventional gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming state (time saving, medium, etc.) in which a shorter fluctuation time is determined as compared with the normal gaming state, the player is notified whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Since it is difficult to execute the effect to be performed in one variable time, the effect using a plurality of variable times is performed based on the winning information stored on hold (so-called "look-ahead effect").

However, in the third control example, as described above, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not held, and the above-mentioned "look-ahead effect" cannot be executed. Therefore, this third control example is special for the player without using the "look-ahead effect" in the predetermined game state ("renso mode") in which the fluctuation time shorter than the normal game state is determined. As a production that suggests whether or not the result of the lottery of the symbol is a big hit, the "chance eye continuous production" is configured to be feasible.

FIG. 195 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation in the “chance eye continuous effect” executed in the “renso mode” with a timing chart. This hit middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when a big hit is won, and is composed of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation is selected by referring to the table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) for the consecutive villa medium jackpot in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a timing chart showing a state in which the “third consecutive chance eye effect” is executed as an example of the effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation in the “chance eye continuous effect”. When this "third consecutive chance-th effect" is executed, the chance-th is stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval within one fluctuation time.

First, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), when the hit middle fluctuation in which the "third consecutive chance effect" is set is started (executed), the pseudo fluctuation is first started (executed) (the pseudo fluctuation period is 0.2). Seconds). This pseudo fluctuation is a fluctuation pseudo fluctuation display until the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) at the chance eye, and is 0.2 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time when the short fluctuation is executed. Fluctuation time is set.

It should be noted that during the period in which the pseudo-variation is performed, it is sufficient that the player is executed in a display mode (non-stop display mode) in which the third symbol is not recognized as being stopped at a specific symbol, and a plurality of symbols are required. The display mode may be changed so that is switched, or the display mode may be such that only a specific symbol is rotated. Further, the display mode may be such that the symbol itself is moved at a high speed or the symbol is made small so as to be difficult to see so that the player cannot recognize the symbol to be stopped and displayed.

After that, when the pseudo-variation period (0.2 seconds) elapses, the chance th (first chance th) is stopped and displayed (the chance th stop period is 0.5 seconds). The stop display of the chance eye is to display the third symbol in a display mode (temporary stop display mode) that causes the player to recognize that the third symbol is stopped at a specific symbol, and the short variation. Is set to the same time as the fixed time (0.5 seconds) when is executed.

This temporary stop display mode includes a display mode in which a specific symbol is slightly shaken, in addition to a display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped. By executing the stop display of the chance eye in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that one fluctuation has been completed before the fluctuation time of the special symbol (3 seconds in the case of a hit middle fluctuation) ends. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform an effect of recognizing that the variation is executed a plurality of times while the variation of the special symbol is executed once.

As described above, when the middle fluctuation is executed, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the chance stop period (0.5 seconds) are the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) of the short fluctuation. Since it is set to be executed in the same period as the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds), the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without discomfort.

Then, when the chance th stop period elapses, the third symbol is pseudo-stopped (pseudo-stop period is 0.7 seconds). This pseudo stop is a pseudo display of the period until the next fluctuation is executed. In this third control example, since the right-handed game is executed during the "renso mode" as described above, the ball enters the second entrance 640a after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (starting prize). However, a non-gaming period may occur before the special symbol change is executed again.

Specifically, in the "renso mode" in which the time is shortened, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) fluctuates for 3 seconds (see S620 in FIG. 135), and then the normal symbol this time. If the lottery result of the symbol is successful (S615: Yes in FIG. 135), the electric accessory 640b attached to the second entrance 640a is movably controlled so as to execute the opening for 1 second twice (FIG. 135). See S616). Therefore, there may be a time lag between the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the time when the electric accessory 640b is opened and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640a. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example is configured so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed based on the ball entering the second entry port 640a is not suspended. Therefore, there may be a non-game period in which the new special symbol change is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 195 (a), the description will be continued. The period for pseudo-stopping the third symbol is a period for pseudo-displaying the period corresponding to the above-mentioned non-game period, and by providing this pseudo-stop period, when the short variation is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to execute the same variation mode as the variation mode of the special symbol with one middle variation.

Here, the display mode in the case of performing the pseudo stop may be any display mode that allows the player to recognize that it is a non-game period, for example, the third symbol during the chance eye stop period. It may be a display mode in which the swing width is smaller than the display mode, or a display mode in which the background image of the third symbol display device is switched from the background image corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol to the background image corresponding to the non-gaming period.

In this third control example, the player is not given a sense of discomfort as a pseudo-variation effect that produces the appearance that the variation is executed a plurality of times while the middle variation is being executed once. Set a pseudo-variation period that is the same time as the fluctuation period of the short fluctuation, set a chance eye stop period that is the same time as the symbol confirmation period of the short fluctuation, and display the non-game period in a pseudo manner. Although a pseudo stop period is provided for this purpose, it is not necessary to provide all of these configurations.

For example, the configuration of the pseudo stop period may be eliminated by extending the chance eye stop period by the period corresponding to the pseudo stop period and setting the chance eye stop period to 1.2 seconds. Even with such a configuration, there is an effect that the pseudo-variation effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The "third consecutive chance eye effect" shown in FIG. 195 (a) is based on the above-mentioned pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds), chance eye stop period (0.5 seconds), and pseudo stop period (0.7 seconds). The configured pseudo-effect (1.4 seconds) is executed twice, and after the completion of the second pseudo-effect, the third pseudo-variation (0.2 seconds) is executed. The time until the end of the third pseudo-variation is executed within the range of the fluctuation time (3 seconds) of the special symbol, and the stop display (0.5 seconds) of the third chance is displayed as the confirmation time (0) of the special symbol. Execute using (0.5 seconds). Then, the jackpot is started (executed) after the stop display period (time for confirming the special symbol) of the third chance is elapsed.

As described above, in the "third consecutive chance effect" shown in FIG. 195 (a), the timing 0.2 seconds, 1.6 seconds, and 3 seconds after the fluctuation is started, that is, 1.4 seconds. Since the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times at intervals, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped multiple times at predetermined intervals within the one fluctuation time in the "renso mode". ing. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is being executed over a plurality of fluctuations without using the "look-ahead effect".

In the "third consecutive chance effect" described with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the stop display of the third chance is executed using the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol. For example, the period until the stop display of the third chance is executed is executed within the range of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (3 seconds), and the confirmation time of the special symbol (0.5 seconds) is the hit of the special symbol. The third symbol combination corresponding to (for example, a combination in which the same numerical symbols are aligned) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that this fluctuation is a hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode corresponding to the out-of-middle fluctuation in the “chance eye continuous effect” executed in the “renso mode” with a timing chart. This out-of-middle fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot is not won (it is out of the lottery of a special symbol), and consists of a fluctuation time of 3 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. To. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation is selected by referring to the table 222a3 (see FIG. 198) for the consecutive villa medium jackpot in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6107 in FIG. 206).

More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a timing chart showing a state in which the “second continuous chance effect for disengagement” is executed as an example of the effect mode corresponding to the deviation middle fluctuation in the “consecutive effect of chance eye”. When this "second consecutive chance effect for disengagement" is executed, the chance eye is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval within one fluctuation time, and then the third symbol is finally stopped at the complete disengagement. Is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the disengagement middle fluctuation in which the “second consecutive chance effect for disengagement” is set is started (executed), the above-mentioned “third consecutive chance th effect” is referred to with reference to FIG. 195 (a). Similar to "Direction", the pseudo-variation is executed twice. After that, the third pseudo-variation is executed (0.2 seconds), and the stop display (0.5 seconds) of the complete deviation is executed using the confirmation time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol.

As described above, in the "second consecutive chance production for disconnection" shown in FIG. 195 (b), the chance eye is stopped and displayed at the timing 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation is started. Therefore, in the "ream villa mode", it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped a plurality of times at predetermined intervals within the one fluctuation time. This has the effect of making the player recognize that the effect is being executed across a plurality of fluctuations without using the "look-ahead effect".

In addition, the first and second chances are stopped and displayed at the same timing as the above-mentioned "third consecutive chance production" (timing 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation starts). Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit until the end of this fluctuation (until the complete deviation stops).

Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (a), among the “chance eye continuous effects” executed in the “renso mode”, the effect mode when the missed short variation and the hit short variation are executed will be described. To do. In FIG. 196 (a), among the “chance-eye continuous effects” executed during the “renso mode”, the “chance-eye effect” is executed for two consecutive variations as an effect mode corresponding to the out-of-short variation, and then. It is a figure which showed the timing chart at the time of executing "chance eye effect" as an effect mode corresponding to a hit short variation. This out-of-short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is not won (winning out), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected in the variation pattern selection process with reference to the table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) for the consecutive villas (see S6107 in FIG. 206). Further, the hit short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when a big hit is won, and the fluctuation time, the fixed time, and the process of selecting the effect mode are the same as the above-mentioned miss short fluctuation, so the description thereof is omitted. To do.

More specific contents will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). First, as shown in FIG. 196 (a), when the out-of-short fluctuation in which the "chance eye effect" is set is started (executed), the fluctuation is started (executed) (the fluctuation period is 0.2 seconds). Then, when the fluctuation period elapses, the chance eye indicating that the current fluctuation is not a hit (missing) is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is confirmed (confirmation period 0.5 seconds).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, the fluctuation time (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (0.5 seconds) in the short fluctuation are executed during the middle fluctuation (0.2 seconds). And the chance eye stop period (0.5 seconds) are set to be the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to execute the simulated effect executed during the middle fluctuation and the fluctuation effect in the short variation at the same timing, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the simulated effect executed during the middle fluctuation. It has the effect of being able to eliminate it.

Returning to FIG. 196 (a), the description will be continued. After the stop display (first time) of the chance is executed, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped until the next fluctuation is started (until a new ball is entered (starting prize) at the second entrance 640a). (Fluctuating suspension period). During this fluctuation stop period, the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the background screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to make the player recognize that the special symbol has not changed is displayed from the changing background screen. It is displayed by switching to the background screen when the fluctuation is stopped.

Then, when a new start prize is generated, the short variation for disconnection for which "chance eye effect" is set as the next variation is started (executed), and the second chance second is stopped and displayed. As for the short variation for disengagement, an effect based on the same effect mode as the first chance display described above is displayed.

Next, the short variation for winning the jackpot is executed, the third chance is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is started (executed) after the chance th stop period elapses.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 198, but in this third control example, the chance eye is stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (interval of 1.4 seconds), and the jackpot is won. Since it has an effect of notifying, in a state where the short variation for disconnection for which the "chance eye effect" is set is executed twice in a row, if the next short variation hits and the short variation occurs, the "chance eye effect" is set. It is configured so that the "effect" can be set, and the "chance eye effect" is not set in the case of a short fluctuation when the next fluctuation is missed.

By doing so, when short fluctuations occur multiple times in a row, even though the lottery result is out of order, the multiple chances are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals across the multiple fluctuations. It can be prevented (suppressed). Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196 (b), among the “chance eye continuous effects” executed in the “during the consecutive villa mode”, the effect mode when the disengagement short variation is executed three times in a row will be described. .. In FIG. 196 (b), among the “chance-eye continuous effects” executed during the “renso mode”, the “chance-eye effect” is executed for two consecutive variations as an effect mode corresponding to the missed short variation, and then the timing is removed. It is a figure which showed the timing chart in the case where the "normal effect" is executed as the effect mode corresponding to a short-circuit fluctuation. This out-of-short fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot is not won (winning out), and is composed of a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds and a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. The effect mode corresponding to the deviation short variation is selected in the variation pattern selection process with reference to the table 222a4 (see FIG. 199) for the consecutive villas (see S6107 in FIG. 206).

First, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), if the missed short fluctuation changes again after the missed short fluctuation for which the "chance eye effect" is set is executed for two consecutive times, the effect corresponding to the missed short fluctuation is produced. It is configured so that "chance eye effect" is not selected as an embodiment (see FIG. 199), and "normal effect" is executed as shown in FIG. 196 (b).

The "normal effect" corresponding to this deviation short variation is an effect mode in which the chance eye is not stopped and displayed, and after the variation display is executed for 0.2 seconds, the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the complete deviation.

In the third control example, an effect suggesting the result of the lottery (so-called "chance eye continuous effect") is executed by an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed a plurality of times at a predetermined interval. As a mode executed in, a mode other than the stop display of the chance eye may be used. For example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. As a result, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that enhances the interest.

Further, in the third control example, an interval of 1.4 seconds is provided as a predetermined interval, but the interval may be shifted within a range that is difficult for the player to recognize, for example, an error range of about 0.2 before and after. It may be included at a predetermined interval. As a result, in the game state in which the winning information of the special symbol 2 is not stored on hold, it is possible to execute the "chance eye continuous effect" even if the change of the special symbol is not immediately started.

Furthermore, instead of stopping the chance eyes at predetermined intervals, the result of the lottery may be suggested by the number of times the chance eyes are stopped and displayed within a predetermined period (variation time or number of fluctuations). ..

Next, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 199. FIG. 197 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 197 (a), in this third control example, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are partially changed with respect to each of the above-mentioned control examples, and the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that 222 g of the additional area selection table is added.

Here, the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the third control example. Similar to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the third control example is roughly indicated by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. It is a data table used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents from the fluctuation contents (fluctuation time).

The variation pattern selection table 222a is composed of a normal medium-sized big hit table 222a1, a normal middle-out table 222a2, a consecutive villa medium-sized big hit table 222a3, and a continuous villa middle-out table 222a4.

Normally, the medium-sized jackpot table 222a1 defines detailed effect modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown). Z). Here, an effect mode defined in the medium-sized jackpot table 222a1 will be described. First, in the normal medium-sized jackpot table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331.

The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which each symbol that is variablely displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d is stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the last symbol is among the display units 331a to 331d. It takes a long time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, "2", "7", "13") is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to stop the symbol on the display unit 331d. This is the stop pattern to be set.

In addition, the normal middle-out table 222a2 also has a detailed effect corresponding to the fluctuation types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 in the same manner as the normal medium-sized jackpot table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are normally selected as the fluctuation patterns selected when a medium-sized jackpot is won. The ratio is specified to be about 1: 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)), and as the fluctuation pattern normally selected in the case of a deviation from the center, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are specified. It is stipulated that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the above is selected is about 3: 1 (FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the consecutive villa middle jackpot table 222a3 is a table in which a detailed effect mode is defined for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the "renso mode". The table 222a3 for the big hit in the consecutive villas will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 198.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 222a3 for the big hit in the consecutive villas. In the table 222a3 for the big hit in the consecutive villas, the fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 are "hit short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)" and "hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds)". Corresponding to the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv and the value of the production counter 223rv, the production modes are "normal jackpot production", "single chance eye production for hit", "second consecutive chance eye production for hit", and "three consecutive chances". Four types of production modes of "eye production" are defined.

More specifically, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit short fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0,1", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is. In the case of "0 to 99", "normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode.

The "normal jackpot effect" is, for example, a character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an effect of notifying the player that the result of this lottery is a jackpot within a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. However, various symbols appearing around it (for example, a symbol with the letter "V" indicating a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol with a skull mark indicating a normal jackpot (falling to "normal mode"), etc.) The production to acquire is executed. Further, for example, an effect in which a mode (for example, the letter "V") indicating a probability variation jackpot is simultaneously displayed on each display unit 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331, or a normal jackpot (fall to "normal mode"). (For example, a skull mark) is displayed at the same time.

Here, after the execution of the "normal jackpot effect" is decided, the character and various symbol symbols (symbol symbols with the letter "V", symbol symbols with the skull mark, etc.) are made to appear, and the character is displayed. If is configured to execute the effect of acquiring the symbol symbol, it becomes necessary to execute a series of effects within 0.2 seconds, and the effect time is too short for the player to fully understand the effect contents. There is a risk that it will disappear. On the other hand, if it is configured to secure the production time by increasing the ratio of selecting (determining) a long fluctuation time, one special symbol lottery is executed and then the special symbol lottery is performed. There is a problem that the time required for the game becomes long and the game is delayed. In addition, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the possibility of entering the second entrance 640a during the fluctuation, but since the entrance to the second entrance 640a is not suspended, in the "consecutive mode" The more the ball enters the second entry port 640a, the more it may feel that the ball is wasted. That is, there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied.

Therefore, in the "renso mode" in this control example, the character is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, the character that performs the effect of whether or not to acquire the symbol in the variable effect is displayed as a part of the rear image. Then, in the variation effect, the variation effect of the effect mode in which the symbol is acquired by using the character displayed in advance as the back image is executed. With this configuration, the rear image before the variation effect is started can be made to appear as if it is a part of the variation effect, so that the variation time is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds). Even when the pattern is determined, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, like the character, images of various symbol symbols (symbol symbols with the letter "V", symbol symbols with a skull mark, etc.) are also randomly made to appear as a part of the back image, and the images thereof are randomly displayed. The display position is also randomly switched. That is, for example, the symbol symbol with the letter "V" framed in from outside the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and approached the character, stayed in the vicinity of the character for a predetermined time, and then separated from the character. , The pattern of the rear image in which the frame is out of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the symbol symbol in which the skull mark is attached similarly approach the character and then move away from the character. Prepare a pattern for the back image, or a pattern for the back image in which both the symbol symbol with the letter "V" and the symbol symbol with the skull mark move closer to and then away from the character. The configuration is such that these back images are randomly switched. Then, in a state where any of the symbol symbols is close to the character (distance at which the character can naturally acquire the symbol symbol in a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds), the variation effect of the lottery result corresponding to the symbol symbol is started. In this case, the symbol symbol displayed as the back image is configured to set the variation pattern of the mode acquired by the character. With this configuration, it is as if the effect starts before the variable effect starts (when the corresponding symbol symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a part of the rear image). I can remind you. Therefore, even when the fluctuation effect of a short variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect with a natural flow as compared with the case where the effect is executed within a short fluctuation time. In this control example, when the game stop state is detected, various symbol symbols are in close proximity to the character as a demo screen (distance at which the character can naturally acquire the symbol symbol with a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds). A back image of a stationary mode is set at. With this configuration, when the short fluctuation is determined per 0.2 seconds of the fluctuation time in the special symbol lottery that is executed first after restarting the game, the character is close to the character while the game is stopped. Among the symbol symbols that have been stationary in this state, it is possible to perform an effect of acquiring a symbol corresponding to the hit type this time. Therefore, even when the fluctuation effect of a short fluctuation time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is executed through the fluctuation stop state, it is possible to execute the effect of a mode with less discomfort.

The fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit short fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 49". In that case, "normal jackpot effect" is selected as the effect mode. Since this "normal jackpot effect" is the same as the above-mentioned content, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "hit short fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "50 to 99". In this case, "one-shot chance eye production for hitting" is selected as the production mode.

This "winning single-shot chance eye production" is when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", that is, when the chance eye is stopped and displayed twice at a predetermined interval (about 1.4 second interval). It is an effect to be executed, and the chance eye is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started. As a result, the second chance that was stopped and displayed before the "winning single-shot chance production" was executed, and the first chance that was stopped and displayed in this "winning single-shot chance production". It is possible to notify the player that a total of three chances have been stopped and displayed.

When the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 29". , "Normal jackpot production" is selected as the production mode. In the "normal jackpot effect" in the hit middle fluctuation where the fluctuation time is 3 seconds, the third symbol is displayed as an effect to notify the player that the result of this lottery is a jackpot within the fluctuation time of 3 seconds. The device 81 executes an effect of acquiring a mode in which the character shows a big hit (for example, a V mark), and an effect in which the modes showing a big hit are sequentially stopped and displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331.

On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "30 to 99". In that case, "third consecutive chance production" is selected as the production mode. This "third consecutive chance eye effect" is an effect mode described in FIG. 195 (a), and is an effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed three times within one fluctuation time.

When the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 49". , "Normal jackpot production" is selected as the production mode. Since this "normal jackpot effect" has the same effect mode as the "normal jackpot effect" at the time of the above-mentioned hit middle fluctuation, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "50 to 99". In that case, "the second consecutive chance production for winning" is selected as the production mode. This "winning second consecutive chance second effect" is an effect executed when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", that is, the chance eye is stopped and displayed once, and the fluctuation starts. This is an effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed at two timings, 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after being performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance eyes have been stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals, in addition to the effect mode executed in the previous variation.

Therefore, since it is possible to stop and display the third chance at a predetermined interval over a plurality of fluctuations, the multiple fluctuations can be performed without using the "look-ahead effect" based on the stored winning information. By straddling, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit.

When the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0-9". , "Normal jackpot production" is selected as the production mode. Since this "normal jackpot effect" has the same effect mode as the "normal jackpot effect" at the time of the above-mentioned hit middle fluctuation, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "hit middle fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "10 to 99". In that case, "one-shot chance eye production for hitting" is selected as the production mode.

This "winning single-shot chance eye effect" is an effect executed when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", that is, the chance eyes are stopped and displayed twice at predetermined intervals, and varies. This is an effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the start of. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the chance eye has been stopped and displayed three times at a predetermined interval (approximately 1.4 second interval) in addition to the effect mode executed in the previous variation. ..

In addition, when "single chance eye production for hit" is executed as an effect mode corresponding to the hit middle fluctuation, the chance eye (third time at a predetermined interval from the previous fluctuation) 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started. During the period (2.8 seconds) from when the chance eye) is stopped and displayed until the fluctuation ends, an image notifying the player that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, a voice congratulating the big hit is output by a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, and an effect of lighting the lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227 is executed.

As described above, in the third control example, in order to realize the "chance eye continuous production" that notifies that the lottery result is a big hit when a plurality of chance eyes are stopped and displayed at predetermined intervals. The effect mode to be executed is selected by the table 222a3 for the big hit in the consecutive villas. Furthermore, since the number of chance eyes to be stopped and displayed due to this fluctuation can be selected based on the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv, the chance eyes are stopped multiple times at predetermined intervals across multiple fluctuations. It can be displayed. Therefore, even when one fluctuation time is short, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the result of the lottery by using the plurality of fluctuations in an effect mode that can be easily recognized by the player.

Returning to FIG. 197 (b), the description will be continued. The table 222a4 for disconnecting the center of the villa is a table in which a detailed effect mode is defined for the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 during the “mode of the villa”. The table 222a4 for the center of the consecutive villa will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 199.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 222a4 for the center of the consecutive villa. On the table 222a4 for the center of the consecutive villa, the fluctuation types indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 are "disengagement short fluctuation (0.2 seconds)" and "disengagement middle fluctuation (3 seconds)". , The value of the chance eye count counter 223qv and the value of the production counter 223rv are associated with three types of production modes: "normal production", "single chance eye production for disengagement", and "two consecutive chance eye production for disengagement". Aspects are defined.

More specifically, the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off short fluctuation", the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0,1", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is. In the case of "0 to 79", "normal effect" is selected as the effect mode.

In the "normal effect", an effect of notifying the player that the result of this lottery is out of order is executed within a fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds. Specifically, an effect (failure effect) in which the character cannot acquire a mode (for example, V mark) indicating a big hit on the third symbol display device 81, or an aspect in which the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331 show a deviation. Is displayed at the same time.

Since this "normal effect" is a short-time fluctuation of 0.2 seconds, the next fluctuation is executed without emphasizing and notifying the player that the result of the lottery is out of order. May be used. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play is reduced when the "disengagement short variation" is continuously executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off short variation", the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0,1", and the effect counter 223rv. When the value of is "80 to 99", "single-shot chance eye production for disengagement" is selected as the production mode.

This "single chance eye effect for loss" is an effect executed when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0,1", that is, when the chance eye is stopped once or less due to the previous fluctuation. , It is an effect that the chance eye is stopped and displayed 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation starts. Specifically, when the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1" and the "single chance eye production for disconnection" is executed, the chance eye is twice in combination with the previous fluctuation and the current fluctuation. The stop display will be displayed, and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv will be added to obtain "2". Therefore, for example, when "hit short variation" is selected as the next variation and "hit single chance eye effect" is executed as the effect mode, the chance eye is stopped and displayed three times across the three fluctuations. It becomes possible to execute a big hit after making it.

Next, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off short fluctuation", the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", and the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 99". Is selected as the "normal effect" as the effect mode. Since this "normal effect" has the same effect mode as the "normal effect" at the time of the above-mentioned out-of-short fluctuation, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off short fluctuation" and the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", that is, the chance eyes are twice at predetermined intervals. When the effect mode of "off short fluctuation" is selected while the stop display is displayed, it is stipulated that the effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed is not selected. This is to prevent the chance eye from being stopped and displayed three times at predetermined intervals across a plurality of fluctuations. As a result, the effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is executed a plurality of times in succession, and even though the lottery result is out of order, the chance eyes are multiple at predetermined intervals across multiple fluctuations. It is possible to eliminate the situation where the stop display is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a highly reliable production mode.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is "off short fluctuation" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", the above-mentioned is described regardless of the value of the effect counter 223rv. The "normal effect", which is the same effect mode as the "normal effect", is selected.

Next, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off middle fluctuation" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "0", the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 0". In the case of "59", "normal production" is selected, in the case of "60 to 89", "single chance production for disengagement" is selected, and in the case of "90 to 99", "second consecutive chance production for disengagement" is selected. To.

This "single chance eye effect for disengagement" is an effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started, and the "second consecutive chance eye effect for disengagement" is shown in FIG. 195 (b). As shown, it is an effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped 0.2 seconds and 1.6 seconds after the fluctuation is started. As a result, the production mode corresponding to the out-of-middle fluctuation can be made the same as the production mode corresponding to the middle fluctuation by hitting halfway, so that the player is interested in the production mode until the end of the fluctuation. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of the pachinko machine 10.

When the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off middle fluctuation" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 59". In the case of "normal production" is selected, and in the case of "60 to 99", "single chance eye production for disconnection" is selected.

Finally, when the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is "off middle fluctuation" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "2", " "Normal production" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 197 (a), the description will be continued. The additional area selection table 222g is referred to when determining the hit pocket to be increased in the “increase effect” for increasing the hit pocket of the rotating member executed in the “preparation mode” (S6001 in FIG. 203). As described above, this "increase effect" is an effect of adding (adding) the number of winning pockets (the number of lucky numbers) in the roulette chance effect, and by adding the winning pockets (lucky number), the roulette chance is added. You can make it seem as if it will be easier to hit in the production (it will be easier to shift to the "renso mode"). Therefore, it is a production that can raise the player's expectation for the roulette chance production.

In this third control example, in the "increase effect", when determining the winning pocket (lucky number) to be added (added), an area that is easy to add (easy selection area) and an area that is difficult to add (difficult selection area) Is set, and a configuration is added in which the hit pockets (lucky numbers) added (added) by the "addition effect" are intentionally biased (not evenly distributed), which is different from the first control example described above.

In this way, by providing a configuration in which the hit pockets (lucky numbers) added (added) by the "increase effect" are intentionally biased (not evenly distributed), the 30 pockets provided in the rotating member 640 ( Areas (locations) where the number of hit pockets is large and areas (locations) where the number of hit pockets are small can be intentionally provided with respect to the pockets P1 to P30). Therefore, in the roulette chance production, the area where it is easy to hit (the area where there are many hit pockets set) and the area where it is difficult to hit (the area where there are few hit pockets) pass, so the player decides when the ball B falls. Will be interesting to see, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Next, the details of the additional area selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 199 (b). FIG. 199 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the additional area selection table 222g. In the additional area selection table 222g, an "easy selection area" and a "difficult selection area" are defined in association with possible values of the effect counter 223rv.

More specifically, the "easy selection area" is associated with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223rv is "0 to 74". As described above in the first control example, the effect counter 223rv is composed of a loop counter that can take 100 values of "0 to 99". Of these, 75 values for selecting the "easy selection area" are "0 to 74", so the probability (ratio) that the "easy selection area" is selected by the additional area selection table 222g is 75% (75/100). ).

A "difficult-to-select area" is associated with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223rv is "75 to 99". Of the 100 values that the effect counter 223rv can take, 25 values for which the "difficult-to-select area" is selected are "75 to 99", so it is established that the "difficult-to-select area" is selected by the additional area selection table 222g. Is 25% (25/100).

That is, for example, when adding (increasing) four hit pockets (lucky numbers) by "additional effect", an average of three hit pockets (lucky) from the "easy selection area" and one hit pocket (lucky) from the "difficult selection area". Number) is the ratio to be selected. As a result, it is possible to bias the pocket to the area where the easy selection area is set. The configuration for dividing the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 into an "easy selection area" and a "difficult selection area" will be described later with reference to FIG. 202.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. FIG. 200 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 200, in the third control example, the contents of the hit position storage area 223k are partially changed for each of the above-mentioned control examples, and the chance eye count counter 223qv and the effect counter 223rv are added. It differs in that it is added. Since the other contents are the same as those of the above-described control examples, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the hit position storage area 223k whose contents have been partially changed in the third control example will be described. As described above, the hit position storage area 223k is a storage area for storing the types of pockets P1 to P30 of the rotating member 640 (whether they are hit pockets or out-of-pockets) in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect". Is. The hit position of the hit position storage area 223k is set based on the pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x in the hit pocket distribution process 3 (S3102 in FIG. 202). Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the differences from the above-described first control example will be described in detail.

FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit position storage area 223k. In the third control example, the hit / fail type corresponding to each pocket P1 to P30 is stored, and each pocket P1 to P30 is divided into a "first area" and a "second area". .. As shown in FIG. 201, the "first region" is a region including pockets P1 to P15, and the "second region" is a region including pockets P16 to P30. By reading the stored information stored in the hit position storage area 223k configured in this way, in addition to the types set in each pocket P1 to P30, each area (first area, second area) is set. It is possible to grasp the number of hit pockets. In this control example, at the start of the increase effect (a state in which only the hit pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is reflected as the hit position), the number of hit pockets included in the first area and the second area is set. The area in which the number of hit pockets is set to be large is set as the easy-selection area described above, and the area in which the number of hit pockets is small is set to the difficult-to-select area. As a result, the increase effect can be executed in a state where the number of pockets included in the easy selection area is larger, so that the arrangement of the hit pockets can be biased to the easy selection area.

Returning to FIG. 200, the description will be continued. The chance eye number counter 223qv is a counter that counts the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed across a plurality of fluctuations in the above-mentioned "chance eye continuous production". The value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is referred to in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S6106 in FIG. 206), and when the "chance eye effect" is determined, the value corresponding to the determined "chance eye effect", that is, , A value corresponding to the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the determined fluctuation pattern is added (S6109 in FIG. 206). Then, when the "chance eye effect" is not determined, that is, when the normal effect is determined, the value of the counter is initialized (S6110 in FIG. 206). Further, although not shown, the counter value is also initialized when the jackpot is executed in a state where the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is not initialized.

In this control example, the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is initialized when the chance eye effect is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv may not be initialized until a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the last chance eye stop display is displayed. As a result, when the chance eyes are interrupted, it is possible to set a period in which the chance eyes do not appear for at least 5 seconds, so that it is possible to more clearly recognize whether or not the chance eyes are continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from misunderstanding the number of consecutive chances, and it is possible to provide a more understandable effect.

The effect counter 223rv is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (“chance eye continuous effect”, “additional effect”, etc.), various lottery, etc. It is configured as a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99 in the main processing of the device 113 (see FIG. 145). By using this effect counter 223rv, randomness can be ensured when various effects are selected.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 206. First, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a hit pocket distribution process 3 (S3011) executed in place of the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example in the state command process (see FIG. 159). In each of the hit pocket distribution processes 3 of S3101 and S3102, the same processes as those of S3101 and S3102 of the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above are executed. To.

Further, in the hit pocket distribution process 3 (see FIG. 202) in this control example, after the read pocket is set to the hit position of the hit position storage area 223k by the process of S3102 (S3102), the hit position storage area 223k is set. The number of per pockets included in the first region and the second region is calculated (S3121). For example, when the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x are pockets P9, P10, P11, P20, and P28, three pockets are included with respect to the first region (pockets P1 to P15). It is calculated that two pockets are included in the second region (pockets P16 to P30).

When the processing of S3121 is completed, it is then determined whether the number of hit pockets included in the first region is larger than that of the second region based on the number of hit pockets in each region calculated in the processing of S3121 (S3122). ). In the processing of S3122, when it is determined that the first area has a larger number of hit pockets (S3122: Yes), the first area is set as the easy selection area and the second area is set as the difficult selection area. (S3123), the process shifts to S3103.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3122, when it is determined that the number of hit pockets in the second region is larger than that in the first region (S3122: No), the second region is set as the easy selection region and the first region is set. The difficult-to-select area is set (S3124), and the process shifts to S3103.

That is, in the processes of S3122 to S3124, the process for setting the area having a large number of hit pockets to the "easy selection area" where the hit pockets can be easily added (added) by the "addition effect" is executed. As a result, the area where the hit pocket is set can be more biased with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

If the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area is the same, the "easy selection area" and the "difficult selection area" may be randomly set, or a predetermined area may be set. May be set to be an "easy selection area". In addition, the number of types corresponding to the hit positions stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x is set to be an odd number so that the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area are not the same. It may be configured.

Further, in the third control example, a configuration in which the "easy selection area" and the "difficult selection area" are set based on the number of hit pockets set in the first area and the second area defined in advance is used. However, when the hit pocket is added (added) by the "addition effect", the configuration may be such that the area where the hit pocket is located is biased. For example, the center is where the hit pocket is continuously set. May be configured to set a "first area".

As a result, the "first region" and the "second region" can be set based on the contact pocket position, so that the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided in the rotating member 640 can be set. It is possible to make the area where the hit pocket is set more biased, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Returning to FIG. 202, the description will be continued. In each of the processes of S3103 and S3104, the same processes as those of S3103 and S3104 in the above-described first control example are executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S3104 that the value of the addition counter is more than 0 (S3104: Yes), the addition position determination process for determining the pocket to be increased (additional) is executed (S3125). ). Details of this additional position determination process (S3125) will be described later with reference to FIG. 203. When the processing of S3125 is completed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the addition counter 233av (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3104. After that, each process of S3104, S3110, and S3125 is repeatedly executed until the value of the addition counter 223av becomes 0.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned additional position determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the additional position determination process (S3125). This additional position determination process (S3125) is a process for determining the position of the additional (additional) hit pocket in the “increase effect”.

In the addition position determination process (S3125), first, the addition area selection table 222g is read out (S6001), and the addition area corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6002). Specifically, when the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is "0 to 74", the area set in the "easy selection area" is determined as the additional area, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223rv is "75". In the case of "~ 99", the area set in the "difficult-to-select area" is determined as an additional area (see FIG. 199 (b)). As described above, the easy selection area and the difficult selection area are set according to the arrangement of the hit pockets stored in the designated pocket storage area 223x at the start of the increase effect.

After finishing the processing of S6002, next, the hit position storage area 223k is read out to determine whether there is a place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more, that is, there is a place where 5 or more hit pockets are continuous (S6003). ). In the process of S6003, when it is determined that there is no place where the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more (S6003: No), one place to add is selected from the pockets in which the type of disengagement is set (S6004). ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S6002, when it is determined that there are 5 or more consecutive hits (S6003: Yes), 5 consecutive hits are made among the pockets for which the type of loss is set. Select one additional position from the detached pockets other than the one before and after the location (S6005).

Here, the process executed in S6005 will be described. In this third control example, when the roulette chance effect is executed, the hit pockets are continuously set in order to drop the ball B into the designated pocket (hit pocket or miss pocket) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. The upper limit of the number to be played is set to 5. If the hit pockets are made too continuous, it will take time for the hit pockets to pass through the continuous position when the hit pockets come off due to the roulette chance effect, and the swinging motion of the ball B will stop during the passage. Or, there is a risk that the swinging motion will have an extremely small amplitude. In this case, it is extremely unnatural that the ball B stays on the upper part of the holding piece 677 without falling, which may cause the player to feel distrust. Therefore, during the execution of the "increase effect", it is necessary to control so that six or more hit pockets are not continuous by adding. Therefore, the situation where the pockets that have already been set as the hit pockets are continuous is grasped, and the position of the hit pocket to be added (added) is set by the "increase effect". As a result, the roulette chance effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the processing of S6004 or S6005 is completed, the hit position storage area 223k is updated (S6006) so that the selected additional position becomes the hit position, and this process is terminated. The additional position determination process is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121) shown in FIG. 204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. Of the special drawing 2 winning command processing 3 (S2121), each processing of S3201 to S3208 is the same as each processing of special drawing 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) S3201 to S3208 in the above-described first control example. The process is executed.

Then, when it is determined in the process of S3208 that the addition is to be added (S3208: Yes), the addition position determination process is executed (S3221), and then this process is terminated. Since the additional position determination process executed in S3221 is the same as the additional position determination process executed in S3125 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the third control example, since the addition position determination process is also executed in the special figure 2 winning command process 3 (S2121), 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P1) provided on the rotating member 640 are executed. The area where the hit pocket is set can be more biased with respect to P30), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The above-mentioned special figure 2 winning command process 3 (see FIG. 204) is configured to execute the addition position determination process when it is determined in the process of S3208 to add the command. , The "easy selection area" and the "difficult selection area" may be set again. As a result, the area where the hit pocket is set can be more biased with respect to the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, the variation display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The variation display setting process 3 differs in that the variation pattern selection process (S3321) is added to the variation display setting process of the first control example described above. In this variation pattern selection process (S3321), a process of selecting a variation pattern for executing the above-mentioned "chance eye continuous effect" is executed.

First, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing a variation display setting process 3 (S1641) executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. In each of the variable display setting processes 3 of S3301 to S3303, the same processes as those of S3301 to S3303 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example described above are executed.

When the processing of S3303 is completed, next, the variation pattern selection process (S3E21) for selecting the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command of this time is executed. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. 206. When this variation pattern selection process (S3321) is completed, the processes of S3e 05 to S3e 10 are then executed, and this process is completed. Each process of S3305 to S3310 is executed in the same manner as each process of S3305 to S3310 in the first control example described above.

Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (S3321) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern selection process. As shown in FIG. 206, when the variation pattern selection process is executed, it is first determined whether the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is in the "consecutive villa mode" (S6101).

When it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is set to ON (S6101: Yes), the table for the consecutive villa corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S6105). Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "hit middle fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a shows the consecutive villa medium jackpot. Read the table 222a3.

Next, the value of the effect counter 223 rv and the value of the chance eye count counter 223 qv are read (S6106), and the effect mode corresponding to the value of each read counter (effect counter 223 rv and chance eye count counter 223 qv) is determined (S6107). .. Specifically, for example, when the value of the effect counter 223rv obtained by reading the table 223a3 for the big hit in the consecutive villas is "60" and the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is "1", it is "winning". "2nd consecutive chance production" is selected (see FIG. 198).

After completing the process of S6107 described above, it is then determined whether or not the chance eye effect is determined (selected) as the effect mode of this time (S6108). When it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect is determined (selected) (S6108: Yes), the corresponding value is added to the chance eye count counter 223qv (S6109), and the process proceeds to the process of S6111.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6108 that the chance eye effect has not been determined (selected) (S6108: No), the value of the chance eye count counter 223qv is initialized (S6110), and the process proceeds to S6111.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6101 when the time saving state flag 223o is not set to on (set to off) (S6101: No), the fluctuation pattern is selected for the normal table corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. Read from table 222a (S6102). Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 indicates a fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "outside middle fluctuation", it is usually used for deviation from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. Read table 222a2.

When the processing of S6102 is completed, the value of the effect counter 223rv is then read (S6103), the effect mode corresponding to the read value of the effect counter 223rv is determined (S6104), and the process is shifted to S6111.

In the process of S6111 to be executed after the process of S6109, S6110, or S6104 is executed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the effect mode determined in each process is set (S6111), and this process is terminated. To do.

As described above, in the third control example, when the addition is determined and the hit pocket is determined in the increase effect, a section in which the ratio of the hit pocket is intentionally high is provided. Here, if the arrangement of the hit pockets is completely randomly determined, the hit pockets may be evenly distributed over the entire rotating member 640. In this case, no matter when the ball B falls from the holding piece 677, there is no difference in the degree of expectation that the ball B will fall into the hit pocket. That is, even if the sphere B is made to swing and the player is made to predict the section (pocket) in which the sphere B falls from the cycle (amplitude) of the swinging motion, the degree of expectation cannot be different. There is a risk. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the swing effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in this control example, since the section having a high hit pocket ratio is intentionally provided, the section having a high hit pocket ratio is arranged and the sphere B swings on the upper part of the holding piece 677. It is possible to make the player watch the correspondence with the momentum (cycle) more carefully. That is, the position (section) where the sphere B falls is predicted from the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation, expecting that the position (section) where the sphere B falls is a section where the ratio of the hit pockets is high. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the swing effect.

Further, in the third control example, in the "renso mode" in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is mainly executed, the chance eye continuous effect in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed once or a plurality of times can be executed. .. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine capable of executing the same type of production over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, fluctuation display for the number of reserved balls held at the start of the production). , "Continuous notice production"). In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations depending on the number of times the production of the same system is executed, the content of the production, and the like. However, in the conventional game machine, the number of times the effect is executed, the effect time, etc. depend on the reserved ball, so the continuous advance notice effect should be applied to the game machine that does not have the function of holding the lottery result in the first place. I couldn't. Further, in the conventional game machine, it is possible to execute an effect in which the variation display is performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner in one variation display, and the pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times. By executing the effect of the same system in the variable display, the above-mentioned continuous advance notice effect may be executed in the variable display of 1. In this conventional game machine, continuous advance notice effect can be executed regardless of the number of reserved balls, but since it is necessary to execute the effect within the range of the fluctuation time set in the variable display, a sufficient effect period is secured. There was a problem that it could be difficult.

On the other hand, in this control example, a specific effect (effect in which a chance eye is displayed) can be executed one or more times in one variable display. Then, when the variable display is executed, whether or not to set a specific effect for the variable display, the number of executions when the specific effect is executed, and the like are executed before the variable display. It is configured to make a judgment based on the history of a specific production. Then, based on the lottery result of the special symbol that triggers the variable display, the maximum number of consecutive times of a specific effect is different between the case of a miss and the case of a big hit. With this configuration, in the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 in which the lottery result of the special symbol is not reserved, a specific effect is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays to the player. You can have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

Further, in this control example, when the display of the chance eye is determined in the short variation of the fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the chance eye is 0.5 seconds after the symbol variation of 0.2 seconds is executed. Stop is displayed. In addition, when the chance eye continuous effect is determined in the middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds, the pseudo fluctuation period (0.2 seconds) and the chance eye temporary stop period (0.5 seconds) are changed to a fluctuation period of 3 seconds. Set once or multiple times inside. In this way, the pseudo fluctuation period and the fixed time during the middle fluctuation are made the same as the fluctuation time (period) (0.2 seconds) and the fixed time (period) (0.5 seconds) of the short fluctuation, respectively. Since it is configured in, the chance eye stop display in the middle fluctuation can be displayed to the player without discomfort.

In addition, as a pseudo effect executed during the middle fluctuation, in addition to the pseudo fluctuation period and the temporary stop period, a pseudo stop period that simulates the period during which the new symbol fluctuation is not started is provided, so that the lottery of the special symbol is stored. The fluctuations when using a configuration that does not (so-called a configuration that does not have a hold storage function and the fluctuation display is executed discretely (discontinuously) even if the sphere is continuously launched) are simulated without discomfort. Can be expressed.

In this third control example, in a state where the short variation for disconnection in which the "chance eye effect" is set is executed twice in a row, when the next short variation is determined to be a hit short variation, the "chance eye effect" is produced. Is configured to be configurable, and in the case of a short fluctuation when the next fluctuation is missed, the configuration is such that the "chance eye effect" is not set. That is, only when the special symbol is a big hit, the chance eyes are allowed to be stopped and displayed three times in a row, and when the special symbol lottery is missed, the number of consecutive chance eyes is limited to two times. It is configured to be.

With this configuration, it is possible to play the game focusing on the number of consecutive chances, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of whether the chance eye continuous effect is set in the middle fluctuation or the short fluctuation in which the chance eye stop display is set is set multiple times in a row, the chance eye stop display is displayed multiple times (three times) at a predetermined interval. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being done. Therefore, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect to the player.

In the third control example, as described above, the control for restricting the stop display of the chance eye is executed for the continuous variable display, but other configurations may be used, for example. After the chance eyes are displayed twice in a row, the production mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is not selected as the production mode corresponding to the fluctuation in which the player wins the loss until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. It is good to do so. As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect to the player.

In the third control example, as the "chance eye continuous effect", the interval at which the chance eyes stop is set to be a predetermined interval, but other configurations may be used, for example, a predetermined period ( Within 3 seconds, which is the fluctuation time during which the middle fluctuation is executed, a plurality of timings at which the chance eyes are stopped are provided, and the chance eyes are stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (3 times) in total at any of the timings. It may be configured as. As a result, it becomes difficult to grasp at what timing the chance eye is displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as a display mode of the chance eye when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, a plurality of patterns of the color of the third symbol to be stopped and the color of the background are easily set in advance, and the chance eye displayed in a specific display mode is 1. When the stop display is displayed, the same value as when the normal chance eye is stopped and displayed three times may be given. As a result, even if it becomes difficult for the chance eye to be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times, that is, even if the chance eye is never stopped and displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation starts, the jackpot is won. Since it is possible to execute an effect of notifying that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the third control example, the chance eye displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as an object that appears a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). Anything that can be recognized by a person may be used, and for example, the upper elevating unit 300 may be moved at predetermined intervals. As a result, it is possible to suggest the result of the lottery using a configuration other than the display of the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect that enhances the interest.

Further, when a configuration in which a movable accessory attached to the pachinko machine 10 such as the upper elevating unit 300 is moved is used, in addition to the configuration in which the same operation (swaying operation) is executed a plurality of times, for example, the movable accessory is stepwise. It may be configured to be movable until the final stage by moving the movable accessory a predetermined number of times. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot is approaching, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Even when the third symbol display device 81 uses a configuration in which a predetermined display mode (chance eye, etc.) is stopped and displayed a plurality of times as in the third control example, the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed. The third symbol display device 81 may display a number display for displaying the number of times the game has been performed and a target display for displaying the number of stop display times in a predetermined display mode necessary for notifying that the jackpot has been won. As a result, each time the predetermined display mode is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot is approaching, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third control example, since the process of counting the number of chance eyes is executed for the fluctuations executed continuously, the fluctuations in which the effect mode in which the chance eyes are stopped and displayed are selected are continuously performed a plurality of times. In the case, the chance eye can be stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times across a plurality of fluctuations, and the effect mode is controlled so that the predetermined number of chance eyes is not stopped and displayed by the effect mode corresponding to the variation that is won out of the game. Because it is done, the production effect is enhanced.

In this way, the configuration is changed from the configuration in which the stop display effect of the chance eye is executed for the fluctuations executed continuously, and the configuration in which the stop display effect of the chance eye is executed for the fluctuations executed within the predetermined period. You may. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of selecting a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time as in the third control example, it is possible to stop and display a predetermined number of chance eyes at a predetermined interval even if non-continuous fluctuations are used. Is. When such a configuration is used, an effect mode in which the chance eye is stopped and displayed a plurality of times within a predetermined period is predetermined, and the chance eye is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the timing of stopping and displaying the chance eye in the effect mode. It may be configured to stop.

With this configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the chance eye continuous effect using the non-continuous variation. When using this configuration, it is advisable to provide a slight allowable range at the timing when the chance eye is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the fluctuations that enable the continuous production of chance eyes, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the third control example, when the "outside middle fluctuation" is determined in the "chance eye continuous production", the first or second chance th time (0.2 seconds after the fluctuation is started) is performed. It is configured so that the stop display can be performed at the stop display timing of the second time (after) or the second time (1.6 seconds after the change starts). The chance eye may be stopped and displayed at the stop display timing (3 seconds after that). With this configuration, it is possible to stop and display a plurality of chances at predetermined intervals across the middle fluctuation and the short fluctuation.

Further, in the third control example, when the "additional effect" is executed, a configuration is provided in which the hit pockets (lucky numbers) added (added) by the "additional effect" are intentionally biased (not evenly distributed). Therefore, for the 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640, a region (location) having a large number of hit pockets and a region (location) having a small number of hit pockets are intentionally provided. Can be done. Therefore, in the roulette chance production, the area where it is easy to hit (the area where there are many hit pockets set) and the area where it is difficult to hit (the area where there are few hit pockets) pass, so the player decides when the ball B falls. Will be interesting to see, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 214. In the first control example described above, the control and effect modes mainly in the "normal mode" and the "preparation mode" have been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertainment effect in the "renso mode", a method of improving the player's interest by producing an effect using an accessory (upper elevating unit 300) is provided. explain.

Further, in the above-described first control example, when the addition of the hit pocket is determined in the increase effect executed in the first half (20 seconds from the start of the effect) of the "renso mode suggestion effect", the position of the hit pocket to be added is determined. Was randomly determined within a range in which the number of hit pockets did not exceed 6 consecutive times. Then, when the sphere B is dropped in the roulette chance effect, the sphere B may be dropped by determining the arrangement of the rotating member 640 after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes sufficiently small. The sphere B is held on the holding piece 677 until the possible pocket is in front of the falling position (0.2 seconds before reaching the falling position).

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the execution of the increase effect, and the additional position of the hit pocket is determined. Here, the back calculation method will be described in detail. Since the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 is reached 70 seconds after the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", it is possible that the ball B can fall after the swinging operation. It is about 75 seconds to 82 seconds after the start of the "renso mode suggestion effect". Therefore, when adding a hit pocket when the transition to the "Renso mode" is confirmed, the player will be in the drop position about 75 to 82 seconds after the start of the "Renso mode suggestion effect". The pocket to be arranged (or the pocket close to the drop position) is predicted from the current elapsed time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and is determined as the additional position. On the other hand, when the transition to the "renso mode" is not confirmed, the addition position is determined while avoiding the pocket that is predicted to be placed in the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds as described above. As described above, the arrangement of the rotating members 640 at the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" has a different configuration depending on the pocket in which the ball B was dropped in the previous "ream villa mode suggestion effect". By arranging the rotating member 640 and configuring it so that the elapsed time can be grasped, it is possible to easily predict the pocket to be arranged at the drop position after about 75 seconds to 82 seconds. As a result, the ball B can be accurately dropped into the hit or miss pocket depending on whether or not the mode shifts to the "renso mode".

Further, in the first control example described above, the rotation member 640 is arranged (pocket arranged at the drop position) by combining the outputs (H output or L output) of the detection sensors A to F of the rotation position detection sensor 684. Was configured to identify. As a result, when controlling the lighting of the rear LED 625, only the lighting area arranged on the back side of the pocket set in the hit pocket according to the arrangement of the rotating member 640 can be accurately set to the lighting state. , The player was able to easily recognize the hit pocket from the appearance. In addition, when the ball B is dropped, the arrangement of the rotating member 640 is determined, and the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the "preparation mode" (that is, whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode") is displayed. It was configured so that it could be dropped into the appropriate type of pocket accordingly.

In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are stored in the next pocket (currently dropped). The pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket arranged at the position) is held until it is arranged at the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with the new detection result acquired by arranging the next pocket at the drop position, and the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are the detection results of continuous (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, the damage of the detection sensors A to F (or the damage of the detected portion 641c) can be detected.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
First, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. As shown in FIGS. 207 (a) to 207 (d), the ROM 222 of this control example has a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)). The difference is that the contents of the scenario table 222b have been partially changed. The contents of the other ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (a). FIG. 207 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 222a of the fourth control example. Similar to the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the first control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a in the fourth control example is roughly indicated by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. It is a data table used to determine more detailed fluctuation contents from the fluctuation contents (fluctuation time).

As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example is composed of a normal medium-sized jackpot table 222a1, a normal center-out-out table 222a2, and a continuous villa-in-house variation pattern selection table 222a5. There is.

Normally, the medium-sized jackpot table 222a1 defines detailed effect modes corresponding to the fluctuation types of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (shown). Z). Here, an effect mode defined in the medium-sized jackpot table 222a1 will be described. First, in the normal medium-sized jackpot table 222a1, a 7-second stop pattern and a 10-second stop pattern are defined as stop patterns of symbols that are variably displayed on the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331.

The 7-second stop pattern is a stop pattern in which the symbols that are variablely displayed on the display units 331a to 331d are stopped and displayed at equal intervals, and the 10-second stop pattern is the last symbol among the display units 331a to 331d. It takes a long time from when the symbol corresponding to the lucky number (for example, "2", "7", "13") is stopped and displayed on the display unit other than the display unit 331d to stop the symbol on the display unit 331d. This is the stop pattern to be set.

In addition, the normal middle-out table 222a2 also has a detailed effect corresponding to the fluctuation types of 7 seconds and 10 seconds based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 in the same manner as the normal medium-sized jackpot table 222a1. Aspects are defined (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are normally selected as the fluctuation patterns selected when a medium-sized jackpot is won. The ratio is specified to be about 1: 1 (see FIG. 111 (a)), and as the fluctuation pattern normally selected in the case of a deviation from the center, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation time with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds are specified. It is stipulated that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the above is selected is about 3: 1 (see FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, when the 10-second stop pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (b), the details of the variation pattern selection table 222a5 during the consecutive villas will be described. The variation pattern selection table 222a5 in the consecutive villas is a variation pattern selection table referred to in the "consecutive villa mode" during the time saving.

As shown in FIG. 207 (b), when the variation type is a hit short variation (0.2 seconds), a normal jackpot effect is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. When the fluctuation type is a hit middle fluctuation (3 seconds), the upper swing effect is set for the value "0 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. When the fluctuation type is a deviated short variation (0.2 seconds), the deviating effect is normally set for the value "0 to 79" of the effect counter 223sw, and the value "80 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. On the other hand, an upper swinging effect, which is an effect mode involving the operation of the upper moving unit 300, is set. When the fluctuation type is off-middle fluctuation (3 seconds), the normal off-effect is set for the value "0 to 89" of the effect counter 223sw, and the upper part is set with respect to the value "90 to 99" of the effect counter 223sw. A rocking effect is set.

Here, the upper swing effect is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 moves up and down is executed a predetermined number of times. Specifically, when a fluctuation that makes the lottery result of the special symbol a big hit is executed, the upper swinging motion is performed three times (0 seconds, 1.4 seconds, and 2.8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). The upper swing effect to be performed (3 times in total) is executed. In the upper swing effect executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed once or twice is executed. In this way, since the number of upper swing operations when the upper swing effect is set is different depending on whether or not it is a big hit, the number of upper swing operations can be noticed. That is, the upper elevating unit 300 can be observed in the hope that the upper swing operation is performed three times in succession. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the "renso mode".

Next, the contents of the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (c). As shown in FIG. 207 (c), the operation scenario table 222b in the fourth control example swings upward with respect to the configuration of the operation scenario table 222b in the first control example described above (see FIG. 119 (a)). The difference is that the production table 222b8 is added. The upper swing effect table 222b8 is a table that is referred to when the upper swing effect to be executed in this control example is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 207 (d), the specified contents of the upper swing effect table 222b8 will be described. Similar to the other data tables defined as the operation scenario table 222b, the upper swing effect table 222b8 has a motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223 g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. The set values (operating speed (pps), number of operating steps, and operating direction) to be set for) are specified.

As shown in FIG. 207 (d), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g is an operation for lowering the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the ascending position (origin position) to the descending position (outward route operation). Are associated with each other. Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the upper elevating unit 300 in the upper swing effect is reached. Note that 127 steps means the number of steps to the descending position.

Here, the operating speed of 635 pps means that the motor driver outputs a signal instructing the upper elevating motor 341 to drive one step at a frequency of 635 pulses (steps) per second. The time required for the elevating body 330 of the elevating unit 300 to operate in 127 steps (moving from the origin position to the descending position) is 127/635 seconds (0.2 seconds).

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for raising the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 from the descending position to the ascending position (origin position). Specifically, 635 pps is specified as the operation speed, 127 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. Therefore, the elevating body 330 of the vertical elevating body unit 300 moves from the descending position to the ascending position over 0.2 seconds. Further, END data is associated with the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that the execution of all the operations specified in the operation scenario has been completed.

In this way, in the upper swing effect, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 descends from the ascending position to the descending position in 0.2 seconds, and then descends from the descending position to the ascending position in 0.2 seconds. It is an effect of executing a swinging motion for a total of 0.4 seconds (3 times in the case of a big hit, 1 or 2 times in the case of a miss). As described above, this upper swinging effect is executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the consecutive villa mode.

As a result, whether or not the swing operation is executed at a predetermined timing (0 seconds (immediately after the start of the fluctuation), 1.4 seconds, 2.8 seconds) after the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed (started). It is possible to make the player interested in the crab.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 208. The RAM 223 in the present control example includes a timer 223pw for an upper swing effect, an upper swing effect flag 223qw, and a sensor information storage area 223rw with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (b)). , The effect counter 223sw is added, and the other configurations are the same. The same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The upper swing effect timer 223pw is a timer counter for counting (timekeeping) the effect time (elapsed time from the start of the effect) of the upper swing effect. This upper swing effect timer is initialized to 0 when the upper swing effect is determined in the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) (see S6135 in FIG. 213), and the upper swing effect is executed. If this is the case, 1 is added each time the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) is executed (see S6204 in FIG. 214).

The upper swing effect flag 223qw is a flag for determining whether or not the upper swing effect is being executed. The upper swing effect flag 223qw is the upper part in the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213). It is set to on when the swing effect is determined (see S6133 in FIG. 213), and when it is determined in the upper swing effect process (see FIG. 214) that the upper swing effect has ended (big hit has started). (S6201: Yes), the third rocking operation timing (S6207: Yes)) is set to off (S6202, S6208).

The sensor information storage area 223rw is an area for storing (updating) the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684, and stores the output values of the detection sensors A to F. It is configured so that it can be stored (updated) at least once. The sensor information storage area 223rw stores (updates) the output values of the detection sensors A to F in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210) (see S2836 in FIG. 210).

Details will be described later, but in the rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 210), the output values of the detection sensors A to F stored last time are compared with the output values of the current detection sensors A to F (S2833 in FIG. 210). ), It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the detected values of the detection sensors A to F. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F and the output values of the current detection sensors A to F match, and if they match, there is no abnormality, and if they do not match, there is no abnormality. Determines that there is an abnormality.

Here, the output values of the detection sensors A to F are a total of 6 attached to the pocket that is the drop position of the sphere B, the pocket for the right two pockets, and the pocket for the left two pockets, for a total of five pockets. It changes depending on the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. As shown in the rotation position determination table 222c (see FIG. 121), when the pocket at the drop position changes by one, the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E changes to the detection sensors B to B. It is moved to the position detected by F. The detected unit 641c detected by the detection sensor F is out of the detection range of the detection sensors A to F, and a new detected unit 641c is moved to a position where the detection sensor A detects it. Therefore, if the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F after the pocket that is the drop position has changed by one, there is a problem such as damage to the detected portion 641c. Can be determined to have occurred.

The effect counter 223sw is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (“upper swing effect”, etc.), various lottery, etc. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 In 4 (see FIG. 209), the update is repeated in the range of 0 to 99.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 209 to 214. First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 201 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 209. The main process 4 in the fourth control example includes a point that the upper swing effect process (S1651) is added to the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, and the command determination process (S1614). The point that the rotation setting process 4 (see S2609 and FIG. 210) is executed instead of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) and the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the command determination process (S1614) are replaced. The difference is that the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117, see FIG. 211) is executed and the variable display setting process 4 (S1652, see FIG. 212) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (S1615). However, the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the main process 4 in the fourth control example, the upper elevating unit 300 is used in the "renso mode" after the processes S1601 to S1610 are executed in the same manner as in the main process (see FIG. 145) of the first control example. The upper swing effect processing for setting the existing effect is executed (S1651), and the process shifts to S1611. The details of the upper swing effect processing (S1651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 214.

Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) in this control example, after the processes S161 to S1614 are executed, the variation display setting process 4 is performed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. It is executed (S1652), and the process shifts to S1616. The details of the variable display setting process 4 (S1652) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Next, the details of the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 210. The rotation setting process 4 (S2609) in the fourth control example is a process executed in place of the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example in the execution command process (see FIG. 155). Similar to the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157), this process is for controlling the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 (and the rear LED 625).

The rotation setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example executes the process of S2831 instead of the process of S2801 for the rotation setting process (see FIG. 157) in the first control example, and S2832. The difference is that the processing of S2836 is added, and the other points are the same. Hereinafter, the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the rotation setting process 4 (S2609) is started, first, it is determined whether or not all the outputs of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 have changed from the L state. (S2831). That is, it is determined whether each detected portion 641c provided in the pocket is displaced from outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F into the detection range, and all the outputs of the detection sensors A to F remain in the L state. When it is determined (each detected portion 641c is still arranged outside the detection range of the detection sensors A to F) (S2831: No), a new (next) pocket is arranged at the drop position of the ball B. If not (the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 has been less than or equal to the unit rotation amount (the amount of rotation that moves by one pocket) since the output values of the detection centers A to F were stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw last time. In the case of), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2831, the output values of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are all L, and the output of at least one of the detection sensors A to F is output. When it is determined that the sensor has been displaced to the H state (S2831: Yes), when a new (next) pocket is placed at the drop position of the ball B (previous sensor information storage area 223rw of the detection centers A to F). Since the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotating member 640 is the unit rotation amount from the time when the output value is stored), in this case, the process proceeds to S2802. Even if the output values of the detection sensors A to F are not all L, unless the output values of any of the detection sensors A to F change from L to H (S2831: No), the output values of the detection sensors A to F have already been changed. Since this is the case when the processing after S2802 is executed, in this case, the main processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2802, the pocket of the drop position of the sphere B is specified (S2802) as in the first control example, and the rotation position storage area 223u is updated based on the specified pocket (S2803). Next, it is determined whether or not the detection by the detection sensors A to F after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is the first time (S2832). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the initial value is stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw. In the sensor information storage area 223rw, L (0) is set for all bits of the storage area for 2 bytes as an initial value when the power is turned on. In the process of S2832, when L (0) is stored in all the bits assigned to the sensor information storage area 223rw, it is determined that the detection is the first time.

In the process of S2832, when it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is not performed for the first time after the power is turned on (that is, the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F are stored) (S2832). : No), the output value of the previous detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw (before the pocket position changes by one), and this time, one of the pockets is newly placed at the drop position. The output values of the detection sensors A to F displaced due to the displacement are compared (S2833). Specifically, as described above, among the output values of the previous detection sensors A to F, the five types of output values of the detection sensors A to E and the output values of the current detection sensors A to F, the detection sensor B Compare with 5 types of output values of ~ F. The presence or absence of an abnormality in the sensor detection result can be determined only by the detection results of the detection sensors A to F for the pockets placed in the previous drop position and the detection results for the pockets placed in the drop position this time. This is because, when the pocket to be detected changes by one pocket, the detected portion 641c detected by the detection sensors A to E is moved to the position detected by the detection sensors B to F. Therefore, if the output values of the detection sensors A to E do not match the output values of the detection sensors B to F before the pocket at the drop position changes by one, at least one of the detected portions 641c is damaged. Therefore, it can be determined that a problem such as being unable to be detected by the detection sensor has occurred.

When the processing of S2833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the comparison result executed by the processing of S2833 is abnormal (S2834). Specifically, if the output values of the previous detection sensors A to E and the output values of the current detection sensors B to F match, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and if they do not match, it is determined that there is an abnormality. If it is determined that the comparison result is abnormal in the process of S2834 (S2834: Yes), the error information is output (display error command is set) (S2835), and the process proceeds to the process of S2836.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2832, if it is determined that the detection by the detection sensors A to F is the first time (S2832: Yes), it cannot be compared with the previous detection result, so the processing of S2833 to S2835 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S2836. If it is determined that the comparison result is normal in the process of S2834 (S2834: No), the process of S2835 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2836.

In the process of S2836, the value of the sensor information storage area 223rw is updated based on the current output values of the detection sensors A to F, and the process proceeds to the process of S2804. In the processing of S2804 to S2808, the same processing as the processing of S2804 to S2808 of the first control example is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the rotation setting process 4 in the fourth control example, a plurality of detection information (output values) of the detection sensors A to F can be stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, and a predetermined timing (any pocket) can be stored. Of the detection information (detection information of detection sensors A to F stored last time and detection information acquired this time) obtained at the timing when is placed at the drop position, the same detection information is obtained if it is normal. By comparing the detection information of the range), it is possible to detect the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c.

In this fourth control example, a configuration is used in which the previous detection information (pocket arranged at the previous drop position) and the current detection information (pocket arranged at the current drop position) are compared. It is also possible to compare the detection information acquired at three or more timings (for example, the timing when the pocket is placed at the drop position this time, the previous time, and the time before the previous time). It is possible to determine the presence or absence of.

Further, in the fourth control example, the detection information (output value) of the detection sensors A to F used to identify the pocket of the rotating member 640 is used to cause a failure of the detection sensors A to F or a damage of the detected portion 641c. Since it is configured to execute the abnormality detection such as, it is not necessary to separately acquire the detection information for detecting the abnormality of the detection sensors A to F or the detected unit 641c. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 by the MPU 221 can be reduced.

The configuration for detecting the failure of the detection sensors A to F or the damage of the detected portion 641c is a combination of the detection results acquired when the pocket was placed in the drop position last time and the pocket this time. It is not limited to the form in which the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing with the combination of the detection results acquired when the position is arranged. For example, the arrangement pattern of the detected portion 641c is stored (stored) in advance. A configuration may be used in which it is determined whether or not the output value (detection information) output from at least one of the detection sensors A to F matches the arrangement pattern stored in advance. Even with this configuration, the same effect as in the fourth control example can be obtained.

Further, based on the output values (detection information) of the detection sensors A to F stored in the sensor information storage area 223rw, the prediction detection information that predicts at least a part of the detection information to be stored next time is created, and the prediction detection is performed. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the information and the detection information to be stored next time match.

Next, the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 211. The special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is different from the special drawing 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example in S3231 to S3234 instead of the processing of S3209 to S3211. It differs in that it executes the process, and is the same in other respects. Hereinafter, the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (S2117) in the fourth control example is started, first, the processes of S3201 to S3208 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S3208, when it is determined to add (S3208: Yes), the pocket within the fallable range is specified from the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 (S3231). Here, the timing at which the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation (throwing the ball B to the holding piece 677) is 50 seconds after the start of the roulette chance production (70 seconds from the start of the "renso mode suggestion production"). Later). Then, the period from when the ball B is thrown to when the ball B is dropped through the swinging motion on the holding piece 677 is about 7 to 10 seconds. Therefore, for example, when the processing of S3231 is executed 5 seconds after the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the pitching device 650 performs the pitching operation 65 seconds later, and 72 seconds to 75 seconds later. It can be determined that the sphere B falls. Then, the rotating member 640 rotates at a rotational speed that allows one pocket to move per second. Therefore, in this specific example, the ball B falls after performing the rotation operation for 72 to 75 pockets (that is, to the pocket 12 to 15 ahead of the pocket currently arranged at the drop position). Then it is determined. In the process of S3231, seven pockets including the margin are determined to be in the fallable range. For example, in the above specific example, the pockets 8 to 17 ahead are determined to be the fallable range. That is, there are two margins in the front and back.

When the processing of S3231 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball that becomes a probabilistic jackpot in the "preparation mode" (when the time saving state counter is larger than 0) (S3232). In the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is a reserved ball that becomes a probable change jackpot in the "preparation mode" (S3232: Yes), the pocket specified in the process of S3231 is selected as an additional position (S3234), and the process of S3212. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3232, if it is determined that there is no reserved ball that will be a probable change jackpot during the preparation mode (S3232: No), a pocket different from the pocket specified in the processing of S3231 is selected as the additional position (S3233). ), The process proceeds to S3212.

After the processing of S3212, the processing of S3212 and the processing of S3213 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command processing 4 (S2117) of this control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3232 that there is a reserved ball that becomes a probable change jackpot in the "preparation mode" (that is, in the roulette chance production). , When the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket), a pocket within the fallable range specified in the process of S3231 is selected as the addition position. As a result, a pocket that can be dropped can be added as a hit position, so that there are many pockets (lighted pockets) that can be dropped when the ball B is dropped (roulette chance effect). It will be placed. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the ball B into the hit pocket (lighting pocket).

On the other hand, in the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no reserved ball that becomes a probable change jackpot during the preparation mode (that is, when the ball B comes off and falls into the pocket in the roulette chance production), it is specified in the process of S3231. Select a pocket different from the pocket that can be dropped as the additional position. As a result, the pocket that can be dropped is not added as a hit position, so that the pocket that can be dropped (the pocket that is turned off) is out of the range that can be dropped when the ball B is dropped (roulette chance effect). Will be placed in large numbers. As a result, it becomes easy to drop the ball B into the detached pocket (the pocket that is turned off).

As described above, in the special figure 2 winning command process 4 (see FIG. 211) in the fourth control example, the range in which the ball B can fall in the roulette chance effect is calculated based on the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650. The 30 pockets (pockets P1 to P30) provided on the rotating member 640 are divided into a range in which the sphere B can fall (first region) and a range in which the sphere B does not fall (difficult) (second region). It is classified.

Then, based on the determination result of whether or not there is a hold that becomes a probable change jackpot during the preparation mode, that is, the determination result of whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or the out pocket by the roulette chance effect, the hit pocket is placed. Since the area to be added is set to either the first area or the second area, even if the frequency of the effect of adding (adding) the winning pocket is increased, the ball B is appropriately applied to the lottery result of the special symbol. Can be dropped.

In the fourth control example, as the first region in which the ball B can fall, a range larger than five, which is the number of hit pockets (lucky numbers) that can be specified by the player (that is, pockets 7). It is configured to set (for each). As a result, even if the player sets the lucky number to five consecutive pockets and all the five consecutive pockets are included in the fallable range (first area), the fallable range (first area). It is possible to set at least one out-of-pocket in one area). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately drop the ball B with respect to the lottery result of the special symbol.

Next, the details of the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 212. The variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in the fourth control example executes the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in place of the process of S3304 for the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. It differs in that it does, and is the same in other respects. Hereinafter, the same parts will be designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S1652) in this control example, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is ON in the process of S3301 as in the first control example described above (S3301: Yes), from S3302. The process of S3303 is executed. Then, the variation pattern selection process 4 is executed (S3331), the process proceeds to the process of S3305, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example, and this process is terminated. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a process for selecting a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (see FIG. 213) will be described with reference to FIG. 213.

The flowchart of FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) described above. The variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) is a modification of a part of the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. Specifically, the difference is that the process related to the upper swing effect (S6131 to S6135) is executed instead of the process related to the chance eye effect (S6106, S6108 to S6110). The points are the same. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the third control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variation pattern selection process 4 (S3331), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101). When it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is off in the processing of S6101 (S6101: No), the normal production mode is determined in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern processing (see FIG. 206) in the third control example. (S6102 to S6104), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101 when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223o is on (S6101: Yes), the table for the consecutive villas (variable pattern selection table 222a5 in the consecutive villas) is read from the variation pattern selection table 222a. (S6105). Then, the value of the effect counter 223sw is read out (S6131), and the effect mode is determined based on the read-out value of the variation pattern selection table 222a5 in the consecutive villa and the value of the effect counter 223sw (S6107).

Next, it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the effect mode determined in the process of S6107 is the upper effect mode (S6132). If it is determined in the process of S6132 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (that is, the upper swing effect is already being executed), or that the upper swing effect has not been determined in the process of S6107 (. S6132: No), a display variation pattern command for notifying a normal jackpot effect is set as an effect mode (S6111), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6132, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off and the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes), the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned on. Set (S6133) and set the upper swing operation (S6134). By setting the upper swing operation in the process of S6134, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is moved up and down based on the upper swing effect table 222b8 of the operation scenario table 222b described above.

After that, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0 (S6135), a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined effect mode is set (S6111), and this process ends.

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3331) in the present control example, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is set to move up and down when the upper swing effect is determined (S6132: Yes). At the same time, the upper swing effect timer 223pw is initialized to 0. Using this upper swing effect timer 223pw, the elapsed time from the start of the upper swing effect is measured, and when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds or 2.8 seconds) elapses, the upper lifting unit 300 is again used. It is possible to perform an upper swinging operation that moves the elevating body 330 up and down.

Next, the details of the upper swing effect processing (S1651) in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 214. The upper swing effect process (S1651) is a predetermined time from the start of the upper swing effect (in this control example, when the upper swing effect is determined (started) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3331)). It is a process for measuring the elapse of 1.4 seconds and 2.8 seconds) and executing the upper swing operation when the predetermined time elapses.

In the upper swing effect processing (S1651), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game has been started (S6201). In the process of S6201, when it was determined that the jackpot game was started (S6201: Yes), the upper swing effect was started, but after that, the jackpot game was started due to the occurrence of the jackpot due to the hit short variation. Since this is the case, the upper swing effect flag 223qw is set to off (S6202) in order to end the upper swing effect, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6201 when it is determined that the jackpot game has not been started (S6201: No), then it is determined whether or not the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203).

If it is determined in the process of S6203 that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is off (S6203: No), it means that the upper swing effect has not been started, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the upper swing effect flag 223qw is on (S6203: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6204 in order to execute the upper swing effect.

In the process of S6204, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added by 1 (S6204). This upper swing effect process (S1651) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 209) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 described above. Therefore, the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is added every 1ms by the processing of S6204.

After finishing the processing of S6204, it is then determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after addition is 1400 (S6205). That is, it is determined whether or not 1.4 seconds have passed since the upper swing effect was started.

In the process of S6205, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw after addition is 1400 (S6205: Yes), the upper part is used to move the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 up and down. The swing operation is set (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6207.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is not 1400 (S6205), the processing of S6206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6207. In the process of S6207, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207). That is, it is determined whether or not 2.8 seconds have passed since the upper swing effect was started.

In the process of S6207, when it is determined that the value of the upper swing effect timer 223pw is 2800 (S6207: Yes), it is the end timing of the upper swing effect, so the upper swing effect flag 223qw is turned off. After setting (S6208), the process proceeds to S6209.

In the process of S6209, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is being executed (S6209). When it is determined in the process of S6209 that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is being executed (S6209: Yes), the upper swing operation is set (S6210).

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, when it is determined that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed (S6209: No), the process of S6210 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the upper swing effect in this control example is an effect in which the upper swing operation in which the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 moves up and down is executed up to three times as described above. When this upper swinging motion is executed three times, it is limited to the case where a big hit is obtained after that, and when the upper swinging motion is executed three times, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won. it can.

The processing of S6209 is already executed for the first (immediately after the start of the upper swing effect) upper swing operation and the second (immediately after the start of the upper swing effect) 1.4 of the upper swing effects. This is the case when the upper swing operation (after seconds) is executed. In this case, if the big hit fluctuation is being executed, the upper swing operation is set in order to execute the third upper swing operation (2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect). (S6210).

On the other hand, if the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed (S6209: No), this process is terminated without setting the upper swing effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the upper swing effect is executed three times after that, even though it is not a big hit.

As described above, the upper swing effect executed by the fluctuation pattern selection process 4 (S3331 in FIG. 213) and the upper swing effect process (S1651 in FIG. 214) of the fourth control example is output from the main control device 110. The first upper swing operation is executed based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the second upper swing operation is performed based on the elapse of a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) after the upper swing effect is executed. Will be executed. Then, when a predetermined time (1.4 seconds) has elapsed since the second upper swing operation was executed, the third upper swing operation is performed when the special symbol won by the jackpot is changed. Is configured to run.

As a result, the upper swing effect composed of the operation mode (upper swing operation) executed a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval) is combined with the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. It can be executed without being affected by.

Therefore, as in the "hit middle fluctuation (variation time 3 seconds)" selected by the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5 during the consecutive villas, the upper swing operation is completed three times during one fluctuation as the upper swing effect. In addition to the case, the upper swing effect is started by the "off short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)", and the "hit short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" different from the fluctuation at which the upper swing effect is started is started. ) ”, Even if it fluctuates 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to execute the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times.

Therefore, a notification notifying that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if a configuration that does not store the lottery of special symbols (so-called configuration that does not have a hold storage function) such as the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is used, an effect that associates the fluctuations of the special symbols a plurality of times. Can be executed.

The pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for storing a lottery (winning information) of a special symbol (a configuration for holding and storing) may use the configuration of the fourth control example. For example, the third upper swing operation is executed. At the timing when the prize is held, it is determined whether or not there is prize information that has been won in the jackpot among the prize information that is stored on hold, and if there is prize information that has been won in the jackpot, the third upper swing operation is performed. It may be configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is executed three times is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fourth control example, the second upper swing operation is always executed 1.4 seconds after the upper swing effect is started. For example, the upper swing effect is started. It is configured so that it is determined whether the special symbol is fluctuating when 1.4 seconds have passed since then, and if it is determined that the special symbol is fluctuating, the second upper swing operation is executed. May be good. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is executed is an effect related to the variation display of the special symbol, and the effect can be enhanced. effective.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the pitching operation timing of the pitching device 650 in the roulette chance effect is calculated back in advance during the increase effect to determine the additional position of the hit pocket. That is, when the ball B is thrown, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion performed on the upper part of the movable piece 677 becomes smaller, and the timing (period) that gives a natural appearance when the ball B is dropped is calculated back. , The position to add the winning pocket is determined based on the back-calculated period and the result of this roulette chance production (whether or not to shift to the "renso mode"). Here, after the amplitude of the swinging motion of the sphere B is simply reduced, the pocket type corresponding to the result of this "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is placed in the falling position, and the corresponding pocket type is set. If the ball B is dropped at the timing when it is placed in the drop position, the corresponding pocket type may not be placed in the drop position for a long time, so that the ball B may stop before the ball B is dropped. There is. That is, even though the sphere B is stationary, it may not fall into the pocket, resulting in an extremely unnatural appearance.

On the other hand, in this control example, the section in which the sphere B can be dropped (the section in which the sphere B is arranged at the drop position when the swinging motion cycle of the sphere B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) is defined as "ream villa". When the hit pocket is increased by the increase effect after determining in advance at the start of the "mode suggestion effect", the distribution (addition) between the hit pocket and the out-of-pocket in the section where the ball B can be dropped is determined. In this case, whether or not to newly set the hit pocket in the section) is determined according to the result of the effect (whether the ball B is dropped into the hit pocket or the out pocket). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably arrange a type of pocket corresponding to the effect result in the section where the ball B can be dropped. Therefore, the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B is equal to or less than the predetermined cycle (1 second), and the sphere B can be reliably dropped into the target pocket before the swinging motion of the sphere B is stopped. it can. Therefore, the sphere B can be dropped with a natural appearance and with high accuracy.

Further, in the fourth control example, when the detection results of the six detection sensors (detection sensors A to F) constituting the rotation position detection sensor 684 are acquired, the detection results are placed in the next pocket (currently dropped position). The pocket that is placed in the drop position next to the pocket that is set is held until it is placed in the drop position. Then, the held detection result is compared with the new detection result acquired by arranging the next pocket at the drop position, and the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined. That is, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by determining whether the previous detection result and the current detection result are the detection results of continuous (adjacent) pockets. Thereby, the damage of the detection sensors A to F (or the damage of the detected portion 641c) can be detected.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, as one aspect of the entertainment effect in the "renso mode", the player's interest is improved by the production using the accessory (upper elevating unit 300). Specifically, the elevating body 330 of the upper elevating unit 300 is configured to be capable of executing an effect of elevating and lowering the upper elevating unit 300 one or more times at a predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval). The number of operations of the elevating body 330 differs depending on whether or not it is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the number of operations is 2 times or less, and only in the case of a big hit, 3 times of elevating operations are allowed. As a result, the player can be made to play the game by paying attention to the number of times the lifting body 330 is raised and lowered, so that it is possible to prevent the game in the "renso mode" from becoming monotonous. ..

The effect of raising and lowering the elevating body 330 (upper swing effect) is a fixed number of times regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol (even if the fluctuation time elapses) unless the jackpot is started. The ascending / descending operation is continued until the predetermined time interval (1.4 second interval) is executed. Therefore, as in the "hit middle fluctuation (variation time 3 seconds)" selected by the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a5 during the consecutive villas, the upper swing operation is completed three times during one fluctuation as the upper swing effect. In addition to the case, the upper swing effect is started by the "off short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)", and the "hit short fluctuation (variation time 0.2 seconds)" different from the fluctuation at which the upper swing effect is started is started. ) ”, Even if it fluctuates 2.8 seconds after the start of the upper swing effect, it is possible to execute the upper swing effect in which the upper swing operation is performed three times. Therefore, a notification notifying that a predetermined lottery result (big hit) has been won by executing a predetermined operation mode (upper swing operation) a plurality of times (three times) at a predetermined interval (1.4 second interval). The effect (upper swing effect) can be executed across a plurality of fluctuations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this fourth control example, a section in which the ball B can be dropped (the cycle of the swinging motion of the ball B is equal to or less than a predetermined cycle) during the execution of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect". Was predicted in advance from the production time, and when a new hit pocket was set, the position of the new hit pocket was determined in consideration of the section where the ball B fell, but in addition to this. , Is there any change in the section where the ball B will fall at a predetermined timing in the "ream villa mode suggestion" production (for example, the start time of the roulette chance production, the pitching timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650, etc.)? It may be configured to discriminate. Then, it is predicted at a section where the ball B is predicted to fall when the hit pocket is newly set and at a predetermined timing (for example, the start time of the roulette chance production, the pitching timing of the ball B by the pitching device 650, etc.). If there is a deviation from the section where the sphere B is predicted to fall, the deviation may be corrected. As a method of correcting the deviation, for example, by varying the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, the section in which the sphere B can actually fall is matched with the section predicted at the time when the hit pocket is added. However, by shifting the pitching timing by the pitching device 650 from a predetermined timing (that is, 70 seconds after the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect"), the ball B can actually fall. The section may be configured to match the section predicted at the time when the hit pocket is added. With this configuration, the sphere B can be more reliably made to look natural (the cycle of the swinging motion of the sphere B is less than or equal to a predetermined cycle, and the appearance of the range in which the sphere B is not stationary). Can be dropped into a pocket.

In this control example, when the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the next pocket (the pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket currently arranged at the drop position) drops the detection result. It is held until it is placed in the position, and the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined by comparing it with the new detection result obtained by arranging the next pocket in the drop position. The discrimination method is not limited to this. For example, each time the detection results of the detection sensors A to F are acquired, the combination of the detection results of the pockets to be arranged at the next drop position is predicted in advance from the arrangement of the rotating member 640 specified by the detection results. It may be configured. That is, the combination of the outputs of the pocket detection sensors arranged next to the drop position may be read from the rotation position determination table 222c and stored in the RAM 223. Then, when the next pocket is actually arranged at the drop position, the combination of the output of the detection sensor predicted (stored in the RAM 223) in advance and the combination of the output of the actual detection sensor match. It may be configured to determine whether or not. With this configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the presence or absence of abnormalities such as damage to the detection sensors A to F and damage to the detected portion 641c, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. .. Further, for example, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors A to F is stored in the order of the pockets, and each time a new pocket is placed in the drop position, the detection result corresponds to the order of the pockets. It may be configured to determine whether or not. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of an abnormality in the detection sensors A to F and the detected unit 641c. Further, for example, when the rotating member 640 makes one revolution, the number of times the detected portion 641c is detected may be determined to determine whether or not at least a part of the detected portion 641c is damaged. .. As described above, the detected portion 641c is provided in 16 of the 30 pockets. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 makes one revolution, the output of each of the detection sensors A to F should be in the state of H 16 times each. Under this circumstance, if it is determined that the number of H outputs per lap is less than 16, one of the detected portions 641c becomes undetectable by the detection sensors A to F due to damage or the like. There is a high possibility that it is. Therefore, in this case, by notifying the abnormality, it is possible to promptly deal with a defect such as damage of the detected portion 641c. Further, the number of times each of the detection sensors A to F is in the H output state at the time of one lap may be compared to determine whether or not the times match. The number of times the output is in the H state during one lap (the number of times each detected unit 641c is detected) should be common to all detection sensors, so if the number of detections does not match, one of the detection sensors It can be determined that a defect such as a failure has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the malfunction of the detection sensors A to F.

In the fourth control example, in the "renso mode suggestion effect" in which the effect time is fixed, the rotating member 640 is rotated at the start of the effect, and the rough section in which the sphere B falls is predicted from the effect time or the like. However, the effect time and the timing for starting the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 do not have to be fixed. For example, the control of the fourth control example can be applied even when the effect time of the "renso mode suggestion effect" is varied and the effect time of 1 is determined by lottery. That is, when the effect time is determined, the approximate section in which the ball B is dropped may be predicted based on the effect time and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. Similarly, even when a plurality of effect patterns in which the rotation operation of the rotating member 640 is started and one or both of the rotation speeds are different are provided, the rotation operation is started at the timing when the effect time is started. The time until the ball B is thrown may be back-calculated to predict a rough section in which the ball B is dropped from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640. With this configuration, when adding a hit pocket, a new hit pocket can be arranged so that a pocket of the type that drops the ball B is surely included in the section predicted by taking the effect result into consideration. it can. Therefore, in each "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the ball B can be dropped into the pocket of the type corresponding to the effect result. Further, even if the timing at which the effect time in the "ream mode suggestion effect" is determined is later than the timing at which the rotating member 640 starts the rotation operation, the control of the fourth control example is performed. Can be applied. That is, at the timing when the effect time is determined, the section in which the sphere B may fall is roughly predicted from the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, and the predicted section is the type corresponding to the current effect result. The structure may be such that the hit pockets are added so that the pockets of the above are arranged. As a result, the ball B can be reliably dropped into the pocket corresponding to the effect result before the ball B completely stops the swinging operation.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 225. In the first control example described above, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connecting position when a part of the jackpot (the jackpot in which the opening pattern A is set) is reached, and the first variable The ball won in the winning device 82a is used as a flow passage for flowing into the second passage forming member 422. In addition to this, in this control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the first control example described above, when the sphere B is dropped in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the rotation member 640 is arranged after the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion of the sphere B becomes sufficiently small. The sphere B is held on the holding piece 677 until the pocket where the sphere B can be dropped is located in front of the falling position (0.2 seconds before reaching the falling position). ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped is predetermined in the roulette chance effect. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to turn it on) according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

Further, in the first control example described above, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is fixed (70 seconds after the start of the “renso mode suggestion effect”). On the other hand, in this control example, in the roulette chance production, a period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance production) is provided, and the player operates the frame button 22. The pitching device 650 is configured to throw the ball B when it is detected. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitching pressing effect (see FIG. 216) for urging the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching pressing effect, the pitching device 650 throws the ball B. As a result, the player can throw the ball B to the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance production can be improved.

The timing for starting the pitching pressing effect (the period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22) is determined based on the rotation position of the rotating member 640. As a result, the pitching pressing effect can be started at a timing at which it is easy to drop the pitching pressing effect to a predetermined drop position (pocket). Further, if the frame button 22 is pressed within a predetermined period (for example, within 1.5 seconds) after the above-mentioned pitching pressing effect is started, the pitching device 650 delays the timing at which the ball B is thrown. It was configured in. Thereby, it is possible to limit the timing at which the ball B is thrown in the pitching pressing effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configurations of the RAM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, an effect mode of the advance notice effect by the left swing unit 500 in this control example will be described. As described above in the first control example, in the "normal mode" of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit by the number displayed on the effect unit 331 of the upper elevating unit 300. It notifies whether it is. In addition to this, in this control example, as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit, an effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved up and down (left swing effect) can be executed. Has been done. As the left swing effect, a first left swing effect with a relatively low expectation of a big hit and a second left swing effect with a high expectation of a big hit as compared with the first left swing effect. At least two types are provided.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a), in the first left swing effect and the second left swing effect, first, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is from the release position to the release position and the connection position. It is raised to an intermediate position with. After that, in the first left swing effect, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the release position.

On the other hand, in the second left swing effect, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the ascending operation is performed from the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position to the connection position. Then, the lowering operation is performed from the connecting position to the releasing position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the left swing effect (first swing effect) in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is movable according to the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. The left swing effect or the second left swing effect) is executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the second left swing effect, which is highly expected to be a big hit, is executed (notes whether or not the left swing unit 500 rises from the intermediate position). The interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the pitching pressing effect in the fifth control example will be described. The roulette chance effect in this control example is executed in the order of pitching press preparation effect, pitching pressing effect, and swinging effect. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the characters “throwing chance!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the pitching pressing preparation effect. By displaying this pitching press preparation effect, the player can be made to recognize that the pitching effect (pitching pressing effect) of throwing the ball B is executed by pressing the frame button 22. The details will be described later, but the timing of transition from the pitching pressing preparation effect to the pitching pressing effect (that is, the timing at which the pitching pressing effect is displayed) is based on the position information of the rotating member 640 and the information of the drop position storage area 223ex. Will be decided. As a result, the pitching pressing effect can be started so that the pocket to be dropped is arranged at the falling position during the execution (during the effect) of the pitching pressing effect for a total of 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 216 (b), the pitching pressing effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to urge the player to press the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution (displaying) of the pitching pressing effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 and shifts to the swinging effect (see FIG. 216 (c)). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not pressed during the execution (displaying) of the pitching pressing effect, the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 after a lapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment), and the pitching effect shifts to the swinging effect. (See FIG. 216 (c)).

If the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds before the pitching pressing effect is started, the ball B is thrown 1.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is started. (That is, the pitch is delayed). On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed 1.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is started, the ball B is pitched at the pressing timing. Thereby, the timing at which the ball B is thrown can be limited to the latter half 1.5 seconds of the 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the ball B falls into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 217. The ROM 222 of this control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118) in that the contents of the left swing unit table 222b3 are partially changed. The contents of the other ROM 222 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the left swing unit table 222b3 in this control example executes the first left swing unit table 222b3a for executing the first swing effect and the second swing effect. A second left swing unit table 222b3b for this purpose is provided. In the left swing unit table 222b3, set values (operating speed (pps), operation) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) are set for each value of the operation pointer 223g indicating the progress of the setting based on the operation scenario. The number of steps and the direction of operation) are specified.

Here, with reference to FIG. 217 (b), the specified contents of the first left swing unit table 222b3a will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the first left swing unit table 222b3a, the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g indicates that the left swing unit 500 is released from the release position (origin position) to the release position and the connection position. The operation for raising to the middle of the (outward route operation) is associated with. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the timing for driving the left swing unit 500 in the first left swing effect is reached. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the release position to the intermediate position.

Here, as described above, the operating speed (pps) indicates the frequency (number of outputs per second) at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) instructing the operation of one step to the corresponding drive motor. .. Therefore, the time required to displace the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 from the release position to the intermediate position by operating the first passage forming member 520 at an operating speed of 200 pps for 100 steps is 100/200 seconds (0.5 seconds).

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (stationing) the left swing unit 500 at an intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 1000 is specified as the operation step, and "stop" is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is stipulated that the stop command is continuously issued 1000 times at an operating speed of 200 pps. As a result, the left swing unit 1000 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 5 seconds (1000 times / 200 pps).

The value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the intermediate position to the release position over 0.5 seconds.

END data is associated with the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Next, the contents of the second left swing unit table 222b3b will be described with reference to FIG. 217 (c). As shown in FIG. 217 (c), at the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223g in the second left swing unit table 222b3b, the left swing unit 500 is released as in the case of the first left swing unit table 222b3a. An operation (outward route operation) for raising from the position (origin position) to the intermediate position is associated. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the release position to the intermediate position over 0.5 seconds (100 steps / 200 pps).

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (stationing) the left swing unit 500 at an intermediate position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 500 is specified as the operation step, and "stop" is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is stipulated that the stop command is continuously output 500 times at an operating speed of 200 pps. As a result, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 2.5 seconds (500 times / 200 pps).

The value "03H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (outbound operation) for raising the left swing unit 500 from the intermediate position to the connecting position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 100 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is raised from the intermediate position to the connecting position over 0.5 seconds.

The value "04H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation for stopping (stationing) the left swing unit 500 at the connected position. Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 300 is specified as the operation step, and "stop" is specified as the operation direction. That is, it is stipulated that the stop command is continuously issued 300 times at an operating speed of 200 pps. As a result, the left swing unit 500 can be stopped at the intermediate position for 1.5 seconds (300 times / 200 pps).

The value "05H" of the operation pointer 223g is associated with an operation (return operation) for lowering the left swing unit 500 from the connection position to the release position (origin position). Specifically, 200 pps is specified as the operation speed, 200 is specified as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operation direction. That is, the left swing unit 500 is lowered from the connection position to the release position over 1 second.

END data is associated with the value "06H" of the operation pointer 223g. By reading this END data, it is determined that all the operations specified in the operation scenario have been executed.

Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 218. The RAM 223 in this control example has an effect counter 223ax, a pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx, a pitching pressing effect in progress flag 223cx, and a delayed pitching flag 223dx with respect to the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (b)). And the drop position storage area 223ex are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223ax is a counter used in the voice lamp control device 113 for selecting various effects (“left swing effect”, etc.), various lottery, etc. Although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (See FIG. 145), it is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99.

The pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx is a flag used for determining whether or not to execute the setting of the pitching pressing effect. The pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx is set to on when the pitching pressing effect setting start timing in the roulette effect is reached in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) (see S2003: Yes in FIG. 222). The pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx is referred to in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222), and when it is determined to be on (see S2023: Yes in FIG. 222), the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223). Is executed. Then, in the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223), when the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650, it is set to off.

The pitching pressing effect flag 223cx is a flag for determining whether or not a pitching pressing effect (see FIG. 216) that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 in order to throw the ball B is displayed. .. When the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223) determines that it is the pitching timing of the ball B (see S6404: Yes in FIG. 223), the pitching pressing effect flag 223cx is displayed. It is set to on (see S6407 in FIG. 223) as well as being set (see S6406 in FIG. 223). The pitching pressing effect in progress flag 223cx is referred to in the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223), and when it is determined to be on (S6408: Yes in FIG. 223), it is based on the fact that the frame button 22 is pressed. The pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set (see S6414 in FIG. 223), and the pitching effect shifts to the swing effect. Even if the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6408: No), the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set based on the passage of a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) (see S6414 in FIG. 223) and swings. Move to directing. Although the details will be described later, a certain period (1.5 seconds) after the start of the pitching pressing effect is a period in which pitching is not allowed, and the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is set to be delayed. Become.

The delayed pitching flag 223dx is a flag for determining whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed outside the pitching allowable period (the period during which pitching is not permitted) of the pitching pressing effect. This delayed pitching flag 223dx is set when the frame button 22 is pressed outside the permissible pitching period of the pitching pressing effect (within 1.5 seconds from the start of the pitching pressing effect) in the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223). It is set to on (see S6410 in FIG. 223). In the pitching pressing effect setting process (see FIG. 223), it is referred to whether the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on (see S6412 in FIG. 223) when the pitching allowable period of the pitching pressing effect is reached, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is on. If it is determined to be present, the pitching operation of the pitching device 650 is executed. That is, the pitching operation is delayed until the pitching allowable period. After that, the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to off (see S6415 in FIG. 223).

The drop position storage area 223ex is an area for storing information on the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. In this drop position storage area 223ex, in the hit pocket distribution process 5 (see FIG. 224) executed at the start of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", the next reserved ball (the lottery result of the special symbol executed first) is It is determined based on whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or not. Specifically, when the next reserved ball is a probabilistic jackpot, one of the pockets (pockets designated by the player) stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is set as the drop position (S3122 in FIG. 224). (See), if the next hold is not a big hit, a pocket other than the pocket stored in the designated pocket storage area 223av is designated as the drop position (see S3123 in FIG. 224). The drop position (pocket) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is used when determining the start timing of the pitching pressing effect described above (see S6404 in FIG. 223) or when increasing the hit pocket in the increase effect (FIG. 224). See S3124 and S3221 in FIG. 225).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 219 to 225. First, the drop control process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 219.

The drop control process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the ball B is dropped (see FIG. 147) in the same manner as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. This is a process for controlling the operation of the holding piece 677). The same parts as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the drop control process 5 in the fifth control example, first, the processes S1801 to S1802 are executed in the same manner as the drop control process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example. Then, the next pocket is calculated based on the pocket specified in the process of S1802 (S1831). Here, the next pocket means a pocket arranged at the drop position next to the pocket specified in the processing of S1802, and for example, when the pocket specified in the processing of S1802 is the pocket P1. , Pocket P2 is identified as the next pocket. This pocket is calculated with reference to the pocket arrangement information (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When the processing of S1831 is completed, next, the information of the pocket (pocket for dropping the ball B) stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S1832), and then stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. It is determined whether the pocket and the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 (next pocket) match, that is, whether the pocket arranged at the next drop position is the pocket for dropping the sphere B (S1833). ).

If it is determined in the process of S1833 that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the process of S1831 match (S1833: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1806. On the other hand, in the processing of S1833, if the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831 do not match (S1833: No), then the value of the swing timer 223w is 100. It is determined whether or not it is smaller (corresponding to 0.1 seconds) (S1834). In the process of S1834, it is determined whether the interval at which H (high) is output from the sphere detection sensor 679, that is, half of the cycle in which the sphere B swings on the movable piece 677 is less than 0.1 seconds. There is. This 0.1 second means that the sphere B is a movable piece 677 until the next output of H (high) from the sphere detection sensor 679 (until the timing at which the next drop motion of the sphere B can be set comes). It is set as a value indicating a state in which there is a risk of stopping at the top.

If it is determined in the process of S1834 that the value of the swing timer 223w is 100 or more (S1834: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the swing timer 223w is less than 100, that is, when it is determined that the sphere B may stop on the movable piece 677 (S1834: Yes), all of the lighting position storage area 223m. (All bits are set to L) (S1835), and the process proceeds to S1806.

Here, the above-mentioned processing of S1835 will be specifically described. As described above, the lighting position storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the states (lighting state or extinguishing state) of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 (see FIG. 97). The lighting of each LED of the rear LED 625 is controlled according to the information stored in the lighting position storage area 223m. Therefore, by clearing all the information in the lighting position storage area 223m (all bits are set to L) in the process of S1835, it is controlled so that all the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are turned off. ..

In the process of S1806, the operation setting in which the effect ball (ball B) is dropped is set after 100 steps, and then the ball drop enable flag 223fv is set to off (S1807), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the drop control process 5 (see FIG. 219) of the fifth control example, the pocket for dropping the ball B in the roulette chance effect is stored in advance in the drop position storage area 223ex, and then arranged at the drop position. The ball B is configured to drop when it is determined that the pocket to be stored is a pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. As a result, the ball B can be appropriately dropped into the preset pocket, so that it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the ball B is dropped into a pocket other than the predetermined pocket.

Further, in the fifth control example, after the swing effect is executed, the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex and the pocket calculated by the processing of S1831 without satisfying the condition for dropping the ball B (the pocket is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex). The amplitude of the sphere B swinging on the movable piece 677 is a predetermined magnitude (in this control example, half of the amplitude cycle is 0.1 second). ), All of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set to the extinguished state, and then a process of dropping the ball B (abnormal process) is executed. As a result, the situation in which the ball B cannot be dropped into the target pocket (the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex) during the swing effect continues, so that the ball B can move the movable piece 677 during the swing effect. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation where the player stops at the top, it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the swing effect executed based on winning the jackpot, when the above-mentioned processing of S1835 is executed (all of the lighting areas A1 to A18 of the rear LED 625 are set to the off state), The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect of notifying that the jackpot has been won after the swing effect is completed. As a result, even if the ball B cannot be dropped, it can be made to look like one mode of notification in the roulette chance production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the fifth control example, when the pocket to be arranged at the next drop position is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex, the drop operation of the ball B is set. The pocket specified based on the value (H (high) or L (low)) output from the detection sensors A to F and the rotation position determination table 222c, and the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 222ex are The number of pockets separated may be calculated, and the timing for setting the falling motion of the ball B may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the fifth control example, the number of steps output by the motor control IC (motor driver) of the rotary motor 631 is used to determine whether it is the timing to execute the falling operation of the ball B. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, the determination may be made by a counter that is updated every time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

Next, the variation display setting process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 220. The variation display setting process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. The same parts as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the variation display setting process 5 in the fifth control example, first, the processes of S3301 to S3305 are executed in the same manner as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) of the first control example described above, and then the left swing unit is used as a warning effect. The advance notice effect setting process for setting the effect of moving the 500 is executed (S3321), and the process proceeds to the S3306 process. The details of this advance notice effect setting process (S3321) will be described later with reference to FIG. 221. In the process of S3301, even when the fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S3301: No), the process shifts to S3306. After that, the processes of S3306 to S3310 are executed, and the variation display setting process 5 is terminated.

Next, the advance notice effect setting process (S3321) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 221. The notice effect setting process (S3321) in the fifth control example is one of the variable display setting processes 5 (see FIG. 220) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. ..

In this notice effect setting process (S3321), a process of setting a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the effect counter 223ax. When this advance notice effect setting process (S3321) is executed, first, the value of the current effect counter 223ax is acquired, and it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301). If the value of the effect counter 223ax is not 0 to 9 (S6301: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6301 if the value of the effect counter 223ax is 0 to 9 (S6301: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6302 in order to set the advance notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500. As described above, since the effect counter 223ax is a loop counter of 0 to 198, a notice effect for moving the left swing unit 500 is set (executed) with a probability of 10/199 (a ratio of about 5%).

In the process of S6302, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S6302), and if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out of order (S6302: No), the first left swing unit table 222b3a (See FIG. 217 (b)), the value of the operation pointer 223g is set to "01H" (S6303), and the process proceeds to S6307. By the process of S6303, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is a big hit (S6302: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223ax acquired in S6301 is a multiple of 4 (S6304). In the processing of S6304, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223ax is a multiple of 4 (S6304: Yes), the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the first left swing unit table 222b3a (see FIG. 217 (b)). The value is set to "01H" (S6306), and the process proceeds to S6307. On the other hand, in the processing of S6304, if the value of the effect counter ax is not a multiple of 4 (S6304: No), the value of the operation pointer 223g corresponding to the second left swing unit table 222b3b (see FIG. 217 (c)) is set. “01H” is set (S6305), and the process proceeds to S6307. In the process of S6307 that shifts after the processing of any of S6303, S6305, and S6306 is executed, the operation content corresponding to the set operation pointer 223g is read out, and the operation content is notified to the motor driver (instruction). ) Is set (S6307), and then this process is terminated.

When the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6306, the first left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the intermediate position is executed, and the process of S6307 is executed via the process of S6305. Then, the second left swing effect in which the left swing unit 500 is moved to the connecting position is executed. As for the ratio in which each swing effect is set, as set in the process of S6304, the first left swing effect is set with a probability of 3/4, and the second left swing effect is set with a probability of 1/4. Set. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the advance notice effect is set, the first left swing effect is set with a high probability (1/4), and the first left swing effect is set with a low probability (1/4). 2 Left swing effect is set. On the other hand, if a special symbol lottery is a big hit and a notice effect is set, only the second left swing effect is set. Therefore, the second left swing effect is an effect with a high expectation of being a big hit, and the first left swing effect is an effect with a low expectation of being a big hit). Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 operates to the intermediate position, the game can be performed with the expectation that the first passage forming member 520 will operate from the intermediate position to the connecting position. That is, since the operation of the first passage forming member 520 can be focused on, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the advance notice production.

The selection ratio of the advance notice effect is not limited to the form of this control example, and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is successful, the first left swing effect may be selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10), or when the special symbol is out of order. It may be configured so that the second left swing effect is not selected.

Further, the mode of the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation of the left swing unit 500 is not limited to two types, and may be further diversified. By diversifying the mode of the advance notice production, a wider variety of productions can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Examples of different modes of the advance notice effect include a mode in which the intermediate position (or connection position) and the release position are reciprocated a plurality of times, a mode in which the vehicle stops at a different intermediate position (for example, a position 50 steps from the release position), and an intermediate position. Examples of the mode in which the stop time is different. Further, conversely, the mode of the advance notice effect may be reduced to one type. In this case, the amount of data in the left swing unit table 222b3 can be reduced.

In this way, in the fifth control example, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit by moving the left swing unit 500 provided with a flow path through which the ball winning the first specific winning opening 82 passes during the big hit. The production that suggests the degree of expectation is configured to be feasible. As a result, it is possible to standardize the member constituting the flow path through which the ball passes and the member used for the effect, and the limited space in the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used.

In addition, the left swing unit 500 provided with a flow path for passing the winning ball through the first specific winning opening 82, which allows the ball to win during the jackpot, is at a timing other than during the jackpot (timing when the special symbol is changing). Even if the left swing unit 500 is moved, it does not affect the ball flow. That is, the left swing unit 500 can be used as a ball passage through which the ball passes during the privilege game (during the big hit), and as a movable member for the effect during the normal game (during the special symbol change).

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured so that the jackpot game is executed with the left swing unit 500 raised from the release position to the connection position. Therefore, for example, as an operation scenario of the left swing unit 500 defined in the left swing unit table 222b3 shown in FIG. 217 (a), an operation scenario that continues to stop at the connecting position only when a big hit is won is provided. It may be provided. With this configuration, the left swing unit 500 can be used not only as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit, but also as a notification means for notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It can be used. Further, since the number of times the left swing unit 500 can be moved can be suppressed, the failure of the movable member can be suppressed.

Further, when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, it is preferable to provide a discriminating means for determining whether the left swing unit 500 is normally moving. As a result, it is possible to determine the abnormality of the left swing unit 500 before the jackpot game is started, and the situation where the left swing unit 500 cannot rise to the connecting position during the jackpot game and becomes abnormal can occur. It becomes possible to prevent (suppress).

If it is determined that the left swing unit 500 is abnormal when the left swing unit 500 is moved as an effect, the determination result is notified and the left swing unit 500 is used during the jackpot game. It is preferable to configure it so that the effect of not moving is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the production during the jackpot game. Here, the left swing unit 500 is provided with a flow passage 515 (see FIG. 36), and is configured to discharge the winning ball out of the game area while being located at the release position. That is, even if the left swing unit 500 is not moved, when a ball wins the first variable winning device 82a, the winning ball normally enters an unexpected position (such as the back side of the pachinko machine 10). It can be discharged).

As an effect of not moving the left swing unit 500, for example, the jackpot game is started with the left swing unit 500 positioned at the release position, and the ball winning the first specific winning opening 82 flows down the flow passage 515. In addition to this, the effect may be executed by the effect unit 422a of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 in a state where it is not connected to the left swing unit 500. In this case, since the ball flowing down the left swing unit 500 does not pass through the sensor member 422c provided in the liquid crystal elevating unit 400, the progress of the effect displayed by the effect unit 422a is determined by the first specific winning opening. Instead of executing based on the ball winning the 82, it may be configured to execute by, for example, operating the frame button 22. That is, for example, every time the player presses the frame button 22, the symbol (number) is fluctuated and displayed in the effect unit 422a, and when the lucky number is stopped and displayed, the effect of notifying the transition to the "preparation mode" is executed. It may be configured.

Further, until a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the end of the jackpot game, the prohibition process may be executed so that the advance notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. The fluctuation time during which the period from the end of the notice effect of the left swing unit 500 (6 seconds (see FIG. 217 (c))) to the start of the jackpot game is within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). In the fluctuation pattern to be set, prohibition processing may be executed so that the advance notice effect using the left swing unit 500 is not selected. As a result, a predetermined interval (for example, 2 seconds) is provided between the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the jackpot game and the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed during the normal game. be able to.

As the predetermined interval, it is preferable to set an interval that is longer than the retry period that is executed when a problem occurs in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500. As a result, even if the retry operation is executed in the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 during the jackpot game or the normal game, it affects the movable operation of the left swing unit 500 executed when other conditions are satisfied. Can be suppressed, and an appropriate effect can be provided to the player.

Next, the effect setting process 5 (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222. The effect setting process 5 (S1613) in the fifth control example is executed in the main process (see FIG. 145) instead of the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example, and is executed during the roulette chance effect. This is a process for setting the pitching pressing preparation effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) and the pitching pressing effect (see FIG. 216 (b)). The same parts as the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

When the effect setting process 5 (S1613) is executed, first, after executing each process of S2001 and S2002 in the same manner as the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, the value of the effect timer 223bv. Is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003). In the process of S2003, if the value of the effect timer 223bv is a timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: Yes), the pitcher press preparation effect is an effect of notifying the player that the pitcher press effect is started. (See FIG. 216 (a)) is set (S2021), then the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is set to off, the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is set to on (S2022), and the present process is terminated as it is. .. Further, in the process of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223bv is not the timer value indicating the end of the increase effect (S2003: No), the present process is performed as it is without executing the processes of S2021 and S2022 described above. finish.

In the process of S2001, when it is determined that the increase effect in-progress flag 223cv is off (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the pitching press effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023). If the pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx is on (S2023: Yes), the pitching pressing effect setting for setting the pitching pressing effect, which is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of throwing the ball B in the process of S2023. The process (S2024) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2006. The details of the pitching pressing effect setting process (S2024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 223. On the other hand, in the process of S2023, if the throwing press effect setting flag 223bx is off (S2023: No), the process of S2024 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2006. Next, the processes S2006 to S2017 are executed in the same manner as the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) of the first control example described above, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the pitching pressing effect setting process (S2024) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223. The pitching pressing effect setting process (S2024) in the fifth control example is one process of the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 222) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This pitching pressing effect setting process (S2024) is a process for setting a pitching pressing effect, which is an effect that allows the player to determine the timing of throwing the ball B in the roulette chance effect by operating the frame button 22. is there.

When the pitching pressing effect setting process (S2024) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pitching pressing effect flag 223cv is on (S6401), and if the pitching pressing effect flag 223cx is off (S6401: No). , The information of the drop position storage area 223ex is acquired (S6402), and the information of the rotation position storage area 223u is acquired (S6403). That is, the processing of S6402 acquires the information of the pocket for dropping the predetermined ball B, and the processing of S6403 acquires the information of the pocket currently arranged at the falling position.

Next, it is determined whether or not the current timing is possible for throwing (S6404). Here, the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, when the mode shifts to the "preparation mode", the total production period is 90 seconds. Is configured to be executed, and this "ream villa mode suggestion effect" is an increase effect (effect time 20) that increases (adds) the hit pocket based on the ball entering the second entrance 640a. Seconds), a roulette chance effect (production period 65 seconds) that indicates whether or not the ball B falls into the hit pocket, and an ending effect (production period 5 seconds) that indicates that the roulette chance effect has ended. ing.

Further, the above-mentioned roulette chance production (production time 65 seconds) is the first half in which the production proceeds according to the notification mode indicating that the roulette chance production has been executed, the notification mode for explaining the roulette chance production, and the lively notification mode. (Direction time 42 seconds), throwing press preparation effect (directing time 5 seconds) and throwing pressing effect (maximum production time 3 seconds) are executed in the middle part (maximum production time 8 seconds), and throwing by the throwing device 650. The ball B is composed of a latter half (effect time: 15 seconds) in which a swing effect is performed in which the ball B swings on the upper part of the holding piece 677 and then falls into the pocket.

Here, the pitching pressing effect (maximum effect time 3 seconds) includes a pitching non-permissible period (1.5 seconds) in which the pitching device 650 does not allow the pitching of the ball B even if the frame button 22 is operated by the player. It is composed of a pitching allowance period (1.5 seconds) that allows the pitching of the ball B by the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. That is, for 1.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is started, the ball B is not thrown by the pitching device 650 even if the frame button 22 is operated, and 1.5 after the pitching pressing effect is started. The period between seconds and 3 seconds is a period during which the pitching device 650 throws the ball B at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated by the player.

Therefore, the timing at which the ball B can be thrown in the pitching pressing effect is 1.5 seconds after the start of the pitching pressing effect at the minimum and 3 seconds after the start of the pitching pressing effect at the longest (the effect time of the pitching pressing effect is It will be 1.5 to 3 seconds). If the production time of the pitching pressing effect is less than 3 seconds, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated during the pitching pressing effect and the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650, the latter half of the roulette chance production is performed. It is configured so that the difference is absorbed. As a result, when the player operates the frame button 22 within a predetermined period (within a period of 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is started), the player immediately operates the frame button 22 based on the timing of the operation. Since the ball B is thrown into the ball B, it is possible to make it appear that the player can determine the pocket into which the ball B falls by himself / herself, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the fifth control example, if the frame button 22 is operated within 1.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is executed, the pitching is performed at the timing when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The pitching operation of the device 650 is configured to be executed. As a result, the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 differs depending on the operation timing of the frame button 22 (1) with respect to the period (3 seconds) of the pitching pressing effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22. .5 seconds) can be shortened.

Further, in the fifth control example, in the swing effect (effect period 15 seconds), which is the latter half of the roulette chance effect, the ball B thrown by the pitching device 650 swings on the movable piece 677 with an amplitude that cannot be dropped. A swinging mid-ball fall prohibition period (7 seconds), which is a period of movement (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is greater than 500 (see S1709: Yes in FIG. 146)), and then swings with a fallable amplitude. It is a period (a period in which the value of the swing timer 223w is smaller than 500 (see S1709: No in FIG. 146)), which is a period during which the ball can fall during swing (maximum 3 seconds), and a period during which the ball B is dropped. It consists of a ball falling period (5 seconds).

Of these, the period during which the ball can be dropped during swinging (maximum 3 seconds) is set to be longer than the period (1.5 seconds) at which the timing at which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650 is different in the above-mentioned pitching pressing effect. Therefore, no matter when the player operates the frame button 22 during the pitching pressing effect, the ball B can be dropped into a predetermined pocket. Further, since a period during which a plurality of (three) pockets move is set as a period during which the ball can be dropped during swinging, it is possible to improve the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket.

The ball falling period (5 seconds) is a period in which after the ball B is dropped into the pocket, a notification effect is performed according to the type of the dropped pocket (hit pocket or out-of-pocket), and the above-mentioned pitching allowable period. Alternatively, it is configured to be extended by the time lag (difference between the actual effect time and the set maximum time) that occurs during the swinging mid-ball fallable period. As a result, even if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the pitching device 650 throws the ball B are different, the effect period of the "renso mode suggestion effect" can be matched to 90 seconds.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed (an operating speed (500 pps) is set so that the time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds). It is configured to be able to control two rotation speeds, a low speed (an operating speed (125 pps) in which the time required to move one pocket is 1 second). This rotation speed is configured to be switched by outputting a signal for setting the operating speed (125 pps or 500 pps) from the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor driver.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the rotating member 640 is rotated at high speed from the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect" to the execution of the pitching pressing effect, and the pitching pressing effect is executed. Then, the rotating member 640 is configured to rotate at a low speed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 223. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above is configured to be able to drop the ball B within a range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is executed. Specifically, the ball B is dropped into the pocket after a throwing pressing effect (maximum 3 seconds), a swinging midball fall prohibition period (7 seconds), and a swinging midball fallable period (maximum 3 seconds). However, since the throwing push effect may be a minimum of 1.5 seconds, the throw press effect is 10 seconds, which is the sum of the throw press effect (3 seconds) and the swinging mid-ball fall prohibition period (7 seconds). The shortest period during which the ball can fall after the execution of is executed, and the throwing pressing effect (1.5 seconds), the swinging ball fall prohibition period (7 seconds), and the swinging ball falling possible period (3 seconds) are set. The total of 11.5 seconds is the longest period during which the ball can fall after the throwing press effect is executed.

Then, during the pitching pressing effect in which the rotating member 640 is moving at a low speed, the pockets corresponding to the range of 10 seconds to 11.5 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is executed are 10 and 10 from the pocket currently in the falling position. Since the pocket is 11 pockets ahead, is the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex acquired in the processing of S6402 10 and 11 pockets ahead of the current pocket acquired in the processing of S6403? Is determined to determine whether the current pitching possible timing is determined (S6404).

If the current timing is not the pitching possible timing (S6404: No), this process ends as it is. In addition, in order to shorten the period until it is determined that the pitching possible timing is reached in the processing of S6404, in the fifth control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is increased to a high speed (500 pps) until the pitching pressing effect is executed. (The time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)). On the other hand, if the current timing is the pitching possible timing (S6404: Yes), the rotation speed of the rotating member is set to a low speed (125 pps (time required to move one pocket is 1 second)) (S6405), and the pitch is pressed. After setting the display of the effect (S6406) and setting the pitching pressing effect flag 223cx to ON (S6407), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6401, if the pitching pressing effect flag 223cx is on (S6401: Yes), then it is determined whether the button (frame button 22) is pressed (S6408). If the button (frame button 22) is pressed (S6408: Yes), it is determined whether the current pitching allowable period (a period of 1.5 to 3 seconds after the pitching pressing effect is executed) is determined (S6409). ), If it is not the pitching allowable period (S6409: No), the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6410), and this process is terminated as it is. If it is a pitching allowable period (S6409: Yes), a pitching effect command is set (S6411), and the process proceeds to S6414.

On the other hand, in the process of S6408, if the button is not pressed (S6408: No), it is determined whether or not the current pitching allowable period and the delayed pitching flag 223dx are set to ON (S6412). If the current pitching allowance period is set and the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to ON (S6412: Yes), the process of S6411 is executed and the process shifts to the process of S6414. On the other hand, if the current pitching allowable period is not set or the delayed pitching flag 223dx is set to off (S6412: No), it is determined whether or not the pitching pressing effect display period has elapsed (S6413). If the pitching pressing effect display period has not elapsed (S6413: No), this process ends as it is, and if the pitching pressing effect display period has elapsed (S6413: Yes), the process proceeds to S6414.

In the process of S6414, the pitching operation of the pitching position is set (S6414), the pitching pressing effect setting flag 223cx, the pitching pressing effect setting flag 223bx, and the delayed pitching flag 223dx are set to off (S6415), and the swinging effect is performed. (S6416), and after setting the swing undetected flag 223v and the swing effect flag 223ev to ON (S6417), this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the player can set the operation timing of the pitching device 650 based on the operation of the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the player can determine the pocket into which the ball B falls by himself / herself, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. Further, in this control example, the period during which the ball B is allowed to be thrown (the latter half 1.5 seconds) is shorter than the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effective (3 seconds). .. Then, when the pitching of the ball B is permitted and the frame button 22 is operated in the first half 1.5 seconds, the pitching of the ball B is delayed until the start timing of the period in which the pitching of the ball B is permitted. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control of dropping the ball B into the predetermined pocket while making it appear that the player can determine the pocket into which the ball B falls by himself / herself.

In addition, the swinging mid-ball fallable period (3 seconds) is longer than the difference period (1.5 seconds) in which the pitching device 650 throws the ball B based on the player operating the frame button 22. Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of dropping the ball B into a predetermined pocket no matter when the player operates the frame button 22.

In the fifth control example, the roulette is configured so that the pitching pressing effect is executed when the pitching possible timing is reached based on the information of the drop position storage area 223ex and the information of the rotation position storage area 223u. It is possible to prevent (suppress) a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable with the swinging motion of the ball B in the chance production.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is high (500 pps (time required to move one pocket is 0.25 seconds)) and low speed (125 pps (time required to move one pocket is 1 second)). The two rotation speeds of and are configured to be settable, and the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is set to a high speed until it is determined that the throwing possible timing is reached. As a result, the period until it is determined that the pitching time is possible can be shortened, and the roulette chance production can be smoothly performed.

Further, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 is slowed down during the period from the execution of the pitching pressing effect in which the player can operate the frame button 22 to the end of the swinging effect in which the ball B is thrown by the pitching device 650. Is set to. As a result, the player can carefully watch the roulette chance production, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Next, the hit pocket distribution process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 224.

The hit pocket distribution process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example. The same parts as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the hit pocket distribution process 5 in the fifth control example, a process for presetting a pocket into which the ball B falls is executed in the roulette chance effect. When the hit pocket distribution process 5 is executed, first, the process of S3101 is executed in the same manner as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160) in the first control example described above, and then it is determined whether or not the next hold is a big hit. (S3121). If the next hold is a big hit (S3121: Yes), one of the read pockets is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3122), and the process proceeds to S3104.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3121, if the next hold is not a big hit (S3121: No), a pocket different from the read pocket is set as the drop position in the drop position storage area 223ex (S3123), and the above-described first control example The processes of S3104 and S3105 are executed in the same manner as the hit pocket distribution process (see FIG. 160). After that, the hit position is read out from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3124), the hit position and the position other than the drop position are selected as the additional positions (S3125), and then the hit pocket distribution process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 160). ), The processes of S3109 and S3110 are executed. After executing the process of S3110, the process returns to the process of S3104, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is configured to determine in advance the drop position (pocket) at which the ball B is dropped in the roulette chance effect. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to turn it on) according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

In the fifth control example, one pocket is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, but a plurality of consecutive pockets may be stored in the drop position storage area 223ex.

Next, the special figure 2 winning command process 5 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 225. The special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) in the first control example. .. The same parts as those of the special figure 2 winning command processing (see FIG. 161) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

The special figure 2 winning command processing 5 in the fifth control example is stored in the drop position storage area 223ex when the winning command that wins the jackpot is output in the increase effect executed in the “preparation mode”. The process for changing the existing pocket to a hit pocket is executed.

When the special figure 2 winning command process 5 in the fifth control example is executed, first, S3201 is executed in the same manner as the special figure 2 winning command process (see FIG. 161) of the first control example described above. In the process of S3201, if the increase effect flag 223cv is off (S3201: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3213. If the flag 223cv during the increase effect is on (S3201: Yes), the drop position is read from the drop position storage area 223ex (S3221), and then a big hit is obtained during the time reduction (when the time reduction state counter is larger than 0). It is determined whether or not the prize is won (S3222). If the prize is a big hit during the time reduction (S3222: Yes), the drop position is selected as the additional position (S3223), and the process proceeds to S3212.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3222, if the prize is not a big hit during the time saving (S3222: No), the hit position is read out from the hit position storage area 223k (S3224), and a position different from the hit position and the drop position is selected as the additional position. Then (S3225), the process proceeds to S3212. After that, the processes of S3212 and S3213 are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is configured to be movable as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big hit. .. Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable members. However, if the number of variable members is increased in order to improve the effect of production, the power consumption will increase, the failure rate will increase due to the increase in the number of parts, the cost of the game machine will increase, and the wiring will become complicated. Various problems arise.

On the other hand, in this control example, the player is provided with a flow path (first passage forming member 520) for discharging the ball winning the first variable winning device 82a to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot game. It is configured to be arranged at a visible position (on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the third symbol display device 81). This flow path (first passage forming member 520) swings between the arrangement (connection position) for discharging the winning ball to the first variable winning device 82a in the jackpot and the origin position (release position). It is configured to be possible. Then, as a kind of hobby effect (effect that suggests the degree of expectation to be a big hit) that is normally executed (in a state where the jackpot is not in progress), a movable effect that swings the flow path is configured to be executable. That is, the flow path for discharging the prize balls (first passage forming member 520) is also configured to be used for a hobby effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of accessories (variable members) from increasing too much, so that the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the failure rate and cost can be reduced, and the wiring and the like can be simplified. It can be realized.

Further, in this control example, as an interesting effect using the flow path (first passage forming member 520), the first passage forming member 520 operates (moves) from the release position to the intermediate position, and then returns to the release position. 1 Left swing effect and a second left swing effect of returning to the release position after the first passage forming member 520 operates (moves) from the release position to the connection position are provided. The second left swing effect is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit than the first left swing effect, and is less likely to be selected when the result is out of order. That is, the second left swing effect, in which the amount of movement of the first passage forming member 520 is large, is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the first left swing effect. Therefore, when the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 starts to operate, the operation can be observed with the expectation that the first passage forming member 520 will operate to the connecting position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the "renso mode".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the drop position (pocket) for dropping the ball B is set to one place in advance in the roulette chance effect. Then, it is configured to determine whether or not to set a predetermined drop position as a hit position (whether or not to turn it on) according to the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the ball B may be dropped into the predetermined pocket, so that the control process can be simplified.

Further, in this control example, in the roulette chance production, a period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 (for example, 3 seconds in one roulette chance production) is provided, and it is detected that the player has operated the frame button 22. In this case, the pitching device 650 is configured to throw the ball B. Further, during the period in which the frame button 22 can be accepted, a pitching pressing effect (see FIG. 216) for urging the player to press the frame button 22 is executed. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the period suggested by the pitching pressing effect, the pitching device 650 throws the ball B. As a result, the player can throw the ball B to the rotating member 640 at an arbitrary timing, so that the player's willingness to participate in the roulette chance production can be improved.

In the fifth control example, one pocket for dropping the sphere B is set in advance, but it is not always limited to one. A section in which a plurality of pockets are continuous may be defined as a position for dropping the ball B, and the ball B may be dropped into any of the pockets constituting the section. With this configuration, the degree of freedom in dropping the ball B can be increased as compared with the case where the dropping position is limited to only one pocket. That is, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the swinging motion is relatively large (for example, exceeding 1 second) at the stage of entering the section where the ball B is dropped, it is arranged behind the section. By dropping it into the pocket, the ball B can be dropped after the cycle becomes small. On the contrary, when it is determined that the period (amplitude) of the shaking motion is too small (for example, 0.5 seconds or less) at the stage of entering the section where the ball B is dropped, the section is determined. By dropping the ball B into a pocket arranged in the pocket on the front side of the ball B, the ball B can be dropped before the ball B is completely stationary.

In the fifth control example, the period of the swinging motion of the sphere B is set to a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) or less before one pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged in the drop position. When it becomes, a special effect is executed, but it may be controlled so that the target pocket is arranged at the drop position before the predetermined cycle (0.2 seconds) is reached. More specifically, for example, at the start of the roulette chance effect, the pocket from which the ball B can be dropped is predicted from the time until the pitching press effect is started and the pocket currently arranged at the drop position. Then, it may be determined whether or not it matches the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex. Then, when it is expected that the ball B cannot be dropped into the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex, the remaining time until the ball B can be dropped and the drop position storage area 223ex are used. Based on the position of the stored pocket, the rotation speed of the rotating member 640 may be changed so that the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position at the timing when the pocket can be dropped. Good. Further, instead of or in addition to changing the rotation speed of the rotating member 640, for example, the execution timing of the pitching pressing effect may be changed. That is, by varying the timing at which the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650, the ball B is adjusted so that the ball B can be dropped at the timing when the pocket stored in the drop position storage area 223ex is arranged at the drop position. It may be configured. With this configuration, the ball B can be more reliably dropped into the target pocket.

<6th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 to 233. In the first control example described above, by displaying a symbol (number) on each of the display units 331a to 331d of the effect unit 331, the notification of whether or not it is a big hit is executed. The third symbol display device 81 was basically used to display a hobby effect, a display of the number of reserved balls, a breakdown of a symbol (lucky number) that becomes a big hit, and the like.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to be able to dynamically display the identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. Since the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode and is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol can be confirmed regardless of the mode. ..

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in terms of configuration in that the decorative symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice lamp control. The configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the device 113 have been partially changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 (a) is a diagram showing display contents when a lottery of special symbols is executed in the “normal mode” and the decorative symbols (third symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the "normal mode", the variable display of the symbols is executed on the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the third symbol display device 81, in the variable display region (lower right region) Dd1 formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the front view, the decorative symbol (third symbol). ) Is displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, in this variable display area (lower right area) Dd1, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each symbol row, decorative symbols (third symbol) with any number from 0 to 9 are displayed in a specified order (descending or ascending order of numbers). Each of these three symbol rows is scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to be displayed in a variable manner. In particular, in the left symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. In the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol (third symbol) with the same number attached to each symbol row is stopped and displayed to indicate that it is a big hit. On the other hand, if at least one of the decorative symbols (third symbol) that is stopped and displayed in each symbol row is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a different number, the lottery for this special symbol is missed. Indicates that there is. The variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 has a smaller area than the display units 331a to 331d. Therefore, the player can be made to confirm the lottery result of the special symbol by the variable display executed on each display unit 331a to 331d.

Further, FIG. 226 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the variable display corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is completed in the "normal mode" and the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 226 (b), when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the "normal mode" elapses, the numbers (designs) are stopped one by one on the display units 331a to 331d as in the first control example. Is displayed. In addition, in the sixth control example, in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81, the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the deviations. In the example of FIG. 226 (b), the decorative symbol with the number "6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column, the symbol string with the number "4" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column, and the right is displayed. The symbol string with the number "3" is stopped and displayed. By displaying the decorative symbols (third symbols) with different numbers, it can be shown that the lottery result of the special symbols was out of order.

Next, the display contents in the "preparation mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b). FIG. 227 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). As shown in FIG. 227 (a), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the "preparation mode", the decorative symbol (third symbol) is displayed in the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 as in the "normal mode". ) Fluctuation display is executed. This indicates that it is changing.

Further, FIG. 227 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time has elapsed in the “preparation mode”. As shown in FIG. 227 (b), the decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a display area different from the variable display area (lower right region) Dd1. FIG. 227 (b) is an example in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper left side region Dq1 of the horizontally long substantially rectangular shape formed in the upper left of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this example, in the upper left area Dq1, the decorative symbol with the number "1" in the left symbol column is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol with the number "8" in the middle symbol column is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol with the number "9" in the right symbol column is stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in a display area different from the variable display, so that it is difficult to recognize the number of time reductions in the "preparation mode" this time from the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. To do. Assuming that the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the "preparation mode", the variable display time of the decorative symbol executed in the "preparation mode" is easy by observing the variable display area Dd1. Will be recognized by. As described above, in the "preparation mode" in which the time saving period is once, the long variation A having a variation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" in which the time reduction period is 7 times, the long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol (see FIG. 112), and the fluctuation time is 3 in the case of a deviation. Middle variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the "Renso mode suggestion effect" (when long fluctuation A is selected), it is a big hit or the time saving period is 1. It is set only once, and it is determined that the case is out of the special symbol. In this case, the lottery of the special symbol will be missed, and the possibility of shifting to the "normal mode" after the change will increase, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent "ream villa mode suggestion effect". There is. Further, when the lottery of the 1st to 6th special symbols in the "preparation mode" in which the time saving period is 7 times is missed, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the 2nd to 6th fluctuation display, it is a big hit without checking the production result of "Renso mode suggestion production" (97.5% probability). It can be recognized as (shifting to "renso mode"). For this reason, it is highly probable that the mode will shift to the "renso mode", and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent "renso mode suggestion effect".

On the other hand, in this control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" before confirming the result of the "renso mode suggestion effect". Therefore, during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect", until the end. The player's expectation can be maintained.

Further, in this control example, in order to make it more difficult to understand the stop display timing, the decorative symbol is displayed every 3 seconds during the execution of the long fluctuation A (90 seconds) to the long fluctuation G (72 seconds). Is configured to be switched to a display area different from the variable display area Dd1 (for example, the upper left area Dq1). The state in which the display position is switched continues for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the display position is switched to the variable display area Dd1 again. That is, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the fluctuation display for 0.5 seconds in a region different from the fluctuation display area Dd1 (such as the upper left region Dq1) are repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the fluctuation display break (switching of the display position) in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", and it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation until the end during the execution of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

Further, in this control example, a plurality of display areas for displaying the stop symbol are provided in addition to the upper left side area Dq1. Specifically, it is formed on the upper right side region Dq2 (see the dotted line on the upper right side of FIG. 227 (b)) formed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 and on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81. A lower left region Dq3 (see the dotted line at the lower left in FIG. 227 (b)) is provided. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode" (when the fluctuation time has elapsed), and when the position of the fluctuation display is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, these One display area is selected by lottery from three types of display areas (upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, lower left area Dq3). With this configuration, it is more difficult to visually recognize the display content (whether the display is stopped or the display is variable) when the display position is switched from the variable display area Dd1 to another display area. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", and it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation until the end during the execution of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

In this control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display area Dd1 can be arranged at any position. Further, in this control example, as the display area when the stop display is performed in the "preparation mode" and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the upper left side area Dq1 and the upper right side Three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, but the display area is not limited to the three types. A larger display area may be provided, or a smaller number may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the variable display area Dd1 may be subjected to a pseudo variable display. As a result, when paying attention to the variable display area Dd1, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the "preparation mode" regardless of whether the display is stopped or the variable is in progress. It is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode".

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixth control example is provided with a symbol position selection table 222h in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example (see FIG. 118 (a)). The symbol position selection table 222h is a data table used to select a display area after switching when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1 in the "preparation mode". The details of the symbol position selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 228 (b).

FIG. 228 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the symbol position selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the symbol position selection table 222h defines the display position of the decorative symbol (stop display or variable display) for each value of the display position selection counter 223ay. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated periodically or irregularly within the range of "0 to 99".

In the symbol position selection table 222h, the upper left side region Dq1 is associated with the range in which the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is "0 to 39". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the display position selection counter 223ay can take, 40 of "0 to 39" are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol can be changed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. The probability (ratio) that the upper left region Dq1 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 40% (40/100).

Further, the upper right region Dq2 is associated with the range in which the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is "40 to 79". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the display position selection counter 223ay can take, 40 of "40 to 79" are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol can be displayed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. The probability (ratio) that the upper right region Dq2 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 40% (40/100).

Further, the lower left region Dq3 is associated with the range in which the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is "80 to 99". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the display position selection counter 223ay can take, 20 of "80 to 99" are associated with each other, so that the decorative symbol can be displayed from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. The probability (ratio) that the lower left region Dq3 is selected when switching (moving) to another region is 20% (20/100). The probability (ratio) that only the lower left area Dq3 is selected is high because only this area has the same line-of-sight height as the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 for the player. This is because there is a possibility that it will be visually recognized if it is focused. Therefore, the selection ratio of the lower left region Dq3, which is relatively easy to see, is lowered to make it difficult to see the display content when the display position of the decorative symbol is switched. On the other hand, the reason why the ratio is not set to 0 is that it is difficult to predict the display position after switching. That is, the more candidates for the display position, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the display position after switching, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the mode (stop display or variable display) of the decorative symbol after switching the display position. it can.

In this way, by switching the display position of the decorative symbol using the symbol position selection table 222h, it is predicted whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" before the result of the "renso mode suggestion effect" is notified. It can be prevented (suppressed) from being done. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the "ream villa mode suggestion production" to the end.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example includes a display position selection counter 223ay, a display time timer 223by, and a display position storage in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example. It differs from the area 223cy in that it is provided.

The display position selection counter 223ay is used to select a display area for displaying a decorative symbol from the symbol position selection table 222h described above. The display position selection counter 223ay is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the range of "0 to 99", and is updated one by one between the processing of S1616 and the processing of S1617 of the main processing, for example. As described above, when the decorative symbol is switched (moved) from the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to another area, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39". , The upper left side area Dq1 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative pattern. If the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "40 to 79", the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the decorative symbol is displayed. The lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area for displaying.

The display time timer 223by displays the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the area 1 (variable display area Dd1, upper left area Dq1, upper right area Dq2, or lower left area Dq3) in the "preparation mode". It is a timer that measures the elapsed time of. The initial value of this display time timer 223by is set to 0, and the value is added one by one in the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) while the decorative symbol is changed in the "preparation mode" (see FIG. 231). See S6503 of 231). Since the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), the display time timer 223by is counted up every 1 millisecond. Further, the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 every time the area (display position) where the decorative symbol is displayed is switched (see S6510 and S6513 in FIG. 231). Based on the value of the display time timer 223by, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display area) when 3 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the variable display area Dd1. Further, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol was displayed in the upper left area Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, or the lower left region Dq3, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol fluctuates to the display area Dd1. Can be switched to.

The display position storage area 223cy is a flag indicating whether the current display position (area) of the decorative symbol is the variable display area Dd1, the upper left side area Dq1, the upper right side area Dq2, or the lower left side area Dq3. In this display position storage area 223cy, any of four types of values "00H" to "03H" is stored, and if "00H" is stored, the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 is indicated. When "01H" is stored, the upper left region Dq1 is indicated, when "02H" is stored, the upper right region Dq2 is indicated, and when "03H" is stored, the lower left region Dq3 is indicated. Whether or not to change the display position of the decorative symbol is determined based on the value (elapsed time) of the display time timer 223by described above and the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy. That is, when 3 seconds elapse in the state where "00H" is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the decorative symbol is switched to another display position (display area). Further, when 0.5 seconds elapse in a state where any of "01H" to "03H" is stored in the display position storage area 223cy, the display position (display area) of the decorative symbol changes to the variable display area Dd1. Can be switched.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. First, with reference to FIG. 230, the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. This main process 6 (see FIG. 230) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 145) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

Of the main processes 6 (see FIG. 230) in the sixth control example, in each of the processes S1601 to S1614 and S1616 to S1621, S1601 to S1614 and S1616 in the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S1621 is executed. Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the second control example, when the process of S1613 is completed, the display position of the decorative symbol is selected according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode". The display position selection process for this is executed (S1661), and the process shifts to S1614. Details of this display position selection process (S1661) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230) in the present control example, when the process of S1614 is completed, the variable display setting process 6 is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example. (S1662). The variation display setting process 6 is a display variation based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation display of the identification information (symbol) in the effect unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. This is the process of generating and setting pattern commands. The details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the variation display setting process 6 is completed, the process shifts to S1616, and thereafter, the same process as the main process (see FIG. 145) in the first control example is executed.

Next, the details of the display position selection process (S1661) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 231. As described above, this display position selection process (S1661) is a process for selecting the display position of the decorative symbol according to the elapsed time during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode".

When the display position selection process (see FIG. 231) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501), and if it is determined to be 0 (S6501: No). ), It means that the current state is not "preparation mode" ("normal mode" or "ream mode"), and there is no need to change the display position (display area) of the decorative pattern, so this process is performed as it is. To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6501: Yes), it means that the current state is the "preparation mode", and the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. Since there is a possibility, it is next determined whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner (S6502). If it is determined in the process of S6502 that the variable display is not in progress (S6502: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S6502, when it is determined that the variable display is in progress (S6502: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the display time timer 223by (S6503) to obtain the current display position (display area). The information indicating the above is read from the display position storage area 223cy (S6504).

Next, based on the information read in the process of S6504, it is determined whether the current display position (display area) of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (whether the read value is "00H"). If the display position of the decorative symbol is the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6505: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 3000 (S6506). That is, it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the display position of the decorative symbol became the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1. In the process of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by has reached 3000 (S6506: Yes), the symbol position selection table 222h is read out (S6507), and the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is read. The display position of is specified (S6508). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left side area Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, and "40 to 79". If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)).

When the process of S6508 is completed, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified by the process of S6508 (S6509). In addition, the value stored in the display position storage area 223cy is also updated in accordance with this switching. That is, when it is switched to the upper left area Dq1, it is updated to "01H", when it is switched to the upper right area Dq2, it is updated to "02H", and when it is switched to the lower left area Dq3, it is updated to "03H". To. After the processing of S6509, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6510), and this processing is terminated. By resetting the display time timer 223by, the elapsed time after changing the display position of the decorative symbol is newly measured, and the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area Dd1 when 0.5 seconds have elapsed. be able to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6506, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 3000 (S6506: No), it is not necessary to switch the display position. End the process.

Further, in the processing of S6505, it was determined that the current display position of the decorative symbol is not the variable display area Dd1 (the one stored in the display position storage area 223cy is any of "01H" to "03H"). In the case (S6505: No), then it is determined whether the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511). That is, it is determined whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the display position of the decorative symbol was switched to any of the variable upper left side region Dq1, the upper right side region Dq2, and the lower left side region Dq3.

In the process of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is 500 (S6511: Yes), the display position of the decorative symbol is switched to the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 (S6512) and displayed. “00H” indicating the variable display area Dd1 is stored in the position storage area 223cy. Then, the value of the display time timer 223by is reset to 0 (S6513), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6511, when it is determined that the value of the display time timer 223by is not 500 (S6511), it is not necessary to switch the display position of the decorative symbol to the variable display area Dd1, so the processing of S6512 and S6513 is skipped. Then, this process ends as it is.

By executing this display position selection process (see FIG. 231), when any of the long fluctuations A to G is executed in the "preparation mode", the fluctuation display and the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 are performed. The fluctuation display for 0.5 seconds in a region different from the region Dd1 (either the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, or the lower left region Dq3) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the fluctuation display break (switching of the display position) in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", and it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation until the end during the execution of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

Next, the details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1662) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 232. This variation display setting process 6 (S1662) is one process in the main process 6 (see FIG. 230), and as described above, the variation of the identification information (symbol) in the effect unit 331 and the third symbol display device 81. In order to generate and set a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the display, the variation display process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Will be done.

Of the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232), in each process of S3301 to S3310, the same process as each process of S3301 to S3310 of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 162) in the first control example is executed. Will be done. Further, in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 232) in this control example, when the process of S3309 is completed, a stop position selection process for selecting a display position for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is executed in the "preparation mode". (S3331), the process shifts to S3310. The details of this stop position selection process (S3331) will be described with reference to FIG. 233.

FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the details of the stop position selection process (S3331). When this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601), and if the value is 0 (S6601), the present Means that is not the "preparation mode", and it is not necessary to change the position where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the variable display area Dd1 to another display position, so that this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6601, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223p is larger than 0 (S6601: Yes), it means that the current state is the "preparation mode". (S6602) to specify the display position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the value of the display position selection counter 223ay (S6603). Specifically, as described above, if the value of the display position selection counter 223ay is in the range of "0 to 39", the upper left side area Dq1 is specified as the area for displaying the decorative pattern, and "40 to 79". If it is a range, the upper right area Dq2 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the lower left area Dq3 is selected as the area for displaying the decorative symbol (FIG. 228 (b)). When the process of S6603 is completed, the display position of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display position specified in the process of S6603 (S6604), and the present process is completed.

By executing this stop position selection process (see FIG. 233), the stop display of the decorative symbol can be executed in a display position (display area) different from the variable display, so that the variable display area (lower right area) can be executed. ) It is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" before confirming the result of the "renso mode suggestion effect". Therefore, during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect", until the end. The player's expectation can be maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example is configured to display the lottery result of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) in the variable display area Dd1 of the third symbol display device 81. There is. As a result, the result of the variable display can be determined based on the stop symbol regardless of the mode.

Further, in this control example, in the "preparation mode", the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be performed at a display position different from the variable display area Dd1. Here, assuming that the variable display and the stop display are performed in the variable display area Dd1 even during the "preparation mode", the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the "preparation mode" is performed by observing the variable display area Dd1. Time is easily recognized. As described above, in the "preparation mode" in which the time saving period is once, the long variation A having a variation time of 90 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 112 and 113). On the other hand, in the "preparation mode" in which the time reduction period is 7 times, the long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the case of a big hit of a special symbol (see FIG. 112), and the fluctuation time is 3 in the case of a deviation. Middle variation in seconds is selected. Therefore, if the decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed 3 seconds after the start of the "Renso mode suggestion effect" (when long fluctuation A is selected), it is a big hit or the time saving period is 1. It is set only once, and it is determined that the case is out of the special symbol. In this case, the lottery of the special symbol will be missed, and the possibility of shifting to the "normal mode" after the change will increase, so that the player may not be able to enjoy the subsequent "ream villa mode suggestion effect". There is. Further, when the lottery of the 1st to 6th special symbols in the "preparation mode" in which the time saving period is 7 times is missed, the middle fluctuation with the fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected (see FIG. 113). Conversely, if the fluctuation continues for 3 seconds or more in the 2nd to 6th fluctuation display, it is a big hit without checking the production result of "Renso mode suggestion production" (97.5% probability). It can be recognized as (shifting to "renso mode"). For this reason, it is highly probable that the mode will shift to the "renso mode", and the player may feel that it is not necessary to confirm the subsequent "renso mode suggestion effect".

On the other hand, in this control example, the stop display of the decorative symbol is configured to be executed in a display area different from the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has confirmed the variable display area (lower right area) Dd1 to recognize whether or not the stop display has been executed. Therefore, it is difficult to predict whether or not to shift to the "renso mode" before confirming the result of the "renso mode suggestion effect". Therefore, during the execution of the "renso mode suggestion effect", until the end. The player's expectation can be maintained.

Further, in this control example, in order to make it more difficult to understand the stop display timing, during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the fluctuation display for 3 seconds in the fluctuation display area Dd1 and the region different from the fluctuation display area Dd1. It is configured so that the fluctuation display for 0.5 seconds in (upper left region Dq1 etc.) is repeated. Therefore, even if attention is paid to the fluctuation display break (switching of the display position) in the fluctuation display area Dq1, it is determined whether the break is due to the stop display or is periodically set in the long fluctuations A to G. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode", and it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to the "ream villa mode". Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation until the end during the execution of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect".

In the sixth control example, when it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the variable display of the decorative symbol was executed in the variable display area Dd1 in the "preparation mode", the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. The configuration is such that the position (any of the upper left region Dq1, the upper right region Dq2, and the lower left region Dq3) is switched or lottery (discrimination) is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be defined for each variable pattern (variable time), including the display position for each time elapsed. Specifically, for example, when the main controller 110 notifies the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the long fluctuation A (90 seconds), the display position switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 is the upper left side area Dq1 → the upper right side area. The order is Dq2 → lower left area Dq3 → upper left area Dq1 → ..., and the display area is lower left area Dq3 → upper right area Dq2 → upper left area Dq1 → lower left area Dq3 → ... The display mode of the variable display this time may be selectably configured from among the modes. That is, in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, as a mode of variable display of the decorative symbol, it is sufficient to define a display mode of a plurality of variations in which the display position of the decorative symbol is different. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to execute a process for drawing (determining) the display position every time, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

In this control example, the variable display area Dd1 is provided at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display area Dd1 can be arranged at any position. Further, in this control example, as the display area when the stop display is performed in the "preparation mode" and when the display position is switched from the fluctuation display area Dd1 during the execution of the long fluctuations A to G, the upper left side area Dq1 and the upper right side Three types of display areas, the area Dq2 and the lower left area Dq3, are provided, but the display area is not limited to the three types. A larger display area may be provided, or a smaller number may be provided. Further, the arrangement of each display area may be arbitrarily determined.

In this control example, the display position of the decorative symbol is switched when 3 seconds have passed after the decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (at the timing of stop display or during variable display). It is not limited. Instead of switching the display position, the display mode of the variable display area Dd1 may be changed. For example, the variable display area Dd1 may be reduced for 0.5 seconds every 3 seconds, and the normal size display mode for 3 seconds and the reduced display mode for 0.5 seconds may be repeated. When the reduced display is performed, the reduced display may be performed in a size that is difficult for the player to see (for example, 1 mm in length × 1 mm in width). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to see whether the decorative symbol is stopped or variable while it is displayed in a reduced size. Therefore, the display position of the decorative symbol is displayed. Can produce the same effect as when changing. Further, since the lottery (discrimination) process for switching the display position can be omitted, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this control example, when the stop display or the variable display is switched to an area other than the variable display area Dd1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the variable display area Dd1 (the display position is simply moved). It is not limited. For example, even after the display position is switched, the variable display area Dd1 may be subjected to a pseudo variable display. As a result, when paying attention to the variable display area Dd1, it looks as if the variable display is always continued during the "preparation mode" regardless of whether the display is stopped or the variable is in progress. It is possible to make it more difficult to tell whether or not the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the "preparation mode".

In this control example, the decorative symbol is configured to move to another display position (display area) when 3 seconds have passed since the variable display of the decorative symbol was displayed on the variable display area Dd1. However, the display time of the decorative symbol with respect to the variable display area Dq1 is not limited to 3 seconds, and may be arbitrarily set.

In this control example, the decorative symbol is configured to be displayed for 3 seconds or 0.5 seconds at any of the four display positions, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display position (variable display or stop display) of the decorative symbol in the "preparation mode" may always be moved at high speed. Further, the moving direction may be configured to have a random appearance. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the result of the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" from being predicted by the player. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the "ream villa mode suggestion effect" with a sense of expectation until the end.

In each of the above control examples, in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", after the ball B is made to swing on the upper part of the holding piece 677 (or holding piece 6770), it is moved to the pocket of the type corresponding to the current effect result. However, the configuration for identifying the pocket showing the effect result is not limited to the sphere B composed of spheres. For example, a doll imitating a character appearing in a part of the pachinko machine 10 may be dropped into a pocket corresponding to the result of the effect. In this case, instead of causing the swinging motion to be performed on the upper part of the holding piece 677 (holding piece 6770), a doll imitating a character is hung above the drop position with a string or the like to perform a pendulum-shaped swinging motion. You may let me do it. Then, when the period (amplitude) of the swinging operation becomes a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or less, the doll may be dropped into a pocket of a type corresponding to the effect result of this time. With this configuration, even if a non-spherical doll is used, the effect result can be clearly notified as in the case of using the sphere B. After the production is finished, the doll that imitates the character is collected like the ball B, and by returning it to the suspended state again, it is possible to execute the production of dropping the doll in each "renso mode suggestion production". It may be configured.

In each of the above control examples, plate-shaped members with numbers are used as the pockets P1 to P30, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotating member 640 may be replaced with an image produced by a liquid crystal display device or the like. That is, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be enlarged, and the roulette image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to execute the “consecutive villa mode suggestion effect”. In this case, the sphere B may also be configured to be replaced by a video. That is, in the "ream villa mode suggestion effect", a series of effects in which the ball B is thrown, then swings on the holding piece 677, and then falls into any pocket, are all performed by the third symbol display device. It may be configured to be executed by the image (image) displayed for 81. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of rotating members 640, holding pieces 677, balls B, pitching device 650, and the like. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (the radial outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end of the first passage forming member 520 opens the side to which the sphere is supplied and the side to which the sphere is supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e. The other side may operate in the form of a lid. In this case, it is possible to prevent foreign matter other than the sphere from being mixed into the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 comes into contact with the first passage forming member 520 and is rotated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the connecting member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the members required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be arranged. In this case, the displacement between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the single-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rack that drives the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of two front and rear layers, the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the front rack, and the drive-side slide member 420 is moved up and down by the rear rack. And may be configurable. In this case, when only one of the two-layer racks is in contact with the driven side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 move up and down in conjunction with each other. It is possible to switch between the case where the drive side slide member 420 passes through the driven side slide member 430 and the drive side slide member 420 moves up and down independently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b project outward from the circle formed by the tooth roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the abutting portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center of the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be projected so as to be longer.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is an adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

In each of the above embodiments, the portion that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b may be formed by partially scraping the gear teeth of the portion formed by the tooth shape.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b comes into contact with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface contact area may be reduced by providing a recessed portion recessed toward the rotation axis at an intermediate position between the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right ascending control members 417 come into contact with the drive side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the left and right rise restricting members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetrical load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 is tilted even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is closer to either the left or right side (one of the left and right sides). It can be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which a blower that blows air from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is arranged, or a mode in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 to attract a sphere by magnetic force. Alternatively, the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 may be vibrated in the rotational direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the sphere from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 inclines upward toward the tip side in the released state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end portion and the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (may be configured in a U shape). In this case, if the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be fastened to the intermediate portion (position closer to the tip portion than the base end portion), so that the state changes to the communication state. At that time, the period from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 until the ball is thrown can be shortened.

In the third embodiment, the case where the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged on one side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the base member 410, respectively, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the descending regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 are set on the left side. There may be a difference between the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged and the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the right side. At this time, the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the right side of the front view is compared with the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the left side of the front view (the side where the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is closer). It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load that causes the driven side slide member 3430 to change its posture in the counterclockwise direction (the direction in which the driven side slide member 3430 tilts due to the bias of the center of gravity) by the lowering regulating member 415 and the ascending regulating member 417 arranged on the right side is While suppressing, when the attitude of the driven side slide member 3430 changes clockwise due to the sudden vertical movement of the driven side slide member 3430, the attitude change can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the case where the driven side slide member 430 is dropped after the driving side slide member 420 is arranged in the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven side slide member 430 may be dropped while the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at an intermediate position. In this state, control (control for repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation) may be performed so that the driving side slide member 420 operates in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the driven side slide member 430. In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 can make the driven-side slide member 430 bounce (repeatedly bounce, etc.).

In each of the above embodiments, the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is connected by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and one side of the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is inserted. It may be driven by the rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638. In this case, since the distance between the split member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent split member DV is widened, the adjacent split member DV, the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the other-side rotation drive member 638 Interference can be suppressed, and the diameters of these one-side rotation drive members and the other-side rotation drive member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the drive torque applied to the split member DV (rotation member 640) from the one-side rotation drive member and the other side rotation drive member can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV and the engaging portion 638b of the other side rotation driving member 638 are the split members. Although the case where the period of engagement with the driven portion 641 of the DV overlaps (see FIG. 75), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the like or the like. While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, the other is disengaged and the engaging portion of the one-side rotation driving member 637. While the other of the engaging portion 638b of the 637b or the other side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, one may be disengaged.

In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. .. That is, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

That is, where a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, drive tolerances of the drive motor 631, etc., a plurality of split members In the rotary member 640 formed by connecting the DVs in an endless manner, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the split member DV. If a phase shift occurs while engaged with the portion 641, one section of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction is in a compressed state and the other section is in a pulled state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. It becomes.

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV. Therefore, even if the phase shift occurs, it is possible to avoid the influence of the phase shift on the rotating member 640. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of divided member DVs in an endless manner, its displacement can be stabilized.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the split member DV is connected in an endless manner in the rotating unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the split member DV is connected in an endless manner (from one end to the other end). Of course, it is possible to connect the split member DV and disconnect one end and the other end). In this case, for example, the split member DV connected in an endped manner may be displaced (moved) along the endless orbit in each of the above embodiments, or may be present along the endd orbit. The split member DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocally displaced (reciprocated).

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of game machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure in which the rotation of the second gear 352 is regulated by the locking arc portion 351c>
The transmission in a gaming machine including a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and is arranged on the displacement member side of the driving force transmission path with respect to the first gear. The gear includes an abutting portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged at an elevated position, a predetermined tooth of the second gear is attached to the abutting portion of the first gear. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted by being brought into contact with the gear.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmitting member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the descending position and the ascending position by the linear motion of the rack. (Patent Document 1: For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-80941). In this case, when the driving force of the driving means is released while the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continuously apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that the energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position increases. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism as a part of the driving means and utilizing the dead center of the crank mechanism, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from the ascending position by its own weight even if the driving force of the driving means is released. However, in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member becomes large due to the presence of the crank mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the first gear includes a contact portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the first gear contacts the first gear. When the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the portion, the rotation of the second gear in the descending direction of the displacement member is restricted, so that the displacement member is still present even if the driving force of the driving means is released. It is possible to suppress the descent by its own weight. Therefore, the energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position can be suppressed. Further, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and it is not necessary to separately interpose the crank mechanism, the transmission member can be miniaturized. it can.

In the game machine A1, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the second gear is in contact with the first gear. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by abutting the receiving portion of the two gears.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, when the receiving part of the second gear comes into contact with the contact part of the first gear, the displacement member rotates in the rising direction of the second gear. Is regulated, that is, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held in the raised position rattles. Can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in a state where the displacement member is arranged in an ascending position, rotation of the first gear in a direction in which the displacement member is lowered is allowed.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. It is not necessary to separately perform an operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move to the ascending position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from the ascending position by its own weight, the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and restricting the rotation of the displacement member. Can be held in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be meshable with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction for raising the displacement member. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the tooth depth is lower than the teeth of the first gear so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface thereof.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in the direction of raising the displacement member. It is possible to form the gear, and the tooth depth is lower than that of the first gear so that the predetermined tooth of the second gear can come into contact with the tooth tip surface of the first gear. Therefore, the first gear is raised in the direction of raising the displacement member. Is rotated, and when the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction of ascending the displacement member through the contact portion and the tooth engagement of the predetermined teeth. As a result, a state in which the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be formed reliably.

A5 of the game machine A4, wherein the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a larger tooth thickness than the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined teeth of the second gear come into contact with each other. A possible area can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position can be relaxed (the allowable amount can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion of the first gear.

Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and regulates the rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member), and the tooth thickness is Since it is enlarged, strength can be secured.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed by bending the tooth tip surface into an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the first gear. ..

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed with its tooth tip surface curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation center of the first gear. Therefore, the strength of the first gear can be improved while allowing the first gear to rotate until the predetermined teeth of the second gear can come into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear. Can be planned.

Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction of lowering the displacement member and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear, the predetermined tooth of the second gear is determined. The direction of the force acting on the contact portion of the first gear from the tooth is set to the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear, and it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear. As a result, the rotation of the second gear in the descending direction of the displacement member can be easily regulated, and even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member can be reliably suppressed from being lowered by its own weight.

In the game machine A6, the second gear includes a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the first gear receives the second gear. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted by abutting the contact portion of the gear.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the second gear is provided with a receiving portion formed in a part of the tooth profile thereof, and the first gear is in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position. Since the contact portion of the gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises is restricted. It can function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

In the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A game machine A8 characterized in that it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to that of the shape.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear, and the first Since it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the contact portion of the gear, when the contact portion of the first gear is in contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are surfaced. The contact portion of the first gear can be abutted by hitting, and the contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the receiving portion of the second gear can be reliably exerted its function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged in the raised position.

Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction can be increased, and the strength of the receiving portion can be increased. Can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the engagement between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in the ascending direction.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A4 to A8, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear Since the meshing of the displacement member is released and the displacement member is located at the end of the movable range in the ascending direction, the displacement member is arranged in the ascending position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member. Later, while stopping the second gear, only the first gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member rises. As a result, a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (a state in which the contact portion (tooth tip surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). Can be reliably formed.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is an example>
The first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which is non-communication, the first passage member or the first passage member or the first passage member is displaceably arranged at one end of one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. 2. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a connecting member that communicates between one end of the first passage member and one end of the second passage member in a state of being displaced by being in contact with the other of the two passage members.

Here, the first passage member and the second passage member formed so that the sphere can pass through are provided, and at least one end of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other by being displaced. A communication state in which a ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not. There is known a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state that is considered to be communicative (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the arrangement position of the second passage member vary due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each part. Therefore, in the communicating state, the positions of one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other, which makes it difficult to stably throw the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is displaced by being in contact with the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. In the case, since the connecting member for communicating between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is provided, even if the positions of the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are misaligned, one end of each of them is provided. The displacement of the connecting portion between them can absorb the misalignment. Thereby, the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member can be stabilized. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member abuts on the connecting member to displace the connecting member, so that the driving force for displaceing the first passage member can also be used and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for causing the displacement.

In the game machine B1, the connecting member includes one side wall portion and the other side wall portion that are arranged so as to face each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member. When it is located on the displacement locus of the first passage member, the first passage member is displaced, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. 2. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member. , Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are placed in the communicating state. , The first passage member and the second passage member can be brought closer to one end, and the misalignment between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member can be easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation axis of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connecting member, the connecting member is rotated and said. The gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connecting member due to the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Further, by utilizing the rotational motion of both, the other side wall portion of the connecting member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

In the game machine B2 or B3, in the communication state, one of the facing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion has a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. The gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when a ball is thrown, and in the communicating state, one of the facing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the ball at the communicating portion between the first passage member and one end of the second passage member. That is, since the communicating portion between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member is a portion where the positional deviation becomes large, the ball throwing becomes unstable, and a rolling surface of the ball is formed in the communicating portion. Since one of the facing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member to the second passage member, the ball can be rolled and the thrown ball can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in the communicating state, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member, and in the released state, in the first passage member. A game machine B5 comprising a ball throwing regulating means for restricting a ball from being thrown from one end of the first passage member.

Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other. When a ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball that has passed through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, even if the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the communicating state, if the sphere stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the released state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that stayed in the game will fall into the game area. If the ball falls out of the game area, it may hinder the movement of movable members such as gears and crank mechanisms, and the ball may be pinched, resulting in damage to the movable members.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be thrown from one end of the first passage member in the communicating state. In addition, in the released state, a ball throwing regulating means for restricting the ball in the first passage member from being thrown from one end of the first passage member is provided. Therefore, for example, when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the release state, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, which allows the passage of a ball in the communicating state and restricts the passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body regulates the throwing of the ball. A game machine B6 characterized by forming means.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, one end of the first passage member is covered as a ball throwing control means that allows the ball to pass in the communicating state and regulates the ball in the released state. Since the body is arranged, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

In the game machine B5, the urging member that applies an urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball and acts on the cover body with the displacement of the first passage member. The gaming machine B7 is characterized by comprising, at least, an action member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through when the communication state is formed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, an urging member that applies urging force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts the passage of the ball is provided, so that the cover body is covered in the released state. It is possible to prevent the body from being inadvertently displaced, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in a direction that allows the ball to pass through, so that the ball can be thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In this case, the displacement of the cover body in the direction allowing the passage of the sphere is performed along with the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the acting member. Therefore, the driving means for displacement of the first passage member is used to displace the cover body. It can also be used as a driving means for the displacement, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The working member is located on the displacement locus of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts on the cover body displaced along the displacement locus to resist the urging force of the urging member. A driving force that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows the ball to pass through (for example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to the game board, etc.) or a driving means that displaces the first passage member. Is transmitted to the cover body, and the cover body is also displaced together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack pinion that converts the driving means and the driving force into rotary motion or linear motion and transmits it to the cover body, etc. ) Is illustrated.

In the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the top in the released state, so that, for example, Even when the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball moves out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can be suppressed from falling.

It should be noted that the first passage member arranged in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is at the uppermost position in the released state does not need to have the entire first passage member ascending and inclined, and the first passage member of the first passage member. There may be a part of the area that is horizontal or has a downward slope.

The game machine B5 is characterized in that the throwing regulating means is arranged in a posture in which the first passage member is ascended from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Game machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the ball throwing regulating means arranges the first passage member in a posture of ascending and tilting from the other end to one end of the first passage member in the released state. Therefore, for example, even when a ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the ball stays in the first passage member and shifts from the communication state to the released state, the ball is transmitted from one end of the first passage member. Can be easily suppressed from falling out of the game area.

Further, when the communication state is formed, the entire first passage member can be formed in a downwardly inclined state from the other end toward one end, so that the ball can be easily thrown from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the released state, it is possible to prevent the ball remaining in the first passage member from falling into the game area.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage formed so that the ball can pass through, and a one-sided position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage and The case body is formed with both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member open so as to include a distribution member that displaces a ball flowing down from the upstream passage between other side positions that distribute the ball to the downstream passage. A game machine B10 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed so that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are open, so that the case body can be moved to one side position or the other side position. Even when a sphere flows down between the distribution member and the case body that are displaced toward the direction, it is possible to prevent the flowing sphere from being sandwiched between the distribution member and the case body.

In the game machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the one side position. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the other side position.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, a distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement member is arranged at one side position and the other side position according to the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the driving means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when the displacement state of the distribution member and the first passage member is deviated due to the occurrence of control failure, the release state is released. The ball is distributed to the first aisle member (that is, the distribution member is arranged at one side position), and the ball may fall out of the game area from one end of the first aisle member. On the other hand, in the game machine B10, since the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can always be synchronized. Therefore, even if a control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member is always in the other side position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as the distribution member.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion for partitioning the passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member is used as a distribution member. , Parts can be standardized to reduce the cost of parts. Further, by using the wall portion that divides the passage through which the spheres pass as a distribution member, the distributed spheres can be surely flowed down into the passage.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure that regulates the bounce of the driven side slide member 430>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and the displacement member are supported at the descending position. A support member and an elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. At the same time, in a gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the ascending position to the lowering position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowering position, the displacement member is moved in the ascending direction. A game machine C1 characterized by including a rise regulating member that regulates displacement.

Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and capable of being displaced along the guide member between the ascending position and the descending position, and the displacement member being supported at the descending position. The support member and the elevating member formed so as to be able to elevate along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is raised from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered from an ascending position to a descending position by its own weight as the elevating member is lowered (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is maintained in the lowered position by being placed on the support member and supported by the support member. However, since the displacement member is mounted on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling is likely to occur due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position is likely to occur. There was a problem that it was unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the ascending regulating member that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the ascending direction when the displacement member is lowered to the descending position is provided, the displacement member is along the guide member at the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be regulated, and rattling caused by disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized.

The game machine C1 includes an urging means for urging the ascending restricting member in a direction close to the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the ascending restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. A separating action portion that displaces the ascending restricting member in a direction away from the displacement member, and the ascending restricting member that allows the ascending restricting member to be displaced in a direction closer to the displacement member at the descending position. A gaming machine C2 comprising an engaging portion to be engaged.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the displacement member includes a separation action portion that displaces the ascending regulating member in a direction away from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and a lowering position. Since it is provided with an engaging portion that engages with the ascending restricting member, the restricting state by the ascending regulating member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to the descending position by its own weight, and the restricting state by the ascending regulating member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for this purpose. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the engagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the ascending regulating member to be displaced in the direction closer to the displacement member, so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion are engaged accordingly. The force required to disengage and the displacement of the ascent restricting member can be increased. As a result, even when a disturbance is input, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion.

In the game machine C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the disengagement between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Is input, and even if it tries to rattle, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member from being inadvertently disengaged.

Further, since the engagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is released by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for disengaging the ascending / descending member. The drive source for raising and lowering the member can also be used as the drive source for disengaging the engaging portion between the ascending regulating member and the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

Further, when a drive source for disengaging the engagement portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member is separately provided, for example, due to the occurrence of poor control, the engaging portion between the ascending restricting member and the displacement member There is a risk that the elevating member will rise and push up the displacement member in the state where the engagement is not disengaged. According to the game machine C3, the disengagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is disengaged. Since it can be performed according to the operation of pushing up the displacement member with the elevating member as the elevating member rises, when the displacement member is pushed up by the elevating member, the engagement portion between the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is engaged. Can form a state in which is surely released.

In the game machine C3, when the elevating member is lifted, the elevating member comes into contact with the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member so that the ascending regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are engaged with each other. The gaming machine C4 comprising a disengaging action portion for disengaging the engagement.

Here, the engagement between the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be disengaged by the pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. In this case, the pushing force is used. It is necessary to make the engagement state to the extent that it can be disengaged, which makes strong engagement difficult. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, vibration is generated due to the reaction, and the posture of the displacement member becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the elevating member abuts on the ascending regulating member and displaces the ascending regulating member when the elevating member is ascended. Since it is provided with a disengaging action portion that disengages the engaging portion between the member and the displacement member, the disengagement is reliably performed even when the ascending restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged. be able to. In other words, since a strong engaging state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member in the descending position can be stabilized. Further, the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released.

In the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member is attached to the elevating member that elevates and elevates the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position in a state where the displacement member is disengaged from the engaging portion. A game machine C5 characterized by being brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3 or C4, the ascending restricting member moves the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position in the state where the engagement portion of the displacement member is disengaged. Since it comes into contact with the elevating member for elevating and lowering, it functions as a guide guide and can suppress rattling when the elevating member is moved up and down. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

In the game machine C5, the lift restricting member that comes into contact with the lift member is urged by the urging means in a direction close to the lift member.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the ascending regulating member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction close to the elevating member, so that the elevating member is urged in a certain direction. It can be urged to stabilize its posture. Further, the rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic buffering action of the urging means.

The game machine C6 includes a driving means, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are engaged, and the rack is arranged on the elevating member, and the elevating member is the elevating member. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction away from the pinion via an ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the rotary motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. To. In this case, since the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascending regulating member, the distance between the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the elevating member rattles in the direction in which the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is narrowed, the urging force of the urging means acts in the direction in which the distance is widened, while the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion is widened. When the elevating member rattles, it can be regulated by the guide structure by the guide member that the interval spreads beyond a certain level. Therefore, the distance between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to prevent the tooth engagement resistance from becoming excessive.

A gaming machine C8, wherein any of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes a lowering regulating member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction when the elevating member pushes the displacement member up to the ascending position.

According to the game machine C8, in any of the game machines C1 to C7, since the elevating member is provided with a descent restricting member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction when the displacement member is pushed up to the ascending position, the elevating member is arranged at the ascending position. The provided displacement member and elevating member can be supported by the descent restricting member. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for a driving force for holding the displacement member in the ascending position, so that the energy consumption of the driving means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

Further, since the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for forming the regulation by the lowering regulation member, and the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member is not required. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine C8, the release of the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by lowering the lowering member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8, the release of the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by lowering the elevating member, so that it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the regulation. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for releasing the regulation of the descent restricting member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when a drive source for releasing the regulation by the lowering regulation member is separately provided, for example, the elevating member is lowered and driven in a state where the regulation by the lowering regulating member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure. Where there is a risk of overload acting on the source or damage to the descent restricting member, etc., according to the game machine C9, the regulation by the descent restricting member can be released in accordance with the descent operation of the elevating member. When lowering the elevating member, it is possible to form a state in which the regulation by the lowering regulating member is surely released.

If the lowering regulating member is not an elevating member but a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the descending direction, the structure in which the regulation is released by the descending regulating member as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descent regulating member has a structure that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction, the release of the regulation by the descent regulating member is accompanied by the descent of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

In the game machine C8 or C9, in a state where the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is restricted by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member is attached to the elevating member. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the abutting direction and the direction in which the ascending restricting member is abutted on the elevating member are different directions.

According to the game machine C10, in the game machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering regulating member is in contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the ascending regulating member is in contact with the elevating member. It is possible to suppress rattling of the elevating member in different directions by the regulating member and the ascending regulating member. As a result, the posture of the elevating member can be effectively stabilized.

The game machine C10 includes a driving means, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving means, and a rack to which the pinions are meshed with each other. The gaming machine C11 is characterized in that it comes into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

According to the game machine C11, the rotational motion of the pinion rotationally driven by the driving means is converted into the linear motion of the rack, and the elevating member is moved up and down along the guide member by the linear motion. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced in the direction parallel to the tooth surface with respect to the pinion, and the lowering restricting member is brought into contact with the elevating member from the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rack (elevating member) is displaced with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

In any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending restricting member and the supporting member can come into contact with the displacement member from one side and the other side sandwiching the guide member. A game machine C12, which is characterized in that it is arranged in each of the above.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the ascending regulating member and the supporting member sandwich the guide member on one side and the other side. Since they are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members, rattling in either direction of the displacement member with respect to the guide member is regulated by the abutment of the ascending regulating member or the supporting member. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

In any of the game machines C1 to C12, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending restricting member come into contact with the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the support member is arranged so as to be possible and the support member is arranged above the ascending restricting member.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C11, when the displacement member is arranged in the descending position, the support member and the ascending restricting member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member. Since the displacement members are arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement members, the rattling of the displacement members in the oblique direction can be regulated by the contact with the ascending restricting member and the supporting member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement member arranged at the descending position from rattling due to the disturbance.

Further, since the support member is arranged above the ascending regulating member, the supporting member does not hinder the elevating and lowering of the elevating member, and a space for the elevating member to ascend and descend can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

<About the concept of the invention in which the structure in which the detected portion 641 of the rotating member 640 is detected by the detection sensor 684 is an example>
In a gaming machine including a moving member formed movably and a detecting means for detecting a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the direction of movement. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by including a plurality of detected portions provided and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on the movement locus of the detected portions.

Here, a gaming machine including a moving member rotatably formed and a detecting means for detecting a rotational position of the moving member is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46667). According to this gaming machine, the detecting means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving portion receives light. The number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, and the amount of rotation (that is, the rotation position) of the moving member from the reference position is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion or the like, the rotation position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number are deviated, and the rotation position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, the subsequent detection result is affected, and each time a detection failure occurs, the influence on the detection result is accumulated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the detecting means is arranged on a plurality of detected portions arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the moving direction, and on the moving locus of the detected portions. Since the plurality of detection sensors provided are provided, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection results detected by the plurality of detection sensors, and the past detection result of the detection sensor is required to detect the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

In the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along the moving direction, and the detected portion is among the plurality of divided members. It is characterized in that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the divided members, which are arranged in a part of the divided members and not in the remaining divided members. Game machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of dividing members and is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing members along the moving direction to be detected. Is arranged on a part of the divided members and not on the remaining divided members, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged based on the arrangement interval of the divided members. Therefore, each time the moving member is displaced by the amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the divided members, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be changed. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing member as the minimum unit.

When a plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members, the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of dividing members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position where the presence / absence of the detected portion of the corresponding dividing member can be detected.

In the game machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of divided members are connected at a narrower interval than the first interval. A second section is formed, and the plurality of detection sensors have an interval based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first section, and the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section. A game machine D3 characterized by being arranged on the top.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the moving member includes a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of divided members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval, which is a narrow interval, is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In this case, since the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the dividing members in the first section, It is possible to easily secure the space required for arranging the detection sensor. In other words, when setting the arrangement interval (second interval) of the dividing members in the second section, it is not necessary to consider the space for the arrangement of the detection sensor, and therefore, the second interval is set more. Can be set at narrow intervals. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed from this point as well.

In the game machine D3, the split member includes a main body member on which the detected member is arranged, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By displacement of the link member with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that it reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the split member is displaced in a direction to widen the distance from the adjacent split member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, both ends of the split member can be displaced to each of the main body member on which the detected member is arranged and the main body member of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. By providing a link member connected to the main body member and the link member being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

In this case, in the first section, since the link member reaches the displacement end and the dividing member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, the detection is performed in the direction of widening the distance. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the position of the portion. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

The game machine D4 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, and the link guide portion acts on the main body member and the adjacent main body member. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, it is possible to form the first section and the second section by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the guided portion of the link member is slidably inserted through the link guide portion of the base member. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it is formed in a groove shape and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member is guided by the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape to be slidably inserted and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. As a result, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the dividing member in the direction of widening the distance from the adjacent dividing member, and suppress the positional variation of the detected portion in the direction of widening the distance. It is possible to improve the detection accuracy by the detection sensor.

In any of the game machines D4 to D6, the split member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the main body member, and in the first section, the split member is brought into contact with the main body member of the adjacent split member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the displacement member is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is narrowed.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D4 to D6, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceable on the main body member, and in the first section, the adjacent dividing member Since the displacement member is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the main body member, and the displacement member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the distance. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the position of. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention as an example of a structure for adjusting the distance between the divided members DV in the moving member 640>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed so as to be movable, the moving member is formed by having a plurality of divided members and connecting the plurality of divided members along a moving direction, and the moving member is formed. Is a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a second interval which is narrower than the first interval. A game machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed so as to be rotatable is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, the effect can be performed by displaying a plurality of identification information along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which a plurality of divided members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of divided members at an interval narrower than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed. That is, while securing the number of the dividing members, the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on each divided member, the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information.

In the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member, and the link member is the main body member and The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body portion of the adjacent divided member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. Since the link member is displaced with respect to the main body portion of the main body member and the adjacent split member, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, so that the first section and the second section are formed. The structure of can be simplified.

The game machine E2 includes a base member in which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion and the link member that guide the main body member when the split member is displaced. The link guide portion acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, and the link guide portion acts on the main body member and the adjacent main body member. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member of the dividing member is changed.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and a link guide portion for guiding the link member when the split member is displaced, and links. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. The distance between the divided members can be increased or decreased as the posture of the link member changes. That is, it is possible to form the first section and the second section by increasing or decreasing the distance between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacement member displaceable on the main body member, and the displacement member has a posture of being tilted toward an adjacent dividing member in the first section. At the same time, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in the second section, the posture is more upright than the posture in the first section.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is in a posture of being tilted toward the adjacent split member in the first section, so that the displacement member is visually recognized by the player. It can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be improved. Further, in the first section, since the distance between the dividing members is widened, it is possible to secure a space for the displacement member to tilt, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Therefore, from this point as well, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

On the other hand, in the second section, the displacement member is in an upright posture rather than the posture in the first section, so that the displacement member can be separated from the main body member of the adjacent split member, and the main body members can be separated by that amount. Can be brought closer and their spacing narrowed. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, the displacement member is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. The game machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably arranged on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member. Since it is arranged, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the distance between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for arranging the moving member can be suppressed.

In the game machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member is characterized in that its trajectory is formed in a circular shape.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body member is displaced by being guided by the main body guide portion of the base member. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all the plurality of dividing members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it has the same radius as when it is arranged in a circular shape.

Here, the first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the plurality of dividing members are connected in the circumferential direction at the second interval which is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed on the moving member (hereinafter referred to as "the former case"), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as "the latter"). Since the length in the circumferential direction of the above can be shortened, the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members can be suppressed while securing the number of the divided members. However, when the trajectories of the plurality of partitioning members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the dividing member of the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of the dividing members forming the moving member based on the number and the radius of the dividing member in the first section. Reminiscent of fewer numbers.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the trajectory of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape covers all the plurality of dividing members. Since it is equivalent to the radius when connected in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranged in a circular shape, the number of a plurality of divided members is secured and the space required for arranging the plurality of divided members is suppressed. At the same time, the player can be reminded of a number corresponding to the actual number as the total number of the divided members forming the moving member.

<Concept of the invention using the drive mechanism 630 as an example>
A moving member formed by connecting a base member on which a guide portion is extended and a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force are applied to the moving member. The guide portion of the base member is provided with a driving means, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member to set the distance between the divided members to the first distance, and the guide portion is more than the first guide portion. The driving means includes a rotary driving member having an engaging portion that can engage with the split member, and the driving means is provided with a second guide portion that sets a gap between the split members in a narrow second gap. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

Here, a game machine including a moving member formed so as to be rotatable is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, the effect can be performed by displaying a plurality of identification information along the circumferential direction on the front surface of the moving member and allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the diameter of the moving member becomes large, which is necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, if the diameter of the moving member is reduced, the number of identification information displayed is reduced.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of divided members, and the section in which the plurality of divided members are connected to the moving member at the first interval is narrower than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval of the interval, as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval, the number of the dividing members is secured and the plurality of the dividing members are connected. The space required for arranging the dividing members can be suppressed, that is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for arranging the moving members can be suppressed while securing the number of displayed identification information. I came up with.

However, a moving member to which a plurality of dividing members are connected is connected to a section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval and a plurality of dividing members at a second interval narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section to be formed.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, the guide portion of the base member is narrower than the first guide portion that sets the distance between the divided members to the first distance by acting on the divided member and the first distance. The second guide portion for setting the distance between the divided members is provided at the second interval, and the drive means includes a rotary drive member having an engaging portion that can be engaged with the split member, and the rotary drive member engages with the rotary drive member. By rotating the portions while engaging them with the dividing members, the plurality of dividing members are displaced along the guide portions of the base members, so that the intervals between the dividing members are wide and narrow (the first interval). The moving member can be displaced with respect to the base member while forming the section (the section and the section of the second interval) in the moving member.

In the game machine F1, the game machine F2 is characterized in that a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotation drive member, so that the efficiency of transmitting the driving force from the rotation drive member to the moving member can be improved. Can be done.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by connecting the plurality of divided body members in an endless manner in the circumferential direction, and the driving means includes two rotating driving members, and the rotation of the two. The gaming machine F3, wherein the driving member is arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the rotation drive members 2 are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, so that the rotation drive member is imparted to the moving member. The driving force can be distributed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the moving member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members and stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the rotation driving members of the second are 180 degrees out of phase with each other in the circular orbits. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is arranged at a vertical position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the trajectories of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotation driving members are circular trajectories. Since they are arranged at positions that are 180 degrees out of phase with each other, the driving force from the rotary driving member can be applied to the two most separated moving members (plurality of dividing members), and as a result. , The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of the second is the engaging portion of the other rotation drive member while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the division member. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the engaging portions are arranged in different phases so as to be engaged with the dividing member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3 or F4, the rotation drive member of 2 is the other while the engaging portion of one rotation drive member is not engaged with the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotary drive member are arranged so as to be engaged with the split member so that the phases of the engaging portions are different from each other, the engaging portion of one rotary drive member and the other rotary drive member It is possible to prevent the engaging portions from being disengaged from the split members at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the driving force from the rotational driving member to the moving member to be intermittent. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of dividing members are connected in an endless manner as in the present invention, when the driving force is intermittently transmitted from the rotary driving member to the moving member, the split members are divided as the driving force is transmitted and released. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F5, either one of the engaging portion of one rotation driving member and the engaging portion of the other rotation driving member is always engaged with the split member, and the moving member is always driven by the driving force. Can form a transmitted state, so that the distance between the dividing members can be easily kept constant. As a result, even a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members in an endless manner can stabilize the posture. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of dividing members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members. The gaming machine F6, which is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the above.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion to which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion thereof is provided. Since the portions are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the track of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotation driving member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased accordingly.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the dividing member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A game machine F7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F6, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the split members. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the split member guided in a state where the interval is widened, interference between the adjacent split member and the rotation drive member can be suppressed, and the rotation drive member can be suppressed accordingly. The diameter of the can be increased. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

In any of the game machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the split member displaced along the guide portion, so that the distance between the divided members is set to the first distance or the second. The rotation driving member is provided with a third guide portion for transitioning from the interval of the above to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation driving member is attached to the dividing member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions. The gaming machine F8, characterized in that the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged.

According to the game machine F8, in the game machine according to any one of the game machines F1 to F7, the rotation drive member is a split member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent split member. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the divided member whose distance from the member is changed from the first interval or the second interval to the second interval or the first interval, the guide portion is provided. The split member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation drive member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from bending in the middle, and to stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is a main body member displaced along the guide portion, one end of which is rotatably connected to the main body member, and the main body member of an adjacent split member. The split member and the other end are provided with a link member whose ends are slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. The distance between the adjacent dividing members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is the main body member of the dividing member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent dividing member is slidably connected to the portion. The gaming machine F9 is also characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged at a position close to a portion rotatably connected.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F8, the dividing member is rotatably connected to the main body member displaced along the guide portion and one end to the main body member. The main body member of the adjacent split member is provided with a link member whose other end is slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member, respectively. As a result, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation drive member is the main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. Since one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the rotatably connected portion than the portion to be connected, when the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation drive member and displaced along the guide portion, The displacement of the main body member can be easily transmitted to the main body member of the adjacent split member via the link member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

The game machine F4 or F5 is characterized in that the game machine F4 or F5 is provided with a drive gear that is arranged concentrically with a circular shape that is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members and is meshed with each of the rotational drive members.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4 or F5, the two rotation drive members are provided with drive gears that are meshed with each other. Therefore, by rotating the drive gears, the two rotation drive members are synchronized. It can be rotated in the state where it is turned on. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is arranged concentrically with the circle which is the trajectory of the plurality of division members, the drive gear and the rotational drive member 2 are moved members (plurality of division members) in the front view of the base member. It can be arranged inward from the outer circumference of the movement locus of. That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member 2 do not protrude outward from the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

<Characteristic G group> (Bunny foot control)
It is determined that the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, the second flow path in which the game ball can flow down and different from the first flow path, and the game ball has entered the first flow path. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is connected to the possible first discriminating means and the first flow path and the second flow path so that the game ball can flow down. Based on the determination result of the movable means that can be moved and the first determination means, the release determination means that determines the establishment of the release condition that can release the communication state, and the release determination means thereof. The gaming machine G1 is characterized by having a maintenance means for maintaining the communication state until it is determined to be possible.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that executes a lottery triggered by a starting prize and gives a winning state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery. In this conventional game machine, a privilege is given to the player by entering the game ball into a specific ball entry area that is opened (or expanded) when a hit state is reached. Further, in such a conventional game machine, a plurality of flow paths are provided inside the ball entry area, and the privilege given is different depending on the flow path through which the ball enters to improve the interest in the hit state. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-59445). Of the plurality of flow paths, the flow path in which the game ball advances can be switched according to, for example, the type of hit, the elapsed time, and the like.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the traveling direction of the game ball may not be completely controlled, and there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be flowed down appropriately.

On the other hand, in the game machine G1, the entry of the game ball into the first flow path is determined by the first discriminating means. At least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved by a movable means so that the first flow path and the second flow path communicate with each other so that the game ball can flow down. Based on the determination result by the first determination means, the establishment of the release condition capable of canceling the communication state is determined by the release determination means, and the communication state is determined by the maintenance means until the release determination means determines that the release is possible. Is maintained.

As a result, the communication state is maintained until the release condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

The game machine G1 has a second discriminating means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the second flow path, and the release condition is discriminated by the first discriminating means. The game machine G2 is characterized in that it is established when the number of game balls and the number of game balls determined by the second discriminating means match.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the second determination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second flow path. The release condition is satisfied when the number of game balls determined by the first determination means and the number of game balls determined by the second determination means match.

As a result, the communication state can be maintained until the game ball flows down from one of the first flow path and the second flow path in the communication state to the other. That is, it is possible to prevent the communication state from being released during the flow from one flow path to the other flow path, and to ensure that the game ball flows down to the other flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the flow destination of the game ball can be preferably controlled.

The game machine G1 is characterized in that the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed after the entry of the game ball is determined by the first determination means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined period elapses after the entry of the game ball is determined by the first determination means. It is possible to pass through the first flow path and the second flow path in a communicated state. Therefore, there is an effect that the communication state is suppressed from being released while the game ball is flowing down any of the flow paths, and the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

In the game machine G1, the release condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed since the last determination of the entry of the game ball by the first determination means in the communication state of 1. The game machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the cancellation condition is satisfied when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last determination of the entry of the game ball by the first determination means in the communication state of 1. Therefore, it is possible to release the communication state after passing all the game balls that have entered the first flow path in the communication state within a predetermined time. Therefore, there is an effect that the communication state is suppressed from being released while the game ball is flowing down any of the flow paths, and the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open state in which a game ball can enter the entry means, and a closure in which entry is more difficult than in the open state. The first variable member comprises a variable member that can be changed to a state, and a variable means that changes the variable member from the closed state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when a specific condition is satisfied. The game machine G5 is characterized in that the flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters the ball.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the variable member is variable between an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. When a specific condition is satisfied, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state by the variable means. Here, the first flow path is arranged at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means enters.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the ball entry means from being released from the communication state before it reaches the second flow path. Therefore, when the ball entry means is in the open state, there is an effect that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can be suitably flowed down.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, the effect means for executing the effect and the effect means based on the elapse of a predetermined elapsed period from the determination of the entry of the game ball by the first determination means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that it has an effect variable means for changing an effect mode to be executed.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G5, the effect means based on the elapse of a predetermined elapsed period from the determination of the entry of the game ball by the first determination means. The effect mode executed by is changed by the effect variable means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player launch the game ball aiming at the first path, with the pleasure of changing the effect mode executed by the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G6, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path, and the game ball that has entered the first flow path reaches the second flow path during the predetermined elapsed period. The gaming machine G7, which is characterized in that it is composed of more than the period required for the game.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G6, the following effects are played. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, a period equal to or longer than the period required for the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means to reach the second flow path is set as a predetermined elapsed period.

As a result, the effect mode executed by the effect means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means is changed, so that the player can reach the effect means. It is possible to perform an effect that looks as if the effect mode has been changed. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel production, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second flow path depending on whether or not a predetermined elapsed period has elapsed, a configuration of a sensor or the like for determining whether or not the ball has entered the second flow path. Can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost price of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts of the game machine.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, so that the game ball is produced in the process of passing through the second flow path. A game ball can be put into the inside of the means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G1, based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path, the second determination means that executes a predetermined determination, the effect means that the effect is executed, and the determination result by the second determination means Based on this, the gaming machine G9 is characterized by having an effect variable means for changing an effect mode executed by the effect means.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the second determination means based on the game ball that has entered the second flow path. Then, based on the determination result by the second determination means, the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed by the effect variable means.

As a result, in order to change the effect mode, the player can launch the game ball so that the game ball enters the second flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G9, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path, and the second determination means determines that the game ball has reached the second flow path. A game machine G10 characterized by.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G9, the following effects are played. That is, the effect means is arranged on the front side of the second flow path. Then, it is determined by the second discriminating means that the game ball has reached the second flow path.

As a result, the effect mode executed by the effect means after the game ball reaches the second flow path provided on the back side of the effect means is changed, so that the player can reach the effect means. It is possible to perform an effect that looks as if the effect mode has been changed. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a novel production, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine G10, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means, and the second discriminating means is inside the effect means in the second flow path. The game machine G11 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the game ball has flowed down the formed portion.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G10, the following effects are played. That is, at least a part of the second flow path is formed inside the effect means. Then, the second discriminating means determines whether or not the game ball has flowed down the portion of the second flow path formed inside the effect means.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel effect in which the effect mode executed by the effect means is changed when the game ball enters the inside of the effect means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machines G1 to G11, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communication state by the movable means, it is determined whether it is the release timing for releasing the communication state. The movable means has a determination means, and when the determination means determines that the release timing is reached, the release determination means determines that the release condition is satisfied. The gaming machine G12 is characterized in that at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to release the communication state.

According to the game machine G12, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G1 to G11, the following effects are played. That is, after at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is moved to the communicative state by the movable means, the determination means determines whether it is the release timing for releasing the communicative state. When the release timing is determined by the determination means, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is movable based on the determination that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination means. It is moved by means and the communication state is released.

As a result, even if the release timing is reached, the communication state can be maintained until the release condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the game ball advances to the first flow path immediately before the release timing, the game is played. There is an effect that the sphere can be suitably flowed down.

In the game machine G12, the release determination means determines that the release condition is satisfied based on the elapse of a specific period after the determination means determines that the release timing is reached. The game machine G13.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effect of the game machine G12, it is determined that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination means based on the elapse of a specific period after the determination means determines that the release timing is reached. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the first passage can be reliably discharged from the first passage and the second passage during a specific period until it is determined that the release condition is satisfied by the release determination means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the game ball can be suitably flowed down.

In the game machine G13, the specific period is equal to or longer than a period in which the game ball that has entered the first flow path is discharged.

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effect of the game machine G13, the specific period is composed of a period equal to or longer than the period in which the game ball that has entered the second flow path is discharged, so that it is determined that the release timing is reached. There is an effect that the game ball that has entered the first flow path immediately before the ball can be more reliably discharged while the communication state is maintained.

<Characteristic H group> (Control target is variable depending on operating conditions (LED control of pocket))
It is possible to change the position of the movable body in which a plurality of decorative portions are arranged, the movable means for moving the movable body, and the decorative portion arranged on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body. A variable means, an actuating body capable of following the movable body and having a plurality of actuating portions arranged on the actuating body, which is smaller than the decorative portion, and the plurality of actuating portions arranged on the actuating body are predetermined. The operation control means that can be operated for each number, the determining means for determining a specific decorative portion from the plurality of decorative portions, and the position corresponding to the specific decorative portion determined by the determining means. The gaming machine H1 includes a discriminating means for discriminating the operating portion, and the operation controlling means operates the operating portion based on the discriminating information by the discriminating means.

Here, there is known a game machine that executes a hobby effect by using a plurality of effect members such as various accessories and display means. Some of such game machines can perform a wide variety of entertainment effects by operating a plurality of effect members in one effect. However, in such a conventional game machine, it may be difficult to perform a unified production by using different production members, so that it may not be possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the player. was there. Further, in some conventional game machines, the effect members composed of liquid crystal display devices provided on the left and right sides of the game board can be slid and moved in directions close to and away from each other. In this conventional game machine, the display mode displayed on the display screen of each production member is changed according to the distance between the left and right production members to improve the interest (for example, special feature). Open 2014-239965). However, in such a conventional game machine, the two production members are merely operated symmetrically with each other. Therefore, when the number of the effect member is increased and the symmetrical operation is impossible, there is a possibility that the operation of the effect member cannot be set appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, a plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The position of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is changed by the variable means according to the movement of the movable body. The operating body moves following the moving body. A plurality of operating portions, which are smaller than the decorative portions, are arranged in the operating body, and the plurality of operating portions are respectively actuated by a predetermined number by the actuation control means. A specific decorative portion is determined by the determining means from the plurality of decorative portions, and the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion determined by the determining means is determined by the determining means. Then, the operation unit is operated by the operation control means based on the determination information by the determination means.

As a result, the operating portion corresponding to the arrangement of the decorative portion can be operated, so that the decorative portion and the operating portion can perform a unified operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine H1, the operating body is fixed to the movable body.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, since the operating body is fixed to the movable body, a unified operation is realized by the decorative part of the movable body and the operating part of the operating pair. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the operation control means is the actuating portion determined by the discriminating means while the specific decorative portion moves from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position. The gaming machine H3, which is characterized in that the above is executed.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, it is determined by the discriminating means while the specific decorative portion moves from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position. Since the actuating portion is actuated by the actuation control means, it is possible to control the actuating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion to be actuated at least after the second position. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a unified operation between the decorative portion and the operating portion, there is an effect that the operations of the decorative portions and the operating portions, which are different in number from each other, can be preferably set.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, the position discriminating means capable of discriminating the positions of the plurality of decorative portions is provided, and the discriminating means is based on the position discriminating information determined by the position discriminating means. The gaming machine H4, which determines the operating portion at a position corresponding to the specific decorative portion.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines H1 to H3, the following effects are played. That is, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means. Then, based on the position determination information determined by the position determination means, the operating portion at the position corresponding to the specific decorative portion is determined by the determination means.

As a result, since the operating portion can be operated corresponding to the positions of the plurality of decorative portions, there is an effect that the decorative portion and the operating portion can perform a unified operation.

In the game machine H4, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions on the movable body, and each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, among the plurality of projecting pieces, It has a detecting means capable of detecting the one or a plurality of protruding pieces set corresponding to each of the movable positions, and the position determining means has the plurality of detecting means based on the detection result of the detecting means. The gaming machine H5, which is characterized in that the position of the decorative portion of the above is determined.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H4, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of projecting pieces are arranged at predetermined positions of the movable body. Each time the movable body moves to a plurality of predetermined movable positions, one or a plurality of protruding pieces set corresponding to the respective movable positions are detected by the detection means among the plurality of protruding pieces, and the detection thereof is performed. Based on the detection result by the means, the position determination means determines the positions of the plurality of decorative portions.

As a result, the arrangement of the decorative portion can be determined by mechanically detecting the protruding piece by the detecting means, so that there is an effect that the determination can be performed more accurately.

In the game machine H5, different identification information is preset in each of the plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. The position determining means has an identification information determining means for determining the identification information of the decorative portion located at a predetermined predetermined position based on the detection result of the detecting means, and is determined by the identification information determining means. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the positions of the remaining decorative portions are determined based on the identification information.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H5, the following effects are played. That is, different identification information is preset in each of the plurality of decorative portions, and the decorative portions corresponding to the identification information are arranged on the movable body in a predetermined order. Further, in the position determination means, the identification information of the decorative portion located at a predetermined predetermined position is determined by the identification information determination means based on the detection result of the detection means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means. The position of the remaining decorative portion is determined based on.

As a result, the positions of all the decorative portions can be determined only by determining the identification information of the predetermined position. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide only the detection means for detecting the decorative portion arranged at the predetermined position. The number of means can be reduced. Therefore, since the number of parts can be reduced, there is an effect that the cost price of the game machine can be reduced.

In the game machine H4, the movable means moves the movable body in a predetermined movable pattern, and the position information storage in which the position information of the plurality of decorative portions is stored corresponding to the movable pattern. The position determination means determines the positions of the plurality of decorative portions from the position information stored in the position information storage means based on the information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved. A game machine H7 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H4, the following effects are played. That is, the movable body is moved by the movable means in a predetermined movable pattern. The position information of the plurality of decorative portions is stored in the position information storage means corresponding to the movable pattern. Based on the information of the movable pattern in which the movable body is moved, the positions of the plurality of decorative portions are determined by the position determining means from the position information stored in the position information storage means.

As a result, the position of the decorative portion can be determined by a simple control of simply reading out the position information stored in the position information storage means, so that the processing load when determining the position of the decorative portion can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a detection means such as a sensor, the number of parts of the game machine can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost price of the game machine can be reduced.

In any of the game machines H1 to H7, the movable body is arranged on the front side of the operating body, and the operating portion is composed of light emitting means that emits light to the decorative portion located on the front side. The gaming machine H8, which is characterized in that it is.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H7, the movable body is arranged on the front side of the operating body, and the operating portion emits light to the decorative portion located on the front side. Since it is composed of means, it is possible to give a specific decorative portion a shining appearance by the operating portion. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific decorative portion can be made to stand out.

In any of the game machines H1 to H8, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the movable pattern is a predetermined rotation pattern for rotating the movable body. A game machine H9 characterized by.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H8, the movable body is rotated by the movable means based on a predetermined rotation pattern defined as a movable pattern. While rotating, the actuating portion corresponding to a specific decorative portion can be actuated. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the rotation operation can be improved.

<Feature I group> (Pocket position control)
In a gaming machine having a movable body that can be moved within a predetermined movable range, a movable means that moves the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means that controls the movable means, the movable body is The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions, and the game machine has the plurality of detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of predetermined predetermined positions. Among them, a detection means capable of detecting one or more of the detection units composed of a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position, and a predetermined number of the detection units detected by the detection means. In this case, the position is based on the detection result detected by the detection means on the condition that the detection unit detected by the detection means is constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined amount. A game machine I1 characterized by having a discriminating means for discriminating information.

Here, a game machine capable of performing a movable effect using a movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate effect operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means by using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when an erroneous detection occurs by the detecting means, there is a risk that the movable position of the movable means may be erroneously recognized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions are provided on the movable body. When the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions, one or more detection units composed of a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position among the plurality of detection units are detected by the detection means. Will be done. When a predetermined number of detection units are detected by the detection means, the detection means detects the movable body on the condition that the detection units detected by the detection means are constant while the movable body is moved by a predetermined predetermined amount. The position information is discriminated by the discriminating means based on the detection result.

As a result, the detection unit can be discriminated more reliably, so that there is an effect that the position information of the movable means can be accurately discriminated.

In the game machine I1, the movable body is moved to a determination means for determining a specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions and the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. The gaming machine I2 is characterized by having a notification means for executing a notification process indicating that the movable body is at the specific predetermined position when the determination means determines that the movable body is.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the following effects are played. That is, a specific predetermined position is determined from a plurality of predetermined positions by the determination means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. When the determining means determines that the movable body is moved to a specific predetermined position determined by the determining means, the notification process executes a notification process indicating that the movable body is in a specific predetermined position.

This has the effect of making the player clearly recognize that the movable body has reached a specific predetermined position.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the game machine is characterized in that the detection means are arranged so that the multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of the detection means is a number larger than the plurality of predetermined positions. I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, the detection means are arranged so that the multiplier of 2 with respect to the number of detection means is a number larger than a plurality of predetermined positions. The combination of the presence or absence of the detection unit at the position where the detection means is arranged can be made different at all the predetermined positions. That is, since the combination of the detection results by the detection means and each predetermined position can be made to have a one-to-one correspondence, there is an effect that the position of the movable means can be more accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the movable body has a plurality of decorative portions arranged, and the decorative portions are respectively arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. A game machine I4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I3, the decorative portions are arranged on the movable body corresponding to a plurality of predetermined positions, so that the movable body has a decorated appearance. can do. Therefore, since the movable body can be focused on, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In any of the game machines I1 to I4, the movable means rotates the movable body, and the plurality of predetermined positions are positions in which the movable body is rotated by a predetermined angle. Characteristic gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines I1 to I4, the following effects are played. That is, the movable body is rotated by the movable means. A plurality of predetermined positions are arranged at positions where the movable body is rotated at predetermined angles.

As a result, when the movable body is rotating, the arrangement of the movable body can be determined for each predetermined angle, so that there is an effect that the rotation operation can be executed more accurately.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the determination means for determining the specific predetermined position from the plurality of predetermined positions based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and the specific predetermined position determined by the determination means. When the determination means determines that the movable body is movable, the determination is made based on the notification means that executes the notification process indicating that the movable body is in the specific predetermined position and the establishment of the determination condition. The determination means includes a determination means for executing the above, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result. The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines I1 to I5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, the determining means determines a specific predetermined position from a plurality of predetermined positions, and the determining means determines that the movable body is moved to the specific predetermined position determined by the determining means. When this is done, the notification process is executed by the notification means to indicate that the movable body is in a specific predetermined position. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination means executes the determination, and based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting means. Further, a specific predetermined position is determined by the determination means based on the determination result of the determination means.

As a result, a specific predetermined position according to the determination result of the determination means can be notified by the notification process, so that there is an effect that the determination result by the determination means can be clearly understood by the player.

The game machine I6 has a selection means for selecting the predetermined position among the plurality of predetermined positions, which indicates that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result when the movable body is stopped. When the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, the determination means determines the specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means, and the determination result of the determination means is the said. The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that the specific predetermined position is determined from other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means when the determination result is other than the specific determination result.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I6, the following effects are played. That is, among the plurality of predetermined positions, the selection means selects a predetermined position indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result when the movable body stops. When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the determination means determines a specific predetermined position from the predetermined position selected by the selection means. When the determination result by the determination means is other than the specific determination result, the determination means determines a specific predetermined position from other than the predetermined position selected by the selection means.

As a result, it can be expected that the predetermined position selected by the selection means is notified as a specific predetermined position, so that the movement of the movable body can be more noticeable. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine I7, the movable body is one in which a plurality of the decorative portions are arranged corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions, and the notification means can move the movable body to the specific predetermined position. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the notification member is moved with respect to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position to notify the player based on the above.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I7, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body corresponding to the plurality of predetermined positions. Further, based on the movement of the movable body to a specific predetermined position, the notification means is controlled to move the notification member to the decorative portion corresponding to the specific predetermined position to notify the player.

As a result, the player can pay attention to the movement of the movable body and the movement of the notification member. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Next pocket control)
A movable body that is movable within a predetermined movable range and has a plurality of decorative portions arranged at different positions, a movable means for moving the movable body within the movable range, and an effect information determining means for determining predetermined effect information. And, based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, the movable means is movable to move a specific decorative part among the plurality of decorative parts of the movable body to a predetermined effect position. In a gaming machine having a control means, when the storage means for storing the arrangement information of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body and the movable body are moved by the movable means, the effect position is set to the effect position. Based on the discriminating means for discriminating the decorative portion and the discriminating result by the discriminating means, the decorative portion that is moved to the effect position after the decorative portion determined by the discriminating means is used as the storage means. The gaming machine J1 having an identification means for identifying from the stored arrangement information.

Here, a game machine capable of performing a movable effect using a movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate effect operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means by using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the arrangement of the movable means cannot be accurately specified until the arrangement of the movable means is detected by the sensor, the degree of freedom of the effect operation may be reduced. .. That is, there is a problem that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, the arrangement information of the decorative portion arranged on the movable body is stored in the storage means. When the movable body is moved by the movable means, the decorative portion in the effect position is determined by the discriminating means, and based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means, the decorative portion determined by the discriminating means is placed in the effect position after the decorative portion. The movable decorative portion is identified by the identification means from the arrangement information stored in the storage means.

As a result, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative portion is arranged at the effect position before the specific decorative portion is arranged at the effect position, so that the effect operation based on the effect information can be performed. The degree of freedom can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the plurality of decorative parts are set with identification information for identifying each of the decorative parts, and the specific decorative part determined by the effect determining means is the specific identification information. A game machine J2 characterized in that is set.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the following effects are played. That is, identification information for identifying each decorative portion is set in the plurality of decorative portions. Specific identification information is set in a specific decorative portion determined by the effect determining means.

As a result, when specific identification information is set for a plurality of decorative parts, one of the specific decorative parts may be moved to the effect position, so that the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine J1 or J2, when the specific decorative portion is moved to the effect position, the specific decorative portion is notified to the specific decorative portion that the specific decorative portion is determined by the effect information determining means. The game machine J3 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying the player by moving the player.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by either the game machine J1 or J2, when a specific decorative part is moved to the effect position, the notification member is moved to the specific decorative part to be specific. Since the player is notified by the notification means that it is a decorative member, the player can pay attention to the operation of the notification member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, since it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative member is arranged at the effect position before the specific decorative member is arranged at the effect position, it is possible to identify before the decorative member is arranged at the effect position. In addition, the notification member can be started to move to a specific decorative member. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification member can be moved to a specific decorative member more reliably.

In the game machine J3, when the notification means has a sphere configured as a sphere as the notification member, the holding means capable of holding the sphere at the holding position, and the holding of the sphere by the holding means are released. In addition, a standby rocking path capable of swinging the sphere at a position where it can be moved to the effect position and waiting for a predetermined period of time, and a standby rocking path of the sphere from the standby rocking path to the effect position. The gaming machine J4 is characterized by having at least a variable means for changing the traveling direction.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, in the notification means, the notification member is composed of a pair of spherical spheres, and the spheres are held at the holding position by the holding means. When the holding of the sphere by the holding means is released, the sphere is oscillated at a position where it can be moved to the effect position on the standby oscillating path, and the sphere is waited for a predetermined time. The traveling direction of the sphere is changed by the variable means from the standby rocking path to the effect position.

As a result, the player can pay attention to the timing at which the traveling direction of the sphere is changed from the standby rocking path to the effect position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine J4, the notification means has a variable control means for varying the variable means, and the variable control means determines a timing for changing the variable means based on the identification result by the identification means. A game machine J5 characterized by being variable.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4, the following effects are played. That is, in the notification means, the variable means is changed by the variable control means. The timing for varying the variable means is determined and variable by the variable control means based on the identification result by the identifying means.

As a result, it is possible to determine the timing at which the variable means is changed before the specific decorative portion is changed to the effect position. Therefore, the movement time for the sphere to move from the variable means to the effect position is taken into consideration, and a specific There is an effect that the sphere can be reliably moved to the effect position while the decorative portion is arranged at the effect position.

In any of the game machines J1 to J5, the movable body has detection units arranged at a plurality of positions, and it is possible to detect the detection units arranged at a predetermined number of predetermined positions. A game characterized in that the discriminating means has a possible detecting means, and the discriminating means discriminates the decorative portion located at the effect position based on the combination of the detecting portions detected by the detecting means. Machine J6.

According to the game machine J6, in any of the game machines J1 to J5, detection units are arranged at a plurality of positions of the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means capable of detecting the detection unit are arranged at predetermined positions. Based on the combination of the detection units detected by the detection means, the decoration unit located at the effect position is determined by the determination means.

As a result, the detection unit can be mechanically detected by the detection means, so that there is an effect that the decorative portion arranged at the effect position can be determined more accurately.

In any of the game machines J1 to J6, the identification means discriminates the type of the decorative portion that is moved to the effect position next to the decorative portion determined by the discriminating means. Game machine J7 to play.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects of the game machines J1 to J6, the type of the decorative part that is moved to the effect position next to the decorative part determined by the discriminating means is identified by the discriminating means, so that it is specific. At the stage when the decorative portion in front of the decorative portion is arranged at the effect position, it is possible to identify in advance that the specific decorative portion is arranged at the effect position. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of the production operation based on the production information can be increased, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Identifies the pocket based on the output of multiple steps)
A movable body having a plurality of detection units at a predetermined position, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the movable body moved by the movable means, a predetermined of the plurality of detection units at a predetermined detection position. A detection means capable of simultaneously detecting the detection units arranged in a range over a predetermined period, a discrimination means for discriminating the detection result by the detection means a plurality of times in a predetermined period, and the plurality of times by the discriminating means. The gaming machine K1 is characterized by having an identification means for identifying the determination result of the above and identifying the identification result when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied as a normal determination result.

Here, a game machine capable of performing a movable effect using a movable means such as an accessory is known. In this conventional game machine, an accurate effect operation is realized by detecting the arrangement of the movable means by using a detection means such as a sensor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213755). However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when an erroneous detection occurs by the detecting means, there is a problem that the movable position of the movable means is erroneously recognized and the movable means cannot be controlled appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, a movable body provided with a plurality of detection units at a predetermined position is moved by the movable means. With respect to the movable body moved by the movable means, the detection units arranged in the predetermined range among the plurality of detection units at the predetermined detection positions are simultaneously detected by the detection means over a predetermined period. The detection result by the detection means is discriminated a plurality of times in a predetermined period by the discriminating means, and among the multiple discriminant results by the discriminating means, the discriminant result satisfying a predetermined predetermined condition is identified as a regular discriminant result by the discriminating means. Will be done.

As a result, when detecting the detection unit of the movable body, the detection can be performed based on the determination result satisfying the predetermined conditions, so that the detection unit can be detected accurately. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable body can be suitably controlled.

In the game machine K1, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body, and the detection means are configured by a predetermined number and are arranged corresponding to the arrangement interval of the decorative portions. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the unit is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decorative portion among the plurality of decorative portions.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of different decorative portions are arranged on the movable body. A predetermined number of detection means are arranged corresponding to the arrangement interval of the decorative portion. Among the plurality of decorative parts, the detection part is arranged corresponding to the position of a specific decorative part.

As a result, the detection unit can be detected each time the movable body moves at the arrangement interval of the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the detection unit can be periodically detected while the movable body is moving.

In the game machine K2, the plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals, and the detection unit is a plurality of decorations in which the plurality of decorative portions are divided into units corresponding to the predetermined number. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it is arranged in the decorative portion so that the portions do not have the same arrangement relationship.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of decorative portions are arranged on the movable body at predetermined intervals. The detection unit is arranged so that the plurality of decorative parts are not arranged in the same arrangement with respect to the plurality of decorative parts divided into units corresponding to a predetermined number.

As a result, the arrangement of the detection unit detected by the detection means and the arrangement of the movable body can be made one-to-one, so that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined from the detection result by the detection means. is there.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, the detection means detects the detection unit in a predetermined order based on the movable body being moved by a predetermined movable amount. The game machine K4.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, the detection unit detects by the detection means in a predetermined order based on the fact that the movable body is moved by a predetermined movable amount. Therefore, there is an effect that the arrangement of the movable body can be accurately determined based on the order in which the detection unit is detected.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, when the discriminating means includes the same discriminating results in a predetermined ratio or more in the plurality of discriminating results by the discriminating means. The gaming machine K5, characterized in that the same discrimination result is identified as a regular discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the discrimination results of a plurality of times by the discrimination means include the same discrimination results of each other in a predetermined specific ratio or more. In this case, the same discrimination result is identified as a normal discrimination result by the discrimination means, so even if a part of the discrimination results of a plurality of times becomes an erroneous discrimination result due to the influence of noise or the like, It is possible to prevent an erroneous discrimination result from being identified as a normal discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more accurate determination can be performed.

In the game machine K5, when the identification means identifies that the same discrimination results included in the plurality of discrimination results by the discrimination means are less than a predetermined specific ratio, the plurality of discrimination results. When the avoidance means for avoiding the identification of the normal discrimination result from the discrimination results of the times and the avoidance means for identifying the normal discrimination result are avoided, the detection unit is said to be the detection unit. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a detection control means for controlling an additional detection over a predetermined period of time.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of the game machine K5, the following effects are played. That is, when it is identified that the same discrimination results included in the multiple discrimination results by the discrimination means are less than a predetermined specific ratio, the normal discrimination is made from the multiple discrimination results. The identification of the result is avoided by the workaround. Then, when it is avoided that the avoidance means identifies the normal determination result, the detection control means controls the detection unit so that the detection unit is additionally detected over a predetermined period.

As a result, the normal discrimination result can be identified again by the identification means based on the additional detection result by the detection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the normal discrimination result can be discriminated more reliably.

<Characteristic L group> (Control to drop the ball into the target pocket)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification units are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and the identification unit that is moved to a predetermined effect position when the movable body is moved by the movable means. When the discriminating means for discriminating information, the holding means capable of holding the effect body used for the predetermined effect at least until the predetermined effect is started, and the holding means of the effect body by the holding means are released. It is possible to detect a swinging means capable of swinging the effect body at a position where the effect body can be moved to the effect position and a swing state of the effect body swinging by the swing means. A detection means, a determination means for determining the identification unit for moving the effect body from the plurality of identification units based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a detection means for determining the swing state of the effect body. It is characterized by having a moving means for moving the effect body to the identifying unit determined by the determining means based on the discrimination result by the determining means when it is detected to be in a moving state. The game machine L1.

Here, a game machine provided with a plurality of flow paths is known. Among such conventional game machines, there are some that are advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the flow path through which the sphere such as the game ball travels. Further, a swing passage capable of swinging the sphere is provided on the upstream side of the branch position of each flow path, and the player can swing the sphere while the sphere swings in the swing passage shape. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-179166), there are some that can increase the expectation that the sphere will flow down into a flow path that is advantageous to the sphere. However, in such a conventional game machine, since the mode of the swinging motion changes depending on the momentum when the sphere enters the swinging passage, the swinging motion is performed before the player's expectation is sufficiently increased. In some cases, the sphere flowed down from the flow path to one of the flow paths. Therefore, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, a plurality of different identification portions are arranged on the movable body, and the movable body is moved by the movable means. The movable body is moved by the movable means, and the information of the identification unit that is moved to a predetermined effect position is discriminated by the discriminating means. The effect body used for the predetermined effect is held by the holding means at least until the predetermined effect is started, and when the holding of the effect body by the holding means is released, the effect body can be moved to the effect position. The effect body is oscillated by the oscillating means at various positions. The oscillating state of the effect body oscillated by the oscillating means is detected by the detecting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the identification unit for moving the effect body is determined by the determination means from the plurality of identification units. When the detecting means detects that the rocking state of the effect body is a predetermined rocking state, the effect body is moved to the identification unit determined by the moving means as the determining means based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means. To.

As a result, in each predetermined effect, the effect body can be moved to the identification unit after being in a predetermined swing state, so that the operation quality of the effect body in the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in swinging motion can be improved.

In the game machine L1, the effect body is composed of a sphere, and the swing means has a swing path capable of swinging the effect body. L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect body is composed of a sphere. The swinging means is provided with a swing path capable of swinging the effect body.

As a result, the effect body can be swung by rolling back and forth on the swing path, so that the effect body can be swung simply by giving the initial velocity in the swing path direction. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the effector with a special configuration for swinging, which has the effect of reducing the number of parts.

In the game machine L2, the detecting means includes an effect body detecting means for detecting the effect body swinging on the rocking path at a predetermined position, and the effect body detecting means, the swing width of the effect body is equal to or less than a predetermined width. The gaming machine L3 is characterized by having a swing width detecting means for determining whether or not the device is.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L2, the following effects are played. That is, in the detecting means, the effect body swinging on the swing path is detected at a predetermined position by the effect body detecting means, and the effect body detecting means swings whether or not the swing width of the effect body is equal to or less than the predetermined width. It is determined by the width detecting means.

As a result, in each predetermined effect, the effect body can be moved to the effect position after the swing width of the rocking body becomes equal to or less than the predetermined width. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the movement of the effector.

In either the game machine L2 or L3, the moving means is composed of a part of the swing path, and is formed in a swing groove for swinging the effect body and in front of the swing groove. The rocking piece in which at least a flow groove for allowing the effect body to flow down to the effect position is formed, and the rocking piece is communicated with the rocking groove and the rocking path from the first position. The gaming machine L4 is characterized by having a swing piece moving means for moving the flow groove to a second position arranged on the swing path.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect played by either the game machine L2 or L3, the following effects are played. That is, in the moving means, a swing groove for swinging the effect body, which is composed of a part of the swing path, and a swing groove formed in front of the swing groove to allow the effect body to flow down to the effect position. A swing piece is provided in which at least a flow groove is formed. The oscillating piece moving means moves the oscillating piece from the first position where the oscillating groove and the oscillating path communicate with each other to the second position where the flow-down groove is arranged on the oscillating path.

As a result, the effect body can be caused to flow down from the flow groove to the effect position by simply moving the swing piece moving means to the second position. It has the effect of being able to be simplified.

In the game machine L2 or L3, the moving means includes a swing piece formed of a part of the swing path and a swing piece tilting means for tilting the swing piece in the direction of the effect position. A game machine L5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L2 or L3, the following effects are played. That is, in the moving means, a swinging piece formed of a part of the swinging path is provided, and the swinging piece is tilted by the swinging piece tilting means in the direction of the effect position.

As a result, the effect body can be moved to the effect position simply by dropping the effect body from the inclined rocking piece, so that the configuration for moving the effect body to the effect position can be simplified. There is an effect.

<Characteristic M group> (Roulette and dark zone)
A plurality of discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. When the discriminating body in which different discriminating parts are arranged, the determining means for determining the specific discriminating unit among the discriminating parts in the discriminating body, and the discriminating result by the discriminating means are the specific discriminating results. Based on the establishment of the specific condition and the notification state setting means for setting the specific identification unit in the notification state, the identification unit of the identification body executes a specific effect of notifying the player of the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The determination unit has a specific effect executing means, and the determination unit divides the discriminator into a plurality of regions, and among the regions, a high determination region having a high ratio of being determined by the specific identification unit and the identification. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the specific identification unit is determined so that a low determination region having a low determination ratio is formed in the identification unit.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a hit or the like is determined, and the determination result is obtained by arranging and rotating a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side, and stopping at a predetermined position. It is notified by the combination of. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped together is executed. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). In this case, the player plays the game with the expectation that the same symbols will stop in a predetermined number, but the number of combinations of the winning symbols is arranged for the rotating rotating body. Since it is a type of game and is always constant, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets bored at an early stage.

According to the game machine M1, a plurality of different identification units are arranged, and among the identification units, when the identification unit determined as the specific identification unit is in the notification state, the player is given a privilege, so that all the identification units are identified. The unit may be a specific identification unit, and the degree of expectation can be varied by the identification unit determined by the specific identification unit. Further, the discriminator is divided into a plurality of regions, and a specific region is formed so that a high determination region having a high rate of determination by a specific identification unit and a low determination region having a low rate of determination by a specific identification unit are formed. Since the identification unit is determined, the ratio of the specific identification unit can be changed depending on the region of the identification body, and the degree of expectation for the specific identification unit can be changed in the identification body. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the player, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The game machine M1 has a movable means for moving the identification body, and the notification state setting means moves the identification body by the movable means and moves the identification body to the specific identification unit at a predetermined position. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the notification state is set by stopping the determined identification unit.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the discriminating body is moved to be in a notification state in which a specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined predetermined position, so that the discrimination result is obtained. Since the player is notified of the specific determination result, the player can be interested in the position at which the discriminator is stopped, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine M2, the effect body, the moving means capable of moving the effect body to the predetermined position, and the effect body are moved to the predetermined position by the moving means at the timing when the discriminating body stops. The gaming machine M3, characterized in that it has a movement control means for moving the body to the body.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, the effect body is moved to a predetermined position according to the stop timing of the identification body, so that the identification unit stopped at the predetermined position can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to notify.

In the game machine M3, the effect body has a rotating portion, and when the holding means capable of holding the effect body and the holding by the holding means are released, the effect body is shaken by the rotating portion. The gaming machine M4 having a movable swing path, and the moving means is for moving the effect body from the swing path to the predetermined position.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, after the effect body swings on the swing path by the rotating portion, the effect body is moved to a predetermined position by the moving means, so that the effect body can be identified. By making the player interested in moving to the unit, there is an effect that the player can recognize the identification unit stopped at a predetermined position in an easy-to-understand manner.

The rotating portion may be a sphere, a member having a cylindrical shape, an arc shape, or the like.

In any of the game machines M1 to M4, when the determination result is not a specific determination result, the notification state setting means is assigned to the specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit. The gaming machine M5, characterized in that the identification unit that has not been determined is set to the notification state.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M1 to M4, if it is not a specific discrimination result, it is determined to be a specific identification unit located next to the specific identification unit. Since the non-identifying unit is in the notification state, it is possible to make the player think that the specific identification unit is in the notification state soon, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic N group> (Control to stabilize the swing width of the sphere)
An effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect, an effect body used in a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and a swinging means capable of swinging the effect within a predetermined range. When the effect body is rocked by the swing means, the swing force applied to the effect body is adjusted based on the discriminating means for discriminating the swing state and the discrimination result by the discriminating means. A game machine N1 characterized by having an adjusting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, and the game is played at the starting winning opening that triggers the start of one of the winning / failing judgments. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain a large number of prize balls and the like. In such a game machine, a flow path is formed that facilitates winning into a winning opening such as a starting winning opening, and the game ball that has entered the flow path falls from directly above the starting winning opening. You will be guided to do so. Furthermore, even for a game ball that flows down a flow path that facilitates winning, the inclination angle of the flow path is changed so that the ease of entering the starting winning opening changes, and the rolling speed of the game ball varies. There has been proposed a game machine configured so that the game is not monotonous by being configured so as to appear (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-65977). Further, there has been a demand for a game machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving the interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the game machine N1, the swinging force applied to the effector is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the swinging state of the effector determined by the discriminating means, so that the player can improve the interest of the player. There is an effect that the effect body can be swung in the moving state, the trouble that the game becomes monotonous can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The effect body is rotatably supported by a support (thin wire such as thread, piano wire, thin shaft member, etc.) and swings, or swings from the upper part of a swing path such as an arc shape. It is conceivable that it will be rocked by rolling or sliding on the road. Here, when the adjusting means is swung by the support, it is conceivable to apply a force to the effect body or a force to the support, and when the adjusting means is swung by the swing path. It is conceivable to change the inclination of the swing path or to apply an external force to the effect body.

In the game machine N1, the discriminating means discriminates at least the swing width of the effect body, and the adjusting means determines that the swing width is equal to or less than a predetermined swing width by the discriminating means. In addition, the gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it increases the swinging force with respect to the effect body.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the swing width is determined by the discriminating means, and when the swing width is equal to or less than the predetermined swing width, the swing force with respect to the effect body is increased. Therefore, the swinging state of the effector is continued for a long time, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In the game machine N1 or N2, when the adjusting means increases the swinging force with respect to the effect body, it is determined that the discrimination result by the discriminating means is larger than the predetermined swing width. The gaming machine N3, characterized in that the increase in the swinging force with respect to the effect body is stopped.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine N1 or N2, the increase in the swing force by the adjusting means is also stopped based on the swing width of the effect body becoming larger than the predetermined swing width. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the swing width of the effect body from becoming excessively large, the swing width can be adjusted within a predetermined range, and there is an effect that a stable effect can be provided to the player.

In any of the game machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effect body so that the potential energy with respect to the effect body becomes large.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N1 to N3, the adjusting means moves the position of the effect body so that the potential energy with respect to the effect body becomes large, so that the potential energy is used as the kinetic energy. By making it variable, there is an effect that the swing width of the effect body can be increased.

In any of the game machines N1 to N4, the effect body has a rotating portion capable of rotating and rolling, and in the swinging means, the rotating portion repeatedly changes the rotation direction. A game machine N5 having a swing path capable of rotating.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machines N1 to N4, the rotating portion of the effect body swings by rolling the swing path, so that the effect body can be swung with a simple configuration. It has the effect of being able to.

The game machine N6 is characterized in that the swing path is formed in an arc shape in the game machine N5.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect of the game machine N5, since the swing path is formed in an arc shape, there is an effect that the rotating portion of the effect body can easily swing.

In the game machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means changes the inclination of the swing path in the direction in which the effect body swings to increase the swing force.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect of the game machine N5 or N6, the adjusting means increases the swing force by varying the inclination of the swing path, so that the player naturally swings the effect body. It has the effect of making it look like it is swinging.

In any of the game machines N1 to N7, the swinging means holds a holding means capable of holding the effect body at a position higher than the lowermost position when the effect body is rocked, and holding the holding means. The gaming machine N8, which comprises a releasing means capable of releasing.

According to the game machine N8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines N1 to N7, the swinging means is held at a position higher than the lowermost position when the swinging means is rocked by the holding means, and the swinging means is held at a position higher than the lowermost position. Since the holding is released, there is an effect that the swinging of the effect body can be started by using the potential energy.

In the game machine N8, the holding means holds the effect body at a position where the effect body can be guided to the swing path when the holding of the effect body is released by the release means. A game machine N9 characterized by this.

According to the game machine N9, in addition to the effect of the game machine N8, when the holding is released by the holding means, the effector is guided to the swing path, so that the driving force is applied to the effector by an electric machine or the like. There is an effect that the effect body can be swung smoothly by its own weight without it.

In the game machines N1 to N9, the adjusting means has a swing damping means for adjusting the swing width of the effect body to be equal to or less than the specific swing width when a specific condition is satisfied. A game machine N10 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine N10, in addition to the effects of the game machines N1 to N9, when the specific conditions are satisfied, the swing damping means of the adjusting means causes the swing width of the effect body to be equal to or less than the specific swing width. Since it is adjusted so as to be, the swing width can be intentionally changed, and by diversifying the production, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

<Characteristic O group> (Pocket position to drop is determined in advance)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of movable conditions. A determination means for determining a movable pattern for moving the movable body, which has a preset stoptable range, and a specific identification unit are stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern. In that case, the privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player and the stoptable range are set based on the establishment of a specific condition when the movable body is movable in the movable pattern. It has an identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit, and a stop control means for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means at a specific stop timing at a specific stop timing. A game machine O1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as a hit is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position is used as a determination result in advance. It is determined based on this and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped together is executed. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Since the stop position of the rotating body is determined in advance before rotation, it is not possible to perform a novel effect such as changing the combination of symbols to be stopped depending on the state of the effect, and the player has a problem that the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that I got bored early. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and by providing a novel game machine, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets bored early. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing defects.

According to the game machine O1, the movable body is moved by a movable pattern in which the movable body is set in advance, and the movable body is moved to the stoptable range determined by the identification unit determining means based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied. Since the identification unit 1 is determined from the set identification unit and the movable body is stopped by the stop control means so that the identification unit stops at the effect position, the stop position of the movable body is stopped until a specific condition is satisfied. Is not specified, and by providing the player with a real-time effect, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

The game machine O1 has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the stop control means uses the specific discriminating unit when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. A game machine O2 characterized in that it is stopped at the effect position.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the specific discriminating unit is stopped at the effect position, so that the discriminating result by the discriminating means can be obtained. There is an effect that the identification unit that stops at the effect position can notify the notification.

The game machine O3 is characterized in that the game machine O1 or O2 has a setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1 or O2, a specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting means, so which identification unit is set as the specific identification unit. It has the effect of making the player interested in the game and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine O3, the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of the game machine O3, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection, so that any identification unit of the player can be used. It can be a specific identification unit, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine O3 or O4, the game machine O5 is characterized in that the setting means sets the specific identification unit based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of the game machine O3 or O4, a specific identification unit is set by the setting means based on the determination result of the determination means. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

In any of the game machines O2 to O5, the game machine O6 is characterized in that the determination means determines the movable pattern based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O2 to O5, the movable pattern is determined by the discrimination means based on the discrimination result, so that the movable pattern can be changed according to the discrimination result. There is.

In any of the game machines O1 to O6, a notification body for indicating that the identification unit is stopped at the effect position, and a guide for guiding the notification body to the identification unit stopped at the effect position. A game machine O7 characterized by having means and means.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines O1 to O6, the notification body is guided by the guiding means to the identification unit stopped at the effect position, so that the identification unit stopped at the effect position can be displayed. It has the effect of being able to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is characterized in that a variable setting period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determination means can be changed is set. Game machine O8.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O7, the movable pattern is set with a variable period in which the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means can be changed. Therefore, the identification unit can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The game machine O8 has an operating means that can be operated by the player, and during the variable setting period, the identification unit determined by the identification determining means is variable depending on the timing at which the operating means is operated. A game machine O9 characterized by.

According to the game machine O9, in addition to the effect of the game machine O8, the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means is changed according to the timing when the player operates the operation means, so that the player can specify the identification unit. It is possible to perform a game in which the operating means is operated with the aim of stopping at the production position, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the identification unit determined by the timing operated by the player is variable, there is an effect that the identification unit corresponding to the discrimination result can be easily controlled to be stopped at the effect position.

<Characteristic P group> (Nail breakage discrimination)
In a gaming machine having a movable body that can be moved within a predetermined movable range, a movable means that moves the movable body within the movable range, and a movable control means that controls the movable means, the movable body is The game machine has a plurality of detection units arranged at a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions, and the game machine has the plurality of detection units when the movable body is moved to the plurality of predetermined predetermined positions. Among the above, based on the detection means capable of detecting one or more of the detection units composed of a predetermined combination corresponding to each predetermined position and the detection result detected by the detection means. A discriminating means for determining the movable position information of the movable body, an abnormality determining means for determining whether the detection result detected by the detecting means matches a preset abnormal condition based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and an abnormality determining means. A game machine P1 characterized by having the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as a hit is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position is used as a determination result in advance. It is determined based on this and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped together is executed. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). The stop position of the rotating body is generally a method of detecting the position of the rotating body with a plurality of sensors or the like, but when a sensor failure or the like occurs, the rotating body may be stopped at an incorrect position. It is conceivable that there is a problem that the player is erroneously notified. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting defects at an early stage.

According to the game machine P1, when the movable body is moved to a plurality of predetermined predetermined positions, one or more detection units composed of a predetermined combination for each predetermined position among the plurality of detection units. Is detected by the detection means. The movable position information of the movable body is determined from the detection result detected by the detecting means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately identify to which predetermined position the movable body has been moved by the movable position information. Further, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the abnormality determination means determines whether the detection result detected by the detection means matches the abnormality condition. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the detection means or the detection unit, the abnormality is detected at an early stage. It can be detected and has the effect of suppressing the movement of an erroneous moving body.

In the game machine P1, the movable position information storage means for storing the determined movable position information based on the determination of the movable position information by the determination means, and the detection unit at each of the plurality of predetermined positions. Has a collation data setting means in which the detection result that should be detected when normally detected by the detection means is set as collation data, and the abnormality determination means is the movable position by the determination means. Assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the movable position information previously determined by the determination means and stored in the storage means and the collation data match the abnormal condition. A game machine P2 characterized by being.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, it is determined by the abnormality determination means whether or not the movable position information determined by the previous determination means and the collation data match the abnormality condition. It is possible to constantly monitor the movable position information when the vehicle is normally moved, and there is an effect that a defect can be detected at an early stage.

In the game machine P2, the abnormality determination means determines whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information stored in the movable position information storage means. , A game machine P3 characterized in that an abnormality is determined by determining from the collation data.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, it is determined from the collation data whether the movable position information determined by the determination means matches the next movable position information of the previous movable position information. Since the abnormality is determined by the abnormality determination means, the abnormality can be determined each time the abnormality is moved to a predetermined position, and there is an effect that the abnormality can be detected earlier.

In the game machine P1, whether the abnormality determination means matches the abnormality condition based on the number of detection units based on the detection result of the detection means, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied that the movable body has moved by a predetermined amount. The gaming machine P4, which is characterized in that it determines.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, it is determined whether or not the abnormal condition is matched based on the number of detection units detected by the detection means. It is possible to detect an abnormality every time the movable body moves a predetermined amount, and there is an effect that the abnormality can be detected at an early stage.

In the game machine P4, when the movable body moves by a predetermined amount, the game machine P4 has a detection number storage means in which the number of detections of the detection unit normally detected by the detection means is stored in advance, and the abnormality determination means The gaming machine P5 is characterized in that it determines whether or not the number of the detection units detected by the detection means and the number of detections stored in the detection number storage means match.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P4, it is determined by the abnormality determination means whether or not the number matches the detection number stored in advance in the detection number storage means, so that the abnormality can be determined more accurately. There is an effect.

<Characteristic Q group> (LED lighting data is divided)
Based on a plurality of operating parts and operation data for operating the operating parts, an operating means for operating each of the operating parts and an operating pattern for operating each of the operating parts are determined based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. Based on the operation pattern determining means to be determined and the operation pattern determined by the operation pattern determining means, the acquisition means for acquiring the operation data of each of the operation units, and the operation data acquired by the acquisition means are obtained. A game machine Q1 characterized by having a setting means for dividing and setting.

Here, a game machine including a light emitting means such as an LED and a production member such as a movable means such as an accessory is known. In such a conventional game machine, a player's interest is improved by executing various production operations using a plurality of production members. Further, in this conventional game machine, the effect pattern of the effect member such as the light emission pattern of the light emitting means and the movable pattern of the movable means is stored in advance in the storage means such as ROM and executed. There is known a gaming machine that reads out an effect pattern corresponding to an effect to be performed and executes an effect operation of the corresponding effect member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-18495). However, if the number of effect members is increased, the amount of setting data for setting the effect operation increases, and there is a problem that the processing load increases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, each operating unit is operated by the operating means based on the operating data for operating the plurality of operating units. The operation pattern for operating each operating unit is determined by the operating pattern determining means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the operating data of each operating unit is acquired based on the operating pattern determined by the operating pattern determining means. Obtained by means. The operation data acquired by the acquisition means is divided and set by the setting means.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data each time the operation data is divided and set, as compared with the case where the operation data is set collectively by the setting means. That is, since the processing load for setting the operation data can be distributed, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the game machine Q1, the setting means is capable of dividing the operation data into the operation unit and setting the game machine Q2.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, the operation data is divided and set for each operation unit by the setting means, so that there is an effect that the processing load can be more finely distributed.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data is characterized in that it includes at least data that specifies an operation mode when operating the operation unit and data that specifies the operation unit that operates in the operation mode. Game machine Q3 to play.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the operation data includes data that specifies the operation mode when the operation unit is operated and data that specifies the operation unit that operates in the operation mode. And at least are included, so that different operating modes can be set for a plurality of operating portions. Therefore, since the operation mode can be diversified, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine Q3, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring the operation data in which data designating a plurality of different operation modes are associated with data designating different operation units. Machine Q4.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q3, the data for designating a plurality of different operation modes is acquired by the acquisition means, and the operation data associated with the data for designating the different operation units is acquired. , Different operation modes can be set for different operation units depending on the operation data acquired by the acquisition means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating modes of the plurality of operating portions can be further diversified.

In the game machine Q4, the setting means divides and sets the operation data for each operation unit in which the same operation mode is set.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q4, the same operation mode can be set for the operation unit at the same timing, so that the same operation mode can be reflected at the same timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the appearance quality of each operating portion can be improved immediately after the operation data is set.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the operating unit is composed of light emitting means that emits light, and the operating data is composed of data for setting a light emitting pattern by the light emitting means. A game machine Q6 characterized by.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are played. That is, the operating portion is composed of light emitting means that emits light. The operation data is composed of data for setting a light emission pattern by the light emitting means.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the light emission pattern by the light emitting means.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q6, the game machine Q7 is characterized in that the operation data is set by a setting means in a serial communication method.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q6, the operation data is set by the setting means in the serial communication method, so that the data can be set with a smaller number of wirings as compared with the parallel communication method. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the cost price of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of wirings.

<Characteristic R group> (Mission set by the player (select a combination of winning symbols) continues until the big hit)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and identification information based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. When a specific condition is satisfied in a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. A specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect to be notified is provided, and the specific effect executing means executes the privilege game by the privilege game executing means from a period in which the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that at least the specific effect is continuously executed over a period of time.

Here, an effect of notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won is executed during the normal gaming state, and an effect of notifying whether or not a privilege (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) given after the end of the jackpot is given is a privilege. A pachinko machine that is executed during a game (during a jackpot game) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-178292). In this case, since independent effects are executed according to each game state, the effect of notifying that the jackpot has been won and the effect of notifying that the privilege will be given are executed in a series of effects. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the game machine R1, a privilege advantageous to the player is given from the period in which the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed to the period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific effect for notifying that the item is to be performed is continuously executed. As a result, during the period in which the privilege game is being executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the next privilege is granted by the specific effect that is continuously executed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the specific effect continuously executed in the privilege game, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of different sub-conditions are satisfied, and the specific effect executing means is based on the determination result of the determination means being the specific determination result. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the specific effect indicating that a predetermined number of the small conditions are satisfied is executed.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R1, a specific condition is satisfied by satisfying a plurality of different subconditions, and when a predetermined number of subconditions are satisfied, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, since the player can recognize that a predetermined number of small conditions have been satisfied by the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game machine.

In the game machine R2, the specific effect executing means performs a residual specific effect indicating whether the remaining subconditions among the plurality of different subconditions are satisfied during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A game machine R3 characterized in that it is executed as the specific effect.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R2, a residual specific effect indicating whether the remaining small conditions among the plurality of different small conditions are satisfied is executed as the specific effect. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the remaining small conditions by executing the remaining specific effect, so that the player can expect the specific condition to be satisfied, and the player can expect the specific condition to be satisfied. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the game machines R1 to R3, at least a normal privilege game that is advantageous to the player and a special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal privilege game are set as the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine R4 is characterized by having a privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R1 to R3, either the normal privilege game set as the privilege game or the special privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal privilege game. It is determined by the privilege game type determination means. Therefore, since the variation of the privileged game that is advantageous to the player increases, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed (prevented).

In the game machine R4, the special privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means by executing the residual specific effect indicating that the remaining small conditions are satisfied during the privilege game. The game machine R5 characterized by being.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R4, it is shown that the special privilege game is being executed when the remaining privilege production is executed, so that the game machine is easy for the player to understand. Has the effect of being able to provide.

In the game machine R4 or R5, the special privilege game is characterized in that, after the privilege game, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is given until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R4 or R5, a special game state that is advantageous to the player is given until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the privilege game. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a more advantageous state, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

A game machine R7, wherein any one of the game machines R2 to R6 has a selection means capable of selecting the small condition by the player.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R6, the player can select a small condition by the selection means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

<Characteristic S group> (Increased roulette pocket)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. In the possessed gaming machine, when a display means displaying a plurality of different identification information and a plurality of different identification information displayed on the display means are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position, the player is informed of the display means. The identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying that the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result, and the identification information displayed on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied are dynamically generated. After being displaced to, the effect executing means for executing the effect of stopping the identification information 1 at the stop position, and when the effect is executed by the effect executing means, the determination is executed by the discriminating means. The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having a variable setting means for variably setting the identification information determined as the specific identification information by the identification information determining means depending on a state.

Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property in which a privilege game (for example, a jackpot game) is given when a predetermined character stops at a specific stop position among a plurality of characters displayed on the roulette board (for example, a jackpot game). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-73580). In this case, it is necessary to control the stop position of the roulette wheel based on the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a predetermined character is selected from a plurality of characters at a specific stop position. There is a problem that the rotation motion of the roulette becomes an unnatural movement, it is not possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. It was.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, one of a plurality of identification information displayed on the display means in the effect executed by the effect executing means according to the state in which the determination by the discriminating means is executed. However, the variable setting means changes the determination result to specific identification information for notifying that the determination result is a specific determination result (that is, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given). Thereby, the specific identification information can be changed in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the game machine S1, a predetermined period is set in advance for the effect executed by the effect executing means, and the identification information determining means is used based on the elapse of the first period of the predetermined period. The gaming machine S2, characterized in that specific identification information is determined.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine S1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect by the effect executing means is executed in a predetermined period set in advance. Specific identification information is determined by the identification information determining means based on the elapse of the first period of the predetermined period in which the effect is executed. As a result, since the specific identification information is determined when the first period elapses, the identification information can be dynamically displaced without discomfort in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

The game machine S3 is characterized in that the game machine S1 or S2 has an acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information determined by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1 or S2, the discrimination information discriminated by the discriminating means is acquired by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, so that the discriminating information is surely acquired. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the effect is not executed by the effect execution means even though the determination condition is satisfied.

In the game machine S3, a storage means that stores at least the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means until the discrimination condition is satisfied, and the discrimination condition that stores the discrimination information stored in the storage means corresponding to the discrimination information. The variable setting means has a pre-determination means for executing the determination before the determination is established, and the variable setting means variably sets the identification information based on the determination result of the pre-determination means. A game machine S4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine S3, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until at least the discrimination condition is satisfied. The discrimination information stored in the storage means is discriminated before the discrimination condition is satisfied by the pre-discrimination means, and the discrimination information is variably set based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means. As a result, the identification information can be changed before the effect based on the discriminant information for which the identification information is variable is executed. Therefore, the identification information is not uncomfortable in the effect executed by the effect execution means. Can be dynamically displaced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play.

<Characteristic T group>(Bunny's foot production)
An entry means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter through the opening of the entry means, and a closure in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state. A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable means that can change the variable member to the open state and the closed state, and a position that allows the game ball that has entered the opening to flow down so that the player can see it. The first flow path arranged in the above, the first flow path, the first position where the game ball which has entered the opening can flow down, and the second position where it is difficult to flow down. The gaming machine T1 is characterized by having a displacement means for displacement and a displacement control means for moving the displacement means to at least the first position during a period in which the variable member is in the open state.

Here, in the game machine, as an effect for improving the interest of the player, a game machine that performs an effect of moving a movable member called a production accessory on the game board is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-). No. 121464). In this case, there is a problem that the installation space such as the winning opening required for the game of the game machine is lost by providing the production accessory.

According to the game machine T1, the first flow path is arranged at a position visible to the player during the period in which the variable member is changed to the open state in which the game ball can enter the open portion of the ball entry means. However, it is changed to the first position so that the game ball that has entered the opening flows down. Further, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position. As a result, when the game ball enters the opening of the ball entry means, the first flow path is changed to the first position, so that the game ball can flow down to the opening of the ball entry means. When the game ball does not enter, the first flow path can be displaced to the first position and the second position and diverted to the production or the like. Therefore, since the first flow path can be diverted to the production, it is possible to improve the interest of the player, and further, there is an effect that the installation space on the game board can be secured.

The game machine T1 has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied. The displacement control means is a game machine that displaces the first flow path to the first position from the end of execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means until a predetermined period elapses. T2.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect played on the game machine T1, the privilege game in which the variable member is changed to the open state is executed a plurality of times until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the execution of the privilege game is completed. The first flow path is displaced to the first position until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, even though the game ball that has entered the opening of the ball entry means has not finished flowing down, the first flow path is not displaced to the second position, so that the ball enters the opening of the ball entry means. It has the effect of allowing the ball to flow down without clogging it.

The game machine T1 or T2 has an effect executing means for executing the effect, and the effect executing means controls the displacement of the first flow path as one of the effects except for the period during which the privilege game is executed. A game machine T3 characterized in that it is displaced by means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine T1 or T2, the first flow path is displaced as one of the effects except during the period when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

The game machine T3 includes a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game execution means is said to be based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. The privilege game is executed, and the effect executing means is characterized in that the first flow path is displaced by the displacement control means as one of the effects showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means. Game machine T4.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3, the following effects are played. That is, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, the privilege game is executed, and the displacement of the first flow path is executed as one of the effects showing the discrimination result. Therefore, whether or not the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result can be discriminated by the effect that the first flow path is displaced, so that the player pays attention to the effect that the first flow path is displaced. It has the effect of improving the interest of the person.

<Characteristic U group> (time-out production)
A discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result by the discriminating means being a specific discriminant result, and a predetermined condition. Is established, the state setting means for setting the special game state in which the determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and the effect is executed in a predetermined period when the special game state is set by the state setting means. Ancillary effect that executes an incidental effect accompanying the effect executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the period in which the effect is executed by the effect executing means and the effect executing means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by having an execution means.

Here, there is a pachinko machine that executes a special gaming state (for example, a probabilistic gaming state) different from the normal gaming state for a predetermined period. In such a pachinko machine, as a technique for notifying the player of the fact that the current gaming state is a special gaming state by using an effect executed in a predetermined period, an effect executed in a predetermined period. A pachinko machine has been proposed that changes the progress of an effect executed in a predetermined period when it is determined that the timing at which the game ends and the timing at which the special game state ends are different (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-). No. 173320). In this case, when the timing at which the effect executed in the predetermined period ends and the timing at which the special gaming state ends differ, control for changing the progress of the effect executed in the predetermined period is controlled. There is a problem that the processing load becomes large because it has to be performed.

According to the game machine U1, a special game state is set in which the determination condition is easily set until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the special game state is set, the effect is executed in a predetermined period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Here, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the display period of the effect ends even though the special gaming state is continued. In this case, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed by the accompanying effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the special gaming state is continued. In addition, the production is executed in a predetermined period. If a predetermined condition is not satisfied during the period in which the effect is executed, the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed. Therefore, control for changing the content of the effect executed in the predetermined period is controlled. You don't have to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the effect can be reduced.

In the game machine U1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means by the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine U2 is characterized by having at least a storage means for storing the discriminant information acquired in the above until the discriminating condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine U1, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination information is acquired when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and the acquired discrimination information is stored until the discrimination condition is satisfied. As a result, even if the discrimination condition is not satisfied at the time when the game ball enters the ball entry means and the discrimination information is acquired, the discrimination information can be stored in the storage means. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the case where the discrimination by the discrimination means is not executed even though the game ball has entered the ball entry means, so that it is possible to suppress excessive disadvantage to the player. It has the effect of being able to (prevent).

In the game machine U1 or U2, the effect executing means indicates that the effect is the specific effect based on the determination of the effect by the discriminating means during the period in which the effect is executed. The gaming machine U3, characterized in that the game is executed in the remaining period.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1 or the game machine U2, when it is determined as a specific determination result in the period for executing the effect, the specific effect is executed in the remaining period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that a specific determination result has been obtained during the period in which the effect is executed.

In any of the game machines U1 to U3, a display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means and a dynamic display period for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means. The gaming machine U4 having a determination means, and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means at a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines U1 to U3, the following effect is played. That is, the identification information based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. Then, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the elapse of the dynamic display period based on the determination by the determination means at the predetermined number of times. As a result, based on the determination result in the period in which the special gaming state is set (that is, the period in which the effect until the predetermined condition is satisfied or the period in which the accompanying effect accompanying the effect is executed). The dynamic display of the identification information is displayed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, during the period in which the special gaming state is set, it is possible to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination result, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic V group> (look-ahead during RUSH)
The discriminating condition is satisfied by using the ball-entry means on which the game ball can enter, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. Discrimination means for discriminating based on, storage means for storing the information acquired in the acquisition means until at least the discrimination condition is satisfied, and display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. And, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. The dynamic display means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic determined by the dynamic display period determining means. As the display period, the dynamic display period storage means in which at least the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period by a predetermined multiple or more are stored, and the dynamic display period. When the first dynamic display period is determined by the determining means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect at the timing when the first period elapses from the start of the first dynamic display period, and the determination. When the second dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determining means based on the determination result by the means, the second dynamic display period starts from the start. A second effect capable of executing the first effect at the timing when the first period elapses, and repeatedly executing the first effect up to a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time the first dynamic display period elapses. It has an effect executing means and a limiting means for limiting the number of times the first effect is continuously executed to less than the predetermined number when the determination result by the determination means is not the specific determination result. A game machine V1 characterized by.

Here, there has been proposed an effect (so-called pseudo-continuous notice effect) that suggests the player is expected to win a big hit by stopping and displaying a predetermined display mode a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display (for example). , JP-A-2008-161390). In order to execute this pseudo continuous advance notice effect, it is necessary to set the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation to a time during which a predetermined display mode can be stopped and displayed multiple times, and the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time. There was a problem that the number was reduced. Further, in a pachinko machine having a function (holding storage function) capable of storing the winning information of a special symbol a plurality of times, a predetermined display mode is used by using a variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the plurality of winning information stored on hold. There has also been proposed an effect (so-called continuous advance notice effect) that suggests the player is expected to win a big hit by stopping and displaying the game a plurality of times (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-207261). Since it is necessary to store a plurality of prize information of a special symbol in order to execute this continuous notice effect, it is continuous on a pachinko machine in which it is difficult to store a plurality of prize information of a special symbol or a pachinko machine that does not have a hold storage function. There was a problem that the advance notice production could not be executed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine V1, the first dynamic display period determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information and the second dynamic display period longer than a predetermined multiple of the first dynamic display period. In, the first effect is executed at the timing when the first period elapses from the start of the dynamic display period. In the second dynamic display period, after the first effect is displayed, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times at the same timing each time the first dynamic display period elapses.

As a result, the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period are executed while having different dynamic display periods from the first dynamic display period and the second dynamic display period. It is possible to match the execution timing of one effect. Therefore, it is said that the first effect is executed based on the fact that the second dynamic display period is set (that is, the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result) while increasing the variation of the dynamic display period. Since the player can be made aware of it, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the first effect is executed a predetermined number of times based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and when the determination result is not a specific determination result, the number of times the first effect is continuously executed is limited. As a result, even though it is not the second dynamic display period (that is, the discrimination result is not a specific discrimination result), the first effect is not executed a predetermined number of times, so that the gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to provide it.

The game machine V1 is characterized in that the dynamic display period determining means is configured to easily determine the first dynamic display period than the second dynamic display period.

According to the game machine V2, in addition to the effect of the game machine V1, it is easy to determine the first dynamic display period whose display period is shorter than that of the second dynamic display period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display period from becoming long. Therefore, there is an effect that the game time is not extended and the player is not bored.

In the game machine V1 or V2, the game machine V3 is characterized in that the first effect execution means executes the first effect based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period.

According to the game machine V3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine V1 or V2, the first effect is executed based on the start timing of the first dynamic display period. As a result, the first effect can be executed only when the first dynamic display period is started at a specific start timing, and the first effect displayed in the first dynamic display period can be changed to the second dynamic. It is possible to match the timing at which the first effect is displayed during the display period. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the first effect is displayed in the first dynamic display period or the first effect is displayed in the second dynamic display period. It has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines V1 to V3, the game machine V4 is characterized in that the first dynamic display period is shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect.

According to the game machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines V1 to V3, the first dynamic display period is configured to be shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the first effect a plurality of times in the first dynamic display period, and it is only necessary to control whether or not to perform the first effect in the first dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the control process for executing the first effect can be simplified in the first dynamic display period.

Further, the first dynamic display period is a period shorter than twice the effect period of the first effect, that is, the effect period of the first effect is longer than half of the first dynamic display period. As a result, even if the first dynamic display period is a short period, it is possible to sufficiently secure the effect period of the first effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the first effect.

<Characteristic W group> (Random display of decorative patterns)
The discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. The dynamic display means, the effect executing means for executing the effect, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player after the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the display means for displaying the identification information. The gaming machine W1 is characterized by having a display position determining means for determining a position to be displayed on each time the determination is executed by the determining means.

Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that notifies a player of a lottery result of a special symbol using identification information displayed on a display means (for example, JP-A-6-134105). In this case, since the display means is configured by the dot LED, there is a problem that the display position of the identification information displayed on the display means cannot be changed and the player's interest cannot be improved. ..

Further, in a pachinko machine that displays a decorative symbol that fluctuates based on a special symbol lottery as a display means, a pachinko machine that changes the display mode of the decorative symbol has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-2358336). In this case, while the special symbol is changed, the display mode of the decorative symbol can be changed to various modes to enhance the interest of the game, but the decorative symbol is also specified at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the stop display is displayed at the position, the player can easily grasp whether or not the special symbol has stopped (whether or not the change of the special symbol has ended) simply by checking the predetermined position. For example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbol variations, there is a problem that the stop display of the decorative symbols displayed by the display means reduces the effect of the series of effects.

On the other hand, according to the game machine W1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Then, each time the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means, the display position determining means determines the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed based on the discrimination result. As a result, the position where the identification information is dynamically displayed can be changed each time the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the identification information, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, by determining that the display position of the identification information is moved to a plurality of places at predetermined intervals by the display position determining means, which display position is displayed at the timing when the identification information is stopped and displayed (the timing when the special symbol is stopped). It can be difficult for the player to grasp whether the identification information is displayed on the. Therefore, for example, when executing a series of effects using a plurality of special symbols, the player can easily grasp the display content (whether or not it has stopped) of the identification information displayed by the display means. There is an effect that the effect of a series of effects can be enhanced.

In the game machine W1, the effect executing means causes the display means to display the effect mode as a part of the effect, and the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area where the effect mode is displayed. A game machine W2 characterized by being displayed.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine W1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect execution means displays the effect mode on the display means as a part of the effect. Further, the identification information is displayed in a display area smaller than the display area in which the effect mode is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content (whether or not the identification information is stopped) of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine W1, the effect executing means displays an effect mode on an effect display means different from the display means as a part of the effect, and the effect display means has a larger display area than the display means. A game machine W3 characterized in that it is composed of.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine W1, the following effects are played. That is, the effect display means is configured in a display area larger than the display means, and the effect display means displays the effect mode that is a part of the effect as a part of the effect by the effect execution means. As a result, it is possible to display the effect mode that is a part of the effect by the effect display means having a larger display area than the display means on which the identification information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and prevent the player from easily grasping the display content (whether or not the identification information is stopped) of the identification information. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines W1 to W3, the display position variable means for changing the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determining means during the dynamic display of the identification information is provided. A game machine W4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine W4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines W1 to W3, the display position of the identification information determined by the display position determining means is changed during the dynamic display of the identification information by the display position changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content (whether or not the identification information is stopped) of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines W1 to W4, the effect executing means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period during which the determination means can determine a plurality of times, and is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information is provided, and the dynamic display period determining means is specified by the determining means in a state where the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that, when the determination result of the above is determined, a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect is easily determined as a dynamic display period.

According to the game machine W5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines W1 to W4, the following effect is played. That is, the effect execution means executes the effect in a predetermined effect period during which the determination means can determine a plurality of times. The dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period of the identification information displayed on the display means. Then, the dynamic display period determining means sets a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect as the dynamic display period when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means while the effect is being executed by the effect execution means. It is set so that it is easy to determine. As a result, when a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, it is easy to determine a period equal to or longer than the remaining period of the effect executed by the effect execution means as the dynamic display period of the identification information based on the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the identification information based on the specific determination result is displayed in the middle of the effect and the effect of the effect is lowered.

In the game machine W5, the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means other than the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the effect period executed by the effect executing means is composed of a predetermined time or more of the first period.

According to the game machine W6, in addition to the effect of the game machine W5, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period to be the first period based on the determination result of the determination means other than the specific determination result, and the effect execution means executes the determination result. The production period is composed of a predetermined time or more of the first period. As a result, in the case of a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result, the number of discriminations by the discrimination means per unit time can be increased, and the discrimination efficiency can be improved.

Further, the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means is displayed on the display means during the period of the effect executed by the effect execution means, but the display position of the identification information is determined by the display position determining means. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode displayed on the effect display means, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the display content (whether or not the identification information is stopped) of the identification information. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

By selectively adopting the configuration described in any of the game machines W1 to the game machine W4, the above-mentioned effect can be further enhanced.

In the game machine W5 or W6, the game machine W5 or W6 has a state setting means for setting a special state in which the determination condition is easily satisfied until the end condition is satisfied, and the effect executing means is set with the special state by the state setting means. The gaming machine W7, characterized in that the execution of the effect is started based on the above.

According to the game machine W7, in addition to the effect of the game machine W5 or W6, a special state in which the determination means is easily established by the state setting means is set until the end condition is satisfied. The effect execution means starts execution of the effect based on the setting of the special state. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect that is executed for a predetermined period in a special state.

<Characteristic X group> (Roulette addition can be changed according to the short period of time)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and the identification information that indicates the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display means. When this is done, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, an discriminator in which a plurality of different discriminators are arranged, and a specific discriminator among the discriminators in the discriminator are determined. Based on the determination means to be performed, the special state setting means for setting the specific identification unit to a special state different from the normal state when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the establishment of the specific condition. , The specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect of notifying the player of the determination result by the identification unit of the identification body, and the specific identification unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine X1 is characterized by having an additional setting means for additionally setting and a probability variable means for varying the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine having a game property in which a privilege game (for example, a jackpot game) is given when a predetermined character stops at a specific stop position among a plurality of characters displayed on the roulette board (for example, a jackpot game). For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-73580). However, since the predetermined number of characters is not changed (added) during the execution of the roulette game, the notification mode indicating the expectation of the jackpot to the player does not change while the roulette game is in progress. , There is a risk that the player's willingness to play will decrease during the execution of the roulette game, and the player will get bored early.

On the other hand, according to the game machine X1, when the specific identification unit among the plurality of identification units arranged in the identification body has the determination result by the determination means (that is, the player). When a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted), a special state different from the normal state is set. That is, when any of the specific identification units is set to a special state different from the usual one, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is executed, a specific identification unit is additionally set. As a result, if a specific identification unit is additionally set in the specific effect, the player feels that there is a high possibility that an advantageous privilege will be given, so that there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved. ..

Further, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is changed by the probability changing means. That is, the probability that a specific identification unit is added can be changed. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed (prevented).

In the game machine X1, at least one of a first gaming state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, is set as the privilege granting means. The probability variable means sets the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied higher when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A game machine X2 characterized by being there.

According to the game machine X2, in addition to the effect of the game machine X1, the second of the first game state which is advantageous to the player and the second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state. When the game state is set, the probability that the predetermined condition is satisfied is set high. As a result, when a predetermined condition is easily satisfied, a specific identification unit is easily added. Therefore, since the player expects that the second game state is set by adding the specific identification unit, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine X1 or X2, an entry means capable of entering a game ball and an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information determined by the discrimination means based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means. X3, wherein the additional setting means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry means.

According to the game machine X3, the information determined by the discriminating means is acquired (that is, the information for granting the privilege granting means is acquired) based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the information is entered. When a game ball enters the ball means, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, whether or not a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the ball entry means, and there is an effect that the motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

In the game machine X3, the additional setting means executes a predetermined lottery when the game ball enters the ball entry means, and when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, the predetermined lottery result. A game machine X4 characterized in that it is determined that the condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X3, a predetermined lottery is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. A predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, a specific identification unit is added). Therefore, since the specific identification unit is added based on the lottery result of the predetermined lottery, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the impression that the specific identification unit is added fairly.

In the game machine X4, the game machine X5 is characterized in that the probability changing means changes the lottery probability of a lottery by the additional setting means.

According to the game machine X5, in addition to the effect of the game machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be changed by the probability changing means. Therefore, since the probability that a specific identification unit is added changes, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed (prevented).

In the game machine X4, the probability variable means sets a probability table in which the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is set for each number of balls entered.

According to the game machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X4, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means is changed by setting the probability table set for each number of balls entered. Therefore, since the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, there is an effect that the control load of the game machine can be reduced.

In the game machine X6, the probability variable means sets a first probability table as the probability table based on the setting of the first game state, and is based on the setting of the second game state. The gaming machine X7 is characterized in that it sets a second probability setting table in which the lottery probability is set to be relatively higher than that of the first probability setting table.

According to the game machine X7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X6, the first probability table is set based on the setting of the first game state, and the second game state is set based on the setting. A second probability setting table in which the lottery probability is set higher than that of the first probability setting table is set. Therefore, by setting the probability table according to the game state, the lottery probability of the lottery by the additional setting means can be easily changed, so that there is an effect that the control load of the game machine can be reduced.

<Characteristic Y group> (If you give a notice of hitting in the background effect, stop it at a position where you can hit it within 0.2Y when you pause)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and an operation that dynamically displays the identification information displayed on the display means. The target display means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means based on the discrimination result, and the discrimination result specific to the display means. When the identification information indicating the above is displayed, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player, the effect dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the effect, and the dynamic display means. When the period during which the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed continues for a predetermined period or longer, the stop control means for stopping the dynamic display of the effect by the effect dynamic display means and the identification information based on the specific determination result. Is dynamically displayed, the effect mode determining means for determining a specific effect mode as the effect mode dynamically displayed by the effect dynamic display means, and the stop control means said. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where the effect can be displayed by switching to a specific effect mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when identification information based on a specific determination result is dynamically displayed, it is known that the effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode. Further, when the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously executed for a predetermined period or more, it is known that an effect such as a demo screen is displayed. In such a game machine, when a demo screen or the like is displayed and the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, it is necessary to switch the production from the demo screen to a specific production mode, and it takes time to switch the production. If this happens, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

In addition, it is proposed to display a character (icon) symbolizing the privilege (big hit, etc.) given to the player on the display screen of the display means, and to notify that the privilege is given by acquiring the character. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851). In this case, after the change of the special symbol is started, that is, after the lottery result of the special symbol is confirmed, the character (icon) symbolizing the privilege is displayed on the display screen to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol. Since the effect to be performed (effect of whether or not to acquire a character) is executed, whether or not to acquire the character after displaying the character (icon) on the display screen during one special symbol fluctuation time. There is a problem that it is necessary to display the effect up to the result, and it is necessary to set a long fluctuation time of the special symbol.

According to the game machine Y1, when the identification information based on the specific determination result is dynamically displayed, the effect is dynamically displayed in a specific effect mode, and the dynamic display of the identification information is continuously executed for a predetermined period or longer. If not, the dynamic display of the effect is stopped in a state where it can be displayed by switching to a specific effect mode. As a result, when the dynamic display of the identification information is not continuously executed for a predetermined period or longer, even if the discrimination condition is satisfied and the dynamic display based on the specific discrimination result is executed, the dynamic display of the effect is performed. Can be displayed by switching to a specific production mode. Therefore, since the production can be performed in a specific production mode without delay, there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the game machine Y1, the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in the period from the start to the first effect period, and the specific determination mode is included. The gaming machine Y2, characterized in that the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of the first effect period or more based on the result.

According to the game machine Y2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Y1, the following effects are played. That is, when the specific effect mode includes a notification mode indicating that the determination result is a specific determination result in the period from the start to the first effect period, and the determination result is a specific determination result. The dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is composed of the first effect period or more. As a result, when performing an effect in a notification mode indicating that the determination result is specific, a dynamic display period equal to or longer than the first effect period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display the effect of the notification mode indicating that the determination result is specific, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine Y1 or Y2, the effect dynamic display means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the effect over a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and the effect is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that it dynamically displays an effect mode that can be switched to the specific effect mode according to the start timing.

According to the game machine Y3, it is possible to dynamically display the effect over a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, and it is possible to switch to a specific effect mode according to the dynamic display start timing of the identification information. The effect mode is dynamically displayed. As a result, when the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the effect mode that can be switched to a specific effect mode is dynamically displayed. Therefore, even if the dynamic display period of the identification information is short, it is possible to switch to a specific production mode without delay after the dynamic display is started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that there is no.

In any of the game machines Y1 to Y3, in the effect, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are dynamically displayed at least at the same time, and the specific effect mode is the first effect symbol and the above. A game machine Y4 characterized in that it is displayed in contact with a second production symbol.

According to the game machine Y4, in a specific effect mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, which are dynamically displayed at the same time, are displayed in contact with each other. Therefore, the player can recognize that a specific effect mode is being executed by visually recognizing the contact between the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game machine. effective.

<Characteristic AA group> (Roulette interruption control)
Based on the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means, the discrimination result is determined. A fixing period determining means for determining a period until the determination is made, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determining means being determined by the specific determination result. In the game machine, the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set and the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the player is informed that the determination result is a specific determination result. The identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information to be notified, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined effect period, and the identification information thereof is selected. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in which the notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified and the specific effect executing means, the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means. As the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of, the setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means, and a predetermined period during the effect period. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized by having an interruption means for interrupting the effect period when the determination is not executed by the determination means for a long time.

Here, there has been proposed a pachinko machine that executes a specific effect regardless of the presence or absence of fluctuations in a special symbol during the period from the start of the time-saving game state to the end of the time-saving game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013). -236851 (Ab.). In this case, since the specific effect is started even if the special symbol is not changed during the time-saving game, the special effect should not be changed for the specific effect executed only within the specific period during the time-saving game state. You can see it for a long time. Therefore, there is a problem that the expectation for a specific production is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AA1, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and the discriminating result is determined by the definite period determining means based on the discriminating result. The period until is decided. The privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the determination result is confirmed by the specific determination result. Then, among a plurality of different identification information set by the identification means, the identification information determining means determines specific identification information for notifying that it is a specific determination result, and the specific identification information is notified to the player. To. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific effect executing means notifies a notification mode indicating one selected identification information among the identification information set in the identification means in a predetermined effect period. Is executed. Identification determined by the identification information determining means as the identification information selected in the specific effect based on the determination of the specific determination result by the determination means when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. Identification information is set by the setting means. Further, if the determination is not executed by the predetermined period determination means during the effect period, the effect period is interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a specific effect executed using a predetermined effect period progresses before the determination is executed by the determination means. Therefore, expectations for the specific effect executed during the effect period are expected. It has the effect of suppressing the loss of sensation.

In addition, by interrupting the production period, the production is controlled rather than the control of changing (extending) the content of the specific production executed during the production period so that the expectation for the specific production is not impaired. It has the effect of reducing processing.

In the game machine AA1, the effect period is set as the first effect period from the start to the elapse of the first period, and the interruption means does not execute the determination for the predetermined period in the first effect period. The gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the interruption is executed based on the continuation of the case.

According to the game machine AA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA2, the following effects are played. That is, the period from the start of the effect period to the elapse of the first period is set as the first effect period, and the effect period is continued by the interruption means based on the fact that the predetermined period determination is not executed in the first effect period. Suspension is executed. As a result, the period for determining whether or not to interrupt the production period can be a part of the production period (first production period). Therefore, when the production period is resumed, it is possible to secure a predetermined production period, and there is an effect that a specific production can be executed without impairing the expectation of the player.

In the game machine AA2, the interruption means determines whether or not the determination of the determination means is executed in the predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, and when the determination is not executed, the first The gaming machine AA3, characterized in that the production period is interrupted based on the elapse of the production period.

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA1, the following effects are played. That is, when it is determined that the determination of the discriminating means has not been executed in the predetermined period until the first effect period elapses, the effect period is interrupted based on the elapse of the first effect period by the interruption means. .. This makes it possible to keep the timing at which the production period is interrupted constant. As a result, when the effect period is resumed, the remaining effect period can be made constant, so that there is an effect that the processing load for executing the specific effect after the resumption can be reduced.

It is preferable that the first effect period of the effect period is such that a predetermined effect is executed regardless of the determination result by the discriminating means, and the specific effect is executed after the first effect period elapses. As a result, even if the production period is interrupted, it is possible to execute the specific production without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, the determination period determining means determines the determination result a predetermined number of times within the effect period as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined. A game machine AA4 characterized in that it determines a period.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, the following effects are produced. That is, as a period until the determination result determined by the determination means is determined, the period is determined by the determination period determining means so that the determination result of a predetermined number of times is determined within the effect period. As a result, the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed a plurality of times within the effect period, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, even if a situation occurs in which the determination by the determination means is not executed within the effect period, that is, after the determination of 1 by the determination means is executed, the game ball does not enter the ball entry means, and the next determination is made. Even if a situation occurs in which the execution is not performed, the production period is interrupted by the interruption means, so that there is an effect that the expectation for the specific production during the production period is not impaired.

<Characteristic AB group> (The acceptance period of the button PUSH is different from the notification)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and a game. When the validity period is set by the operation means that can be operated by a person, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period in which the operation by the operation means is effective, and the validity period setting means, the operation means The effect executing means for executing the effect based on the operation, the first period setting means for setting the first period within the valid period by the valid period setting means, and the operating means for the first period. The gaming machine AB1 is characterized by having, when operated, a delay means for delaying the execution of the effect by the effect executing means until the first period elapses.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, after the discriminant symbol is dynamically displayed on the display device for a predetermined period, the discriminant symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol based on the determination result. During the period in which the determination symbol is dynamically displayed, as various effects, the effect mode is variable based on pressing an operation means (for example, a button) that can be operated by the player, and the determination result is played in advance. A gaming machine has been proposed that improves the interest of a player by displaying a notice display or the like that gives a notice to the person (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-185224). In this case, the period during which the player can operate the operating means is limited to the period during which the effect mode can be variably displayed, and when the player is notified of the operable period, the period is short and the valid period. There was a problem that the operation means could not be operated inside, which made the game difficult. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing easy games.

According to the game machine AB1, when the valid period in which the operation by the operating means is valid is set, the operation means is operated within the valid period after the first period of the valid period has elapsed. Is executed. On the other hand, if the operating means is operated before the first period of the valid period elapses, the execution of the effect is delayed. Therefore, the valid period can be set even if the period is different from the start timing of the effect executed based on the operating means, the valid period can be set longer, and the player can operate the operating means. Since the period is long, there is an effect that the player can easily play a game.

In the game machine AB1, the effect executed by the effect executing means is characterized in that the effect mode is determined based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AB1, the production mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result by the determination means. That is, the player can grasp the discrimination result by the discrimination means by visually recognizing the production mode of the production. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the production mode of the production, the operation of the operation means for displaying the production can be enthusiastically executed, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved. effective.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, among the identification means in which a plurality of different identification information is set and the plurality of different identification information set in the identification means, the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result for the player. The identification information determining means for determining the specific identification information for notifying the above, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, one of the identification information is selected from the identification information of the identification means in a predetermined execution period. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect in which the notification mode indicating the selected identification information is notified and the specific effect executing means, the specific determination is performed by the discriminating means. Based on the determination of the result, the identification information selected in the specific effect includes a setting means for setting the specific identification information determined by the identification information determining means, and the effect is executed. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the means is to execute a notification effect indicating the selected identification information in the specific effect.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machines AB1 or AB2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific effect is executed and a specific determination result is determined by the determination means, the effect execution means notifies that the determination result is a specific determination result, and the notification effect is based on the specific identification information. Is executed. As a result, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result during the execution of the specific effect, the discrimination result is the specific determination in the effect by the effect executing means (that is, the effect based on the operation of the operating means). A notification effect is executed so that the player can recognize that it is the result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the production based on the operation of the operating means, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Set the next roulette effect based on the previous stop position of the roulette)
A movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and the movable body based on the establishment of movable conditions. A determination means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoptable range that can be stopped is preset, and a specific identification unit at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determination means. The stoptable range is set based on the privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when stopped and the establishment of a specific condition when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern. An identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit, a stop control means for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means at a specific stop timing, and a stop control means for stopping the identification unit at a specific stop timing. The determination means determines a movable pattern in which the stoptable range to be stopped next is set in advance in response to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. Game machine AC1 to play.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as a hit is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position is used as a determination result in advance. It is determined based on this and notified by controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped together is executed. (For example, JP-A-7-204318). Even if the rotating body is stopped by the rotation effect of 1, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be changed depending on the stop position, and the problem that the game becomes monotonous causes the player to get bored early. There was a point. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and by providing a novel game machine, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and the player gets bored early. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing defects.

According to the game machine AC1, among a plurality of identification units in the movable body, the identification unit corresponding to the stoptable range set in the determined movable pattern is stopped at a predetermined effect position. As the movable pattern, when the movable body is stopped, the movable pattern in which the stoptable range to be stopped next is set in advance is determined. That is, the next stoptable range is determined when the movable body is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of whether a specific identification unit stops at the effect position from the position where the position of the movable body is stopped according to the next stoptable range, and the specific identification unit does not stop at the effect position. In some cases, the stop position can be of interest. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the game machine AC1, the movable pattern is characterized in that a preset execution period is set.

According to the game machine AC2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1, a preset execution period is set for the movable pattern of the movable body. Therefore, there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored at an early stage can be suppressed (prevented) by extending the movement of the movable body.

Further, according to the configuration provided with the game machine AC1, the next stoptable range is determined when the movable body is stopped, so that even if the movable period of the movable body is a preset execution period, the next stoptable range is determined. The range that can be stopped can be determined based on the execution period. That is, the stoptable range suitable for the movable period (movable pattern) of the movable body can be determined. For example, the identification unit that does not reach the effect position in the set period (movable pattern) is defined as the stoptable range. Never. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable movement of the movable body does not become unnatural, and a suitable effect can be provided without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The game machine AC1 or AC2 has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the stop control means said the specific discriminating when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. The gaming machine AC3, characterized in that the unit is stopped at the effect position.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1 or AC2, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the specific discrimination unit is stopped at the effect position, so that the discrimination by the discrimination means There is an effect that the result can be notified by the identification unit that stops at the effect position.

The game machine AC4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3 has a setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines AC1 to AC3, a specific identification unit is set by a plurality of different identification units by the setting means, so which identification unit is set as the specific identification unit. It has the effect of making the player interested in what is done and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine AC4, the game machine AC5 is characterized in that the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

According to the game machine AC5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC4, at least one of the specific identification units is set by the setting means based on the player's selection, so that any identification unit of the player can be used. It can be a specific identification unit, and there is an effect that the player can participate in the game and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine AC4 or AC5, the game machine AC6 is characterized in that the setting means sets the specific identification unit based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

According to the game machine AC6, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC4 or AC6, a specific identification unit is set by the setting means based on the determination result of the determination means. There is an effect that the determination result can be predicted by the player.

<Characteristic AD group> (executed after entering the bunny's foot production)
An entry means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter through the opening of the entry means, and a closure in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state. A variable member that can be changed to a state, a variable means that can change the variable member to the open state and the closed state, a detection means that detects a game ball that has passed through the opening, and a means that passes through the opening. Based on the taxiway that causes the game ball to flow down for a predetermined period and guides the game ball to the effect body on which the effect is executed, and the predetermined period after the game ball is detected by the detection means, the effect body The gaming machine AD1 characterized by having a production variable means for varying the production.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of winning openings are arranged on the front side of the gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, and the game is played at the starting winning opening that triggers the start of one of the winning / failing judgments. When the ball enters, a predetermined lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, a game in which the variable winning device is opened is executed, and the player can obtain a large number of prize balls and the like. In such a game machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a game ball is allowed to flow down to a predetermined position by connecting a passage port through which a plurality of game balls can pass with a flow path member through which the game ball can flow down. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-1333036). Further, there has been a demand for a game machine that suppresses the game from becoming monotonous by improving the interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

According to the game machine AD1, the effect of the effect body is changed by the effect variable means based on the elapse of a predetermined period from the detection of the game ball passing through the opening to the arrival at the effect body. By guiding the ball to the effect body, the effect of the effect body can be changed. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand the timing at which the effect of the effector is changed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The taxiway AD1 of the game machine AD1 is characterized in that the taxiway is composed of a visually recognizable member in which a game ball flowing down inside is visible to the player.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD1, the taxiway is configured so that the player can see the game ball flowing down inside, so that the game ball is visually guided to the director. This has the effect of making it easier to understand when the effect of the effector is variable.

In the game machine AD1 or AD2, the taxiway is configured to be at least movable at a first position where the game ball can be guided to the effect body and a second position where it is difficult to guide the game ball to the effect body. When the movable means that moves the taxiway to the first position and the second position, respectively, and the variable means change the movable member to the open state, the taxiway moves from the second position to the second position. A game machine AD3 characterized in that it can be moved to one position.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD1 or AD2, when the variable member is in the open state, the taxiway is moved to the first position, so that the variable member is in the open state. Has the effect of being able to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The game machine AD2 or AD3 is characterized by having a discharge flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the opening when the taxiway is not moved to the first position. Game machine AD4 to play.

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effect of the game machine AD2 or AD3, even if the taxiway is not moved to the first position due to a defect or the like, the game ball that has entered the opening can be discharged from the discharge passage. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines AD1 to AD4, the discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and when the discriminant result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result, the variable until the predetermined condition is satisfied. AD5 is a gaming machine AD5 comprising: a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game in which a member is changed to the open state by the variable means.

According to the game machine AD5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AD4, when the discrimination result becomes a specific discrimination result, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved. ..

In the game machine AD5, when the determination result is the specific determination result, there is a determination means for determining whether to set a special game state advantageous to the player after the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. However, the game machine AD6 is characterized in that the effect body notifies the determination result by the determination means by the effect.

According to the game machine AD6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine AD5, it is notified whether the special game state is set by the directing body, so that the effect that the game becomes monotonous even during the privilege game can be suppressed. is there.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
631 Rotation motor (movable means)
640 rotating member (movable body)
S214 Part of privilege granting means S1116 Part of privilege granting means S1806 Part of stop control means S2808 Part of movable control means S3004 Setting means S3121 Discriminating means S3122, S3123 Identification unit determining means S3504 Part of movable control means, determination Part of the means

Oite the pachinko machine such gaming machine, when the player wins per, Ru Monogaa advantageously degree after completion per are transferable configured to higher gaming state.

JP-A-2009-178292

However, there was a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. Variable input means, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. When the identification information indicating the above is displayed, the variable ball entry means has a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, and the variable A gaming state in which one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state after the game is completed. The specific effect executing means includes a setting means and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect capable of suggesting whether the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and the specific effect executing means is the specific. The predetermined specific effect is executed in at least a part of the period in which the identification information indicating the determination result is displayed and in at least a part of the period in which the variable game based on the specific determination result is executed. When the second gaming state is set, the gaming machine can display a specific display mode in a predetermined display area during execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect of the specific effect. In the first period, which is included in the effect period and is at least a part of the period in which the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed, the specific determination result is applied to the predetermined display area. The display operation is performed in the predetermined display area during the execution of the effect which has the means for displaying the corresponding predetermined symbol and is executed to show the determination result of the determination means in the second game state. While the variable game is being executed, at least a predetermined displacement member that does not displace can be displaced, and the predetermined display area is used to perform a predetermined display that is at least different from the display of the predetermined symbol. It is a configuration that can perform notification.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in claim 1 gaming machine described in the Ru comprising a firing unit capable of emitting a game ball.

According to the game machine of the present invention , a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. Based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means display the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result. In this case, the variable ball-entry means has a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period, and the game after the variable game is completed. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the game state. The specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect capable of suggesting whether the second game state is set by the setting means, and the specific effect executing means indicates the identification indicating the specific determination result. It is possible to execute the predetermined specific effect in at least a part of the period in which the information is displayed and in at least a part of the period in which the variable game is executed based on the specific determination result. When the second gaming state is set, the gaming machine is a means for displaying a specific display mode in a predetermined display area during execution of the specific effect, and a period included in the effect period of the specific effect. In the first period, which is at least a part of the period in which the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed, a predetermined symbol corresponding to the specific determination result is displayed in the predetermined display area. The variable while the display operation is being performed in the predetermined display area during the execution of the effect having the means and the means and being executed to show the determination result of the determination means in the second gaming state. It is a configuration in which a displacement operation of a predetermined displacement member that does not at least displace during execution of the game can be performed, and it is possible to perform a predetermined notification at least different from the display of the predetermined symbol by using the predetermined display area. It is a configuration.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a determination such as a hit is executed, a plurality of rotating bodies in which a plurality of different symbols are arranged on the front side are arranged, and a combination of symbols that stop at a predetermined position is determined in advance. It is notified by determining based on and controlling the rotation. As a result of the notification, a gaming machine is proposed in which a game in which a variable winning device is changed so that a game ball can be entered when a predetermined number (for example, three) of the same symbols are stopped together is executed. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-7-204318).
In this case, even if the rotating body is stopped by the rotation effect of 1, the degree of expectation for the next rotation effect cannot be changed depending on the stop position, and the player gets bored early due to the problem that the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it would end up.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, and a movable body for moving the movable body by the movable means. A control means, a determination means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoptable range capable of stopping the movable body is preset based on the establishment of a movable condition, and the movable pattern determined by the determination means. When the movable body is moved by the privilege giving means for giving a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved, and the movable body in the movable pattern. In addition, the identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit set in the stoptable range based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means. It has a stop control means for stopping at the effect position at a specific stop timing, and the determination means has a stoptable range to be stopped next corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. It determines a preset movable pattern.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and the movable pattern has a preset execution period.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 has a discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition in the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the stop control means is the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Is a specific determination result, the specific identification unit is stopped at the effect position.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 has the setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition in the game machine described in the technical idea 3.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine described in the technical idea 4, and the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a movable body in which a plurality of different identification portions are arranged, a movable means for moving the movable body, a movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and a movable control means for moving the movable body. Based on the establishment of the movable condition, a determining means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoptable range capable of stopping the movable body is preset, and after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determining means. , A privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position, and a specific condition when the movable body is moved in the movable pattern. Based on the establishment of the above, the identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit set in the stoptable range and the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means are specified at a specific stop timing. The determination means has a stop control means for stopping at the effect position, and the stoptable range to be stopped next is preset in the determination means corresponding to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. It determines the movable pattern.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable pattern has a preset execution period.
This has the effect of providing a suitable effect to the player.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the stop control means has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result, the specific discriminating unit is placed in the effect position. Is to stop.
This has the effect of providing a suitable effect to the player.
The gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, it has a setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.
In addition to the effects of the game machine described in Technical Thought 4, the game machine described in Technical Thought 5 sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection. Is what you do. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37A, 37B 1st symbol display device (display means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
82a 1st variable winning device (variable ball winning means)
631 Rotation motor (movable means)
640 rotating member (movable body)
S214 variable game execution hand stage
S305, S508 Discrimination means S1116 Part of privilege granting means
S1126 Game state setting means S1806 Part of stop control means S2808 Part of movable control means S3004 Setting means S3121 Discrimination means S3122, S3123 Identification unit determination means S3504 Part of movable control means, part of determination means

Claims (5)

A movable body in which multiple different identification parts are arranged, and
Movable means to move the movable body and
Movable control means for moving the movable body by the movable means, and
Based on the establishment of the movable condition, a determination means for determining a movable pattern in which a stoptable range in which the movable body can be stopped is set in advance, and
When the specific identification unit is stopped at a predetermined effect position after being moved by the movable pattern determined by the determination means, a privilege giving means that gives a privilege that is advantageous to the player, and a privilege giving means.
When the movable body is moved by the movable pattern, the identification unit determining means for determining the identification unit 1 from the identification unit set in the stoptable range based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the identification unit determining means.
It has a stop control means for stopping the identification unit determined by the identification unit determining means at the effect position at a specific stop timing.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determination means determines a movable pattern in which the stoptable range to be stopped next is set in advance in response to the identification unit stopped by the stop control means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable pattern has a preset execution period set. It has a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the stop control means stops the specific identification unit at the effect position when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. .. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising a setting means for setting the specific identification unit from the plurality of different identification units based on the establishment of the setting condition. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the setting means sets at least one of the specific identification units based on the player's selection.

Images